513 results found

Actually, podcasting IS for manufacturers

podcasting for manufacturers

As of 2020, “68 million Americans are weekly podcast listeners.”

That’s from a study by Edison Research. And to put that number in perspective for you, the comments go on to say, “In 2020, for the first time, a larger percentage of American consumers listened to podcasts weekly than attended church or religious services weekly: 24% to 23%.”

The bottom line here: The podcast medium is exploding.

I suspect a majority of you reading this would consider yourself (at least in some capacity) a podcast listener. But…

Have you thought about whether you could be a podcast host? Or if not you, could someone inside of your organization do it? Because I can promise you this:

As intimidating as it might sound, it’s far less difficult to pull off than you might imagine. And the benefits are immense.

Let’s break ’em down.

6 benefits of podcasting for manufacturers

The following list certainly isn’t exhaustive. But if you take the leap, I can promise you that you’ll reap a majority of the following benefits.

1. You become a thought leader in your niche

Two to four times per month, you’re publishing 20-plus minutes of pure thought leadership content for your target audience.

2. You humanize your brand

A very small percentage of manufacturers are consistently producing genuinely insightful content that creates awareness, builds trust and opens doors to sales conversations. And 90% of those smart enough to do it are using one medium alone – the written word.

Now, I’m certainly not knocking words on a page (heck, I wrote what you’re reading now!). But I will say this:

Podcasts give you a chance to humanize yourself and your brand.

When a listener hears your voice, now you’re a person. Not just a company behind a curtain of words on their screen.

3. You build personal relationships with future customers

One of my favorite books of 2020 was Content Based Networking by James Carbary (more on James below). Here’s the premise:

By interviewing the people in your target market (on your podcast) about their challenges, successes and stories, you’re building personal relationships with future customers. And simultaneously, you’re creating amazing content for their peers (who are also your future customers!).

Consider this:

How many manufacturing CEOs do you think would welcome a cold 30-minute phone call with a marketing guy like me?

But how many, on the other hand, would welcome a 30-minute conversation as a guest on my podcast – where I’m shining a spotlight on their expertise?

You get the idea.

4. You build personal relationships with industry influencers

Same deal as #3, but for influencers in your industry.

My interview on The Manufacturing Executive with Gary Konarska (President of the American Welding Society) reached thousands of manufacturing folks in my target audience.

My interviews with best selling authors Mike Weinberg, Sangram Vajre and Ian Altman reached thousands of people in their exponentially larger follower base.

5. One podcast episode is so much more than one podcast episode

A 30-minute interview can be repurposed into so many things. Case in point below. Notice how we’ve chopped up the original podcast episode (the first link) and turned it a variety of other things too:

We also summarize these episodes and distribute them via email newsletter to our list of 4000-plus manufacturing people every two weeks, use them in follow-up emails after sales calls, share them with our new clients and employees to help them learn, and so on.

6. Your podcast doubles as free market research

When you’re speaking with the types of people your business serves (and they know coming into these conversations that this isn’t a sales call), they naturally let their guard down.

I never try to sell anything to my guests. And as a result, great insights emerge.

Imagine doing this once per week for a year.

All of a sudden, you’ll have collected qualitative human insights from over 50 people in your exact target audience.

You’ll then use those insights to make better decisions related to product development, sales and marketing.

Not convinced?

Dang.

Well, I’ll take one last shot.

In a recent conversation on our podcast (The Manufacturing Executive), I interviewed the previously mentioned James Carbary, Founder of Sweet Fish Media and author of Content Based Networking.

James Carbary The Manufacturing Executive Podcast

In my interview with James, I asked him to address the stigma that “podcasting isn’t for us as a manufacturing organization.”

Whether you remain skeptical, a little curious or you’re ready to rock, I’m confident that these will be 25 minutes well spent. James runs the best podcasting agency in the country and wrote the book on the subject too. If he can’t convince you, then you win!

Click here to listen: Breaking the stigma on podcasting w/ James Carbary (Apple Podcasts / Google Podcasts / Spotify).

PODCAST: How to Solve the Manufacturing Recruitment Puzzle w/ Patrick O’Rahilly

Patrick O'Rahilly The Manufacturing Executive

The Manufacturing Executive: Episode 32

Listen to this episode here or on Apple PodcastsSpotifyStitcher or Google Podcasts.

powered by Sounder

Episode show notes

The industrial sector’s labor market has shifted over the past decade. From the emergence and adoption of recruiting technologies by Indeed and LinkedIn to the widening manufacturing skills gap, most manufacturers face stiff challenges on the recruiting and hiring front.

On today’s episode, I talk about solving the problems in hiring with Patrick O’Rahilly, Founder at FactoryFix.com

Here’s what we discussed:

  1. Recruiting and hiring mistakes manufacturers make today
  2. What it costs to make a hire
  3. The future of hiring in the manufacturing sector

To ensure that you never miss an episode of The Manufacturing Executive, subscribe on Apple Podcasts, or Spotify, or here.

PODCAST: Giving Your B2B Customer a B2C Buying Experience w/ Sultana Mangal and Annie Dohl‪e

Sultana Mangal Annie Dohle The Manufacturing Executive podcast

The Manufacturing Executive: Episode 31

Listen to this episode here or on Apple PodcastsSpotifyStitcher or Google Podcasts.

powered by Sounder

Episode show notes

Think about the experience of walking into an Apple store. Or the ease and simplicity of making a purchase on Amazon — 30 seconds, one click, and you’re done.

More and more, B2B buyers expect B2C buying experiences. 

In light of that, what does “customer experience” mean to you?

On today’s episode, I talk about customer experience with Sultana Mangal and Annie Dohle, both Account Executives at Gorilla 76. 

Here’s what we discussed:

  1. What kind of experience B2B buyers expect
  2. How to differentiate your B2B brand beyond your physical product
  3. Tips for creating amazing new customer experiences in the first 100 days

To ensure that you never miss an episode of The Manufacturing Executive, subscribe on Apple Podcasts or Spotify.

PODCAST: Fill Your Sales Funnel in 2021 w/ Joe Sulliva‪n

The Manufacturing Executive Joe Sullivan

The Manufacturing Executive: Episode 30

Listen to this episode here or on Apple PodcastsSpotifyStitcher or Google Podcasts.

powered by Sounder

Episode show notes

In today’s podcast, I break down a simple three-step framework for what a mid-sized B2B manufacturer should be doing to fill the sales funnel in 2021. This year, we still can’t rely on trade shows or other in-person meetings.

Here’s what I recommend you do instead:

  1. Focus on the right people from the right companies
  2. Create amazing content specifically for them
  3. Distribute that content consistently to as many of the right people as possible

To ensure that you never miss an episode of The Manufacturing Executive, subscribe on Apple Podcasts or Spotify.

PODCAST: Industry 4.0 is now Industry 4.5 w/ Justin Goldston

Dr. Justin Goldston The Manufacturing Executive podcast

The Manufacturing Executive: Episode 29

Listen to this episode here or on Apple PodcastsSpotifyStitcher or Google Podcasts.

powered by Sounder

Episode show notes

Artificial intelligence…machine learning…blockchain…digital transformation. All buzzwords marking the transition from Industry 4.0 to Industry 4.5.  

In this episode of the podcast, I talk with someone who’s right in the middle of it all. 

Justin Goldston, PhD is a Professor of Project and Supply Chain Management at Penn State University. He works closely with the Penn State Sustainability Institute to blend technology into organizational sustainability efforts.

Justin and I discussed:

  1. What we mean by Industry 4.5
  2. How new technology will impact the workforce in manufacturing
  3. Should we worry about new tech or embrace it?
  4. …Where to go to learn more

To ensure that you never miss an episode of The Manufacturing Executive, subscribe on Apple Podcasts or Spotify.

PODCAST: Why Voice of Customer is Essential in Marketing w/ Dave Loomis

The Manufacturing Executive Podcast Dave Loomis

The Manufacturing Executive: Episode 28

Listen to this episode here or on Apple PodcastsSpotifyStitcher or Google Podcasts.

powered by Sounder

Episode show notes

What is Voice of Customer? How can Voice of Customer be used to curate tailored content across your industry? Why is this important?

These are a few of the many questions answered on today’s show with industry expert, Dave Loomis.

In this episode, we spoke with Dave Loomis, President of Loomis Marketing on episode 28 of The Manufacturing Executive podcast. Our dynamic conversation covered…

  • How do you facilitate a voice of customer meeting?
  • What are the benefits of a voice of customer meeting?
  • Understanding the pain customers feel and ideal outcomes 

Want more resources and information?

For more ways to serve others as an individual or business, Dave has written a book called Marketing Is Everything We Do. Dave also suggests checking out New Product Blueprinting by Dan Adams and Jobs to Be Done by Tony Ulwick.

PODCAST: Mitigating Risk Through Smart Procurement w/ Aaron Brimer

The Manufacturing Executive Podcast Aaron Brimer

The Manufacturing Executive: Episode 27

Listen to this episode here or on Apple PodcastsSpotifyStitcher or Google Podcasts.

powered by Sounder

Episode show notes

Somewhere along the way, we all run into that guy…

The customer’s procurement guy…

The buyer.

And with supply chain disruption fresh in all our minds, it’s time we talked to that guy.

In this episode of the podcast, I spoke with Aaron Brimer, a supply chain leader and founder of the The Manufacturing Procurement Guy podcast. We talked about mitigating risk through smart procurement practices.

Aaron and I discussed:

  1. Second sourcing
  2. Inventory management
  3. Negotiation
  4. …And the role engineers play in the buying decision

To ensure that you never miss an episode of The Manufacturing Show, subscribe on Apple PodcastsSpotifyStitcher or Google Podcasts.

The power of video for manufacturing brands

I was recently on-set with a client of mine, CK Power.

We’ve worked with them for years. Their Learning Center is filled with educational articles, case studies and guides.

But this shoot was the first time we’d experimented with video for CK  Power.

See, they wanted a way to showcase their brand. And we’ve experienced the CK brand first-hand.

We’ve interviewed power system engineers, product specialists, safety managers, service and parts specialists and so on and have heard them talk about what being a part of the CK Power family is like.

We’ve felt it as we’re welcomed into the building.

We’ve heard it as we walk the halls.

We experience it in the smallest and simplest interactions of an email.

While CK Power products supply millions of kilowatts to hospitals, businesses and job sites, the true power of their company is in their people and their loyal customers.

They wanted to tell that story — and video, not writing, was the best way to tell it. Our goal during filming was to capture it.

We recently got to sit down with some of the leadership and team members on camera. This was the result:

The CK Family: Every Customer, Every Employee

I was completely blown away by the conversations I heard during the shoot. It wasn’t that I was necessarily surprised by WHAT they were saying but HOW it was being said. I knew we had something here that we hadn’t gotten to create for CK Power in the past.

We had the leadership team talking on camera about their core values, the relationship with their employees and customers. Getting that on camera was more powerful to showcase their brand than written content could do in this instance.

Now let’s reflect on the video that you just watched.

  • What did you learn about CK Power in those short three-and-a-half minutes?
  • What emotions did you feel?
  • Would you want to do business with them?
  • Would you want to work for a company like CK Power?
  • What did the video format convey that may not have been communicated otherwise?

Think about how you personally are consuming information on your favorite brands.

Maybe you’re a fan of Filson and their “unfailing goods.”

Think about those same questions I asked earlier:

  • What did you learn about Filson?
  • What emotions did you feel?
  • Would you want to do business with them?
  • Would you want to work for a company like Filson?
  • What did the video format convey that may not have been communicated otherwise?

Video can do a better job at conveying your brand’s story than written content can in some instances. I’m not knocking it down by any means. Written content will always be powerful in delivering emotional content.

But video can do a few things better.

When telling a brand story through video, you get:

Nonverbal communication and body language.

Have you ever seen someone’s eyes light up as they talk about something they’re passionate about? Or maybe you get a better sense of what they’re saying through the inflections in their voice?

Think about all the forms of nonverbal communication:

  • Facial expressions
  • Gestures
  • Eye contact
  • Voice

More personal, face-to-face interviews.

Think back to the CK Power video I shared above. We got to interview the leadership team as a group and then individual, one-on-ones. When you watch the interviews, it feels like each person is speaking with just you. It’s like having a one-on-one conversation.

That video allows you to scale that one-on-one experience.

No matter how many people watch this video — hundreds, thousands? — each person will feel like they’re talking one-on-one. And all he had to do was devote one day of his time.

Trust and authenticity.

Video content can humanize your brand. It’s a reminder that there are real people behind the company. Think about all of the really cool, interesting people who work at your company. Now think about what it would look like to get those people on camera talking about your brand. Your people can speak to your brand.

People’s attention.

People are busy. And let’s be honest, we have short attention spans. Video is easy to consume and share.

But this is also respectful of your subject matter expert’s time. Book one day of interviews and bank a whole year’s worth of content for your brand.

One of the things I hear most often from my client is the importance of the relationship. Video is about building relationships. It’s about creating an emotional connection with your audience.

Who speaks most passionately about your brand? It’s likely your team. So why not capture that on camera?

PODCAST: Expanding Into International Markets w/ Ashley Madray

The Manufacturing Executive Podcast Ashley Madray

The Manufacturing Executive: Episode 26

Listen to this episode here or on Apple PodcastsSpotifyStitcher or Google Podcasts.

powered by Sounder

Episode show notes

I asked listeners what topic they wanted to learn more about on the podcast.

You said “expanding into international markets.”

So I put the word out among my network and discovered today’s guest. He founded a gas company in 2002 that now does business in many foreign countries.

My guest on this episode is Ashley Madray, executive vice president of Gas Innovations, a producer, purifier, and packager of specialty gases.

Ashley and I discussed:

  • Who he is, how his company began, and how it expanded internationally
  • Common challenges to international expansion
  • The impact of doing business globally

To ensure that you never miss an episode of The Manufacturing Show, subscribe on Apple PodcastsSpotifyStitcher or Google Podcasts.

PODCAST: Creating an Award-Winning Culture w/ Jon Franko

The Manufacturing Executive Podcast Jon Franko

The Manufacturing Executive: Episode 25

Listen to this episode here or on Apple PodcastsSpotifyStitcher or Google Podcasts.

powered by Sounder

Episode show notes

The workplace is experiencing a massive transformation.

I thought we should start at a high level and talk about that.

So we did.

In this episode of the podcast, I spoke with Jon Franko (I just call him “Franko”), my co-founder here at Gorilla 76, about how to grow a great team rooted in relationships.

Franko and I discussed:

  1. What employees value most in an employer right now
  2. A little thing we do called “Retention Brainstorming” and how it can help you
  3. How to use Glassdoor to your advantage

To ensure that you never miss an episode of The Manufacturing Show, subscribe on Apple PodcastsSpotifyStitcher or Google Podcasts.

The economics of your trade show are broken. Here’s the fix.

I’m a recovering trade show runner.

As a marketing director for four years, the trade show was always, ALWAYS the biggest expense on the budget, the most effort in manpower, and the biggest waste of time on all the impactful things marketing could do.

There, I said it.

I remember sitting in my President’s office at my former company in 2018. Our major trade show had increasingly produced diminishing returns. The effort to make the show happen had likewise become increasingly demanding, and the work was coming at the expense of other activities.

It also was impacting department morale, knowing that we were putting forth a ton of effort that wasn’t making much of a business impact.

Finally, my boss asked: “Is the trade show actually worth going to?”

To which I responded: “Not unless you view it as a brand exercise.”

Even then, with that qualifying answer, I was dead wrong.

That was a cop-out way of saying the expense was a budget sink that would be better allocated elsewhere.

Since recovering from the trade show hamster wheel, I’ve developed more clarity on why the trade show is an incredibly obsolete investment for industrial companies. And that was pre-pandemic. It’s only accelerated the obvious: you can build more brand in your company and create a better business outcome by funneling that spend into digital channels.

With that, let’s walk through the unit economics of the trade show. Then, I’ll compare that to a reallocated budget spend on digital channels. Lastly, I’ll speak to the common objections you’re likely to think of to still justify attending the trade show, and how you can stay involved without being stuck under its thumb.

Trade show unit economics

I’m not breaking any news here, but trade shows are freaking expensive.

At our biggest trade show, we budgeted $230,000 for our 40’ x 60’ booth. That included everything from drayage to material handling to on-site labor to electricity/utilities to rigging to trussing.

If you sell heavy industrial equipment like we did, that’s pretty standard and for some may be a low spend for a booth that size (your equipment may be much heavier, requiring more costly drayage and rigging).

And this doesn’t even account for travel, hotel, and meals. If you send 20 people to the show, expect another $50,000 in travel fees if your show is three days in a big city.

So let’s break down the unit economics of this show and how I came to the obvious conclusion this was an extreme waste of budget compared to alternatives.

First, the attendance. 

The show would promise 40,000 qualified attendees to the show.

And they delivered on that. The first day the place buzzes with people. The smell of singed base metal fills the air. Every robot is dancing or filling a beer cup or serving ice cream if it’s not performing an industrial function. The micro influencers are out in force with their company partners doing collaborative content hits.

It’s fun, there’s no question about it.

But remove the energy from the equation. Because the numbers show you this is more like being in a casino and show management is the house.

Let’s start with the concept of impressions. Impressions are a term used in digital advertising, and it’s the number of times your ad is viewed by your audience.

On digital channels, you don’t pay for impressions (unless you choose to). In trade shows, it’s part of the unit economics.

What I mean by that is you are paying in part because of the space needed to accommodate a crowd of that size. Those 40,000 attendees are baked in to the expense.

So let’s use those 40,000 people as the potential number of impressions that exist for your major trade show. 

Here’s the cost of that per attendee:

$230,000 / 40,000 attendees = $5.75  per impression

Except in reality, you don’t get 40,000 impressions on your booth experience, because it’s a guarantee not even a quarter of attendees will see your booth or notice it, unless you’re one of the big dogs exhibiting.

Then there’s the real carrot… the badge scan.

The badge scan is what show management has been selling you as the reward for all that spend and all that time put in.

Show management guarantees prequalified “buyers” ready to submit a PO within weeks of visiting your booth and seeing your brand for the first time ever.

It’s really expensive though when you consider the intent behind the badge scan and the reality behind what branding actually entails.

Most of these people are simply perusing around and looking at anything that catches their eye. Few go to the trade show now with serious buying intent. Now, it’s for meetings, networking, and frankly the few company-paid days away from the office.

Badge scans are not stated intent. It’s assumed intent on the part of your eager sales rep or marketing manager. They deduce by talking to this lead for five minutes that they’re legitimately interested in that product.

Remember, this person has probably gotten scanned 50 times at this show. They will barely remember you by the time they unpack their suitcase at home.

But for argument’s sake, let’s say your team scans 300 badges for your $230,000 investment. That’s a whopping number of badges scanned. What are you paying for each badge scanned?

$230,000 / 300 badges scanned = $767 per lead

Yikes. 

Afterwards, we have to see how many of these leads turn into opportunities, right? Let’s say your team miraculously flips 3% of these leads into an opportunity. 

What are you paying per opportunity?

$230,000 / (300 x 3%) = $25,556 per sales opportunity

Let’s take this a step further. Say you win 25% of those sales opportunities:

$230,000 / 2 = $115,000 per closed won sales opportunity

If your product or solution is $100,000, congratulations. You just lost $30,000 before accounting for travel and expenses.   

When I say the unit economics of trade shows don’t work, it’s because this is for many the rosiest picture that can be painted. It’s also the practicality of the trade show. 

You bank an inordinate amount of time, effort, and money into what amounts to a three day showcase. How can your marketing have any chance to blossom and your brand any chance to take hold when the entire department’s existence is built on a 24 hour experience?

The better move would be to reallocate this spend and stretch it 365 days with a content marketing strategy + intentional brand building through growth channels.

So, what the heck do I mean by that?

Reallocated budget spend

I harp on paid content distribution a lot, if only because I’ve seen and witnessed how much more effective a marketing tactic it is from the alternatives I see in manufacturing.

It’s also still relatively untapped. You don’t compete with your competitors on most of these channels. So while you will compete with other brands, you’ll inherently stick out because you’ll be distinct in a marketplace if you can make good content.

As opposed to your trade show, where you look like everyone else.

Let’s get into the unit economics of digital ad spend.

Remember that $5.75 you pay per impression at a trade show?

On digital platforms, impressions are not baked into the cost of running paid media. You pay when your ad is clicked on and your content viewed.

So it’s reasonable and feasible to spend $0.01 – $0.02 per impression. PER IMPRESSION. Literally a couple pennies to get target eyeballs on your ad to build and breed familiarity.

Except that fee is baked in as a result of the person clicking on your ad.

And if the creative is good and the content valuable and relevant to them, you start to build equity. 

The power of that impression is real, too. As your audience is continuously introduced to your brand and your company time and time again on the channels they spend time on, they become more familiar with your brand. Which then spills over into the other channels they find you on.

All that good equity you deposit into your audience is what builds true brand, and allows you to win on the qualities and features that you want to win on (customer service, unique process, user friendliness, etc.).

It’s hard to cram all that communication into a 24 hour experience in a sea of stimuli.

The cost effectiveness of digital content distribution comparatively is a no brainer.

So, what about the badge scan? This is where the true value of that contact information is actually worth considering.

Again, this goes back to stated intent vs. assumed intent. When your team member scans a badge, unless that person is emphatically stating they want a demo or pricing or a consult, it’s really a wasted scan.

Your team will spend time and effort pursuing a lead that is never going to convert instead of working with existing opportunities that have a greater probability.

My last year doing our major trade show, we set aside an entire week and a half period after the show where the Outside Sales team was calling on all the badge scans we had from the show. Every single person we rated 4 or 5 stars (for whatever that’s worth) was called, emailed, and followed up with. 

Detailed notes were provided for each of these people.

We ended up creating two opportunities from that eight working day effort. When they instead could have been on the road working existing opportunities and getting them closer to the finish line.

So I ask again, what’s the value of that contact information if it won’t convert?

The better use of time for your sales team is to have them act on stated intent. That’s your website visitors who are submitting an RFQ, completing a contact form asking for a consult, or reaching out to you directly.

It’s not a badge scan, which is the marketing equivalent of an ebook download. Ask how many of your sales reps are excited to get ebook download contacts passed to them.

There’s two ways to get sales opportunities. You can knock on people’s doors or have them knock on yours. 

You’d much rather it be the latter.

You don’t get that from following up on lukewarm trade show leads.

So, how do you get people to knock on your door?

Content distribution.

This is back to the idea of paid social or SEO. Distributing your own content on Facebook, you can get people to the pages you want for less than a dollar.

On LinkedIn, because it’s a more expensive ad platform, you’re more likely to pay in the $7 – 11 range. Sometimes more.

Compare that to $767 per badge scan.

And unlike your trade show, you get to pursue this audience 365 days a year and give them a new experience whenever your content gets stale. 

But, like your booth (hopefully), your content has to be good. It must convey value. Your audience has to build trust in you from it. 

Fortunately for you, you can build a program and pursue that audience 365 days a year so you can figure out what works and what doesn’t.

With a program optimized towards those people stating intent with you, you lower your cost per opportunity, increase your closed won percentage, and give your sales team more buy-ready leads who have more affinity with your company from your content than from your trade show experience.

That’s winning on brand — and it’s a concept industrial companies have yet to unlock but presents a massive growth channel if executed properly. 

Okay, with the cost efficiencies of brand marketing now clearly defined, let’s detail the common ways industrial companies, even with this preponderance of evidence, still will justify the trade show at the expense of better options.

Common objections & remedies

It’s common for even the most disciplined and cost-conscious executives to experience a little FOMO about skipping out on the trade show experience.

There’s a great quote from Kevin Dorsey that sums this feeling up perfectly: “People would rather lose money the way they know how than make money in a new way.”

So with that, let’s go over some of the common objections I’ve witnessed in these meetings and go over how to not have FOMO while saving your budget from certain doom.

Objection #1: Our competitors will be there 

Great! Let them burn that money. If you’re worried they may start some rumors about the health of your company, it’s likely misplaced. 

Privately, they’re having the same discussion and expressing the same doubt you are. All of your competitors are spending the same exorbitant amount of budget on the major trade show you are, they just have their head in the sand about it.

You can display more wisdom and discipline reinvesting in marketing growth channels that work and you can measure. And they’ll allow you to be far more agile in your marketing spend.

Also, just because you’re not exhibiting at the show doesn’t mean you can’t show up. Which brings us to the next excuse.

Objection #2: But we won’t be able to meet face to face with key people

This excuse comes from thinking the only way you can make an impact at a trade show is by exhibiting.

Again, there’s nothing stopping you from attending your trade show. Go walk it and meet with your distributors and take your key customers out to dinner.

There’s also nothing stopping you from renting conference room space at the Exhibit Hall or getting one at the hotel next door and holding key meetings there.

All the cost is in the exhibiting — the products you ship, the labor you hire, and utilities you pay for.

And all of that really amounts to spectacle. 

Truly great marketing is just like sales. It’s about cultivating relationships. You’re just doing it differently via marketing.

Brief encounters at trade show booths don’t build that relationship. At least not without substantial relationship building with potential customers consistently throughout the rest of the year.

Objection #3: If we want to exhibit in future years, we’ll lose our slot

I’m going to call this for what it is… fear mongering.

Let’s say you did spend $230,000 on your booth, like we did. Then you decided to take a couple years off to try other growth channels and see if there was more to be had.

For whatever reason, you decide to come back into the fray. Maybe at a smaller footprint or maybe the same.

Do you honestly think show management is going to turn down your money and not give you a floor space commensurate with your investment?

Yea, me neither.

Don’t let this commonly held belief affect your decision-making. If you want to get back in, your money will still be good there.

Objection #4: I don’t want to spend all that unused budget on digital ads

This is a reasonable push back. After all, reallocating all of that spend into digital ads would amount to nearly $20,000 per month in ad spend.

Now I know several mid eight-figure industrial companies spending $20,000 a month profitably on digital advertising, but you may not feel comfortable allocating that budget there.

No problem. There’s a few other avenues I would say are worth pursuing.

One is to reallocate that spend into multiple smaller events regionally. Partner with other companies or distributors if you sell through a dealer network to have an event. Find a micro influencer on Instagram or Facebook that lives in that area to partner with you. Then invite to your email list in that area. 

Hire a local videographer and make it into both a relationship building event and a content project.

You get way more out of that for less spend, and could do five or six of those per year and end up spending far less and having way more impact.

The other option is to simply hold part of that budget as a variable spend. Let it be used for a promotional series, or if one of your paid channels performs especially well, have discretionary spending available to scale it.

By now I hope you’ve at least started scrutinizing the business impact of your industry trade show. That’s really what I want to accomplish with this blog: to get you to examine the parts of your business you’ve accepted spending money on but haven’t evaluated with the fine-tooth comb it deserves. 

Maybe your marketing manager wanted to protect their livelihood, or you’d always thought of marketing as a cost sink.

Let it be known that marketing’s job today has to be to produce a business impact. Anything less cannot be acceptable. If your trade show isn’t showing up as positive-sourced revenue opportunities on your sales dashboard, it’s time to ask yourself if there’s better ways that money can be used.

Ready to jump off the trade show hamster wheel?

You might not be quite ready to press reset on your marketing, but if you’re looking for more insight on how to modernize your marketing game, we have you covered.

Join myself and fellow G76 Senior Strategist Julian Schaaf for Industrial Marketing Live, a 2x per month webinar series where we go deep on marketing best practices and strategies for manufacturing companies.

You can register here. If you’re busy, no worries, we ship the recording the day after every one. Watch it on your time.

Prefer to see if we can help you more directly? Consider a Road Map with the Gorilla team. We start with a front-end content strategy and build the demand gen engine on the back of it, building your company’s brand and getting that marketing-sourced revenue engine purring.

And if you want, contact me anytime on LinkedIn. Happy to talk and dish on marketing and your business. It’s what I love to do!

Success nothing less, my friend.

PODCAST: Thrilled to Be Asked: How to Build Leaders on the Frontline w/ Gayle Noakes

Gayle Noakes The Manufacturing Executive Podcast

The Manufacturing Executive: Episode 24

Listen to this episode here or on Apple PodcastsSpotifyStitcher or Google Podcasts.

powered by Sounder

Episode show notes

If we create an environment where people on the production floor can help the company be better, they’re more than happy to use their knowledge to do it.

Unfortunately, many supervisors and managers have not been given the training, development, and coaching to do the job on their own or to help the company grow.

On this episode of the podcast, Gayle Noakes, a 20+ year veteran of the manufacturing industry, joined me to talk about building leaders at all levels to achieve business results.

Gayle and I discussed:

  1. Giving people the right training for their roles
  2. Creating the right balance among activities in complex manufacturing roles
  3. Whose voices we should be hearing — but often aren’t — on a daily basis

To ensure that you never miss an episode of The Manufacturing Show, subscribe on Apple PodcastsSpotifyStitcher or Google Podcasts.

PODCAST: The Incredible Shrinking Pie: Why the Future Lies in E-Commerce w/ Kevin Haar

Kevin Haar The Manufacturing Executive

The Manufacturing Executive: Episode 23

Listen to this episode here or on Apple PodcastsSpotifyStitcher or Google Podcasts.

powered by Sounder

Episode show notes

It’s time to face reality about sales channels, technology, and how people buy.

E-commerce is going to dominate sales. Business was moving in that direction pre-COVID, but the pandemic dramatically accelerated those trends.

You can fight this reality, or you can grow with it.

On this episode of the podcast, I talked with Kevin Haar, Chief Operating Officer at Super Bright LEDs, about the transition to e-commerce.

Kevin and I discussed:

  1. What e-commerce can offer now that it couldn’t in the past
  2. The impact of online sales in different parts of the organization
  3. Roadblocks and challenges in e-commerce adoption

To ensure that you never miss an episode of The Manufacturing Show, subscribe on Apple PodcastsSpotifyStitcher or Google Podcasts.

Just. Friggin’. Start.

I’m a big idea guy.  In fact, it probably drives my team crazy sometimes. “Oh great. Joe had another epiphany!”

But of course, big ideas are generally meaningless if you don’t act on them.

I thought I’d try delivering a little inspiration this week in the form of two simple stories from my own experiences over the past couple of months.

One from inside Gorilla. One from outside.

In both cases, these guys had big ideas. But instead of sitting on those ideas and worrying about how to make them perfect, they said…

“Let’s go.”

STORY 1: The Manufacturing Procurement Guy

On October 1st, Aaron Brimer, a manufacturing procurement expert, called me for some marketing advice. Here’s what happened next (over three short weeks)…

10/01 (Day 1):

Aaron and I chatted for 30 minutes or so about how he could develop an audience for the personal brand he wanted to build.

Our conversation concluded with me advising Aaron to pick up a copy of Content Based Networking by James Carbary.

I recommended that Aaron follow James’ playbook, which was essentially to start building relationships by interviewing as many people in your target audience as you can (and turning those conversations into content).

10/02 (Day 2):

Aaron sends me this text:

“Hey Joe. It’s Aaron B. Thanks for your time yesterday! I dove into Content Based Networking. It’s a gold mine for what I’m looking to start”.

10/05 (Day 5):

I see this post by Aaron on LinkedIn:

10/18 (Day 18):

Episode 1 of The Manufacturing Procurement Guy goes live on Apple Podcasts.

Wow. Eighteen days!

Aaron could’ve said, “Great idea. Maybe I’ll do that some day.”

Instead, he turned idea into reality in less than three weeks.

STORY 2: Industrial Marketing Live

“I’d like to start a regular webinar for Gorilla”

This was the subject line of an email our Senior Strategist Julian Schaaf sent me and my business partner Jon Franko on August 26th. Here’s the story of what’s happened since that day…

08/26:

In his email, Julian goes on to say…

“I’d like to host a bi-weekly webinar for Gorilla. In it, I’d like to give very tactical advice for marketing folks at our target accounts…

“I see this as 50% opportunity generator for Gorilla, 50% R&D for our clients to get a great process in place for webinars. And to judge how results can be measured.

“I really believe events are an efficient way for our clients to generate content while connecting with buyers, and we need to figure out how to do them well…

“What do you guys think? I can get started whenever.”

09/21:

Webinar 1 draws over 30 live attendees, cohosted by Julian and our other Senior Strategist Matt Sciannella.

11/16:

Through the first five webinars, what is now a biweekly event called “Industrial Marketing Live” has generated over 150 recurring registrants.

This is the stuff that makes me proud.

Someone on my team coming to me and saying, “I’m gonna do this”. And then, well, doing it.

So… that new Big Thing you’ve been planning?

If you start today, it won’t be perfect.

But it will almost certainly be better than the thing you’re doing right now. So dive in and make it better as you go.

Just. Friggin’. Start.

PODCAST: Servant Leadership in the Manufacturing Sector w/ Dan Erschen

Dan Erschen The Manufacturing Executive podcast

The Manufacturing Executive: Episode 21

Listen to this episode here or on Apple PodcastsSpotifyStitcher or Google Podcasts.

powered by Sounder

Episode show notes

You know the Golden Rule: Do unto others as you would have them do unto you.

But do you practice that philosophy as a manufacturing leader? Does it influence who you hire? How you manage your team? The way you interact with your stakeholders?

On this episode of the podcast, I invited Dan Erschen, the owner of Wisconsin Metal Parts, a contract manufacturer of metal parts and assemblies, to talk about Servant Leadership.

Dan and I discussed:

  • Dan’s personal battle with MS and how it has shaped who he is today
  • What Servant Leadership is and the benefits and challenges it brings to manufacturing companies
  • Dan’s advice about how to start shifting culture through Servant Leadership

To ensure that you never miss an episode of The Manufacturing Show, subscribe on Apple PodcastsSpotifyStitcher or Google Podcasts.

PODCAST: A Conversation with the Manufacturing Millennial w/ Jake Hall

Manufacturing Millennial Jacob Hall

The Manufacturing Executive: Episode 20

Listen to this episode here or on Apple PodcastsSpotifyStitcher or Google Podcasts.

powered by Sounder

Episode show notes

When the mandated industry shut down in Michigan happened, one Millennial sought new ways to engage his current customers and share the benefits of automation while working from home. He turned to LinkedIn.

Seven months later, his content has reached over 1.5 million views, and he’s amassed more than 10,000 followers.

On this episode of the podcast, I invited Jake Hall, the Manufacturing Millennial, to discuss everything from embracing technology and creating video content to engaging young professionals in the workforce and building a personal brand on LinkedIn.

Jake and I talked about:

  1. The value of video on LinkedIn for personal branding
  2. Why face-and-voice communication is your differentiator
  3. How to get past vanity metrics when evaluating your content’s performance

To ensure that you never miss an episode of The Manufacturing Show, subscribe on Apple PodcastsSpotifyStitcher or Google Podcasts.

PODCAST: Getting Clear About Thought Leadership w/ Bill Sherman

bill sherman thought leadership podcast

The Manufacturing Executive: Episode 19

Listen to this episode here or on Apple PodcastsSpotifyStitcher or Google Podcasts.

powered by Sounder

Episode show notes

The term thought leadership has gotten tossed around a lot the last few years. But what exactly does thought leadership mean? Does it simply imply that you write a blog or that you spoke at a local Chamber of Commerce event? Or is thought leadership something more than that? How did you become a thought leader anyway?

On this episode of the podcast, I invited Bill Sherman, COO and thought leadership practice lead at Thought Leadership Leverage. Bill helps clients who want to use thought leadership whether it’s to fill a sales pipeline or influence how people think and act.

Bill and I talked about:

  1. The four elements of thought leadership
  2. How thought leadership can impact your organizational and personal brands
  3. Why people struggle with content insecurity

To ensure that you never miss an episode of The Manufacturing Show, subscribe on Apple PodcastsSpotifyStitcher or Google Podcasts.

PODCAST: Create a Dashboard Effect: Drive Your Work With Data w/ Jon Thompson

Drive Your Work With Data w/ Jon Thompson

The Manufacturing Executive: Episode 18

Listen to this episode here or on Apple PodcastsSpotifyStitcher or Google Podcasts.

powered by Sounder

Episode show notes

Twenty years ago, we barely had enough info to measure our impact. Today, manufacturing marketers are overwhelmed with data, and everyone wants to sell us software to find, store, clean, surface, and use that data.

Why is data such a big buzzword in business, especially manufacturing?

On this episode of the podcast, I invited Jon Thompson, co-founder and senior partner at Blue Margin Inc, a company of 38 consultants and engineers who help mid-market companies with an emphasis on industrials use their data to create growth.

Jon and I talked about:

  1. Why data needs visibility from the c-suite all the way to the frontline
  2. The idea of numbers as a motivator
  3. The biggest challenges manufacturers face when controlling and using their data

Here’s Jon’s book, as referenced during the episode:

The Dashboard Effect: Let Your Data Do The Work

To ensure that you never miss an episode of The Manufacturing Show, subscribe on Apple PodcastsSpotifyStitcher or Google Podcasts.

5 ways manufacturers can engage an audience through video

video marketing for manufacturers

I talk to a lot of manufacturers who know video is important.

But they rarely know where to start.

So today, we’re gettin’ tactical.

Below are five totally different ways to bring video into your organization – from marketing to sales to managing employees.

And included are tangible examples of manufacturing folks who are crushing it on these fronts.

So take a look.

Study these applications.

Look at how they’re doing it. And think about why they’re doing it.

Then figure out what your own version could be. If you need help, let me know and I’ll try to point you in the right direction!

1. Show your product in action (instead of talking about it)

Most people talk about how awesome their stuff is.

Here are two examples of real life manufacturing guys who are showing it.

First up is Tony Gunn.

Sales and Marketing Exec at 5th Axis Workholding, Tony’s a rare example of a manufacturing sales guy who’s managing to show his company’s products in action (and in an engaging way).

“I don’t have all the tools or talent to do video content” isn’t an excuse anymore. Your have a high-def video camera in your pocket. Take it out and start shooting. Like Tony does.

Here’s an example of Tony’s stuff on LinkedIn (where his following is over 10,000 people and growing).

 

Need some additional inspiration?

Check out what Jake Hall is doing.

Self branded as “The Manufacturing Millennial”,  Jake has turned himself into a video curator of machines at work.

In less than a year, Jake has gone from almost no visibility to daily videos that are garnering 30-40,000+ views each (which is just completely nuts by the way).

Here’s an example.

Have a compelling video of your machinery?

Send it Jake’s way. He’s like a human content distribution channel!

Go follow Jake and be inspired.

2. Train your audience

Titan Gilroy.

This is a name many of you probably know already.

Titan runs an appropriately named training organization called TITANS of CNC, Inc where he publishes an insane amount of learning content about CNC machining.

And for free.

When you give your insights away, you earn attention, you build trust, you establish thought leadership.

And then you get hired.

titans of cnc

Go take a look at Titan’s academy.

3. Send a daily video message to your team

Here’s an absolutely brilliant idea.

I recently interviewed Kevin Snook, author of “Make it Right: 5 Steps to Align Your Manufacturing Business from the Frontline to the Bottom Line” on our podcast.

As Kevin said in the clip below, back in 1920, the only way Henry Ford could talk to his Operations was to shout at them through a megaphone.

But today, everyone throughout your organization, from the C-Suite to the frontline has a smart phone in his or her pocket.

So use it.

What if the CEO of a manufacturing company sent a 30 or 45-second video to the whole company every morning that sounded something like this?…

“Hey, just want to let you all know that back down in Brazil at the moment, on line number four in the plant in Sao Paulo, we’ve got [fill in the blank] going on. I just want to give a shout out to them all because this is important for the company. Brazil’s a growth country for us. And guys, keep it up, you’re leading the way for us.”

In less than a minute, he or she would have given a shout out to the whole company, communicating awareness for what’s going on, letting everyone know he/she cares, and acknowledging that what people are doing matters.

Imagine the impact across the organization to hear from your leader in this way, every day. Or heck, even a few times a week.

Here’s what Kevin had to say about the topic.

4. Engage your prospects in a live webinar

You’ll be hearing lots more from our crew at Gorilla about how to run a successful webinar series in the coming months.

We’re hard at work launching one for ourselves (and a few of our clients simultaneously).

So why a live webinar?

  1. It gives you something of value to promote to your existing list, organically on the social channels and through paid ads
  2. This content can be used to nurture your existing contacts and generate new leads alike
  3. It positions you as an expert
  4. The opportunity to share 20-30 minutes of insights with your ideal audience (and live) on a regular basis is otherwise tough to come by
  5. A live Q&A session at the end lets you engage one on one with the right people from the right companies, answering their questions and building human-to-human connections
  6. The questions that are asked in that Q&A session will generate ideas for future content that will also resonate with these individuals
  7. You can record the webinar and post it on YouTube (like we did below) and stream it into your website (again, like we did below!). Now it lives on beyond the live event.
  8. You can break that long-form video down into micro videos and audio clips to use in social media channels using a tool like VEED.io.
  9. You can transcribe it using a service like Rev.com and publish the text as a blog post. Or better yet, throw the transcription to a professional copywriter and write a blog series from it.

Need more reasons? Or is that good enough? 😉

For context, here’s what we’re doing on the webinar front for Gorilla…

We’re branding our series and giving it a name:

industrial marketing live logo

Every two weeks, our two Senior Strategists, Julian Schaaf and Matt Sciannella, are teaching a different industrial marketing subject, and we’re encouraging our audience to sign up to attend this episodic series every other Monday at 2:00 PM CST.

Here’s a recording of the first session:

To gather some real examples from manufacturing organizations who have embraced this medium (and are actually doing it well), I solicited my LinkedIn network.

Here are a few that stood out:

Firetrace:

Webinar Series: Exploring the Causes and Impacts of Fires in Wind Turbines

ABICOR BINZEL:

Source Capture Fume Extraction for Beginners

Fortress Interlocks:

Risk Reduction Measures

Columbus McKinnon:

Automation Custom Engineering, Processes, and Capabilities

Hopefully some of these will inspire ideas for you!

5. Be a guest on series your audience already watches

There are a lot of really great niche manufacturing shows out there at this point.

Some are pure audio (nothing wrong with that by the way!), but since this article is about video, below are some shows that have video components too.

As you look through these, think about who from your organization would make for a solid guest.

Then reach out and offer an idea for how your subject matter expert could share his or her expertise with their shared audience.

Remember, though, you’re there to teach and create value (not to promote or sell).

Three examples:

Manufacturing Happy Hour

Chris Luecke is a former Rockwell Automation guy who just started his own venture helping manufacturers create better content. His longstanding show – Manufacturing Happy Hour – pairs beer and manufacturing.

Doesn’t get much better than that, right? 🍻

Industrial Sage

Danny Gonzales and David Caron are killing it with video content for manufacturers at Industrial Sage.

Check out all the interviews with manufacturing leaders they’ve published.

The Manufacturing Executive

As of the time I’m writing this (mid October of 2020), we’ve published the first 18 episodes from our new every-other-week show – The Manufacturing Executive.

Though an audio podcast at heart, we record all the episodes as videos and publish them here on YouTube too.

And note that we didn’t create the show to talk about ourselves. Instead, we’re shining the spotlight on manufacturing leaders who have something to say.

So there you have it

Hopefully something in here made your ears perk up.

Need help talking through where to go from here? Drop us a note and we’ll help guide you if we can!

PODCAST: Make It Right: Growth and Stability in Manufacturing Companies w/ Kevin Snook

Growth and stability in manufacturing Kevin Snook

The Manufacturing Executive: Episode 17

Listen to this episode here or on Apple PodcastsSpotifyStitcher or Google Podcasts.

powered by Sounder

Episode show notes

What comes to mind when you think of a great business leader? 

Someone with all the answers? Someone who grinds away working long hours? Someone with such deep experience and expertise that you don’t need to question his or her guidance?

Or is a great leader someone who leads by empowering the people around them?

On this episode of the podcast, I invited Kevin Snook, CEO of both Saxagon and LUCIDi4 and author of the Amazon bestseller Make It Right, to talk about leadership in the manufacturing sector. 

Kevin and I discussed:

  1. Empowering the frontline employees to make decisions
  2. A 5-step framework for leading a manufacturing organization
  3. A leader’s 2 roles
  4. Avoiding the slippery slopes of manufacturing leadership

To ensure that you never miss an episode of The Manufacturing Show, subscribe on Apple PodcastsSpotifyStitcher or Google Podcasts.

PODCAST: Start With the Problem, Not the Technology w/ Jonathon Hensley

Start with the problem, not the technology podcast

The Manufacturing Executive: Episode 16

Listen to this episode here or on Apple PodcastsSpotifyStitcher or Google Podcasts.

powered by Sounder

Episode show notes

From Industry 4.0 to 3D printing to wearable technology, there are so many advancements happening in manufacturing.

But it’s easy to get sidetracked by these shiny objects.

We need to focus on the problem or goal at hand first. And then APPLY the right-fit technology accordingly.

On this episode of the podcast, I invited Jonathan Hensley, co-founder and CEO of Emerge Interactive, a digital product consulting firm that works with companies to improve operational agility and customer experience.

Jonathon and I talked about:

  1. Digital products and services that might be applied in the industrial sector
  2. Customer experience in the data
  3. Changing operations, supply chain disruption, and labor retention in the manufacturing space

To ensure that you never miss an episode of The Manufacturing Show, subscribe on Apple PodcastsSpotifyStitcher or Google Podcasts.

PODCAST: How to Sell Your Industrial Business w/ Nick Jackson

how to sell your manufacturing business podcast

The Manufacturing Executive: Episode 15

Listen to this episode here or on Apple PodcastsSpotifyStitcher or Google Podcasts.

powered by Sounder

Episode show notes

After I go, what happens to my company? 

Every successful business owner eventually faces that question. In some cases, the succession plan seems obvious. In others, it’s not at all clear. 

On this episode of the podcast, I invited Nick Jackson, Principal of The Mendota Group, which acquires small to medium sized manufacturing, distribution and service businesses.

Nick and I talked about:

  1. The difference between a financial buyer, a strategic buyer, and an active investor
  2. A step-by-step process for finding an advisor when selling your company
  3. What happens after a deal gets closed

To ensure that you never miss an episode of The Manufacturing Show, subscribe on Apple PodcastsSpotifyStitcher or Google Podcasts.

PODCAST: 3 Things Manufacturers Can Do In The Absence of Trade Shows w/ Joe Sullivan

3 things manufacturers can do in the absence of trade shows podcast

The Manufacturing Executive: Episode 14

Listen to this episode here or on Apple PodcastsSpotifyStitcher or Google Podcasts.

powered by Sounder

Episode show notes

Many manufacturers rely on events to generate pipeline. What do you do when events shut down?

On this episode of the podcast, I share three tangible ideas for reallocating your marketing budget to keep a steady flow of leads coming while trade shows can’t help you do it.

  1. Make the shift from brochure marketing that’s all about you to genuinely helpful content marketing that’s about your prospect.
  2. Market to your existing customers. Your email list is gold.
  3. Learn how to do video based prospecting. It’s a lot easier than you might think.

Resources we talked about:

To ensure that you never miss an episode of The Manufacturing Show, subscribe on Apple PodcastsSpotifyStitcher or Google Podcasts.

PODCAST: Doing the Dirty Work: How to Find Qualified, Consistent Labor w/ Gary Konarska

Gary Konarska The Manufacturing Executive podcast

The Manufacturing Executive: Episode 13

Listen to this episode here or on Apple PodcastsSpotifyStitcher or Google Podcasts.

powered by Sounder

Episode show notes

We hear grumblings about automation taking away job opportunities. But inside the manufacturing sector, companies are struggling to find high quality, consistent human laborers.

The real challenge facing the industry is this: Baby Boomers are exiting the workforce, and there aren’t enough people in the skilled trades to replace them.

Gary Konarska, Executive Director & CEO at American Welding Society, joined this episode of the podcast to discuss how to attract and retain high quality labor.

Gary and I talked about:

  • The opportunity cost of college and the value of learning a skilled trade 
  • How to address the shortage of welders
  • Ways to attract fresh talent through creating great content
  • How to upskill the current welding workforce

Resources we talked about:

To ensure that you never miss an episode of The Manufacturing Show, subscribe on Apple PodcastsSpotifyStitcher or Google Podcasts.

Transcript of episode

Joe Sullivan:
Welcome to another episode of The Manufacturing Executive podcast. This show is being brought to you by our sponsor Cadenas Part Solutions. I’m Joe Sullivan your host, and a co-founder of the industrial marketing agency Gorilla 76. So we talk a lot on this show about top line growth, sales, marketing, lead generation, and so on. Attracting, engaging, winning, and retaining great customers is really hard work. But so is attracting, engaging, hiring, and retaining great employees.

Joe Sullivan:
If you talked to the average person in the general public, you’d probably hear grumblings about automation and other technology taking away job opportunities from the workforce. But when I look inside the manufacturing sector, what I see is one company after the next struggling to find high quality and consistent labor. The reality today is that many people don’t want to do the dirty jobs, work night shifts, operate heavy machinery.

Joe Sullivan:
And on top of that, in many cases, not enough skilled laborers are being trained to replace those that are on their way out. So in today’s episode, we’re going to tackle some of this head on. My guest is Gary Konarska, the executive director and CEO of the American Welding Society, or AWS. Gary has spent more than 20 years in the welding and automation industry.

Joe Sullivan:
Most recently working for the Lincoln electric company, where he held roles including, vice president of global automation, managing director of Southeast Asia, Korea, and Taiwan based in Singapore and director of business development based in Shanghai, China. Throughout his career Gary has focused on sales, strategic planning, international business, and foster relationships among highly diverse teams. Gary, welcome to the show.

Gary Konarska:
Thank you, Joe. I appreciate you having me on here.

Joe Sullivan:
Yeah, thrilled you’re here. Well, before we get into the nitty gritty Gary, can you tell the listeners a bit about your personal journey up to this point in your career? And also just tell us a little bit about AWS and what you guys do over there.

Gary Konarska:
Yeah, sure. So from a personal standpoint, obtained an industrial engineering degree, but realized that I probably didn’t want to be tied to a desk or inside a facility. So I actually went into technical sales. So stayed in the industrial space, but went into the more dynamic aspects of sales. I spent about seven years on the streets really looking at, how do I add value to an end user customer?

Gary Konarska:
So that was one of the beautiful things is, I wasn’t a product sales guy, I was a solution sales guy early on. Early in my career, I was really trying to help people be more productive and effective in their operations. I had the unique opportunity to actually work as an ex-patriot, which was supposed to be a two year assignment, but I ended up actually spending 10 years living and working in Asia.

Gary Konarska:
So I went over as a senior level sales guy, trying to mentor some local resources, but that expanded to regional subject matter expert type roles. And then eventually moving on to Director of Business Development, as well as a manager and director role for about a 13 country region in Southeast Asia. After that, as I repatriated back to the US, I moved back to Cleveland, Ohio, and I left the core business, which was product based and went into the automation industry.

Gary Konarska:
So still with the same organization, but focused on providing firstly arc welding robotics solutions. So basically addressing that skilled labor shortage or trying to help increase productivity of manufacturers. Then eventually took on a role where I had actually 13 locations around the world that were doing all kinds of automation from material handling, to laser processing, welding processes. So quite the start as a sales guy to eventually leading a pretty substantial footprint as a business leader.

Joe Sullivan:
Good background. And now with AWS, can you talk a little bit just for anybody who’s unfamiliar about what AWS is and does?

Gary Konarska:
Yeah. Thanks. So I joined AWS just here in April of 2020. And so the mission of the American Welding Society is to advance the science and technology of welding joining an allied processes. So we are the recognized body that’s created the standards at which US manufacturers in particular, adhere to from a welding standpoint. So if there’s any type of code quality welding, any type of classifications on welding products, such as welding consumables, those would adhere to the standards that were developed by AWS.

Gary Konarska:
We also actually provide certification programs. So our largest program being a program called the certified welding inspector, who actually … They work in the quality assurance space, looking at the reliability as well as the safety of welded products. And so we are an industry trade association. We do also have individual membership, which is nearly 70,000 members of the AWS, both here domestically as well as internationally. I mean, we’re here to support the welding community.

Gary Konarska:
Now our job is dual focus is to provide services to the welding community. But also one of our core missions that we have is that we [inaudible 00:06:11] promote through our, what we call the AWS Foundation, is to help address the shortage of welding personnel in industry today. And so that is actually something that I personally am passionate about as one of the interesting things. And as I looked at this opportunity to join AWS was really that balance between, running a business, but also giving back to in this case, the welding community.

Gary Konarska:
And so hopefully today we’ll talk a bit about some of the things that we’re doing, not just here at AWS, but also what industry participants can do to do this at a local level to help you as a manufacturer.

Joe Sullivan:
Yeah. That’s exactly I think what made me say, “I think Gary would be a great guest on this show.” As I alluded to in the intro to this conversation, and one of the things I hear most commonly from manufacturers is, it’s really difficult to find high quality and consistent labor, to attract them, to retain them. And so I’d love for you to be able to, during this episode, speak to that from your experience in the welding industry.

Joe Sullivan:
But also think of it more broadly for our audience inside the manufacturing space. Because it’s absolutely a problem that is … As I’m sure you know, is prevalent throughout manufacturing. I guess, we can start at a high level. What are you seeing on this front in terms of this … The shortage in skilled labor and this gap that has to be filled? Maybe start by talking about it in the welding industry.

Gary Konarska:
Yeah. And I’ll add some personal anecdote to it.

Joe Sullivan:
Please.

Gary Konarska:
25 years ago when I was myself going through high school, I was in a bit of a rural area, I grew up in Michigan. And there wasn’t really vocational programs available to me. There were, but the types of students that were enrolling 25 years in the vocational programs, were the ones that were deemed the ones not going to college. Right? And there was a negative connotation to going and joining the skilled trade.

Gary Konarska:
And I think over time, and it’s really been probably a two decade journey that that pendulum has started to swing back where the emphasis on vocational skills, bringing back those types of programs into the high school level and then into the post secondary level has really started to gain speed. I was looking at some data. I do see that we’re making progress on that front. But the challenge that we face is, we knew the baby boomer generation.

Gary Konarska:
We knew that there would be a large number of people exiting the workforce at some point, but we didn’t really see the effects and take action probably early enough. So as we start to see more and more of this generation retiring, we don’t have as many entry level people entering the industry as well. And so that’s the real gap that we’re really trying to address is, we’ve got more people exiting and we could say skilled trades, specifically welding as well. But there’s more people exiting the skilled trades than are entering the skilled trades today.

Joe Sullivan:
Yeah. I think you summed that up really well. There’s a book that I read recently, it’s called Leveraged Learning and the author is Danny Iny, I don’t know if you’ve come across this. But it immediately struck me because, the book is really about … I’m going to read a quote here that I have bookmarked. He wrote, “If not colleges who will provide the lifelong learning of the future, from the only place that it can come from.

Joe Sullivan:
The experts and professionals on the cutting edge and front lines of their respective fields. They’re the ones whose knowledge and skills will be sufficiently up to date to provide what learners will need, while their skill level and opportunity costs will command a premium, the transformation they will deliver, will justify paying for it.” When I read that book, I flagged that because it’s … This is so relevant I think in the manufacturing industry, because I’ve seen this.

Joe Sullivan:
I’ve heard this from others, this shift you described it as the pendulum swinging back toward vocational programs. And the fact that you leave high school, you go into one of these and you learn a skill. The opportunity cost of college at this point sometimes can … It almost doesn’t even justify what you could be doing, learning a usable skill, going into a really good job and being trained to be an expert in something like in welding. Right?

Joe Sullivan:
I think it’s really interesting have you talking about this. I don’t know if you agree with that quote and what’s being said there.

Gary Konarska:
Yeah. I mean, absolutely. I mean, when you look at the skill sets, and like right now as an example, I’m looking to hire a director of global sales. And I’m looking at the experience that that individual has. The skills that they’ve developed over the course of their career. And I actually just made this joke. I looked at a number of great candidates. I couldn’t tell you what university any of them went to. Right?

Gary Konarska:
It’s not really at this point of this type of role, it’s really about the experiences that they’ve gained. Now, when you look at a role like a skilled trade, right, experience is really what makes that role so important. But getting that foundational start that’s where the vocational programs, the continuing technical education programs, getting that solid foundation, they’re learning the basic ways to approach problem solving. Right?

Gary Konarska:
That’s what’s so important for that longer term career where you can maximize earning potential longterm. I mean, if you look at, and I have some data on the welding industry in particular, now the median income is about $43,000. Right? I mean, that sounds like a pretty good start. So if I’m looking at, I just graduated high school, I’m looking at my options, I can look at a continuing technical education program. Typically they have a pretty low cost to go through them.

Gary Konarska:
They’re not typically that long. Oftentimes six months to a year. Right? And then you’re out in the workforce earning. So on the alternative, you look at college. Right? Many people take out loans, they’re saddled with high debt. Right? Four years if you’re lucky, typically five. Right? Now you look at starting to earn, so you dig this hole, you create this debt and long term, is the earning potential maybe higher?

Gary Konarska:
Yeah. You could say that there is a potential that over the course of a 40 year career, that the earning potential could be higher. However, at what point does that cross? Because now if you’ve gone into a vocational program, you started earning at, let’s say 19 years old, you don’t have debt at that point. So you’ve got a four year head start. You’ve also now been building your experience, which means you’re more qualified for further roles.

Gary Konarska:
And you continue to expand upon your skillset, because in most skilled trades, there is progression to be made. Right? There’s more difficult machinery run as a machinist, there’s more difficult welding processes to learn. It can progress to running automated equipment, doing those processes. So there’s tremendous career opportunity within these different skilled trades that can really make a great career for an individual.

Joe Sullivan:
I love it. Totally love it. So give some context maybe for listeners here from maybe what you guys … I know you’ve mentioned that there are things you’re doing at the American Welding Society. Initiatives you have underway that address this welder shortage specifically. Can you talk a little bit about that?

Gary Konarska:
Sure. So I’ll highlight a few of the different things we’re doing here at AWS. So, one of the things that we recognize is that, for those that are leaving high school, it’s important for the parents as well as the students, to understand what a career in welding might look like. And so we’ve created what we call … A Website called Careers of Welding, that highlights a number of the different career paths that an individual can take when entering the field. Right?

Gary Konarska:
So we’re really trying to present, the knowledge process of what does it mean to become a welder? What does that look like? Now there’s a lot of testimonials from actual people that are in the profession today, so they can learn to identify with, what does the future look like if I go into this particular field? We’re also doing a number of things financially. So we have the AWS Foundation. And the AWS Foundation is our arm that’s really looking at direct support to the industry.

Gary Konarska:
As an example, in 2019, we actually gave out $1.8 million in scholarships and grants across the United States. From a scholarship standpoint, that was more than 1000 individual students, received a scholarship from AWS to basically go and attend some type of welding related program. So that could be actually learning to weld itself. It could be going to get an associates degree in welding technology or even a four year engineering degree in a university as well.

Gary Konarska:
And so in addition to that, we then have offered a series of grants to education facilities. So whether to expand the capacity of an existing program to meet increased demand in that area, or even to help schools start a welding program. Right? So there’s some specific campaigns to actually focus in places that need to introduce or want to introduce welding into their curriculum or their vocational programs. We’re really trying to get into the career entry point, attracting people to welding as a career. Right?

Gary Konarska:
Another thing that we do is we have something called … We have a welding mobile trailer that travels around and attends things like the state fairs. Right? The Future Farmers of America Annual Convention, Boy Scouts of America Annual Convention. And on that there’s these welding simulators. Right? And so the welding simulator is a virtual reality system, and that virtual reality system actually gives a student or anybody, an opportunity to try welding basically in your tee shirt and shorts. Right?

Gary Konarska:
So gives you that real life experience even gives you the sound. It doesn’t give you the smell of the heat, but it does give you the chance to at least try the skill to say, “Hey, do I have an aptitude for this?” It gives great exposure. And actually during those events, we run a competition because those virtual reality machines actually score your weld. The highest score of every one of those events earned a scholarship to a welding program.

Gary Konarska:
So we’re trying to generate awareness that you can have a great career in something like welding, and really trying to get out and bring people into the industry is a lot of our focus.

Joe Sullivan:
We’re going to take a 30 second breather here for a word from our sponsor Cadenas Parts Solutions. Let’s talk real quick about getting specified. Are you a component manufacturer? Maybe you sell architectural products to parks or large facilities. Engineers and architects need models of your products to test fit in their designs. That’s where Cadenas comes in, to help you create a dynamic shareable CAD catalog you put on your Website. Designers can preview the product from any angle and download it in the format they prefer.

Joe Sullivan:
They get the data they need for their design, and you get a fresh lead to add to your marketing pipeline. To get one of your products turned into an online 3D model for free, use the code executive@partsolutions.com/executive. There’s a staggering parallel for me as a guy who’s come up in marketing and sales to … Between lead generation for new business and attracting talent, at least in the way I believe it should be done.

Joe Sullivan:
And we have on our Gorilla site, if you go into the careers section, you’ll see we have a separate blog called to get a job blog. Well, our main blog is focused on helping manufacturers figure out how to do sales and marketing. It’s just purely insightful, resourceful information. But our get a job blog, which is in its infancy, but our objective is to help teach people who are either in college or prior or in the marketing, and trying to break into the marketing industry.

Joe Sullivan:
Help them learn what skill sets they need to acquire, how they can be successful, trying to get into marketing. And as a result of this, we attract a lot of really great young marketing candidates. And so it’s a very similar thing to what you’re doing. You’re becoming the resource, the organization that’s helping people picture for themselves or paint a picture of what a career could look like. Put themselves in that situation, make it tangible.

Joe Sullivan:
The virtual reality thing you just described is such a great idea. The separate website, that’s purely about careers in welding. And I think there’s a lot that even a small or midsize manufacturer can take from this, because you can do the same thing, regardless of whether you’re a CNC machining company or a equipment manufacturer or a contract manufacturer of some kind.

Joe Sullivan:
Think about the type of people that you’re trying to attract that are so hard to attract, and can you be a resource to them, and open up conversations and help them picture what it would be like to have a career not only at where you are in your organization, but in this industry? It’s a really smart thing to do. So I love it.

Gary Konarska:
Yeah. I mean, well we look at what can somebody do at the local level. Right? So I’m a small to medium sized manufacturer anywhere in the US. Right? We always say, get engaged. So get engaged at the local vocational programs. Offer apprenticeship, offered internships. Normally you think of internships in the marketing space, the engineering space, but a welder, a kid going through welding school also needs some real life experience as well. Right?

Gary Konarska:
So look at programs where you … Part time they could come in and be a helper. Right? Oftentimes just like any career progression when somebody that has less experience, they may come in and do the more simple tasks. Right? That then frees up those that are more experienced to work on the more complex tasks. Right?

Gary Konarska:
But getting engaged at that local level, and if you really form a close with those schools, over time what ends up happening is those that do a great job of supporting the program, start to receive the benefits of, “Hey, I’ve got a really good student coming through, if you’re in the market to find a good welder here’s your individual.” It’s a give and take and it’s a mutual beneficial relationship to those schools and to that organization.

Joe Sullivan:
That’s such a good point, Gary. And I see it in my world too. I’m sure this point transcends welding and manufacturing. It’s certainly present in my world. We’re about two miles down the road from Washington University in st. Louis, which is where I went to college. Their program there is, they produce great designers. There’s a visual communications program.

Joe Sullivan:
University of Missouri, Columbia has got one of the best journalism schools in the country and they’re a few hours down the road. And of course, we’re talking about universities there. But the point is we’ve built relationships inside of the journalism school there, inside of Washington University’s visual communications program. And we’re always getting great candidates. A lot of our employees, our best employees over time have come out of those programs because they know that Gorilla’s a place people have enjoyed working.

Joe Sullivan:
They’ve started their careers here, they’ve had … So we have had a lot of interns from these places. And there’s no reason why this same thing can’t be happening in welding or other areas of manufacturing. You can get really great work done too. You said it, if you can delegate, take the things that can be … A process that can be taught that’s … Now you’re delegating work from your full time full salary employees down to more junior people who are using that to learn and gain real hands on experience.

Joe Sullivan:
And there’s just benefits for everybody there. So I’m glad you brought that up. Is there anything you’re seeing from other organizations or companies to things they’re doing to up skill the welding workforce, so people are armed with the right skills to meet demand? Other things outside of what you’ve talked about with AWS?

Gary Konarska:
Yeah. I mean, one thing that we have seen, and it tends to be more than medium to larger size organizations, are doing more focus work on in house training. Right? Actually doing more from a structured standpoint of bringing in an employee without the skills and starting to give them the skills, either on the job or through a structured training program. Right? Just like this may be a live thing in the future for you.

Gary Konarska:
Right now it’s all virtual, but there’s a plethora of great learning tools available now that are online. Right? Whether from us or from other providers and other skilled trades area, there’s a lot of online learning that is really readily available and they’re great programs as well. And so as a small to medium sized manufacturer partner with that have those developed programs. Right? They can help you with learning paths.

Gary Konarska:
Now we’re working with some parts of industry where there’s a need that’s unfulfilled. And so as a small to medium size organization, you might not be able to stand up your own training program. But working with program partners out there, they can look at, well, I have 10 partners, I have 50, or I am an entire industry like for us, that has a need. And as more people understand what that need is, which in this particular example would be in house training, then those needs can be met by various types of organizations. Right?

Gary Konarska:
So I do see that there’s more and more of that that’s happening of people recognizing that, “Okay if I can’t just hire a skillset that I’m looking for…” And right now, even in these times there are still, a hundred thousands, hundreds of thousands of openings across the US for skilled trades at this particular example, welding. Right? I may need to do something to bring in somebody that doesn’t have the exact skillset that I need and help them to develop those skill sets. Right?

Gary Konarska:
When you look at the current generation workforce, one of the things you talk about when people say how much they’re engaged or like the organization, is that investment into the employee. Right? That personal development, that professional development that the organization provides. So that’s one of the number one factors why people would stay at a place like Gorilla. Right? They’re not just staying stagnant. They’re not coming in with a skill, and that’s all they’ve got. Each day and month and year that goes by, they build their skillset.

Gary Konarska:
And when you’re a small to medium sized company, it’s hard to formalize those process. I think that’s one of the things, when you’re looking at skilled trades in particular, you’ve got to look at potentially formalizing some of these processes. Right? But you don’t have to do it alone. There are people out there, there’s organizations that focus primarily on this that can help you to develop those in house programs.

Joe Sullivan:
Well, I know the younger generations are looking for it too. It’s becoming more important for them to … They value advancement in their career and learning and gaining skills more than past generations. There’s enough data out there that represented it.

Joe Sullivan:
It’s not just about having a stable income there’s a … When they feel like they’re learning and growing, it matters a lot. What would you say to incumbent workers? What skills should they continue to build through ongoing training so that they can remain competitive?

Gary Konarska:
I mean, in most the skilled trades, technology is becoming part of whether it’s the equipment itself, how the job is actually done. But there is a technology component that’s already here and will continue grow in proliferation across manufacturing. So of today, and I’ll use welding as an example. If today, I’m a welder. I need to start building my understanding of how to run a CNC equipment. Perhaps I need to learn how to program a robot. Right?

Gary Konarska:
There’s technologies that are being introduced, and even across small to medium sized manufacturers are probably adopting them as fast at this point, as larger scale manufacturers, is to build that technological understanding. Right? And to start that process of learning. So whether you’re learning technology, whether you’re practicing your skill set, but you’ve got to be developing yourself beyond just on the job I’m doing my job, therefore I’m learning.

Gary Konarska:
You’ve got to go a little bit beyond that. That might mean after work, you got to spend 30 minutes or an hour utilizing tools if your employers allows you to do that, to build up your skills. Right? If I use welding as an example, there’s many different processes. The more processes that you’re proficient at, the more valuable you are as a welder. Right? If you’re a machinist, the more types of machines that you can run, the different brands, the more valuable you are to an employer. Right?

Gary Konarska:
So continuing to up skill to expand your knowledge. And the technology piece is the most important probably longterm, because as we talk about things like Industry 4.0, we talk about automation. I mean, the Industry 4.0 is monitoring equipment that it’s either maintained or operated by a human today. Right? At some point in the future, like one of the other podcasts you had talked about, technology is here and humans are here and that interaction is happening.

Gary Konarska:
It’s happening now, it’s going to continue to happen. How do you get on the leading edge of being that robot programmer. Right? Learning how to analyze data today I’m a welder, but if I understand the process, I understand the variables that make me go faster or slower, how could I translate that to a shop wide solution to help my employer to say, “Today, we only weld this much?” If we were to take data around this, we could probably improve our productivity by 5%, 10%.

Gary Konarska:
Small increments like that over the course of time are massive productivity gains for the employer. But that’s all around technology and the application of it. And using robotics, I have direct experience in that. We always used to say, it’s easier to teach a welder how to program a robot and a robot programmer how to weld. Right? When you think about programming, programming is a pretty linear process typically.

Gary Konarska:
You can learn the steps, you could study the steps even, and become proficient at that. At least small base, medium type proficiency. As a welder you can’t learn that in a book, it’s all time actually physically doing that. So when you think about that to learn to program versus to learn to weld, if you don’t spend the time under the hood in this particular case, it’s much more difficult.

Gary Konarska:
So as you think about more robotics, more automation, there’s still typically need a welder to actually operate that equipment.

Joe Sullivan:
Well, Gary, I’m more accustomed to talking sales and marketing. And so this was a really interesting conversation for me. And I think all of your experience brings such a great perspective to this really … Real challenge with closing the skills gap and finding good labor. So I appreciate you coming on the show. Can you tell listeners where they can connect with you online and how they can learn more about what AWS is doing?

Gary Konarska:
Yeah. So the primary website is aws.org. Right? So that’s the best place to learn more about what we’re doing as American Welding Society. My name Gary Konarska you can find me on LinkedIn. I enjoy to grow my network, really enjoy following Gorilla 76 in particular, because Joe is very good about offering tangible insights that you could actually go out and start applying. Right?

Gary Konarska:
So those are probably the two best ways, if you wanted to get more information. And if you want to reach out to me directly to learn more about some of the things I’ve done in the past or something we’re doing in the future, I’m very open to anybody reaching out. If I can help, I would love to do that.

Joe Sullivan:
Beautiful. Well, I would encourage all of you listeners to take Gary up on that offer. Well, before we wrap it up, I want to say thank you again to our sponsor Cadenas Part Solutions for helping make this episode a reality. And Gary, thank you for being on the show today. I really appreciate you taking the time out of your day to do this. It was a really interesting conversation. I know everybody’s going to get a lot of value out of this.

Gary Konarska:
Yeah. Thank you Joe, for having me.

Joe Sullivan:
Great. Well, for the rest of you, I hope to catch you on the next episode of The Manufacturing Executive.

Speaker 2:
You’ve been listening to The Manufacturing Executive Podcast. To ensure that you never miss an episode, subscribe to the show in your favorite podcast player. If you’d like to learn more about industrial marketing and sales strategy, you’ll find an ever expanding collection of articles, videos, guides, and tools specifically for B2B manufacturers at gorillaseventysix.com/learn. Thank you so much for listening until next time.

 

Buyer personas for manufacturers: Are they just fluff?

buyer personas for manufacturers

I’ve long been an advocate for documenting profiles of your key buyer personas.

But lately, I’ve heard more and more marketing folks saying, “Personas are fluff. Don’t waste your time. Just start executing your marketing strategy.”

I disagree, strongly.

And especially so in the manufacturing sector.

So below, I’ll make my case.

But really quickly, in case this topic is somewhat unfamiliar to you, here’s the basic idea:

Buyer personas profiles are documented portraits of your ideal customer’s buying-process influencers.

👨🏾‍🔧 🤵 👩🏾‍💻 🧟‍♂️

These profiles outline the characteristics of these key people at an individual human level – so you can craft a focused marketing strategy with them at the center.

I wrote an overview article on the topic a few years ago if you’d prefer to start there.

But this one is a position piece. So on that note…

Buyer personas: fluff or not fluff?

To quote marketing agency consultant David C. Baker in his recent article “Buyer Personas Can Over-Complicate Your Marketing”:

“You don’t need to name this buyer “Larry” and imagine what kind of dog he has or whether she drives an M5 or Highlander. All that extra stuff drags you down a wasteful path of needless complication.”

I’m 100% on board with this statement.

This type of buyer persona profile was born out of B2C (business-to-consumer) marketing from 10- or 20-plus years ago. (Think McDonalds trying to sell cheeseburgers to teenagers. Ba da ba ba ba!)

But B2B manufacturers aren’t selling cheeseburgers.

They’re selling CNC rotary transfer machines to OEMs and machine shops.

Or FDA-compliant sterilized packaging for diagnostic companies developing microfluidic-based near-care tests.

Or modified atmosphere food packaging machinery for meat and poultry processors.

Often, the buying process takes weeks or months (not minutes or hours).

The solution is complex and engineering-driven.

The sale is non-linear and extremely consultative.

And as a result, the buyer is not a buyer, but a committee of buying-process influencers – individuals with different roles and requirements:

Engineers

Plant managers

Operations

Procurement

Finance

C-Suite

And in very few scenarios over my decade plus of consulting B2B manufacturing organizations would I have told my client, “Treat ’em all the same. No need to differentiate the message.”

The problem isn’t that buyer personas aren’t useful in nature.

It’s that most companies fail to write them in way that makes them useful.

So as David Baker suggested, sure, go ahead and scrap your “Leader Larry” and “Buyer Bonnie” personas. Your general health will benefit from losing less sleep over whether they buy their clothes from Banana Republic or Nordstrom Rack.

Instead, for each of the most important buying-process influencers at the companies you’re trying to reach, let’s focus on documenting this stuff…

Common job titles

Just “engineer”?

Or plant engineer, project engineer, process engineer, systems engineer, controls engineer or mechanical mngineer?

Who are we really talking to here? Let’s visualize who this person is.

Responsibilities at the company

What is this person responsible for doing without fail?

What’s the company counting on him/her to deliver?

And as a result, what matters to this person is his or her job?

Decision-making authority

How much pull does he/she have when it comes to making a buying decision?

Whose approval is needed up the chain?

Personal pains/goals

This one’s super important.

What are the biggest struggles this person is facing that your solutions can help address? And/or what goals is this person trying to achieve that your solutions can help with?

Common questions

Maybe even more important.

What are the most common questions your sales folks (or your engineers or account managers or whoever interfaces with this type of person) get from them?

Your marketing strategy (and in particular, your content strategy), should be born straight out of these things.

Common objections

What objections do you have to overcome from this individual about your company’s ability to solve his/her problems or help achieve his/her goals?

Type of buying process sought

How does this person seek information? Google? From peers or colleagues?

How does he/she want the buying process to go? Short and sweet? In-depth with long consultations or site visits?

How does he/she prefer to communicate? Email? Phone calls? Zoom? Face to face?

Level of sophistication as a buyer

I personally love this one.

How well does this person understand the issues he/ she is up against?

And how knowledgeable is he/she about potential solutions (both yours and others in the marketplace)?

In other words, what kind of learning curve and education process will be required?

You can’t explain solutions to someone who isn’t even aware of the problems he or she is dealing with.

What he/she values most about you

What is the perceived value proposition you offer in the mind of this person?

Whether or not that value proposition aligns with how you want to be positioned, what does he or she currently value about you and your company’s solutions?

Can see where I’m coming from here?

And why it matters that we differentiate between process engineers and procurement and maintenance managers?

From positioning to content strategy to sales outreach, the message you deliver can’t be universal.

Not if you expect it to resonate.

We’re all marketing to people. Not faceless companies.

And thoughtful, focused buyer persona profiles help us talk to human beings as human beings.

Rant over.

Agree or disagree? I’d certainly appreciate your take in the comments below.

PODCAST: I Need What’s In Your Brain: Extracting Expert Knowledge for Content Marketing w/ Toby Wall

Toby Wall Gorilla 76 The Manufacturing Executive Podcast

The Manufacturing Executive: Episode 12

Listen to this episode here or on Apple PodcastsSpotifyStitcher or Google Podcasts.

powered by Sounder

Episode show notes

What happens when your competitors are talking about themselves but you are producing resourceful content? You win! 

So how can you write helpful technical content for manufacturers? First, it needs to come from the brains of subject matter experts. Second, you need to extract that knowledge from their brains and use their insights to fuel your marketing strategy. 

Toby Wall, thinker and senior writer at Gorilla76, joined this episode of the podcast to discuss how to create great content in the manufacturing space.

Toby and I talk about:

  • Where should content expertise originate?
  • Why should subject matter experts expect to play a role in content creation?
  • How do you extract expert knowledge and turn it into credible content?

Resources we talked about:

To ensure that you never miss an episode of The Manufacturing Show, subscribe on Apple PodcastsSpotifyStitcher or Google Podcasts.

Transcript of episode

Joe Sullivan:
Welcome to another episode of The Manufacturing Executive Podcast. This show is being brought to you by our sponsor, CADENAS PARTsolutions. I’m Joe Sullivan, your host and a co-founder of the industrial marketing agency, Gorilla 76.

Joe Sullivan:
So when we launched this podcast a few months ago, I wanted to sprinkle in a solo cast every four episodes or so, where instead of me interviewing someone else, I’d share some of my own insights on sales and marketing topics and specific to the industrial sector. But I’m one person and I co-own an agency of 19, who collectively possess deep expertise in a variety of things industrial marketing related.

Joe Sullivan:
So instead of me talking your ear off today, I’m going to put the spotlight on our senior copywriter, Toby Wall. And we’re going to have a conversation about content marketing. More specifically, we’re going to dive into a couple of things.

Joe Sullivan:
First, why effective content for manufacturing organizations really needs to come from the brains of your true subject matter experts. And second, how you can go about extracting the knowledge from the brains of those deep experts inside your company and use those insights to fuel your marketing strategy.

Joe Sullivan:
I’m excited about this conversation because content marketing is a personal passion of mine and it’s such an important topic for B2B manufacturers. When your competitors are talking all about themselves, but you on the other hand are producing resourceful content that helps, and guides, and earns the trust and attention of the people you’re trying to reach, you’re going to win.

Joe Sullivan:
So on that note, let me take a moment to introduce Toby Wall. Senior writer, Toby Wall, joined our agency Gorilla 76 almost four years ago. In his tenure, he’s developed special expertise in areas including industrial thermal processing, automation technology, industrial facility construction, and commodity dairy product trading.

Joe Sullivan:
In addition to producing written work, Toby produces a niche podcast for one of our clients that’s reached all but one US state, 68 countries around the world. Prior to joining the company, Toby was a newspaper reporter in Illinois. He covered breaking news and state and local government. Toby, welcome to the show.

Toby Wall:
Thanks Joe. Good to be here.

Joe Sullivan:
Well, let’s get right into it. Toby, you wrote an article in our learning center that immediately became one of my favorites, earlier this year. I use it all the time, I send it to clients and prospects because I think it really hammers home a really important point. The piece was about how to create effective content, and it’s titled, I Need What’s in Your Brain, Why We Insist on Interviewing Subject Matter Experts.

Joe Sullivan:
And from your experience as a writer, working specifically with manufacturers, who in those organizations have you found are those experts? Are they engineers, are they sales engineers? Sales people? I’m just curious what your take is on where that expertise needs to come from.

Toby Wall:
Generically, engineer is usually where it comes from, but there’s all kinds of engineers, project engineers, facility engineers, design engineers, corporate engineers, electrical engineers, production engineers. Think of an engineer of any kind, we have probably spoken with that persona.

Toby Wall:
But there’s other ones too, it’s not just engineers, sales folks are always very valuable to us. They’re the people talking to an audience pretty much every day. We found them to be a great conduit between us and what’s on the marketing side, and then whatever our intended goal is.

Toby Wall:
Other examples, project managers, supervisors, or superintendents and their construction projects, or contractors or subcontractors, that persona is really helpful to us when we can get a hold of them. Draftsmen, estimators, auditors, really any boring sounding… I hate to say it that way, but any boring sounding job title in a manufacturing organization is usually where we hit [inaudible 00:04:56].

Toby Wall:
Now, it’s not just about people, there’s physical things that I would consider subject matter experts to. This is the paper trail of all of these people. So we’ve had great success looking at RFIs, and RFPs, and RFQs. We’d like to see estimates. Sometimes I ask for invoices, drawings, CAD models, renderings, specs are great not only just from background technical information but something we can publish.

Toby Wall:
You look at a rendering or look at a CAD drawing and it’s way better most of the time, in my opinion, than a paragraph. But then, sales decks, training decks, trade show materials, compliance documents, audit reports, statutory reports. You got to file with the EPA in certain industries and then even lawsuits. If you were surprised at what you can learn about a company or its business by what they’re getting sued over. Obviously that’s not something our clients usually volunteer, we crack that down on our own. And I’m not out there snooping for lawsuits, but it’s useful, it’s all useful.

Joe Sullivan:
It’s an interesting way to answer that question because I hadn’t really thought about it from the perspective of… I was thinking about people, who are the brains we need to tap into? But in addition to that, there are so many resources and things that you’ve already created inside your company for one reason or another, and you created it for a reason.

Joe Sullivan:
And whether it’s that thing you created or something that’s stored in the brains of an engineer or some other technical professional or sales person, it all comes down to what are the things the customer cares about, what are the questions they’re trying to get answered, what are the things they’re trying to achieve? And you want to find that knowledge inside your company and figure out how to harness that knowledge and be able to deliver it to the client. Is that fair to say?

Toby Wall:
It’s fair. And I mentioned this exhaustive list of documentary evidence, if you will, of things that help us out. I don’t mean to understate how important those people still are to that. I do want that mountain of files, but if I don’t have someone to talk to about those, for me, it would be like trying to read a new language. I wouldn’t know what to do with it.

Toby Wall:
The subject matter experts are really important and what’s in their brains is really important. And even though technical documents are my favorite thing to read, that’s not going to matter to an audience that we’re trying to reach if I don’t also know how to stitch those things together and put it in a context or in the language that these people are going to respond to. So, like I said, all of it matters. The article says, I need what’s in your brain. I also want what’s in their hard drives. If I could get both, that’s perfect.

Joe Sullivan:
That’s a good answer. From my observations, it seems that a lot of B2B organizations who maybe haven’t done a lot of this, haven’t done a lot of content creation, maybe they’ve marketed more traditionally, trade shows, print ads, maybe pay-per-click or things, but maybe they haven’t really gotten into this idea of harnessing their expertise in publishing expert content.

Joe Sullivan:
A lot of them seem to expect that the marketer, whether that’s an internal person on their staff or an agency like Gorilla, or a freelance writer, or a marketer, or whatever it is, is the one who should be responsible for creating all the marketing content. And although marketing may own that task, you argue in your article that they can’t really do it effectively without tapping into the brains of the subject matter experts in some way.

Joe Sullivan:
So talk a little bit more for me about why you think it’s so important for those tactical professionals or deep subject matter experts for their expectation to be there, that they are going to play a role in this content creation process.

Toby Wall:
And forgive me if my cat enters to the frame.

Joe Sullivan:
This is the world we live in now. We’ve got kids running around in the background, we got cats jumping into the picture, dogs barking, that’s [inaudible 00:09:31], right?

Toby Wall:
Practically every meeting I’m in anymore, there’s a cat entering the frame. Cole, you want to be famous?

Joe Sullivan:
There he is.

Toby Wall:
So why is it important that these people are available, that we have access to them? To answer that, I think you got to look at the way niche B2B industrial marketing is a thing all unto itself, even though it also is a lot like every other kind of marketing.

Toby Wall:
So let’s presume that you agree, and that our listeners agree that engaging an audience where they are, demonstrating that you understand what their challenges are, that that is good marketing. Can we agree on that point first of all?

Joe Sullivan:
Mm-hmm (affirmative).

Toby Wall:
So if we agree, that is still true regardless of what you’re trying to market. Whether you’re trying to market cigarettes and iPhones, or trying to market the service lines for metal organic chemical vapor deposition tools, it’s the same.

Toby Wall:
But with that last one, how do you reach the people interested in it’s MOCVD is the abbreviation there. How do you reach them? And it’s not by telling them that they’re going to look cool in front of their friends. You got to tell them about, like we said, the things that they care about. Well, they care about double containment and passivation, and electro polishing, and orbital weld quality inspection. Those are all cares, those are all things that they’re interested in. Those address challenges that they face. Consumers care about looking cool in front of their friends.

Toby Wall:
So it’s the same principle from a marketing perspective. It’s just the knowledge comes from different places. Those are things that I mentioned that audience cares about. Well, why do they care? Because if they don’t do it right, you put air inside a siling line, it explodes. So it’s different orders of caring, but we approach that caring.

Toby Wall:
So I need to know those kinds of things. And unless I go study systems engineering, I’m not going to know it. So I need those experts to be involved. I need to have not free total access to them, but I need to know that they’re available to answer these questions and help me make heads or tails of some of topic that our marketing strategy indicated we need to talk about to get this audience of theirs engaged. So I’ll stop there. Hopefully that answers the first part of that.

Joe Sullivan:
I think it’s such a simple thing. It’s what the title of your article says, I Need What’s in Your Brain. You’re not the expert, they are. Your job is to harness it and figure out how to pull that insight out, right?

Toby Wall:
Yeah. And so, you asked about ownership too, and I agree. I think it’s essential that the marketing, whether it’s internal or outsourced owns that task, drives it. But in some ways it’s a two way street still. And I’ll give you an example of that because we had one fall into our laps this time last week, or maybe last Tuesday.

Toby Wall:
We’ve got a client who makes big ovens, industrial ovens. You put, you name it, can go through these. The carpeting that goes into the bottom of your car, you can do, or these ovens that make the foam that ends up being your yoga mat at home. And there was evidently some meeting they had internal with a prospect, we were not involved. And this prospect was discussing a oven design that they were interested in pursuing. And our client during that conversation was proposing alternatives to that, saying “What you’re proposing, in our experience doesn’t work, let’s do it a different way.”

Toby Wall:
And where we got involved in this, and it’s not like we helped in any way, they just clued us into this conversation. But the man who was talking about these alternative design features, let’s call him, decided he could explain himself better in writing in a followup email to his prospect.

Toby Wall:
Well, they forwarded that email to us too. And this was a 1300 word dissertation on why dew point is a better measurement inside an oven chamber compared to relative humidity, or why do you want to orient mass air flow in certain directions, or how do you position the sensors inside your oven to determine airflow, velocity, and humidity, and dew point, and all of these things?

Toby Wall:
So we wouldn’t have known that. That’s awesome. That’s an awesome narrative we got, but we would never have come up with that idea ourselves to talk about. And we proposed a content piece based on this guy’s dissertation about dew point. No matter how much ownership we have over the process and over the adventure of content ideation, there’s just some things that a marketer is not going to get, or isn’t going to think about, or ways that they don’t think that a subject matter expert thinks every day.

Toby Wall:
And this was an example where they said, “Hey, I think Gorilla might… See if they can turn this into something.” His comment was try not to fall asleep reading this, but if you manage to stay awake, see if you can do something with it. And then I told our strategist, “I think this is golden, absolutely golden.”

Toby Wall:
So yes, ownership is important. And if you have a good marketing partner, you’ll see what that ownership looks like and those partners will make it easy for you. But that doesn’t mean, don’t take an active role in it because there’s all kinds of great material that we’ve gotten from clients that came from them, that they started it, that they showed us, and we wouldn’t have known to even ask. [crosstalk 00:15:44].

Joe Sullivan:
I’m afraid it’s tangible example, and it’s straight from the customer. And there’s a quote I’m going to butcher it here, but it’s from Marcus Sheridan’s book, They Ask You Answer, which is arguably my favorite marketing book out there. And it just goes something like this, “Every time I get off a sales call, I think, what questions did I answer on that call, and have I answered that question in the form of content on my website yet?”

Joe Sullivan:
And the example you gave from that particular manufacturer is a perfect example of that. They had this question, they had written a 1300 word email, they’ve probably written a similar email five other times on the same topic to a similar type of customer. What if you just had that out there? What if you had written that already, it was published on your website, it’s optimized in the search engines, every time you get that question, as opposed to starting from scratch and re-inventing the wheel and typing an email, it probably takes you an hour to write. By the time you’re done editing it, you say, “Hey, you know what? We covered this topic actually in an article we published last year, and I’m going to send that to you after we get off the call,” or just reply to the email with that.

Joe Sullivan:
And what it shows is, well, first of all, the work’s done. You did the work already. You might add a few notes onto it to apply it to that particular situation. But it also shows if you think about what impact that has on the recipient’s end, it’s oh, geez, these guys have thought about this before, and they’ve thought about it enough that they actually wrote a 1500 word article that breaks it down. These guys are experts, they know what they’re talking about and what a great confidence builder, right?

Toby Wall:
Mm-hmm (affirmative). This isn’t a dig at Marcus answering questions about swimming pools. The challenge there is how do you find a way to apply the specific? [Stailman 00:17:48] was talking about this alternative design to X, Y, Z type of thermal process. How do you make that readable, and digestible, and relevant to an audience greater than one? But it can be done. I think that’s partly why we were involved, why they hired us, and why they sent it to us because they know something’s there, they just got to get on the right way to wrap it up.

Joe Sullivan:
My take on that is it’s all about pattern matching. If enough people have asked this question, and if 80% of the response to that question can be covered in a piece of content, you publish it because it’s enough to demonstrate to somebody that you get this topic. And your piece of content is not meant to play the whole role of salesperson, not at all. The human-to-human conversation is where that happens.

Joe Sullivan:
It needs to be enough to peak their interest, to demonstrate that, oh, you’ve thought about this kind of thing before, you’d be the one to answer my questions about it. And now you can have a much more qualified conversation with somebody around that topic. I think if you can accomplish that with a piece of content, it’s done its job.

Toby Wall:
I didn’t even estimate that you don’t have to answer 80% of their questions. You could answer one of their questions and the rest of it is irrelevant. But if it’s good and if it shows… And I wish we had another half hour, I’d just read this email that he sent. And you would see, you wouldn’t even have to be interested in dew point at all. And you would know you’d qualify these guys right away because they know their stuff.

Joe Sullivan:
Absolutely. It’s super powerful. We’re going to take a 30 second breather here for a word from our sponsor, CADENAS PARTsolutions. Let’s talk real quick about getting specified. Are you a component manufacturer? Maybe you sell architectural products to parks or large facilities. Engineers and architects need models of your products to test fit in their designs. That’s where CADENAS comes in. They help you create a dynamic shareable CAD catalog you put on your website, designers can preview the product from any angle and download it in the format they prefer. They get the data they need for their design, and you get a fresh lead to add to your marketing pipeline. To get one of your products turned into an online 3D model for free, use the code executive@partsolutions.com/executive.

Joe Sullivan:
I want to just jump over to another great article you wrote this time back in 2019, and we’re going to get a little more tactical here now, but this one was titled, How To Extract Expert Knowledge From Your Team And Turn it Into Incredible Content. This is a little more of a how to, and I’d love for you to be able to share some actionable advice with listeners about how they can approach this sometimes really intimidating topic of content creation.

Joe Sullivan:
And keep in mind here, as you answer this question that a lot of our clients have the luxury of working with you or one of our super-talented writers, but a lot of times manufacturers, they need to be able to create this stuff internally. And maybe it’s a marketing person internally, maybe they don’t even have a marketing person on staff, but how can they go about, first of all, generating ideas for content that would actually resonate with their audience?

Toby Wall:
So the first step that I noted in that piece is that you need a framework around the entire thing just from the beginning. You need to have strategy of some kind, because recognizing that you would benefit from a library of content and then deciding, “Okay, I’m going to do some content,” you leave a whole lot on the table that you could maximize if you thought about it a little more.

Toby Wall:
So you got to have a framework that can get you to something you’ve identified, some goal. We don’t need to talk about how do you do a strategy, I would say, subscribe to this podcast and you’ll probably figure out how to do a strategy. But once you’ve got that, in my opinion, I think you got to get buy-in next.

Toby Wall:
You can’t do this alone, or if maybe you’re a part of a internal team or an external team, but regardless, you need buy-in from subject matter experts or anyone, decision makers on your clients and/or on the organization’s end. They need to know what you’re doing, ideally, they agree with what you’re doing and will help you. So that’s how you build sources.

Toby Wall:
It’s going to take time to do this program if you’re going to do it the right way. So you need people who would be able to stand behind you and agree that what you’re doing is worthwhile and agree to help you if you need their help. So get buy-in, definitely get buy-in.

Toby Wall:
Now, in terms of actually generating ideas, the first thing on my list is, you’ve mentioned already, do what Marcus Sheridan does and just record every question he sees or answers and try to answer it. And whether you answer it or find someone else who can, log that down.

Toby Wall:
Another way you can do it is just brainstorming here. Have a conversation with a really loyal customer or even somebody in your industry who’s not a customer, but someone that you can talk to and just get the lay of the land.

Toby Wall:
Another one could be, find out where your audience hangs out online, find groups, join groups. And back in my reporting days, that’s what we would do. If there was something you wanted to find out, there was a certain group of people might’ve had your answers, join their group and just say, “Hey, I’m here. I’m who I am. This is why I’m here, anyone want to help?” 21st century version of following the cops to the bar after their shift ends and building sources that way.

Toby Wall:
Another thing you might try is, might seem silly, but select a couple of people in your organization and buy them pizza twice a year, and say, “Sit with me for an hour, have some free pizza, answer my questions.” You’d be surprised at what you can learn just by getting someone in a room. And we’ve done this before with one of our clients. We bribed their entire sales team with a free lunch and we learned so much more about how that business works. And it had to have come from those sales team members, because that was a missing link that we needed.

Toby Wall:
So if I was going to wrap a bow around this, how do you generate content ideas, is try to be aware of all of the people who would be sharing those ideas and then make inroads with them.

Joe Sullivan:
Those are all really great ideas. So many different ways to get to it. The insights are there. The ideas, they’re right there, they’re at your fingertips, you just have to put yourself out there and talk to the right people, they’re going to come up.

Toby Wall:
And people like to talk about what they do. Like I said, the combination of free pizza and “Hey, tell me about your job,” you will get people talking. And once they’re comfortable because they don’t always start out being comfortable, and they’re like, “Why the hell are you asking me this stuff?” But once they’re comfortable, they’ll go on, and on, and on. And that’s pay dirt, it’s just as good as any RFP or any lawsuit that I find online.

Joe Sullivan:
Well, we’ve talked here about why content matters, we’ve talked about why you need to get into the brains of the experts, we’ve talked about how to generate ideas. The last thing I really want to cover here is, can you open up your process a little bit? Once somebody has gotten that far, what does the creation process actually look like? And you’re a writer, there’s video content, there’s audio content, there’s a lot of ways to do content and it’s not that one is better than the next, but from your perspective as a writer, how can you start making some of this stuff, turning it into something tangible?

Toby Wall:
How do you make it? You got to read. Because what you create has to come from a position of authority, and that’s true, whatever you’re marketing. But if you’re going to market an industrial B2B, like I said before, you’ve got those MOCVD service lines. You need to come from a position of authority. And let me tell you, the people who you are trying to reach are authorities.

Toby Wall:
So research is absolutely paramount here. You need to understand the context of a topic, you need to know what the vocabulary words were, you need to know what all the vocab words that make up a vocab word mean. You need to know if you’re talking about a process, well, what comes before the process? What comes after the process? What does this process make? Why does it make it this way?

Toby Wall:
Go watch YouTube videos, see how something is done. Google image search something, what does this look like? What are the dissenting opinions? What are the commonly held opinions of a thing? The way I characterize it is researching around the topic. You need to know more than what you’re going to say. A lot of this stuff never sees the light of day, but you need to do your research and you will thank yourself for it later. And your audience will probably thank you for it too. And I need to get on a soap box about research because in grade school they were telling us, “Don’t use Wikipedia, Wikipedia is bad.”

Joe Sullivan:
You actually had Wikipedia in grade school, unlike me, I had Encyclopedia Britannica books and stuff.

Toby Wall:
Maybe aside from Encyclopedia Britannica, I can’t think of an online resource that gives more editorial scrutiny over its content than Wikipedia, maybe with the exception of an encyclopedia like Britannica or like The New York Times or something. And they cite their sources too. Opinion time here, anyone who thinks Wikipedia is bad, I disagree, it is very good and can lead you to other really great places.

Toby Wall:
Now, what comes next? Because it is a process and you can download this, we’ve got this on our website, but one of the first things you need to do is devote the proper time to this. If you need to block off half a day, or block off a day, or block off a week, doing this the right way, in my opinion is not something you can hurry through, give it its time.

Toby Wall:
I think you should then, as you consider the idea that you’re about to create content around, how does that align with the strategy we talked about making? Is it going to work? If it does, okay, go ahead. If it doesn’t, maybe rethink it.

Toby Wall:
Obviously, interviewing could be a big part of the content if you need to talk to an expert. And so you’re going to need questions to ask this person. Sit down and make your list of questions. A word to the wise, do not try to edit this question list right now, just every question that comes to mind, put it down.

Toby Wall:
I have noticed, as you write these questions, the need for more research is going to come up. So it’s not like you do 40 minutes of reading and then your reading is done and you move on to whatever is next. You’ll need to read some more, probably. Do more.

Toby Wall:
Try to answer the questions that you’ve posed. If you can answer a question for yourself that you don’t need to ask, great, you’ve saved your subject some time, or what happens more often in my case anyway, is when I try to answer my own question, I find a different way to ask the question or a more detailed way to ask it, or a more relevant way within the context of the audience we’re trying to reach, a way to ask that question.

Toby Wall:
So it’s like a feedback loop, interview, questions, research, interview, questions, research. Just keep going. Then at the end of the process, go ahead and give it a look, edit your questions, see if something doesn’t make sense, see if you’re being repetitive. A very important part of “editing a question list” is sharing those with the subject matter.

Toby Wall:
Let this person see it. They know about this stuff more than you do, they are the experts. Not only are they going to know if you’re on the right track or not, but they can put you on the right track. “Hey, I noticed this question you’re asking about X, Y, Z. We’ll actually, L, M, N, O, P is the more relevant direction to go down, ask it this way because that’s relevant.” And then it unfolds from there. They can set you on the right track, or they can tell you, “You’re totally wrong. Here’s some more reading to do, go do some more reading.”

Toby Wall:
And I don’t know whether this needs to be said or not, but I’ve had someone ask in a presentation, and you might remember this, Joe, we did this presentation together. But ask whether it’s okay to send interview questions in advance of a call. In marketing, yeah, absolutely. If you’re in a newsroom, no, never do that.

Toby Wall:
But in this case, not only is it okay, I think it should be the norm, is to get those in front of your subject matter expert in advance of the call. Well, what about when you’re doing the interview? Maybe this is the part that makes people nervous. It makes me nervous and I do it every day. Here’s some interview tips that will… It’s not going to guarantee you’re going to get everything you need, but it’ll put you in position for it.

Toby Wall:
If you’re not getting what you need, just ask the question again, or rephrase the question, put it in a different way, push gently, but push your interviewee. These people, like I said a moment ago, they might be uncomfortable, they might not have ever done this before. They might be reluctant. They might think they don’t want to say something too complex.

Toby Wall:
So part of our job as interviewers is to put them at ease and say it the way you need to say it and I will stop you if this is too complicated, or if I need you to explain it, I’ll tell you that you need to explain it. But we don’t want them to censor themselves.

Toby Wall:
Another thing I’ve found useful is to be upfront with these folks about what I don’t know. I think it’s tempting for an interviewer to censor themselves. They’re afraid to look stupid in front of someone who’s smarter than them. Well, in this world, if I’m talking about me, everybody is smarter than me. I don’t know a lot of stuff. It’s my job not to know, but to find out. So don’t censor yourself, ask rookie questions if you have to ask rookie questions, but get the information that you need.

Toby Wall:
One tactic I find that helps there is to post theoreticals or make assumptions with your interview subject, even if you think or you know that you might be way off on that. If you want someone to explain a topic in a way that matters or in a way that makes sense to your audience, it’s almost like roleplay. Say I am someone in your audience and this is a problem I’m having, or this is a process I might need to implement and just start throwing variables out there. “What would happen if I did this? What would happen if I did that?”

Toby Wall:
It’s almost like exploratory surgery, if you will, but assumptions, even wrong ones are going to end up solidifying your understanding of a topic, which is besides the point. The point is it’ll make you able to translate that topic in a way that if you only got just the textbook definition of a thing, wouldn’t have been as good at doing.

Toby Wall:
Another consideration is to not treat your interview document like a stone tablet. If you need to go off script, chase something down, you should go for it. We talk about this all the time, the other writers and I, is if we had a dollar for every time we had to do that and skip questions or depart from the question list or just delete the entire document altogether, we could retire.

Toby Wall:
It happens, and I think interviewers shouldn’t feel chained, even though the prep work is important, don’t feel chained to it because the conversation is going to go where it’s going to go. Don’t limit yourself to just the questions you were asking. And what do you do after that? Well, as Grace, my colleague would say is you write the dang thing. I don’t really want to get into, how do you write a blog post, but an important aspect of your relationship with a subject matter expert here is make sure that they can see it. Let them review it.

Toby Wall:
And I can’t think of a client we’ve had where we did not have a subject matter expert available to do these edits. And tell it to us blunt, track changes, “No, you’re wrong, here’s what’s right.” It’s almost like, why do we talk to salespeople? Because they speak the language, right? These people are going to know not only factually what needs to be in a piece or where you’ve aired and where to put you back on track, but then they can say it the way that it needs to be said in that industry.

Toby Wall:
All through junior high, they were telling us jargon is bad. Well, once you graduate and join a B2B industrial marketing agency, jargon is good. And you’re going to need those people to tell you what that is. And there’s all kinds of other ways you can branch off of that in terms of getting feedback from somebody.

Toby Wall:
And I would encourage folks to read, Grace wrote a piece fairly recently about how to give that feedback to a writing partner. But if this conversation is a little galaxy, that’s part of the wider universe that I think almost is a natural extension of the rest of this process.

Joe Sullivan:
That’s great. Well, Toby, you covered a ton here. So many valuable insights. Any parting words before we wrap this up?

Toby Wall:
Don’t guess. I had to etch it onto my tombstone, Toby’s number one rule of industrial B2B copywriting is don’t guess. Make friends with your engineers, bribe them with pizza.

Joe Sullivan:
Love it, love it. There’s the quote of the episode right there. Make friends with your engineers and bribe them with pizza. Well, Toby, you and I, among many others at Gorilla have had countless conversations and debates about these topics we’ve covered today. And I love that we got to do it publicly this time, because I think your experiences over the last four years or so in the industrial sector have revealed a lot about what works, and what doesn’t, and how to do content effectively. So thanks a ton for doing this with me today.

Toby Wall:
Glad to do it. Thank you.

Joe Sullivan:
Can you tell our listeners how they can connect with you if they want to learn more?

Toby Wall:
Sure. I’m never on LinkedIn.

Joe Sullivan:
That’s fair.

Toby Wall:
So I might reply like four weeks after you’ve messaged me. But really, if you want to email me, it’s real easy. It’s toby@gorilla76.com. That’s T-O-B-Y@gorilla76.com. And I will answer that. I’ll probably answer in 30 seconds-

Joe Sullivan:
Awesome.

Toby Wall:
… [Crosstalk 00:38:36] email.

Joe Sullivan:
Perfect. Well, that’s simple enough. Well, before we wrap it up, I want to say a big thank you to our sponsor, CADENAS PARTsolutions for helping make this show possible. Well, again, thanks for joining Toby. And for the rest of you, I hope to catch you on the next episode of The Manufacturing Executive.

Joe Sullivan:
You’ve been listening to The Manufacturing Executive Podcast. To ensure that you never miss an episode, subscribe to the show in your favorite podcast player. If you’d like to learn more about industrial marketing and sales strategy, you’ll find an ever expanding collection of articles, videos, guides, and tools specifically for B2B manufacturers at gorilla76.com/learn. Thank you so much for listening, until next time.

6 tips to prevent Google Ads disasters

coins slipping out of a pocket

Google Ads makes a great promise: Getting in front of the people who are ready to buy the very thing you sell.

It seems simple…

  1. Your ad shows up on Google
  2. People see it and buy from you
  3. Boom, you’re raking in the money

No need to go through the painfully slow process of SEO, right?

The problem is that many companies make basic mistakes that will turn Google Ads’ promise into a disaster. These mistakes will make you want to write off search engine marketing as a giant waste of money.

Or, even worse, whoever is running the ads for you may have convinced you that all the “awareness” you’re now getting is worth continuing the disaster.

But here’s the truth: Google Ads is a direct response tool that needs to be measured in bottom-line results.

If you’re not seeing these results, you’re not alone. Everything you’ll read below are things I learned the hard way (read: I screwed up each one of them more than once).

They’re not a play-by-play tutorial on Google Ads. YouTube alone has tons of free resources there.

Instead, consider them your ground rules for Google Ads campaigns that, if followed, will prevent you throwing money out the window.

1. Do the math

Google Ads works on a cost-per-click model. That means every time someone clicks on your ad, you pay $2-$10 (in competitive industries this can be north of $30). The majority of people that click on your ad won’t end up buying, which means you need a lot of clicks to generate a new customer.

This rules out Google Ads as a customer acquisition channel for low-cost products. In that case, your time and money will be spent more wisely elsewhere.

Check out this Google sheet to put together your own ROI calculation. This should give you a rough understanding of whether or not Google Ads is a fit for you.

2. Target high-intent keywords

The first thing you’ll do for a Google Ads campaign is pick keywords.

When I ran my first campaign, I included every possible keyword a buyer might search. After all, I didn’t want to miss out on any of them.

But rather than bidding on all keywords, I should’ve focused on the 10% with very high purchase intent. Because I didn’t, most of my money was getting sucked up by high-volume keywords that were informational in nature. The people searching these keywords weren’t looking to buy. This set my campaign up to fail from the very beginning.

Here are some examples of low intent (educational) and high intent searches for Gorilla:

Low intent:

  • What is industrial marketing
  • B2B marketing ideas
  • Manufacturer marketing

High intent:

  • Industrial marketing agency
  • Lead generation for manufacturers
  • Manufacturing marketing agency
  • Industrial marketing company

You’ll notice that the difference between low and high intent might just be one word (e.g. “agency”). But it can make all the difference between someone who’s ready to buy and someone who’s just gathering information.

Important: After you’ve picked your keywords, make sure to read up on match types (broad match, phrase match, exact match). If you’re new to Google Ads, stick with exact match targeting to play it safe. Over time, try out modified broad match targeting.

3. Write ad copy for your ideal buyer

You did the math. You picked your keywords. The next big puzzle piece are the actual ads Google will show to someone searching for your keywords.

I used to think the only goal of Google Ads copy is to convert as many people as possible. But the way you write your ads has a second goal: Deterring unqualified people from ever clicking on them.

When you write with your ideal buyer in mind, your ads will not only stand out in a sea of sameness, but also prevent ad dollars wasted on the people that don’t need or can’t afford your solution.

Here are three tips for doing this

  • Mention a job title or industry: “Made for Project Engineers” or “Designed for Oil & Gas”
  • State a very specific problems your solution solves
  • List a minimum order value

Take this piece of advice with a grain of salt. Google rewards “clickable” ads with lower costs and better placements. So for some keywords, you may need to strike a balance of targeted copy and relevance to all searchers.

4. Don’t Google “landing page examples”

Your landing page is where people will go after clicking your ad. This is where you explain who your solution is for, what problems it solves and how it’s different from your competitors’.

There’s no magic formula for a high-performing landing page. So don’t Google “landing page examples” hoping to find it.

Instead, talk to your sales team and speak with people who you’d consider ideal buyers. Ask them who your solution is for (and who it’s NOT for), what problems it helped them solve and why they chose you over other alternatives. Use their answers to structure and write your landing page.

You should also consider including

  • Social proof (case studies, testimonials, reviews on Google, etc.)
  • Guarantees (money-back, warranty, etc.)
  • Spec sheets
  • Pricing
  • A step-by-step description of what happens after submitting the RFQ form
  • FAQs

The job of your landing page is to sell the buyer on the benefits of your solution (not the features), answer the questions your sales team hears often, and eliminate any doubt that your solution is the right choice.

Don’t start with A/B testing and expensive landing page builders. Instead, just talk to the people you’re trying to sell to. Also, read our 5 copywriting tips for manufacturers.

5. Track conversions the right way

This topic is a little more technical and dry. So let me cut right to the chase and list three important points you should be thinking about when it comes to conversion tracking.

  • Plain and simple, you need to set up conversion tracking in Google Ads. It will allow you to optimize your campaign and minimize your customer acquisition cost.
  • Ebook downloads and newsletter subscriptions are not conversions. If you track them as such, you will optimize your campaign for the wrong outcome. Instead, track conversions that are likely to become an opportunity (e.g. submissions on your contact or RFQ forms).
  • If you can, look beyond the conversion. Look at the leads that turned into buyers and what they’re spending with you. Which keywords did they search for? Are there keywords that are disproportionately attracting bigger, better deals? Ones that are attracting the wrong job titles and lead nowhere? Marketing software like HubSpot will allow you to do this.

6. Optimize

If you’ve got tips 1-5 down and your campaign is off to a good start, there’s only one thing left to do: optimization.

During optimization, you’re looking for waste and opportunities. From refining your keyword targeting to excluding specific devices, there’s a lot to cover here. Other people have already described optimization routines better than I ever could, so check out this article.

Google Ads can feel intimidating. When I first started working on campaigns, it was like staring at the dashboard of a 747. So many buttons, graphs and numbers. I had no idea what to look for.

But if you follow these six pieces of advice, you should be off to a good start. For a deeper dive, I recommend taking this course on Google Ads, which is concise but covers a lot of important ground. For more entry-level instructions on how to set up your first campaign, I recommend turning to YouTube.

And if you have any questions or comments, don’t hesitate to send me an email.

I’d love to hear from you!

PODCAST: Be Careful With the Internet: How B2B Inbound Marketing Exploded w/ Brian Signorelli

The Manufacturing Executive Podcast Brian Signorelli

The Manufacturing Executive: Episode 11

Listen to this episode here or on Apple PodcastsSpotifyStitcher or Google Podcasts.

powered by Sounder

Episode show notes

It’s 2010. Apple has just released a new product called the iPad. The Lakers just won their fifth championship under Phil Jackson. And the BP oil spill was all over the news. In the marketing world, a trending movement started to take hold. It was called inbound marketing.

Today, inbound marketing has exploded, and B2B businesses are taking the next logical step to inbound selling. Brian Signorelli, senior director of sales at Hubspot and author of the book Inbound Selling, joined this episode of the podcast to discuss the history and future of inbound. 

Brian and I talk about:

  • Why inbound marketing’s popularity spread so far
  • Great resources to learn more about what inbound is and why it works
  • Extending inbound marketing principles into the sales side of an organization

Resources we talked about:

To ensure that you never miss an episode of The Manufacturing Show, subscribe on Apple PodcastsSpotifyStitcher or Google Podcasts.

Transcript of episode

Joe Sullivan:
Welcome to another episode of the Manufacturing Executive Podcast. This show is being brought to you by our sponsor, CADENAS PARTsolutions. I’m Joe Sullivan, your host, and a cofounder of the industrial marketing agency, Gorilla 76.

Joe Sullivan:
So let’s transport ourselves back in time about 10 years. It’s 2010, Apple had just released a new product called the iPad. The Lakers had just won their fifth championship under Phil Jackson. The BP oil spill was all over the news. And in the marketing world, there was a trending movement starting to take hold called inbound marketing.

Joe Sullivan:
The term inbound marketing is common speak now, and it has been for a while. But I’d be willing to bet that most of you in the manufacturing sector listening to this, would have probably stared at me with glazed-over eyes if I asked you to tell me what inbound marketing is 10 years ago.

Joe Sullivan:
Today, my guest is someone who has witnessed firsthand, and also contributed to, in a lot of ways, the explosion of inbound marketing in the B2B world over the last decade. Brian Signorelli is the senior director of partner acquisition at HubSpot, where his teams work with marketing, sales, CRM consulting, and other professional service companies to help them grow their own businesses and their client’s businesses faster.

Joe Sullivan:
He regularly writes, develops, and presents inbound sales content for HubSpot’s Solution Partners and their customers. He’s been with HubSpot since 2012, and has seen the company grow from 5,000 customers, through its 2014 IPO, to over 80,000 today. Prior to that, Brian worked as an analyst for a management consulting firm, as well as a small startup in the Boston area. He resides in Boston, Massachusetts with his wife, Leah and their dog, Dixie.

Joe Sullivan:
Brian, it’s been a while since you and I have talked, and I’ve been looking forward to this conversation ever since you made my day a few weeks ago by agreeing to come on the show. So welcome.

Brian Signorelli:
Thank you. Thank you, Joe. Yeah, it’s crazy that we first talked, I mean, what about eight years ago now? And it’s great to stay in touch with you over the years and see your business do well. And it was great to get an invite from you to jump on the podcast. So I’m to happy to be on with you today.

Joe Sullivan:
So I guess before we get into this topic of inbound, can you kind of briefly tell our listeners just a little bit more about you and your journey to this point? And also for anybody listening who doesn’t really know much about HubSpot, which is probably a small percentage of people at this point given the brand’s name at this point. But give us a little bit about you and an overview of what HubSpot is, and what the software does.

Brian Signorelli:
Yeah, absolutely. I’m happy to. So, I think you know this, but before I came to HubSpot, I was actually a HubSpot customer. I was working with a buddy of mine, and his dad, and a few other people, and we were trying to get this little startup called Gifts On Time going. I was hired to basically be the head of sales/marketing/other stuff. I mean, you know how it goes with a small business. Kind of did everything.

Brian Signorelli:
When I started working with them, the product was just about to come to market, and I go, “Okay, great. We need to start generating awareness, and generate leads, and website traffic, and get signups, and get some revenue here. Because we’ve invested a lot and we want to get this business going.” And I said, “Yeah, marketing, lead gen, seems easy enough. Sure I’ll do that.”

Brian Signorelli:
It’s really hard, obviously, for anyone who has worked in the marketing profession or in sales, it’s really, really hard. And so we spent… I mean, I’m not kidding. We literally spent hundreds of thousands of dollars on website design. We hired an SEO specialist. We hired a pay-per-click specialist. We did trade shows. We did advertisements in local newspapers. We did advertisements in national rags and all that type of stuff.

Brian Signorelli:
It felt like we tried literally every known outbound marketing to… I didn’t know it was called outbound them, but I just was like, “This is what marketing is.” We tried every one of the tactics we thought marketing was, and we just got crickets. This was 2009… Or 2010, actually. This was 2010. So, good intro.

Brian Signorelli:
And we’re just like, “This is crazy. How are we putting so much money and effort into all these marketing efforts and literally getting nothing for it?” So, frankly, we were down to our last 10 or $15,000 of budget that we had for marketing. And we had a choice between hiring another marketing agency versus using HubSpot on our own.

Brian Signorelli:
And at the time, we had decided to use HubSpot. That’s not to say that using an agency would have been a bad idea, but they were basically only managing our social media profile, they were doing the trade show stuff, helping us design booths. It was stuff that we were basically already doing, and it wasn’t fundamentally different.

Brian Signorelli:
So anyway, we started using HubSpot on our own. I think within the first week of getting it up and running, writing our first blog post, our first call to action, our first landing page, we generated something like 40 leads right away. And I was like, “Oh my gosh, this is amazing. This works so well.”

Brian Signorelli:
Ultimately, six months in, we didn’t stick to it because it’s hard. It’s hard to write a lot of blog posts that are actually good and worth reading. It is really hard to develop premium content like ebooks, white papers. Diagnostic tools. Things that people are willing to give a little bit of contact information for.

Brian Signorelli:
And so I’d certainly… Anyone who hasn’t adopted the concept of inbound marketing, I would highly encourage you to consider working with an agency. Unless you really feel like you’ve got a lot of time, a full staff that has mastered this, knows what they’re doing, is ready to go, and you’d prefer to keep everybody in-house.

Brian Signorelli:
Anyway, fast-forward to today, I’ve been at HubSpot for eight years. I’ve been on the sales team for the entire time. I’ve worked with basically our marketing agency partners, our sales partners, our integration partners. I’ve held various roles as an individual contributor. Different management roles.

Brian Signorelli:
And yeah, it’s been really cool to see HubSpot’s growth and journey over those past… Almost past decade now. Happy to elaborate further, but that’s probably more than you were betting on there.

Joe Sullivan:
No, that’s great. So, I mean, you’ve seen some serious changes to the marketing landscape, not only inside your company at HubSpot, but in general across the marketing landscape in the last eight or nine years or so.

Joe Sullivan:
As I suggested earlier, inbound marketing wasn’t really even common language for most businesses back in the early 2010s. What do you think drove this explosion, in terms of the acceptance of inbound marketing, and the spread of its popularity.

Brian Signorelli:
Yeah. I mean, my take on this is that it just takes time for people to change and to get with the program. And so if you think about… Don’t worry, I’m not going to take you through a play-by-play of the last 20 years. But if you think about the last 20 years, the internet only kind of became widely available like in the late 90s, early 2000s.

Brian Signorelli:
And people were highly suspicious of it. I mean, I remember… Frankly, I was probably a teenager, a kid. I was really a teenager at that point. I remember wanting to buy something off of eBay. And my mom was like, “Be really careful with the internet. You don’t know who’s out there.”

Brian Signorelli:
It takes a long time for businesses to realize that, “Okay, what the internet represents, it’s not just I need a website to prove to people I exist in the world.” It’s, “Oh my gosh, this is actually a way that…”

Brian Signorelli:
It was really Google that fundamentally transformed the way that we find information. I mean, just think of the simple concept of, whenever you have any questions. It was like, “Oh, I don’t know about blah, blah, blah.” “Just Google it, just Google it, just Google it.”

Brian Signorelli:
Well, what that means for businesses is, if you are not coming up in the search results on the first page… When someone is asking questions that is relevant to your subject matter expertise, to your domain, to your products, to your services, if you’re not showing up, then you don’t exist.

Brian Signorelli:
So I think from 2000 to 2010, a lot of people were like, “Yeah, we need a website. We need some digital presence. I don’t really know exactly what we’re doing, but we need something.” Then I saw this kind of second wave of like, “Oh, we need content.” But do you remember, probably 2000… I don’t know, five, 2010. There was a lot more content online, but a lot of it was paid. So you had to pay $500, or $1,000, or $3,000 for content.

Brian Signorelli:
And then, it wasn’t HubSpot necessarily. I think that HubSpot was part of that. But I think people started realizing, “Oh my gosh, we can actually start generating a bunch of website traffic and leads if we give our content away for free, especially if it’s something of value to people.

Brian Signorelli:
And so, the evolution is like, if you think about sales and marketing in the context of the internet over the past 20 years. Before Google, all the control was, frankly, in the hands of sellers. If you’re a buyer, you needed to call a company to actually get access to information. And the seller could hide behind this kind of iron curtain of like, “Well, you need me to understand what it is that we do and what your options are, etc.”

Brian Signorelli:
Google flipped that equation. All the power is now… The internet, Google, however you want to refer to it. All the power shifted away from the seller and into the hands of the buyer. And so now, I think businesses have realized that, because buyers can do all this research on their own, they can basically get answers to almost any question they want on their own without ever talking to a sales rep.

Brian Signorelli:
I think that’s kind of what has driven this change, and driven this adoption of inbound marketing. If I want to exist, if I want anybody’s attention, if I want anybody’s interest, we need to actually be adding value in some way that lines up with the way people, frankly, consume information these days. Which is really through Google searches. That’s really all it is.

Joe Sullivan:
Yeah, I think you nailed it. I think that’s right on the money. And that shift in power from seller to buyer has just been so transformational.

Joe Sullivan:
I mean, the expectation is now that you’re going to be able to obtain this information, and if you’re not the one publishing it, your competitor is. And who’s going to have the visibility, who’s going to be the first to gain trust and attention? Well, whoever’s putting the insights out there, right?

Brian Signorelli:
Absolutely. Absolutely. Yeah, I mean, you have to, and we’ll get to this, but you have to be adding value in some way that your competitor isn’t, or that is going to help your buyers get to the point of being ready to make a purchase, or even consider a purchase, for that matter.

Brian Signorelli:
I mean, just think about the world we’re living in. It’s the age of convenience. Everything is available on demand. Why would I ever pick up the phone to call a business to learn about them, when I can accomplish all of that, on my own terms, in my own time, at any hour of the day that I want.

Brian Signorelli:
And so I’d much rather talk to the 24/7 sales rep, so to speak. Which should be your website, as long as it actually has like meaningful blog content, resources, pricing information. And if it’s not there, I’m going to find it on Quora, I’m going to find it on other review sites. I’m going to find it somehow.

Brian Signorelli:
But I’d much rather do that on my own time, and on my own terms, than talk to one of your sales reps, frankly. And that’s coming from someone who has been a sales rep.

Joe Sullivan:
Yup. Makes total sense. And I think that the pushback that I’ve heard from time to time is, “Well, you can’t replace a sales person, a real human conversation, with a website or with written content.” But I think people are missing the point when they make that argument.

Joe Sullivan:
If your buyer is already out there looking for information on their own, and the expectation is they’re going to be able to obtain it, you need to be the one providing it. That content’s not there to replace the human being, in a lot of cases. Especially in complex B2B buying processes.

Joe Sullivan:
But it’s going to be the first step. It’s the first step in the sale. The first interaction somebody has with you, is going to be your content and whatever you’re able to put out there online.

Joe Sullivan:
And not until you’ve earned enough of their attention and trust that maybe you understand their issue, you’ve seen it before. You could help them solve it. It’s not until they have that sense of confidence that they’re going to pick up the phone and call you, right?

Brian Signorelli:
Absolutely. Absolutely. They’re going to consume… I can’t remember the most recent stat from the Content Marketing Institute, but it’s something like, the average buyer’s going to consume seven to 15 different pieces of content before they ever even engage with your sales rep.

Brian Signorelli:
So if you aren’t making a really strong first impression, and giving your prospective would-be buyers access to information that they are looking for before they are even ready to talk to one of your sales reps, then your sales reps will never even have the at bats. They’ll never even have the chance to have that conversation.

Brian Signorelli:
And that’s the whole point. It’s like, look, we’re not trying to replace sales reps. It’s just, if you want to give your sales reps as many at bats as possible, you will do inbound/content marketing. That is how people are generating leads these days.

Joe Sullivan:
Yup. Right on. We’re going to take a 30 second breather here for a word from our sponsor, CADENAS PARTsolutions.

Joe Sullivan:
Let’s talk real quick about getting specified. Are you a component manufacturer? Maybe you sell architectural products to parks or large facilities. Engineers and architects need models of your products to test fit in their designs.

Joe Sullivan:
That’s where CADENAS comes in. They help you create a dynamic, shareable, CAD catalog you put on your website. Designers can preview the product from any angle, and download it in the format they prefer. They get the data they need for their design, and you get a fresh lead to add to your marketing pipeline.

Joe Sullivan:
To get one of your products turned into an online 3D model for free, use the code executive at partsolutions.com/executive.

Joe Sullivan:
Well, let’s talk more about content for a minute, while we’re sort of on that topic. So, I’ve been consulting manufacturers specifically, now for about a decade.

Joe Sullivan:
Manufacturers love talking about their products. They love talking about themselves, and what they do, and how great their customer service is. And I always say that there’s absolutely a place for that, but nobody wants that information until they are in the process of actually vetting you. They need to first believe that you understand their issues and goals. It’s really those things that I believe your content needs to address.

Joe Sullivan:
So, can you talk a little bit from your perspective, Brian, about what role you think content should play. And especially during those early stages of an often long and complex buyer’s journey?

Brian Signorelli:
Absolutely. So are you familiar with… I mean, I read this book probably a year or two ago, that just… I have not been as excited about a book since I learned what inbound marketing was and I read Brian Halligan and Dharmesh Shah’s Inbound Marketing. Are you familiar with StoryBrand by any chance, by Don Miller?

Joe Sullivan:
Yes. Yes.

Brian Signorelli:
Okay. So this one just popped for me. I’m like, “Oh my gosh. He’s got it right.”

Brian Signorelli:
Okay, so here’s the thing. The premise of that book is basically, “Look, you need to clarify your message to your buyers.” And where most businesses get it wrong with content marketing, or just really marketing in general, is that they view themselves as the hero in the hero’s journey. And you need to flip that equation.

Brian Signorelli:
Briefly walk you through it. I’ve got the infographic pulled up, just so I remember this. Seven-ish stages of the hero’s journey. There is a character, the hero, who has a problem, who meets a guide. And that guide gives them a plan, part four. Then the guide calls them to action, step five. And that, step six, results in either realizing their hopes, their dreams, their goals, or ends in tragedy that they’re trying to avoid.

Brian Signorelli:
And what really just popped to me was that where most businesses get it wrong, is that they view themselves… And it’s reflected, frankly, like when you said these companies that want to talk about their products, and how great they are, and their services, and how awesome they are. That is a reflection of you thinking that you are the hero in the buyer’s journey.

Brian Signorelli:
You are not the hero in the buyer’s journey. Your customer is the hero in the buyer’s journey. And your content needs to take them through that journey. You are simply the guide.

Brian Signorelli:
So like your customers are Luke Skywalker. You are Yoda, as the business. Doing all your marketing. I think that’s the main thing that businesses miss.

Brian Signorelli:
Look, you need to basically paint this picture to help your customers understand that you understand what their fears are. You understand what their challenges are. You have a plan. You are calling them to action to execute on that plan. And if they execute on that plan, they will realize their hopes, their dreams, their business goals. Whatever those success outcomes they are looking for. That is the role that your business should be playing in that hero’s journey.

Brian Signorelli:
And it might sound crazy, but I’m telling you, take a page out of the Hollywood playbook for how movies are written, apply that to your own marketing. All my chips are in on that concept of how businesses should be thinking about marketing these days.

Joe Sullivan:
Yeah, I love StoryBrand. I stumbled across it through a few different sources probably six months ago as well, and read it, and immediately loved it. I think it’s a perfect analogy really.

Joe Sullivan:
And it’s such a logical thing, too, to think about, it’s about your customer, right? It’s such a cliche in business, but then people don’t practice it. So I love having an analogy that is about making the customer the hero. You’re there to guide them, you’re here to help them understand their problem, figure out different ways to get to the solution. And that’s the role of your content.

Joe Sullivan:
So, to make it a little more tangible, talk to me a little bit about content. What could content be for a business to business company? What role or what form could that take?

Joe Sullivan:
I love Marcus Sheridan’s stuff where he talks about problem-based content and comparison content, and review-based content. What do you see that works?

Brian Signorelli:
It’s super simple. I’ve been saying this for eight years, at least. 2010… Well, 2012 I started at HubSpot. And obviously I had the problem of saying, “Hey, I’ve noticed your website doesn’t have a blog.” And people basically laughing me out of the room, being like, “What the hell’s a blog? Why would I ever use one?” Well, who’s laughing now?

Brian Signorelli:
However, for people who would actually entertain it, they’re like, “Okay, all right, I’ll blog. I’ll take a bet on you. I will blog. I have a problem. What do I blog about? What content do I write about?” And I said, “This is going to sound overly simplistic, but I’m telling you, this is what works. You should write content that answers the questions that your prospects are asking.”

Brian Signorelli:
So, think about… The easiest way to generate your next 100 blog articles, is to sit down with your sales team, with your support team, your customer service team, and just say, “Hey, tell me the top two or three most common questions that you’re getting from our prospects, from our customers, whoever it is.” And I guarantee you that… All you do is you take what their questions are. You flip the question into a statement.

Brian Signorelli:
For example, someone for HubSpot might be saying, “I’m really struggling to generate more leads. How do I generate more leads?” The blog article itself, or an ebook or a white paper, whatever kind of premium piece of content, would be something like Five Proven Strategies to Generate More Leads to Your Website. It’s literally just taking the question, flipping it around, making it a statement.

Brian Signorelli:
And then the best part is, if you know what you’re talking about, and you should, because whatever questions they’re asking you, your company should be a subject matter expert in. And if you don’t have people who are good writers again, hire Joe and his team. You just literally answer the questions that people are asking. It’s a very simple equation. You don’t need to overthink this.

Brian Signorelli:
Of course, there’s a bunch of finer points of content architecture and making sure that your website is optimized to get found, and you’re promoting the content. There’s a lot more that goes to it. You can’t just write a blog article and be like, “Okay, I’m done. I can walk away.”

Brian Signorelli:
But in terms of getting the meat of it, it’s literally just answering the questions that people are asking. Because your hope is, when they are Googling some question that they have, you want to show up first, second, third, just not any later than 10th. But hopefully in the top 10 is when you’re going to show up.

Brian Signorelli:
And if your answers are showing up when they’re asking Google questions, then guess who’s going to get the attention? Your business, not your competitor.

Joe Sullivan:
Yup. Absolutely. Nailed it. And, let’s just say you’re a manufacturer. You’re a automation service provider, something like that. And you hear from your customers in struggling with downtime on the plant floor, or cost of labor, or whatever it is.

Joe Sullivan:
Now you address that, that way. Here are ways you can reduce downtime. There’s your blog post. Five Proven Ways to Reduce Downtime, or something like that. There’s a million ways to do it, but let those common questions that your sales team’s hearing over and over again, and those problems you’re trying to solve for your customers, form the foundation of your content.

Joe Sullivan:
And now when you start… People will find you. There will be context for a conversation with them when it gets to that point. I think it’s a perfect framework.

Brian Signorelli:
Yeah.

Joe Sullivan:
So simple, right?

Brian Signorelli:
Yup. It is very simple. Very simple.

Joe Sullivan:
So you published your book, Inbound Selling in 2018, where you sort of extend these principles of inbound marketing into the sales side of an organization.

Joe Sullivan:
Can you talk a little bit about, what’s the topic of the book? What does inbound selling mean as opposed to inbound marketing?

Brian Signorelli:
Yeah. I mean, inbound selling is really just, Okay, well, if inbound marketing is any form of marketing designed to develop someone’s trust and at least get them to feel comfortable exchanging a little bit of information, like even their first name, last name, email, inbound selling is literally the next step in that process.

Brian Signorelli:
So if you’re changing the way you’re doing marketing, and you’re starting to generate these inbound leads through your website… Where I’ve seen most businesses really fail is that they might be very successful generating a lot more website traffic, generating a lot more inbound leads. But then the sales team is like, “These leads are garbage. I can’t sell to these people.”

Brian Signorelli:
The reality is, sure, are some of the leads garbage? Yeah, they probably are. But I think the problem is that most salespeople, and this is not true everywhere, of course, but certainly over the past 10 years, salespeople have had to adopt the way they actually think about engaging leads. It’s not like the cold call, the pitch, like, “Hey, I know I caught you out of the blue, but do you have five minutes to talk?” That’s not what it’s about. That’s not how you approach an inbound lead.

Brian Signorelli:
So the idea of the book Inbound Selling, is really just a reflection… I mean, it’s literally the HubSpot sales playbook. It’s everything that I’ve learned at HubSpot over the past, well, I published it two years ago. So, the first five years at HubSpot.

Brian Signorelli:
Everything that is in that book is still true for how HubSpot sells today. And it really kind of guides businesses through rethinking the way that their sales team needs to engage buyers in the age of convenience, in the age of content marketing, to make sure you’re getting the most out of those investments.

Brian Signorelli:
And, it goes on too, and talks a little bit about cross functional alignment, about managing sales teams, developing people. I had a really kind of funky, but I thought interesting chapter from a sales futurist named Derek Wyszynski, the last chapter, kind of talking about this dystopian future of sales and where we could theoretically be heading in the next 20 or 30 years.

Brian Signorelli:
But yeah, that’s really it. It’s just sort of like, all right, look, marketing’s done its job. I mean, not everyone, but it feels like a lot of people, certainly today, have kind of… Most people have got with the program. They’re like, “Okay, good. Got it. Website should be more than just a brochure. It should be a lead generator. It should be an educator for my potential prospects.”

Brian Signorelli:
Inbound Selling is literally just that extension. It’s the next step of, “Okay, great. You’re doing all this work. You made a huge investment to actually get more website traffic and leads. Don’t screw it up. Make sure your sales team actually understands how to work these leads.”

Brian Signorelli:
Because, frankly, it’s a bit different than what they are used to, especially if they have been around the block a few times and have sold from say, I don’t know, the year 1990 through the year 2010. The way sales worked then, there are a lot of things that are still true today, certainly, but there are a lot of things that aren’t true that you have to do differently today. And that’s kind of what Inbound Selling gets at the heart of.

Joe Sullivan:
Well, it’s such an important topic, and I see this really time and time again. I see this disconnect between marketing and sales in the manufacturing companies that we consult.

Joe Sullivan:
What you said is exactly true. They’re used to maybe leads… A request-a-quote lead, or an RFQ form submission, is so different than somebody who is, say, downloading a white paper or subscribing to your newsletter. But a more traditional sales person is inclined to kind of just treat it the same way. “Oh, I have a new lead. I’m going to call them and try to sell them something.”

Brian Signorelli:
Yup.

Joe Sullivan:
Not going to work. Yeah, I think it’s a great topic. I think it’s a book everybody should check out, because I see this literally 90% of the time. There’s an adjustment to be made to selling this way when you start to really see that inbound funnel start working for you.

Joe Sullivan:
Well, Brian, last question I’ll ask you here. A lot’s changed in the last 10 years or so, as we’ve talked about. Where do you see things headed next with B2B marketing and sales?

Brian Signorelli:
Yeah, so three things I’ll touch on for that. And I’ve thought a lot about this for, I guess, the past decade. And try to pay attention to what businesses are doing, where things are going.

Brian Signorelli:
I think one thing that you’re going to see more and more of, I think you’re already starting to see more of, is now that everyone’s doing content marketing, how do you stand out? And I think that one of the things that you’ll see more and more businesses doing over the next two, three, five years, is creating a primary research. Doing original research studies on their own, and creating insights, and creating original information that no one can find anywhere else. That is one of the main keys, I think, to standing out today.

Brian Signorelli:
And, frankly, as a sales rep, one of the things I always tell my sales team is, “Look, if you cannot provide information to your prospect that they can find on their own, or that they’d be able to find on their own otherwise, then you by definition have no value.” If you’re writing blog content that is well known about topics that have been established, and there’s information, insight, that, frankly, you can get on 15 other websites, you’re not going to stand out.

Brian Signorelli:
So I think one thing you’ll see, and it’s hard, but I think there’ll be more original research done. And I think the companies that do that will really stand out.

Brian Signorelli:
The second thing, and this is… You might remember a guy by the name of Pete Caputa. He’s the CEO of Databox. He was the founder of the Agency Partner program at HubSpot. He clued me in to another marketing strategy that they’ve had phenomenal success with.

Brian Signorelli:
He said, “I think the place that a lot of marketers are getting it wrong today, is that they think they should be marketing to their audience.” And he’s like, “I think that’s wrong. They should actually be marketing with their audience.”

Brian Signorelli:
And so what he does is, he basically… Like we said, we have a bunch of these questions that prospects are asking. But instead of answering these questions himself at Databox, he actually sends these questions out to all of his newsletter subscribers, his customers, and says, “Hey, I’m writing a blog article. I’m looking for experts like you to contribute some of your thoughts to this. Would you be interested in writing a little snippet? We’ll feature you on our blog,” so on and so forth.

Brian Signorelli:
The really cool part about that is, you’re making your prospects and your customers kind of, I wouldn’t say famous, but giving them a little bit of street cred with their peers. You’re also offering to drive an inbound link back to their website, and often they will do the same for you, which helps you drive more and more marketing.

Brian Signorelli:
I think it’s in a really early stage, but I think Pete is onto something. And I can’t say that I’ve seen a ton of businesses adopt this yet. I know you see a lot of these like roundups, and insights from the top 10 influencers, and blah, blah, blah. I think marketers are getting closer to the right strategy, but I think you’re going to see more and more of that over time is, stop marketing to your audience, market with your audience. I think that’s an interesting paradigm shift.

Brian Signorelli:
And then the third thing that I would point to is, I think so many businesses are missing the mark with leveraging their customer base as a source of, frankly, new business.

Brian Signorelli:
If you think about how hard it is to win new accounts versus grow existing accounts… It’s not to say that you want to rely purely on net new lead gen to grow your business. But your, customers have already made the investment. They’ve already taken the bet on you. They’ve already had, hopefully, an amazing experience with you.

Brian Signorelli:
And so I just think that there’s… And I see it a little bit in B2C. I mean, companies like Uber, Zoom, Slack. I mean, there’s all these businesses. Even the B2C apps. It’s always like, “Here’s your referral code. Refer a friend, get 10, $15 off,” whatever.

Brian Signorelli:
I’m not suggesting that industrial manufacturers should be offering $15 redemption codes to make referrals. And I don’t know what’s right. I’m not an expert in that space. But I would challenge you all to think, “What more can we be doing to drive awareness for our business by turning our customers into promoters of our business in a way that balances the value equation.” Where, what do they get in exchange for what they’re giving?

Brian Signorelli:
I don’t know exactly what that looks like. Probably take some creative people to figure that out, to think through it, but don’t underestimate the value of your customer base. Because they are the ones that have already made that bet on you. Figure out how to turn them into promoters of your business, and then that will continue powering the flywheel that we talk about at HubSpot.

Joe Sullivan:
Great answers. Yeah, a really thoughtful response. And, per your numbers two and three there, what I really like is they’re both about, you’re delivering value and getting something in return just through partnerships and relationships.

Joe Sullivan:
Creating content with your potential customer, you’re putting the spotlight on them. It’s not that different from a podcast where you might be interviewing potential future customers so that you can hear from them, build a relationship with them. Then their peers can learn from that and it sort of spreads. And in your last example, leveraging those relationships with clients, creating value for them in some way, and they are happy to return that to you.

Joe Sullivan:
So I think you’re onto something. I think it’s right on the money.

Brian Signorelli:
We shall see.

Joe Sullivan:
We’ll see. Well, awesome, Brian. Great conversation. Really appreciate you coming on. Just a lot of really great insights from somebody who’s been there to see the rise and explosion of inbound along the way. I’m sure it’s been an interesting perspective being inside of HubSpot, who’s really was kind of been at the forefront of all this.

Joe Sullivan:
Can you tell listeners where they can connect with you online, where they can find your book, Inbound Selling, and also where they can learn more about HubSpot?

Brian Signorelli:
Yeah, absolutely. I’m happy to connect with anybody on LinkedIn. There are, as hard as it may be to believe, there are multiple Brian’s Signorellis online.

Joe Sullivan:
No kidding.

Brian Signorelli:
Yeah. Just make sure that if you connect with me, I’m pretty sure I’m the only one in the Boston area. I am in Boston, Massachusetts.

Brian Signorelli:
Yeah, so LinkedIn, Brian Signorelli. Happy to connect with anybody. The book, Inbound Selling, is available on Amazon and a bunch of other places. Amazon’s probably easiest if you want to check it out. It’s also an audio book, if you prefer audio books.

Brian Signorelli:
HubSpot, hubspot.com, or reach out to me through LinkedIn, I’m happy to get you connected with anybody who could answer questions you might have or help you in some way. We also have a bunch of free products, if you want to try before you want to talk to anybody. We try to walk the walk on that.

Joe Sullivan:
Beautiful. Yeah, HubSpot definitely practices what they preach. So there’s a lot of great resources you can find there just for learning purposes even before you’d be ready for the software, potentially.

Joe Sullivan:
Before we wrap it up, I want to say a big thank you to our sponsor, CADENAS PARTsolutions, for helping make this show possible. All right, well, Brian, thanks a ton for joining. Again, great conversation. And for the rest of you, I hope to catch you on the next episode of The Manufacturing Executive.

Brian Signorelli:
Thanks, Joe.

Speaker 2:
You’ve been listening to The Manufacturing Executive Podcast. To ensure that you never miss an episode, subscribe to the show in your favorite podcast player.

Speaker 2:
If you’d like to learn more about industrial marketing and sales strategy, you’ll find an ever-expanding collection of articles, videos, guides, and tools specifically for B2B manufacturers at gorilla76.com/learn. Thank you so much for listening. Until next time.

PODCAST: Finding the Fit: How the Seller and Buyer Can Work Together so Everyone Wins w/ Ian Altman

The Manufacturing Executive Podcast Ian Altman

The Manufacturing Executive: Episode 9

Listen to this episode here or on Apple Podcasts, Spotify, Stitcher or Google Podcasts.

powered by Sounder

Episode show notes

Back in May, I wrote an article entitled Summer Reading 12 lessons from 12 books for 12 weeks. The author of one of those 12 books, Ian Altman, is my guest on this episode of The Manufacturing Executive!

A bestselling author and B2B growth expert, Ian started, sold, and grew his prior companies from zero to over $1 billion in value. He has since spent years researching how executives make decisions. Ian’s modern approach has helped many businesses turn marginal growth into explosive growth and thrive where their competitors struggled merely to survive.

Ian and I talk about:

  • Why you should flip your sales message
  • The three questions you need to ask to make an informed decision
  • How to weed out wrong-fit clients
  • How to pivot away from in-person meetings during COVID-19

Resources we talked about:

To ensure that you never miss an episode of The Manufacturing Show, subscribe on Apple Podcasts, Spotify, Stitcher or Google Podcasts.

Transcript of Episode

Joe Sullivan:
Welcome to another episode of the Manufacturing Executive Podcast. I’m Joe Sullivan, your host, and a co-founder of the industrial marketing agency Gorilla 76. So back in May, I wrote an article titled “Summer Reading: 12 Lessons From 12 Books For 12 Weeks”, and in this article I pulled standout quotes from 12 of my all time favorite business books. And today, I’m pretty darn excited because my guest is the author of one of those 12 books. So let me take a moment to introduce bestselling author and B2B growth expert Ian Altman. Ian started, sold and grew his prior companies from zero to over $1 billion in value. He has since spent years researching how executives make decisions. His moderate approach has been instrumental in helping many businesses turn marginal growth into explosive growth, and to help them thrive where their competitors struggle to merely survive. Ian is a co-author of the bestseller, Same Side Selling, now in its second edition. You can read hundreds of his articles on Forbes and Inc. And Ian is a founder of the Same Side Selling Academy, rated one of the top five sales development programs globally. Ian, welcome to the show.

Ian:
Joe, thanks for having me on. And I’m flattered that, see, originally you said, Hey, I wrote this thing about the top 12 books on business, and I was expecting you to say, and none of those people were available. So I have Ian here instead.

Joe Sullivan:
No, you made the list, and you are, yeah. I can’t remember exactly how I stumbled across Same Side Selling, I want to say I heard maybe you as a guest on a podcast or something years, maybe five years ago or so. But the book was intriguing, I picked it up and immediately, it became one of my favorites for a number of reasons, which I want to get into today.

Joe Sullivan:
But yeah, and it’s, among a few things I’d love to talk to you about. But first, could you give our listeners a little bit of background on you, just build on the intro, tell us how you wound up where you are today?

Ian:
Well, the big thing, I mean, you talked about my work. I started my first company in 1993. We became a Fast 50 company by 1998, some of the 50 fastest growing companies in the Washington DC region. We were also the only company on the list who was not a government defense contractor. Which was funny, because once we hit the list, we’d get all these inbound prospecting calls from people talking about what we needed for government contracting. We’re not a government contractor. No, no, you’re number 21 on the list. Yeah, we’re not in that space.

Ian:
And we built a software company then, starting in 98, in addition to the core consulting business that we had. In 2005, I got approached by some investment bankers out in New York, we sold the company for cash and stock, and I served as managing director of the parent company. We grew the value of the business from $100 million to actually about $2 billion in a little over three years. And I was flying 200,000 miles a year, I wasn’t spending time with my wife or my kids, and I just thought after a while, why am I still doing this?

Ian:
I didn’t have a good answer, so I stopped. And people said, what are you going to do now? And my first thought was, I’ll just do the same sort of thing. I’ll just build a new company like that again. And one of my friends said, you know, a bunch of us were talking, and any time our businesses were struggling to grow, you seem more excited about helping us fix something in our business than you were about your own business. Why don’t you do that? And I said, do what? They said, well, help businesses grow. And I said, well, there’s a business for that? And they said, well, you didn’t necessarily need that, but most of us, yeah. We go to experts in that type of space.

Ian:
And so I started speaking in, what was this, probably 2008, 2009, something like that. Started speaking at events, and I’ve been doing it ever since. So speaking, coaching and guiding people on how they grow their businesses with integrity. It’s frustrating for me to see the frustration that people have with sales and marketing, because it doesn’t have to be that miserable experience.

Joe Sullivan:
Sure, absolutely. So what came first? The organization, Same Side Selling and your training program, or the book?

Ian:
So the book, we released the first version, I think it was in 2014 or 2015. And so definitely the speaking and everything came first. In fact, the first book I wrote was called Upside Down Selling, that is a really short book that people can read that gives them the gist of, it’s in essence, how do you take non sales people and teach them some of the core principles of Same Side Selling before Same Side Selling existed. And then I met Jack Quarrels, who spent two decades in purchasing and procurement, and Jack actually attended a workshop I was delivering on sales. It was the Upside Down Selling workshop.

Ian:
And I thought, wow, this is cool. Jack’s coming to kind of see what’s going on, and see if he can learn something. And the reality is, that Jack had found that some of the vendors who, they were willingly paying much higher fees to, than other vendors, the common thread was they would say, Oh yeah, I through this program with this guy Ian Altman, and Jack wanted to understand what they were being taught.

Ian:
And when he came to the program, he said, well, this is all integrity based. In fact, this makes perfect sense. This isn’t dishonest, this is totally honest. And then we got to know each other, and said, there are no books written from the perspective of the buyer and the seller. We should do this. And fortunately it’s resonated with quite a few people, enough to the point that we released a second edition about a year ago, and it’s been a very successful road. I just think that the title resonates with people. It’s like, Oh, that makes sense. You can understand conceptually, ah, I’m getting onto the same side, not on opposing sides.

Joe Sullivan:
Yeah. And I think that’s what’s so unique about it, having the perspective from procurement, or the buyer’s side, and then the sales side. I see it all the time, in my world and the world of my customers, where it’s like it’s this battle in the sale of buyer versus seller, and there’s this race to the bottom on price and everything. Yeah, it’s one versus the other, and the whole concept of your book, which I think you chose the perfect name for it, is let’s work together to figure out if there’s a fit. Let’s come to a common solution that makes sense for everybody. So I just thought it was so unique in that sense.

Ian:
Thank you. Yeah, it’s fascinating that almost every book that I’ve ever seen on sales either uses a battle metaphor, or a game metaphor.

Joe Sullivan:
Yeah.

Ian:
And if we take the second one first, in a game, there’s a winner and a loser. In a battle, the loser actually dies. And then we wonder why there’s this adversarial tension, instead of, we use the model or the metaphor of a puzzle that says, look, if you’re putting a puzzle together, you each have to be able to see each other’s pieces, or you’ll never be able to put the puzzle together. And if you’re not trying to put the same puzzle together, then there’s just not a good fit.

Ian:
And so it changes the dynamic, where it’s less about “how do I convince this person that they need to buy from me, they just don’t know it yet”. Instead, it changes it to “look, for the right organizations, we’re a great fit. We’re not a great fit for everybody, so I don’t yet know if I can help you, but if you’re facing these sorts of problems, I’m happy to learn more to see if I can help.” Makes it so that you’re instantly on the same side.

Joe Sullivan:
Yeah, I love that. You know, one of the biggest issues that I see with sales in the manufacturing sector, where the listeners of this show live, and our customers at Gorilla is, everybody defaults to talking about themselves. It’s ‘we do this’ and ‘we sell that’ and ‘our people are the best’ and ‘our competitors are phonies’, and you know, it’s all about us, right? And what I love about what you call the Same Side pitch is that you kind of flip the positioning statement, or the sales message, on its head, and you lead with the customer’s issue. I was wondering if you could talk about that a little bit.

Ian:
Sure. Well for starters, that example that you give of people always talking about themselves, and here’s what we do, and here’s the way we approach the world, and everyone else’s evil, is when companies suffer from what I like to call “Axis Displacement Disorder”. And that’s where the person doing the selling believes that somehow the axis of the earth has shifted, and now the world revolves around them.

Ian:
And it doesn’t. In fact, if anything, the world revolves around our client. So one of the things in researching how executives make and approve decisions, one of the things that we did is we run people through an exercise, and I’ve done this exercise with over 10,000 executives around the world. From companies ranging from, relatively small startups, under $1 million in revenue, to multi billion dollar multinationals, virtually everywhere on the planet, except for the continent of Africa, and we haven’t gone anywhere on the Antarctic. So outside of that, I got you covered.

Ian:
And we asked people, well let’s say someone in your team comes to you and wants to spend money on this thing. Call it a Gazurtenblat, it doesn’t matter what it’s called. And they say, we’re going to spend $20,000. It takes 45 days for the vendor to implement it, requires no resources whatsoever on our part, and they give us a 10 year guarantee. The challenge I give people is, what are the five questions you would have to have answered to be comfortable making an informed decision, to either approve or deny that request? And I let people work in teams to come up with their list of five, and then they narrow it down to their top three. And they ask the same three questions everywhere, no matter the size of the company, no matter where they are geographically.

Ian:
And the three questions come down to this. The first one is, what problem does this solve? So think about it, you’re going to spend money. Well, in essence, what problem does this solve? Which, is immediately followed by the second question, why do we need it? Which is, what happens if we don’t solve that issue? Meaning, what’s the problem, and then what’s the consequence of not solving that problem? And then the third question is, what’s the likely result or outcome if we make this investment?

Ian:
And by the way, the distant fourth in all this is ‘what are the alternatives’. And the reason why it’s a distant fourth is that if you answer those first three questions well, the fourth one becomes implied. So the vendor who you’re in total sync with about what problem they’re trying to solve for you, and why you need their help, who happens to also be the same vendor who delivers the best, most likely outcome for you, that’s your vendor. That’s the one you pick.

Joe Sullivan:
Mm-hmm (affirmative).

Ian:
So if we know that that’s how people make decisions, what problem does it solve, why do we need it, what’s the likely outcome or result. Then, what the heck are we doing by leading with “here’s what we do as a company, and here’s how our widget works”? It does not align with how people make decisions. So instead, what do we lead with? Well, our clients come to us when they’re facing these types of problems that have these types of consequences. For the right organizations, we deliver this specific type of outcome. And now I need to disarm the notion that I’m just there to sell something, so I say, but the way we approach that isn’t the right fit for everybody. I don’t yet know whether or not we can help you, but if those are issues you’re facing, I’m happy to learn more to see whether or not we might be able to help.

Ian:
And that structure is what we call the Same Side Pitch, it’s in chapter four of the book. If you search, if you Google Same Side Pitch, you can probably find excerpts of this for free, if you don’t want to get the book. It doesn’t matter, if people have the book, they know where to find it in the book. So the idea is that the Same Side Pitch follows this construct of entice, disarm and discover. So first we entice by sharing problems that we’ve solved with dramatic or extraordinary results. We then disarm the notion that we’re just there to sell something, and then we trigger a discovery phase to learn more about their situation, to see whether or not we might be able to help.

Joe Sullivan:
So yeah, it’s a great model, a great infrastructure for doing it. And I can see, I love the puzzle piece analogy, because if you can just blatantly say, these are the types of companies that we’re good at helping, these are the problems that those types of companies typically experience, this is how we can help solve those problems. But, not everybody’s the right fit for us. All of a sudden, you start to weed out companies that aren’t the right fit. I imagine it makes you more efficient in your sales process, because now you’re spending time with companies that actually could be the right customers, right?

Ian:
Sure. Well, the idea is this, what people used to be taught – and by the way, we’re going to use G76 as an example. So in a second, I’m going to ask you, well, what are the problems that your clients would face? So you have a second to think about it.

Joe Sullivan:
All right.

Ian:
But what I want you to think about is this. If you’re leading with what people have often been taught in the past is, you ask an open ended question like ‘what keeps you up at night?’. And you might ask somebody what keeps you up at night, and they say, Oh, my dog licks himself. All right. Well, what do you have for that? Do you have a solution? No. So then you’re fishing going, Oh, well, what else?

Ian:
Well, I got concerns about X, Y, and Z. Yeah, we don’t do that either. Now you’re fishing for an opportunity, as opposed to, if you think about it, my guess is, some of your best clients were facing a problem that they weren’t even aware of until you helped them realize that it was an issue.

Joe Sullivan:
Mm-hmm (affirmative).

Ian:
And so if you say to them, what’s your biggest problem, they might not even realize it. One of the questions that we’ll ask people is, well, zero to 10, how well do your salespeople perform? And no one ever gives a 10, it’s usually like a five.

Joe Sullivan:
Okay.

Ian:
So, how much of that do you attribute to a hiring problem, and how much would you attribute to a skills problem? They go, it’s probably like 80% skills. Okay. So what are you doing to invest in those skills? And it’s like, the head explodes and goes, Oh. Right? But if you asked them, Hey, what’s your biggest challenge? They would never say it’s the selling skill side. But oftentimes, it is. So going back to the Same Side Pitch, if you’re okay with it,

Joe Sullivan:
Yeah.

Ian:
We’ll use your business’s example.

Joe Sullivan:
Fire away. Like a twofer.

Ian:
So what’s the biggest challenge that you solve for your clients?

Joe Sullivan:
I would say the biggest challenge is that they’re not getting in front of enough of the right people from the right companies.

Ian:
And why is that a problem?

Joe Sullivan:
Because if they’re not doing that, then they’re relying on their existing customer base or referrals, and are often stuck serving customers who are not profitable, and they wind up kind of on this hamster wheel.

Ian:
Yeah. Okay. So your Same Side Pitch might be, well, manufacturers come to us when their message of the amazing products and services they have, aren’t getting in front of the right clients. And that means that either their inferior competitors are winning that business, or at a minimum, the company is forced to just keep trying to harvest the existing clients, who you can eventually run out of additional things you can sell your existing clients.

Ian:
For the right organizations, they tell us that we deliver marketing solutions that attract those clients, fill the top of their funnel, and give them a disproportionate share of mind from those ideal customers. But the way we approach that, it’s not the right fit for every company.

Ian:
So I don’t yet know if I can up your manufacturing company. But if that’s something you’re facing, I’m happy to learn more to see if we might be able to help. And so that’s what it sounds like, is first understanding what are those problems that we solve? And then, what the consequence is. Now, I just kind of winged it, so it may not be perfect, but it might not suck.

Joe Sullivan:
Well you know what, I’m glad we’re recording this, because now I can just transcribe it and copy and paste right into our website, right?

Joe Sullivan:
No, that’s right on the money. I mean, it’s exactly the convers- I can understand the power of having that conversation. And especially when you’re in a niche, and you have a very specific type of customer, and you know that customer really well, you’ve seen all these patterns over time, right? While you can’t make assumptions about what your prospects need, you’ve seen these problems before, and you’re able to speak to them.

Ian:
Absolutely. In my business it comes down to, it’s the earning attention side. It’s people feeling that they’re commoditized. So, wow. We’ve got somebody that’s head and shoulders above the competition, but our clients see us as a commodity just like everybody else. Or, there’s this whole shift of how do we shift the conversation from price to value? Because everyone wants to beat us up. Those are the types of things that I hear, time and time again.

Ian:
So that’s when people say, what do you do? Well, my clients are usually facing one of these problems. Boom, boom, boom. And if that doesn’t resonate, it’s probably not the right fit today. It doesn’t mean that it’ll never be, but they’re probably not the right client today.

Joe Sullivan:
There’s a line from your book that I’ve quoted, I’ve had a picture of your book up there, I’ve had the quote highlighted in a number of times I’ve been in front of our own clients, and hopefully it’s sold you some books along the way without you realizing it. But the line that I really love, because it just speaks so well to a lot of things that we preach at Gorilla and try to teach our clients, is this. It says, you said the goal of being an educator is not to convince, but to include a prospect in your perspective or knowledge base, so that you build a common mutual understanding.

Ian:
Yep.

Joe Sullivan:
And I just love that quote so much, because everybody in my world, in this manufacturing world, they just default, like I said earlier, to talking about themselves.

Joe Sullivan:
And that’s all you see in their marketing. It’s brochure marketing, it’s websites filled with product pages, which you need that stuff. I’m not saying you don’t need it. But what we emphasize so much is that you have to take these elements of a consultative sale, and you’ve got to bring them down into your marketing process as well, because the first touch point that a lot of your future customers will have with you is the content you publish and the things you say. And so I was just kind of curious to hear your take on that particular quote, and this idea of being an educator.

Ian:
Well, I always say that the best quotes in the book, Jack probably wrote. But the idea behind this is that when your client or prospect doesn’t decide to do business with you, they’ve decided not to spend money with you, one of two things has happened. Either they don’t believe that the problem that you’re talking about solving for them is that big of a deal, at least not compared to other things on their plate. Or, they don’t believe in the result or outcome that you’re allegedly going to deliver, or both.

Ian:
And so when companies talk about ‘here are our features’ and ‘here are our capabilities’ and all this whizzbang stuff, what’s the client wondering? What problem does it solve? Why do I need it? What’s the likely outcome or result? So the idea is that if you believe in the issue, the impact of the results, and the client doesn’t, it doesn’t count. Similarly, if they believe in it, but you don’t, it doesn’t count. So it’s got to be a mutual understanding. If you both are on the same page about what problem you’re trying to solve, if you’re both on the same page about what happens if they don’t solve it, and you both have consistent expectations about what the results should be, then there’s a level of trust. If you think about it, if you’re buying from somebody, and you haven’t had a meaningful conversation about what the results need to look like, what’s going through the customer’s mind? The client is thinking, yeah, but do they really understand what we’re trying to accomplish?

Ian:
But if you ask the questions up front about what does success looks like, and how are we going to measure it, then it’s just the client saying, yeah, I think they’re actually going to follow through, or not. But at least everyone’s on the same page about what it is you’re trying to accomplish.

Ian:
You know, one of the things that I often share, especially with people in the manufacturing side is, so let’s say you had two different vendors. One vendor is asking you about who needs to be involved in actually making a purchase. The other vendor says, what could put the results at risk, and what are we going to measure together to make sure that we get the right results for you? Well, which vendor would you rather deal with? The person who’s focused on the sale, or the vendor who’s focused on the results? All right?

Ian:
Obviously, the results side.

Joe Sullivan:
Right.

Ian:
And then I’ll say, well, so would you be willing to pay more for the vendors focused on results? And people almost universally say oh yeah, I’d pay more for that. Okay. How much more? And the most common answer is somewhere between 10 and 20% more.

Ian:
And then I asked the following question, which is, so how much less would you have to pay for it to be a good deal, but you don’t get the results that you need? The answer is, it doesn’t matter. If I don’t get the results I need, it was a waste of time and resources, let alone the money. So when companies can learn how to pivot, to focus on results instead of focusing on just getting the sale, that’s when everything changes. That’s when clients routinely pay more for your services than for other peoples. And there’s a whole thing that we don’t have time to discuss today, that talks about differentiation and how do you stand out over the competition.

Joe Sullivan:
Sure. Yeah, I love that.

Joe Sullivan:
Well, Ian, we are recording this in August of 2020. The world is still upside down in a lot of ways, and it looks like it may be for a while. One of the biggest struggles that I’m seeing among B2B manufacturers is they’re not sure what to do with this big gap that’s being left by the absence of trade shows. And not only trade shows, but just being able to get on a plane and fly across the country to see a customer, or a prospect. So many of these companies are reliant on that in person interaction. And so I’m curious, from your perspective, what you’re seeing with the companies you consult, and what you think these organizations can be doing in the meantime to fill that void.

Ian:
It’s interesting. In the Same Side Selling Academy, we do a monthly coaches corner column. One of the most prevalent topics of late has been, so what do we do when we can’t have in person meetings, when we can’t rely on networking? When we used to get 80% of our leads through these trade shows that now don’t exist, what do we do? And so, what we need to do is immediately pivot to think like our customers. Now, the smart companies already were thinking like their customers, but there’s still time to catch up. Which is, okay, what are the questions that our clients would ask? My friend Marcus Sheridan, in his book “They Ask, You Answer”, Marcus talks like you’re in the marketing world. You undoubtedly know Marcus, as well.

Joe Sullivan:
Love, love They Ask, You Answer. Love it, yeah.

Ian:
And so the whole idea is that, how do you create content that is meaningful for your client or prospect? And it comes down to Marcus talks about his big five of content marketing, five key topics that move the needle. And one of them is talking about price. One of them is talking about best of and comparisons, rankings, and reviews, I think it is.

Joe Sullivan:
Mm-hmm (affirmative).

Ian:
And so the idea is to make it so that you’re speaking to the problems you solve, not your features and capabilities. So if, for example, you did a case study that talked about how you solve this problem for another organization, it used to be when people did case studies, they would write a little bit about what the client was doing. Then they would write three or 400 pages about themselves and how smart they are as a manufacturer. And then in the end, it would say “contact us for more information”.

Joe Sullivan:
Mm-hmm (affirmative).

Ian:
And instead, what I suggest is, you condense things and you say, so here’s a manufacturing company that, whether it’s a manufacturer, whether it’s a, whatever their incline is. Here’s this organization, they were having this problem, and here’s why that problem was so important. Notice, what am I starting with? What problem were they trying to solve, and why did they need to do it?

Ian:
Then, I give you an entire sentence. Not a compound sentence, but a sentence that says they came to us for help. And then, you talk about the result and outcome they ended up with, which barely mentions your product or service. So it says, when they came to us and they use the [inaudible 00:25:05] A2020, today they’re able to do this now. They’ve captured more market share. They’ve shortened their time to market, they’ve reduced errors, they’ve improved efficiency, their dogs and cats now peacefully get along together, whatever it is. And that’s all great.

Ian:
So somebody reads that, and they say, wow, that’s really great. It could be a video, it could be text, doesn’t matter. After they’ve consumed that content, they’re only going to look at that if they’re having that same problem. So now we’re already narrowing down our filter to the right people.

Ian:
And then what happens is, they say, wow. Yeah, I didn’t think about the consequences of that. Yeah, I bet you we had the same consequence, and wow, I’d sure like to have that same outcome. Only, the vendor didn’t describe the exact solution. So if you’re that customer, what do you do? You either pick up the phone or you email the company and say, how did you solve that?

Ian:
And then it’s about training the rep who answers that call to not say, “Oh, here’s how we solved it”, but instead say, “what was it about that case that piqued your interest?” And immediately talk about what’s important to them as a customer, not talking about your stuff.

Joe Sullivan:
Perfect, love it. So case studies, but focused on the problem and the outcome.

Ian:
So basically, it’s just taking all of your marketing mindset and shifting it to a focus on what problems do we solve, what’s the information that people are wondering about, and guess what? If there’s a certain problem, you might say, here are three ways to solve this problem. And guess what? You might start by saying, look, oftentimes people come to us to solve this problem, and that’s something that we do. But in the event that you can’t afford to do it the way that we do it, here are two or three alternatives that could work for you.

Ian:
Because the person who’s going to go through all the headaches to do it the hard way, they’re going to do that anyhow.

Joe Sullivan:
Sure, sure.

Ian:
But other people are going to look and say, well, those three ways look like a lot of work, we’re not doing that. Let’s just call these guys.

Joe Sullivan:
Mm-hmm (affirmative).

Ian:
And then you’re narrowing your field, so if you just put out a whole bunch of marketing hype that says here’s how cool we are, no one’s going to care.

Joe Sullivan:
Right.

Ian:
If instead you say, okay, how do we attract the right interest by speaking to the problems that these people are facing day in and day out, then you’re onto something. In the Same Side Selling Academy, I created a course called Growth In Crisis that we give people, people can access for free. They just go to the website, samesidesellingacademy.com, and you can click and get that course for free.

Ian:
One of the first things I talk about is that in this type of crisis environment, your goal, first and foremost is to be helpful. And so I thought it’d be kind of cynical if I then charged for the course. So we just made it available for free, but it’s the whole idea of, how can you help other people and talk about the problems that they’re facing and how to solve them? And the right people will come back and do business with you, that’s okay.

Joe Sullivan:
Yeah. Makes sense. And so with in person events, trade shows out the door, so creating content that’s actually helpful. How do you get it out there, from your perspective? Are you an inbound guy, an outbound guy, do you like both?

Ian:
It’s a little bit of both. So if you already have a good list, then you’re sharing information, and you’re constantly seeking feedback. Hey, here’s this piece of content we shared. What else would you like to hear? I use LinkedIn Live, and so at the end of every LinkedIn Live, I’ll post something that says, what other topics would you like to hear about?

Joe Sullivan:
Mm-hmm (affirmative).

Ian:
Because the idea is, I’m just trying to serve that audience. And what are the questions that you have? You know, Hey, play stump the guesser. Ask a question that you don’t think we can answer. Oh, here’s a really hard one. Because if you’re the person they’re coming to you for a lot of answers, then you’re probably also the person going to come – now, if you basically solicit questions for things that have nothing to do with your business, that’s going to be harder, but it can be related to it.

Ian:
I think Marcus talks about, I think it’s Columbia Sports or one of those Columbia Outerwear, I think has a whole app that they produced on knots, on how to tie knots. Bill said, well, they don’t sell rope. Yeah, you’re missing the point. Their audience is people who are on boats, and camping and this and that, who would like an app on, how do I tie this type of knot or that type of knot? So they’re serving their audience, so it’s relevant.

Ian:
But if they were posting something about doing sous-vide cooking, their audience wouldn’t care, because on a boat, they’re probably not firing up the sous-vide.

Joe Sullivan:
Of course, yeah. It’s all about understanding the customer, and being a resource to them.

Ian:
Sure.

Joe Sullivan:
Love it. Well Ian, this has been a fantastic conversation. It’s been an honor having the opportunity to talk to the coauthor of one of my absolute favorite business books.

Joe Sullivan:
Can you tell us the best place for listeners to find you online, where you’d send them and where they could pick up a copy of Same Side Selling?

Ian:
Absolutely. So you can pick up the Same Side Selling just about anywhere books are sold. Amazon tends to be the one of the most popular places now, but you can also get it in the bookstores as well. If you go to Ianaltman.com, you’ll get me, or Same Side Selling Academy, gets everything on the Academy side, and people can always reach out with any questions. Because sometimes people will read the book or hear something, and they’ll post a question, and it’s amazing because I’ll usually get questions that say, well, I’m sure Ian doesn’t actually read these. And then I get the email, and I respond and say, why do you think I don’t read these? Oh, you read them. I’m like, well you sent it to me. If you send it to info, maybe I’ll read it, maybe I won’t. If you send it to me, I’m probably going to read it.

Joe Sullivan:
Yeah. That’s great. Perfect. Well, Ian, thanks a ton for taking the time out of your week to do this. I really appreciate it.

Ian:
You betcha, thanks for all the great questions.

Joe Sullivan:
Awesome. And as for the rest of you I hope to catch you on the next episode of the Manufacturing Executive.

Narrator:
You’ve been listening to the Manufacturing Executive podcast. To ensure that you never miss an episode, subscribe to the show in your favorite podcast player. If you’d like to learn more about industrial marketing and sales strategy, you’ll find an ever expanding collection of articles, videos, guides, and tools specifically for B2B manufacturers at gorillaseventysix.com/learn. Thank you so much for listening. Until next time.

“Be painfully specific” and 4 other tidbits of writing advice for manufacturers

Writing advice for manufacturers

The title says it all. I’m going to walk you through a few tips that will help you write good well.

So why am I qualified to give this advice?

Well, I write. A lot.

In the past few months alone, I’ve written north of 30,000 words just on label manufacturing. And throughout the years, I’ve written hundreds of thousands more on topics like additive manufacturing, injection molding with bioplastics, conducting geotechnical soil reports, designing emergency power supply systems … and, well, you get the idea.

I also routinely consult with internal marketing teams at manufacturing companies about how they can improve their writing.

There’s a reason my last name is “Wright.” Some things are just meant to be.

Before I hop on my soapbox and preach about my craft …

… we need to agree on what makes B2B marketing content “good.” Call me crazy, but I firmly believe the effectiveness of your writing has nothing (or, at least, not much) to do with how good it sounds.

Let’s not kid ourselves. We’re trying to educate prospects and drive sales, not write the next Great American Novel.

Here’s how I define good marketing content:

  • Good content speaks directly to one person. To know who it should speak to, you’ll need to identify the companies you’d most like to do business with and list out the people within those accounts you’ll need to get in front of to win the account. This video walks you through how to do that.
  • Good content is narrow in focus, solving one specific question or addressing one pressing problem. If you try to boil the entire ocean in 1,000 words, you’ll fail. (Believe me. I’ve tried).
  • Good content is helpful. If you aim to answer a question, then answer it. In full. Don’t create a piece that dances around the topic without offering utility to the intended audience.

Basically, good B2B marketing content should read like a one-on-one conversation between your brightest minds (engineers, leadership, salespeople) and your prospects. And to feel like that, you need to know who your prospects are and address the things that keep them up at night (pain points, questions, hesitations) head-on.

To that end, the writing advice I’ll give here won’t be about where to put commas. Although, if you must know where I stand on the matter, I strongly recommend avoiding the Oxford comma. If you disagree, take it up with the Associated Press.

Instead, I’ll offer actionable advice that’ll make sure you achieve your primary goal:

Helping your prospects.

After all, if you keep helping them, they’ll come to recognize you as a trusted advisor. And when they do have a problem, or are ready to buy, it’s your company they’ll phone.

Okay, now that we agree on that, let’s get to the good stuff.

Tip 1: Be painfully specific

Corporate Ipsum will suck every last bit of meaning from your writing if you let it:

  • “Industry-leading innovation”
  • “Best-in-class products”
  • “Professionally cultivating one-to-one customer service with robust ideas”

Sure, those phrases sound nice — smart, even — but they mean absolutely nothing.

Don’t join the echo chamber of manufacturers using jargon and empty phrases to shout, “Look at how great we are! Let’s circle back on how to achieve synergies! Buy from us!”

Be bold. Say something specific.

Copywriting pioneer Claude Hopkins said it best:

“A man may say ‘Supreme in Quality’ without seeming a liar, though one may know that other brands are equally as good. But just for that reason, general statements count for very little. But a man who makes a specific claim is either telling the truth, or a lie. People don’t expect the advertiser to lie.”

You’re probably saying, “Great advice, Claude, but how do B2B manufacturers do that?”

Glad you asked. Like this:

  • Don’t just talk about how smart your engineers are. Detail the time North America’s largest transit company needed to address the issue of sparse charging infrastructure for their battery-powered bus fleet, and you designed and built a hybrid diesel/battery charging container in just four months.
  • If you’re going to write about sustainable packaging materials, go past vague generalities. Turn your deep expertise into specific, helpful content that actually solves a problem. Give your prospects small, but very impactful actions they can take today to make reduce the burden their packaging places on the environment.
  • Your team is great at solving problems? Okay, but that claim would be a lot more convincing if you walked me through a real example of a time you solved a problem. Show me your thinking. Show me when you couldn’t solve the problem at first, but persisted anyway — and succeeded. Like this case study about when metallurgists led a part failure investigation on behalf of a client.
  • Instead of touting how great your customer service is, tell the story of that time you hired a private jet (on your dime!) to get a mission-critical part to your client just to minimize the downtime on their packaging line.

As you’re writing, look out for vague throwaway phrases, and sprinkle in some specificity — bolstering your claims with stories only your company can tell.

Tip 2: You can make your article as long as you want but it doesn’t mean people will actually read it

^ That headline is a train wreck. It’s about 17 words longer than it needs to be. “Be brief” would’ve gotten the idea across just fine.

If you want anyone to slog their way through to the end of your article, always cut your first draft by at least a third.

Yes, even if you think your first draft is perfect and this advice couldn’t possibly apply to you.

There’s always room for improvement. Cut your intro down, tighten your sentences, put the good stuff up front and get rid of any and all fluff.

As fellow Gorilla writer Toby Wall says, “Content may be king, but brevity is the emperor.” I happen to agree.

Tip 3: Never sacrifice clarity

When given the choice between being clever or explaining something clearly, always choose clarity. It’s great if you can create something that’s both fun to read and easy to understand — but being clear always comes first.

Tip 4: Roll up your sleeves

Don’t be fooled — writing is hard work.

Writing mediocre copy is hard enough. But writing copy that resonates with your target audience will require some serious sleeves-rolled-up work.

If you aren’t an expert in the topic you’ll be writing on, then you need to do the work to become one. Or, at least you’ll need to seem like one in your writing.

Here are a few ways you can level up your knowledge in an industry:

  • Interview subject matter experts — There’s no substitute for true expertise, which is why we conduct an interview for every piece of content we write. If you prepare thoughtful, well-researched questions, an interview will allow you to tap into the expert’s decades of firsthand knowledge and transform it into exceptional content. To learn how to prep for interviews, give this article a skim.
  • Dive head-first into research rabbit holes — I’m not talking about Googling a few basic terms. I’m talking about the type of rabbit hole where you put your phone down, end up reading regulations over lunch and have an a-ha moment that NFPA Level 1 roughly equates to NEC Article 700 for “emergency systems.”
  • Learn from your mistakes — Inevitably, you’re going to get something wrong. When an expert corrects something in a piece, accept their change and use that information to become a more informed writer on every subsequent article you turn in.
  • Document everything — I personally have a 166-row spreadsheet filled with links to guides, articles and magazines that I routinely reference, as well as a separate folder of transcripts from interviews with subject-matter experts — and that’s just for one client.

To get a glimpse at how much work you should put into researching, interviewing and writing, you can check out this article. It’ll walk you through the Gorilla writing process, from ideation to publishing.

Tip 5: Good content reads like a one-on-one conversation

And any conversation requires you to understand a few things:

  • Who are you talking to?
  • How much do they already know about the topic you’re discussing?
  • What questions do they need answered?
  • What keeps them up at night?

Let’s say you’re writing two articles: One geared toward an engineering lead, and another toward an operations manager.

The engineer won’t want any fluff. Zero. They need to know, in no uncertain terms, how your machine will actually work. Detailed, no-frills case studies or highly technical articles speak well to this audience. Err on the side of writing a 101 primer, and you’ll lose their interest in the first few sentences.

Operations folks care about the uptime and the bottom line. They don’t need quite the same in-depth discussion about product design — but they’ll care about throughput, support, ease of maintenance and other factors that will improve efficiencies on the plant floor.

Do you see how you’ll need to write very differently for these two audiences?

That’s why we usually fill out these ideal customer and buyer persona templates ahead of writing any content. So we have a document to reference that shows us what each audience cares about and what questions they’re asking, as well as their level of knowledge about your product/service.

When you’re evaluating a draft to see if it’ll actually be helpful to the person reading it, a little empathy goes a long way.

You’ll need to walk a mile read a thousand words in your customer’s shoes.

Imagine you’re an engineer, and you’re reading the article you wrote. Ask yourself:

  • Does this fully answer my question? Or does it dance around the issue?
  • Is this telling me stuff I already know, or filling in the gaps in my knowledge about this topic?
  • Do I smell fluff? Salesy-speak?
  • Is this about me, and my problems? Or is it about how great the company is?
  • What value do I get from reading this?

The answers to these questions should guide your revisions, allowing you to fine-tune your writing to speak to this audience’s level of knowledge, pain points, questions and preferences.

And regardless of the audience, make sure to write in a conversational tone. Write the way you talk, not like you’re vying for a spot in a peer-reviewed journal.

Remember:

Good content should feel like a one-on-one conversation in a coffee shop, not a stuffy lecture you’d hear in an ivory tower somewhere.

Go forth and write

That about covers the basics. Good writing isn’t about grammar and it certainly isn’t about sounding good — it’s about fully addressing the needs of the person reading it.

PODCAST: The 7 Core Elements of an Industrial Marketing Strategy With Joe Sullivan

The Manufacturing Executive Podcast Joe Sullivan

The Manufacturing Executive: Episode 8

Listen to this episode here or on Apple Podcasts, Spotify, Stitcher or Google Podcasts.

powered by Sounder

Episode show notes

A few years ago, we at Gorilla 76 took a close look at the common components among our most successful manufacturing clients’ marketing strategies.

Then, we boiled these down to seven specific elements. Once we put them together, we built a model we call the Seven Core Elements of an Industrial Marketing Strategy.

On this episode of The Manufacturing Executive, we discuss these seven key elements of manufacturing marketing:

  1. Positioning
  2. Website Foundation
  3. Technology Stack
  4. Content Strategy
  5. Lead Generation Strategy
  6. Pipeline Management Strategy
  7. Data Analysis

Resource discussed on the episode:

Downloadable 7 Core Elements Guide and Audit Spreadsheet

To ensure that you never miss an episode of The Manufacturing Show, subscribe on Apple Podcasts, Spotify, Stitcher or Google Podcasts.

Transcript of Episode

Joe Sullivan:
Welcome to another episode of the Manufacturing Executive Podcast. I’m your host, Joe Sullivan and a co-founder of the Industrial Marketing Agency Gorilla 76. So, a few years ago, we took a close look at all the common threads on the marketing front among our most successful manufacturing clients. And we decided we’d boil them down to seven specific things. And those things are positioning, website foundation, technology stack, content strategy, lead generation strategy, pipeline management strategy, and data analysis. And we decided to put all these things together and build them into a model that we now call the seven core elements of an industrial marketing strategy. These are essentially the seven puzzle pieces that you want present and optimize and working in sync to drive a successful marketing initiative as a manufacturing organization.

Joe Sullivan:
So, what we’re going to do today is take you through these seven things, help you understand what they are, and then leave you with a couple tools really, one that’ll help you audit where you are right now in each of those seven key areas. And then there will be a guide as well that I’ll direct you to that is really a written version of what I’m talking through today. But it will be a good reference point for you to go back to. So, let’s get into it. The seven core elements. The first of these seven is right at the center of your marketing initiatives, and that is your positioning. And we define positioning as the perception of your business in the mind of your customers. So, positioning is not who you think you are, but who your customers think you are.

Joe Sullivan:
And effective positioning, it really all starts by identifying and documenting who your ideal customer is, both at a company level and at an individual human level. And then it’s followed by crafting of positioning language or positioning story that clearly articulates how you create value for those specific individuals. And this is how you can start to shape the outward facing perception of who your business is, or start to be able to influence that. So, let’s talk about the first step inside of that first core element positioning. And that’s establishing who your ideal customer is. So, there are, probably at least from all the clients that we have consulted over the years, they all say, “Oh, we serve 10 different types of customers or 50 different types, and all these different verticals and their big customers and small customers and…”

Joe Sullivan:
I think the thing to do here is to try that identify what are the common threads among your very best customers, the types that you really want to build your business on. Because positioning is really about, it’s forward looking, it’s not about who you’ve done business with but who you want to be doing business with. And often that’s rooted in who your best customers are. So, what do those best customers look like? How big are they? Where are they located? What do they buy from you? What are the triggers inside of those companies or externally that lead them into the buying process? How long and complex is the buying process? How does the sale play out? Who on the customer’s side gets involved in the buying process?

Joe Sullivan:
So, once you’ve identified who those ideal customers are and the characteristics of those, then you want to take a closer look at the individuals who make up the buying committee, or the buyer personas as you might call them. So, these are the people whose attention and trust you need to earn throughout the buying process. Often early on, we’re talking about engineers, technical professionals who are experiencing very specific problems that they need to solve. Maybe plant managers, facility managers, maintenance people. And then as you move up the chain somewhere along the sale, when your sale is complex, you’re probably dealing with procurement. Almost certainly you are. And maybe CEOs, presidents, owners of companies, but who are those individuals that influence the buying process and therefore you need to be able to influence them with the message you deliver?

Joe Sullivan:
What are their responsibilities at the company? What decision making authority do they hold? And most importantly, what are their personal pains and goals and common questions that they ask? These are the things you want to be able to address in your outward facing messaging, in a concise way, through the way you craft your positioning language. But then also in the content you create, which we’ll talk about in a little bit here. Inside of positioning, the first core element, once you’ve identified who the ideal the customer is at a company level and individual human levels, then it’s a matter of crafting language that will speak to them. And what you’re trying to do here essentially is say, who we help and how. What are those issues we solve? What are those common problems we address and common goals we help these types of people from these types of companies achieve?

Joe Sullivan:
And the best structure I’ve seen for articulating this is, we’ve pulled from a book called, New Sales Simplified by Mike Weinberg. And chapter eight of that book is about what he calls his power statement. I would highly recommend spending the $15 to pick up a copy of New Sales Simplified. Mike presents a really great way of articulating who you help and how. And what desired business outcomes do you help transform into a reality? What are the common problems you solve? And focusing on that before you focus on what you do. Everybody defaults in their positioning language to saying, “This is what we do. This is why we’re amazing. This is why our people are the best and you should buy from us. And our competitors are phonies.” But nobody cares who you are, what you do, until they believe you understand their issues and you’ve solved them before.

Joe Sullivan:
And so, we need to wrap the outward facing communication around that. So, you can also visit the, who we help and how page on the Gorilla site, and you can see that we have followed this exact structure to write our own positioning language. You’ll see a condensed version of that on our homepage as well. So it gives you a little bit of a tangible model for how that could work. Okay. So, core element, number one of seven positioning. We’ve covered that. We go to core element number two, your website foundation. So, your website will almost always be part of the online marketing conversation. It’s the home base for your company online. It’s the online face of your company. It’s your storefront, even if you’re not physically selling a product or service through it. It’s the place where the right people from the right company that we talked about in core element number one, many of them will have their first interaction with you there before they’re ever ready to pick up the phone and you control all the messaging there.

Joe Sullivan:
And so, we need to make sure that the right messaging is there, the right pieces are in place, to be able to attract the right people there, to engage them, to convert them into leads so that you can start physical sales conversations with them. So, there are some key pieces of this website foundation that we think need to be in place. And one of those is your content management system. We’re huge advocates of WordPress. Probably many of you listening are familiar and your sites run on WordPress. If you don’t, that’s okay. There are other good content management systems out there. But the point is you need your website sitting on top of a piece of software that lets you easily add pages, edit content, make modifications, add new calls to action, there’s a learning center or a blog there that you can publish new content. And so, your website is a growing and evolving beast, really? And it should never be done. It’s not a project that’s ever done. It should be growing and evolving. You should be responding to how people use it.

Joe Sullivan:
That’s why the content management system is such a central piece to that website foundation. So, other parts of this core element, number two, the website foundation, your learning center. You might call it your blog, you might call it your resource center, learning center, knowledge center. Regardless of what you call it, it’s a place to house educational content. Content that answers those common questions we were talking about, that addresses those key problems and objectives your customers are trying to achieve. So, a learning center, again, you could use Gorilla if you’re familiar with us, with our learning center, as an example of what that could be. Another one that I love is CK Powers, is one of our clients, in full transparency, but I love their learning center, ckpower.com. They’re a manufacturer and value added re-seller of engines and generators. And I love the way their learning center has been organized, where you can sort by different content types, by different topics. So, a couple of references for you.

Joe Sullivan:
Another piece of your website infrastructure is having a lead generation system in place. So, calls to action, being able to easily deploy new calls to action, forms that people can fill out to download guides. There’s been a shift in the last year or two that I’m seeing away from gating in too much content, which means, putting content behind a form where you have to submit contact information to download it. And more of a shift to just creating and publishing valuable content and maybe using a newsletter subscriber. All you’re asking for is an email address and trying to build your email list and nurture people that way. Or using a chat bot, a technology like Drift, or if you’re using HubSpot, they have a chat bot software where you can engage people in an automated way, or a live chat where you have a person behind it. But you want to have some methodology in place to convert a visitor into a tangible lead, so that your visitors aren’t just anonymous and you can proactively begin conversations with them.

Joe Sullivan:
So, lead generation infrastructure, also part of this website foundation, which its core element number two is, lead management software integration. So, there’s a CRM and there is a marketing automation software component to this, which we’ll talk a little bit about later. But you want to have a direct tie into your lead management software so that when somebody fills out a form on your site, a contact record is created for that individual in each of these software platforms. Or if that contact record already exists, it’s updated and populated with data on what this person is doing on your site and what information they’re filling out. So, that’s another thing. And then there’s other elements, on page SEO, responsive design, things that make the user experience strong, and help keep them there and move them throughout the site to the content that’s most relevant to them.

Joe Sullivan:
So, these are all elements of core element, number two. Your website foundation. So, let’s move on to core element number three out of seven, which is your technology stack. And there’s so much marketing and sales technology out there these days. There are a ton of things you can and probably should be using, but if we had to break it down into the most essential starting places, they would be one, your CRM, two, your marketing automation software, and three, your website analytics software. Som CRM stands for Customer Relationship Management. And in short, this is a piece of software that exists to keep your sales efforts organized and make your team as efficient as possible on the biz dev front. At the heart of your CRM are contact records for individual leads and customers.

Joe Sullivan:
Inside any individual’s contact record, you can log calls and meeting notes. You can record data points like customer preferences and birthdays and favorite sports teams and all that basic stuff. But a really high quality advanced CRM software will also let you sync your email to it. So, every time you send an email, you can log it directly into your CRM without having to make a manual note. You can assign accounts and individuals to specific sales professionals on your team. You can build task lists with automated reminders to follow up with leads. You can track the life cycle stage of your deals and your opportunities. You can assign values, timelines, and probabilities that deals will close to give you a real time forecast of your sales pipeline. So, these are all things a CRM will let you do. Some examples of CRMs would include HubSpot, which is by far our favorite.

Joe Sullivan:
There’s Salesforce, which is the most popular. But it’s also more advanced and I think is more valuable for really large sales teams as opposed to smaller ones like most of our midsize manufacturers have. And there’s Pipedrive, Microsoft Dynamics, NetSuite, Infusionsoft. These are all other examples of CRMs. Okay. The second piece of your technology stack is your marketing automation software. So, whereas a CRM is a place for managing your company’s interactions with current and prospective customers. The marketing automation software is there to let you streamline and automate and measure marketing tasks and workflows. In short, your CRM is a sales tool. Your marketing automation software is a marketing tool. There’s some overlapping features, but when you deploy both of these side by side, you can build a really effective marketing sales joint strategy and software foundation, I guess. So, some things that your marketing automation software will let you do. Easily deploying onsite lead generation devices, like templates for lead capture pages and forms and call to action buttons, collecting lead intelligence.

Joe Sullivan:
What are specific website visitors? What are specific people doing on your site? Who’s showing buying intent? Who’s coming back regularly? These are all things that will influence your sales process and that marketing can use to feed the sales team and help them make decisions about what to do. So, a lot of marketing automation software is out there at this point. Again, we are partial to HubSpot, but others include Marquetto, Pardot, Act-On. You’ll see all of these out there. And a lot of them have similar features. We just think HubSpot is best in class for what you pay. It gives you really the most bang for your buck. So, the third piece of your technology stack is your web analytics platform. This will probably come from a few places, the no brainer you want to get up and running if it’s not already, is Google Analytics. Probably a majority of you listening are already familiar with analytics to some extent.

Joe Sullivan:
That’ll help you measure things, like how much traffic is your website’s generating? Where that traffic’s coming from? What pages and types of content are engaging and attracting your visitors to you and pulling them in out of search engines? How visitors are moving through your site to points of conversion. So there’s so much there inside of Google Analytics. Other bits of analytics on individual people you’ll pull from your automation software like HubSpot. Okay, let’s go to core element number four of seven, which is your content strategy. I’m going to start here with a definition of content marketing by Joe Pulizzi, who is an author and the co-founder of the Content Marketing Institute. He’s the guy who coined the term content marketing probably 15 years ago or so. But he calls content marketing, “A strategic marketing approach, focused on creating and distributing valuable, relevant, and consistent content to attract and retain a clearly defined audience and ultimately to drive profitable customer action.”

Joe Sullivan:
And I think the key word there is valuable. And we’re talking about, not about us content or brochure type of content, all that stuff has a place in your marketing strategy, but we’re talking about addressing those problems with objective answers and in depth content that answers the common questions and helps your prospects and customers achieve what they’re trying to achieve. A stat that we lean on often, well, there’s a study that GlobalSpec puts out every year for engineers. And it shows that somewhere around 60, 65% of technical professionals wait until the comparison and evaluation stages of the bi-cycle to make contact with a vendor. And what that tells us is, your buyers are gathering information online. They’re doing it on their own. And they’re doing it all throughout the buying process.

Joe Sullivan:
They don’t care about you until they’re confident you’ve understood their problems and you’ve solved these problems before. And so, your website becomes their first stop and the first interaction they have with your company. The sales process starts there, in your content. It’s your job to publish content that will earn enough attention and trust from them so that they will be willing to start a real sales conversation with you. So, content can come in all kinds of shapes and forms and sizes, there’s articles, there’s blog posts, white papers, buyers guides, case studies, videos, webinars, podcasts, ROI calculators. There’s a ton of ways you can create value through the content you publish online. It’s a matter of thinking about what content your audience is most likely to consume, and developing content that will help them all throughout the buying process to help you generate awareness before they know who you are. And maybe they’re just Google searching a problem they have or a question they have. Answering their common questions once they find you. Establishing credibility for your organization, converting visitors into leads, building trust and nurturing them.

Joe Sullivan:
There are so many polite ways that content will help throughout that whole buying process. And it’s such a critical piece of your inbound and your outbound marketing strategies. Core element number five of seven is your lead generation strategies. So, as you look back through these core elements we’ve talked about, positioning, identifying the right people, and putting the right pieces of the pie in place on your website. We’ve talked about getting the right technology stack in place, developing all this content that speaks to the pains of those most important people and helps them achieve what they’re trying to achieve. Once we’ve got all those foundational pieces in place, now it’s time to start driving the right people to your website, getting the right message in front of them.

Joe Sullivan:
You don’t want to do too much of that until some of that foundation’s in place. And so, this is where your lead generation strategy begins. And there are three ways to do lead generation. And all of these probably have a role for you. It’s just a matter of finding the right balance. So, there’s inbound marketing, there’s outbound marketing, and there’s paid media. With inbound, we are talking about developing thought leadership content and content that, like we talked about in the last core element, establishes credibility for you, teaches the search engines like Google, that you are the best source of information on these topics or one of the best sources. This is what will help give you visibility in the appropriate Google searches which results in traffic, which will eventually result in leads. It’s not that simple of course, there are tactical components to it, strategic components.

Joe Sullivan:
But inbound marketing in short is about establishing authority for your website, gaining visibility that way, and sort of casting a wide net and some of the right fish will swim into it. Some of the wrong ones will. But as the volume of the fish that swim into that net increase, so will the volume of those that are qualified, especially as your content becomes more and more targeted at the right people. So, that’s inbound. Also in your lead generation strategy you have outbound and paid media. So, inbound is kind of the long game. It’s going to take a while for you to gain traction if you’re just starting, you’ll get some quick wins, look at the low hanging fruit. But you don’t win the inbound game overnight. It takes time.

Joe Sullivan:
So in the short term, we’re advocates of having a really strong outbound and paid media strategy where you can say, “All right. Let’s target the 200 most important companies that fit the description of our ideal customer. Let’s develop an outbound strategy where we find the right people from those companies with this great educational content we’re using, we deliver it directly to them.” And then we tell paid media platforms like, say LinkedIn, “Hey, LinkedIn, show this content, whether that’s video or written or whatever it might be. Show this content to people with these job titles, from these types of companies, in these geographical regions, with these commonalities.” And what you can then do is, amplify the distribution of all this great content to make sure as many people as possible that fit your ideal customer profile in your total addressable market see it. So, again, it’s not a super simple thing, but conceptually it is, and that’s the strategy you want to be able to deploy.

Joe Sullivan:
So, inbound for the longterm, paid media and outbound in the short term to supplement that. Okay, two core elements remaining. Number six of seven is your pipeline management strategy. So, this is about what happens after the lead is generated. And so, we’ve talked about attracting the right people to you through inbound or outbound. When you start to generate leads or start with your, say, outbound leads to develop a two way conversation with them, the next thing is how do we help move those people through the buying process? They’re going to buy on their schedule, not on yours. So, how do we nurture them? How do we enable your sales team to nurture them and to develop those leads? So, I would break the sixth core element of pipeline management into two buckets. There’s sales enablement, and there’s lead nurturing.

Joe Sullivan:
Sales enablement is marketing’s responsibility to help your sales team develop the right processes, to enable them with the right data, and to give them the right content to help develop these leads. So, when I talk about processes, I’m talking about, who manages inbound leads? When a new inbound lead comes in or a lead from a paid ad comes in, who’s responsible to reaching out to that person? What messaging and points need to be communicated to them? What’s the follow-up cadence? And then, what data points can marketing supply them? So, if let’s just say you have an outbound campaign running to 300 people, which 20 of those 300 people clicked through to your website, and of those 20, which five seem super engaged and they’re coming back and they’re looking at pages that might indicate some level of buying intent? This is all information you want your marketing team to be able to help sales, process, and understand so they know where to spend their time.

Joe Sullivan:
So, the other part of this pipeline management strategy is the nurturing strategy, lead nurturing, which is largely a marketing responsibility. And here we’re talking about, being in the inbox of your existing contacts and all these new leads are generating probably at least every other week or so. It just depends on your business. For some of you, it might be weekly. For some of you, it might be monthly. But you want to consistently be delivering value to them, not sales messages, but sending the new, helpful video or written content that you’re creating that addresses issues that they care about. So, when you can consistently be in front of them in creating value, you’re naturally going to drive more and more valuable conversations over the course of time. Some people are ready for that conversation now, some will be ready in a month, some will be ready in two years.

Joe Sullivan:
But I can’t tell you the number of times I’ve had conversations with people that have said, “Hey, we’ve been reading your content for the last two or three years and the time’s right now. And we already know you’re the first company we need to talk to because you’ve been teaching us all along the way.” That’s what you want to be able to replicate inside of your business. The seventh and final core element is data analysis. So, there was a time when measuring marketing results was all about tracking impressions and reach and how many people are getting their eyes on us. And that absolutely still has a role, but there’s also a lot of tangible data that we can now harness. And so, we need to have the software in place and the systems in place to be able to track leads all throughout the buying process. How many individuals are we reaching? What percentage of those individuals are actually converting into leads? What percentage of those leads are sales qualified? How many of those are turning into tangible opportunities that we’re quoting business for? And then, how many of those are actually turning into revenue?

Joe Sullivan:
So, these are all metrics that we need to be looking at throughout the buying process. I do like to put the caveat on this that, especially if you’re a company with a long sales cycle that plays out over a year or more, which I’ve seen plenty of that, especially when you’re selling, say, expensive million dollar equipment, and you might sell 20 pieces of equipment a year. The sales cycle is long and you can’t look at a six month marketing effort and expect there to be revenue there. Right? But we need to look at these leading metrics like traffic, and sales qualified leads generated, and then pipeline revenue. How much work are we quoting? Is it with the right people? And that’s the type of data you want to be gathering. So, those are your seven core elements.

Joe Sullivan:
Recapping them very quickly. Core element number one is your positioning. Core element number two, your website foundation. Three, your technology stack. Four, content strategy. Five, lead generation strategy. Six, pipeline management strategy. And then seven, is your data analysis processes. So, the last thing we’ll do here is, I’m going to leave you with two resources as I mentioned. If you go to Gorilla76.com/7 elements, you’re going to find two things there. There’s a downloadable PDF version of everything I just talked through. It’s a really long in depth designed PDF guide that can serve as your guide. And then there’s a downloadable spreadsheet that we call the industrial marketing audit scorecard. You’ll score yourself on 35 points, five for each of these seven core elements. And it’ll show you where you’re strong, where you’re weak, and maybe help you figure out where you need to invest some time and energy into optimizing your strategy. So, that pretty much covers it. I hope this was helpful. And we hope to see you on the next episode of the Manufacturing Executive Podcast.

Speaker 2:
You’ve been listening to the Manufacturing Executive Podcast. To ensure that you never miss an episode, subscribe to the show in your favorite podcast player. If you’d like to learn more about industrial marketing and sales strategy, you’ll find an ever expanding collection of articles, videos, guides, and tools specifically for B2B manufacturers at gorilla76.com/learn. Thank you so much for listening. Until next time.

PODCAST: The Robots Are (Not) Coming: How Wearable Technology Augments But Doesn’t Replace Human Labor w/ Tracy Hansen

The Manufacturing Executive Podcast Tracy Hansen

The Manufacturing Executive: Episode 7

Listen to this episode here or on Apple Podcasts, Spotify, Stitcher or Google Podcasts.

powered by Sounder

Episode show notes

Automation cannot replace human labor. Rather, the key is to augment the workforce by equipping humans with the technology they need to be more effective, more efficient, and safer.

Tracy Hansen, President of North America and Global CMO for ProGlove, a German maker of wearable digital interfaces and operations analytics for industry, joined this episode of The Manufacturing Executive show. She talked about the ways manufacturers need to pivot with technology as they look at how to emerge from this pandemic in one piece.

Here’s what we discussed with Tracy:

  • How wearable solutions can augment the human worker
  • Examples of the ways wearable technology improves safety, efficiency, and productivity
  • The wearable technology solutions executives should know about
  • …And what excessive automation looks like and how to avoid it.

To ensure that you never miss an episode of The Manufacturing Executive, subscribe on Apple Podcasts, Spotify, Stitcher or Google Podcasts.

Transcript of Episode

Joe Sullivan:
Welcome to another episode of the manufacturing executive podcast. I’m Joe Sullivan, your host, and a co founder of the industrial marketing agency Gorilla 76. So if you’ve been listening to the first handful of episodes or so of the show, you’ve probably noticed that a majority have focused on marketing or sales related topics, but we’ve designed the podcast to cover growth from a variety of angles. And one of those angles is technology. So our guest today is at the forefront of that movement. And on that note, I’m super excited to introduce Tracy Hansen, president of North America and global CMO for ProGlove, a German maker of wearable digital interfaces and operations analytics for industry. Tracy brings more than two decades of strategic brand building experience at startups, scale ups and Fortune 500 firms to the role. She’s a student of disruptive innovation, championing ideas that stretch boundaries, mobilize teams, and deliver business breakthroughs. Tracy, welcome to the show.

Tracy Hansen:
Thank you. It’s wonderful to be here.

Joe Sullivan:
Tracy. I found you through an article that you recently published on manufacturing.net back in May I think it was that covered some ideas about how manufacturers need to pivot as they look at how to emerge from this pandemic in one piece. And since then, I’ve connected with you and your team at ProGlove. And I had a chance to see your thinking behind some of the things that are going on in this industry 4.0 world we’re now living in and in particular, what caught my attention were some of your thoughts about this misconception that automation can replace human labor. And the argument I’ve seen from you and supported by high-profile business figures like Elon Musk and some of the biggest technology companies in the world, including Apple, is that human labor is still very essential. And the key is not to replace human labor, but instead to augment the workforce by equipping humans with technology, they need to be more effective and more efficient and safer. So I’m excited to unpack all this stuff with you today and sort of drawing your insights and experience for our listeners.

Tracy Hansen:
Wonderful. Glad to talk about all of this stuff.

Joe Sullivan:
Great. Yeah, I know it’s your world. So before we get into the thick of it though, I was wondering if you could just kind of give us a little bit of a quick background on ProGlove and also tell us a bit about your personal journey that brought you to where you are today.

Tracy Hansen:
Absolutely. So as you mentioned in the introduction and thank you for all of that, ProGlove is a german manufacturer, we’re based out of Munich. And we also are headquartered in Chicago. So we are a four or five year old company. We were founded after our co founders won the Intel make it wearable contest. It was an idea that they had germinating around how to make people in the assembly line and manufacturing more effective and more productive. And the thing that they made, the wearable device that they made is a wrap that you can put around your hands and I’ll show you, in case you use video.

Tracy Hansen:
They put it on your hand and very quickly have a scanner that is as light as a matchbox on the back of your hand, but has the power of data intelligence, realtime feedback, and really clear data capture on the manufacturing floor. So it shifted the focus away from how do I use all of these tools all around me into one wearable device that you can put on the back of your hand within seconds. And the team from there grew to be a multinational company with more than 500 companies using our product on the manufacturing and supply chain universe.

Joe Sullivan:
Wow. Super interesting. And then such a unique advancement. I’ve seen pictures of it. I haven’t seen or heard you talk about it yet though. And to think it’s that light and I mean, it makes a ton of sense.

Tracy Hansen:
One of my favorite analogies is when you think about scanners and anybody who’s assembling anything that has multiple parts is likely scanning and the supply chain. Everything we touch, eat, drink, wear has been scanned multiple times as scanning is as an integral part of our day to day operations. And the traditional handheld scanner weighs as much as a Volkswagen beetle at the end of a given shift. So you can imagine the stress that it puts on the human, who is working with these devices compared to something that weighs as much as a matchbox. So not just the ergonomics of it, but the human first human centered approach to technology is so crucial when we think about things like wearable devices.

Joe Sullivan:
Yeah. And so Tracy, what has sort of led you to ProGlove? Can you give a little background on sort of how you got to where you are today?

Tracy Hansen:
Sure. So in graduate school I had discovered just in time technology, just in time processes, Joseph Denning, the whole world. And wrote my thesis on ISO 9,000 and how to grow your business and move into quality and control and process. So my degree and my thesis was on ISO 9,000. And from there I moved into manufacturing. I worked at a hardware company called NetApp based out of Silicon Valley for about 15 years and had a chance to meet a gentleman named Andreas Koenig. Who’s a real leader and visionary and building business and bringing technology to market.

Tracy Hansen:
So after I left NetApp, I started to move into the startup space and into scale up businesses when Andreas called and said that he had discovered ProGlove, met the co founders and thought it was just a phenomenal organization that was poised to really bring something new and innovative to the market and wanting to break open those markets specifically North America. So he tapped me to join. I came about nine months ago and have really seen the opportunity that this company has to offer manufacturers, assembly lines, supply chain, you name it to do something great and innovative. Not just with the scanner, but with the software that we have behind it.

Joe Sullivan:
So the ProGlove sort of presence in the United States is relatively new still. Kind of in its infancy and you’re helping bring it to life.

Tracy Hansen:
Absolutely. Brand new. We started about two years ago here and really hit the ground running about 18 months ago. And the last year we’ve seen explosive growth in North America.

Joe Sullivan:
Interesting. What’s what’s your customer base look like? Just out of curiosity. Who are-

Tracy Hansen:
It has a lot of different factors. So we started in the assembly space. So automotive manufacturing in Germany. Some of our big customers are… Every major car manufacturer that you can think of, they are likely using the ProGlove scanning solution on their assembly line. BMW, Audi, Volkswagen, you name it. Then we moved into aviation. So companies like Lufthansa. Now we’re going deep in the retail space. So e-Commerce is exploding. So anybody who is with warehouse distribution and logistics, they’re finding great use for our technology. And we’re also seeing growth in healthcare. So both of the frontline healthcare in hospitals, in universities, as well as in the back office with the design and distribution of healthcare goods.

Joe Sullivan:
So we’re recording this in July of 2020, and we’re in the thick of everything going on with the pandemic. And I’m just kind of curious how does this fit into the mix and a wearable solution that sort of augments the human worker. Obviously healthcare is at the forefront of all that. I’m just kind of curious to hear you talk about that.

Tracy Hansen:
Sure, yes. So we’re in a very interesting time and starting at a new company, right? As we headed into the post COVID world or, I guess we’re still in COVID world, has been really interesting. And the challenges that we were talking about as a company in the early part of 2020 have shifted very dramatically. At the beginning of the year, we were looking at scale and innovation and deployment of new technology. Now, what we’re looking is how can I bring in technology that will speed up my operations, keep my employees safe, help me onboard and train new employees quickly and adeptly. How can I used technology to enhance the worker and in a time where safety is absolutely at the forefront of every operation leader’s mind. So the good news is we didn’t need to pivot too terribly strong in this whole universe, because from the very beginning, we were focused on the human. The human at the center of the workforce.

Tracy Hansen:
We’ve never strayed from that. And while it wasn’t our intention to have a solution for the environment we’re currently in, it naturally fit into this space because our customers, our prospects, the people that we talk to day in and day out are really challenged with shifting the business, to accommodate new requirements for health and safety for their employees. Bringing on new employees as they’re rapidly, spinning up robust e-Commerce solutions. I mean, you think about it as we shift to e-Commerce, you need more people to do the picking and the packing and the logistics and the delivery and so forth.

Tracy Hansen:
As we’re looking at our manufacturing and assembly teams, they’re looking at how can I have safe social distance? How can I make sure that I’m using a solution that is personal to me. So if I have wrap, that’s my wrap and I’m not sharing it with three other employees, is that safer? So our human centered design are focused on keeping employees safe, has always been a core part of our vision and our culture. And that’s what people are talking to us about now. And that’s what’s attracting them to these types of devices.

Joe Sullivan:
So a shift more, would you say to the safety focus than the increasing efficiency focus or is it a lot of both and just given how the business world has changed in a few months?

Tracy Hansen:
It’s a lot of both. Safety is first and foremost. We actually, and in all transparency, we had a few deals or customers that we were talking to where they’re like, Hey, we got to pump the brakes here. And then once we started to talk to them about the safety component or they came to us talking about the safety component of what they’re trying to implement, it became evident that the human first approach lent itself to the challenges that they were facing.

Tracy Hansen:
It’s so important to our customers and the people that we see in the field to care about their employees, to focus on what will make them efficient, yes of course, but safe in the environment that they’re working in. The second part is really around speed of adoption and speed of operation. So efficient, absolutely still a crucial, but as so many of us have had to pivot and do something different or faster than we had prior, the idea of complete digital transformation, complete overhaul of operations was put to the side and they wanted to look at what can I do to enhance the workforce I have and bring things up quickly without a lot of training, without a lot of complexity.

Tracy Hansen:
So ease of use was crucial because speed was paramount. And I’m sure like you, I’m sure like me, you’ve probably experienced a lot of… Because of COVID things are delayed, because of COVID things are slow. And that resulted in a lot of re-imagining of what needed to happen in assembly, in supply chain across the board. So it’s pretty pervasive. Those two things speed and safety are a recurring conversation that we have with almost everybody we speak with.

Joe Sullivan:
So could you get kind of tangible for listeners here and maybe talk about a few specific examples where wearable solutions that augment the human worker can help with either efficiency or safety or just helping productivity. Would love to hear some real, tangible examples that make this concrete.

Tracy Hansen:
Sure. So there’s a couple. So let’s start with the sharing of tools and assets. So making it wearable, instead of sharing a handheld scanner, right? So every time I’ve put it down and one of my coworkers picks it up, I had the potential to spread germs or to create an environment that is unsafe. And then the time it would take to clean everything between every single scan would become quite a slowing technique. When I have a wearable device, something that I’m putting on my body and it’s mine, I am now less room for contamination, less likely to unintentionally share a germ that I don’t want to with a coworker because it’s mine and it’s on me. Then the second thing that I would say is from a wearable safety standpoint, we introduced in our own floor, we’re a manufacturing company and assembly company as well. We create the devices on our own premises. We needed a mechanism to allow our assembly team to know when they were too close to somebody. So we created and innovated a proximity sensor.

Tracy Hansen:
So I had the wearable device and through our mechanisms of communication can either through optics, through sight, through audio or through haptic, so feeling, let somebody know if they’re too close to another coworker. We rolled it out on our floor. And then we realized our customers might need it too. So we made it free and available to all of our customers. They could download it right from our website at no additional charge. And then we extended that out to anybody who wanted to download our PG connect, our ProGlove connect solution but maybe it didn’t have our wearable device. So they could have it on a cell phone, something on their body, but not our scanner so that they could keep their employees safe. That’s the second thing.

Tracy Hansen:
And then the third thing around speeding things up and how does wearables speed things up? We introduced Mark Display, which has on the back of your hand an E ink reader that allows you to, as a wearer of our device, to see instantly what you need to do next, what’s the job to get done. So I don’t have to go back to a terminal somewhere on the picking floor or go back to an office to get a printout, to know what the next job to get done is saving vital minutes and sometimes seconds, every time I’m doing the job on the shop floor. So those are just three examples of how wearables can keep you safe and keep you moving faster.

Joe Sullivan:
That’s great. Now, along the lines of augmenting the worker, what other innovations are you seeing out there that executives should know about?

Tracy Hansen:
Wearable technology is pretty exciting. We’re so used to it as humans and consumers, whether it’s the Fitbit, the watch that you’re wearing, the phone that you’re carrying. We have it integrated into our daily lives. So if you bring that to the shop floor, you bring it to the manufacturing plant, and you start to realize that that wearable technology, when used in combination together can create such effective streamlined processes. You can start to envision having a human digital twin that creates a set of data that you can now, as an operations manager, see what’s happening on your floor every step of the way. The visual I like to use is when I have a truck come into my plant and I’m unloading the truck, I’m scanning things, I’m bending, I’m looking, I’m hearing different things. And if I have a wearable technology that is helping me as the worker, know where to put the pallet, where to put the box, and then as a peer comes, where to take the box to, how to assemble.

Tracy Hansen:
And all of the wearable technology that I have on is feeding me realtime information, giving me haptic feedback on if I’m going in the right direction or picking up the right box. It gives me the intelligence right there within my body to do the right thing, the next job that needs to get done in the right order. From a worker standpoint, it’s much more efficient, it’s less stress and trying to figure things out. From an operations manager perspective, it gives me the intelligence I need to know how to improve my production line, how to improve my operations, how to keep my workers again very healthy and safe, remove obstacles that get in their way or eliminate challenges that are placed in front of them that are unnecessary obstacles. As an executive looking to figure out what to do next I’m really hone in on the human and understanding what are the steps the human needs to take next, to be more effective, to be more efficient.

Tracy Hansen:
Years ago I read a book called the Mythical Man-Month. Are you familiar with it?

Joe Sullivan:
I’m not. No.

Tracy Hansen:
It’s a book by Fred Brooks and it’s this whole concept around adding more people to… Some people think, Oh, if I had a software project that I need to deliver against, I can add more people and that software project will get done faster, right? More people means faster. Well, when I look at what’s happening in this assembly floor and then the supply chain, I sometimes hear similar things like, Oh, if I add an automation, things will get faster. Things will move faster. And I kind of feel like we need to have a simple, a mythical man month concept, the mythical automation month if you will. Because really at the end of the day, it’s the human and our ability to respond and to think and to move the product forward, that creates the momentum and efficiency.

Tracy Hansen:
And when you think about automation and bringing automation into the assembly line, the manufacturing floor, the supply chain, you sometimes displaced the efficiency because the thinking is automation is going to solve all the problems, but really automation can create more challenges, different challenges. So our thinking is let’s focus on the human, let’s focus on what the processes are that they do and use wearable technology to move the needle faster. And that’s what I think executives need to really hone in on is using the assets they have and enriching that experience versus displacing those assets with things that will just introduce an entirely different set of complexity and challenges that might result in that mythical man month that doesn’t yield the results they’re looking for.

Joe Sullivan:
Yeah. I love that. So many things related to automation, I imagine sound perfect in theory. And then when you get into actually implementing them, you realize that it creates new hurdles and obstacles. And what you’re saying it makes a lot of sense. It’s a good sort of segue into the next few questions I have here. It’s one thing to augment a worker and another to attempt to fully automate or attempt to fully automate a process. And my understanding from what I’ve seen from you is that a lot of companies tend to run into these obstacles. And so, what does excessive automation look like from your perspective and how can executives avoid it?

Tracy Hansen:
Each business is different, right? Where some companies need automation and it could be excessive for a different business. So I think we need to look at these uniquely. If I were to say, Hey, I have an opportunity to go in and fully automate the entire environment and there’ll be no humans involved. I think that would give you great pause because even automation requires humans. You need technicians, you need process engineers, you need a different skillset certainly when you have automation. It’s just different. So when I think about what’s excessive, I think if it’s totally rotating over to we’re going to automate everything. Where I’ve seen successes… I’ve had an opportunity to go to a number of different warehouses and assembly floors now, and I’ve seen the balance of automation.

Tracy Hansen:
Where automation makes sense, where using systems and robotics to move the process forward makes sense is partnered with where the humans make sense, where is critical thinking required, where is more dexterity required. Those two things when balanced out create an incredibly efficient and elegant solution. So my recommendation for executives would be to find the balance. Anytime you say all or 100% or everything, you’re probably leaning towards excessive. If you’re looking at collaborative automation and human collaboration, you’re probably on the right path.

Joe Sullivan:
That’s a good answer. I read an interesting article the other day about Apple’s manufacturing process. And here you have the most profitable technology company in the world and one of the most technologically advanced companies probably in history and they’ve repeatedly failed to automate their production lines. Is sort of what I gathered from the article. And it’s led them to turn back to human labor time and time again. And so what do you think that failed attempts from even the biggest companies in the world like Apple can teach manufacturing executives about efficiencies, automation, the role of human labor, et cetera.

Tracy Hansen:
Yeah. The article you’re referring to is really insightful. And they’ve been trying now for close to a decade. I think they started in like 2012 with their partner in China to bring automation to life. And they were going to replace all the human workers with a million robots. What I love about that example, and I think we can learn from is that it’s okay to fail, right? It’s absolutely okay to fail and to attempt different ways to bring the automation to life. It’s okay to experiment. And I encourage it, I think it’s really important. It’s how we discovered the wearable solution, right? Prototyping, risk and attempting. What I think the best thing we can learn from the Apple example and from others I’ve seen is bringing humans in to the design stage. Bringing humans into the process. So they over-rotated, to my previous answer, they over-rotated to we’re going to do all robotics.

Tracy Hansen:
As we see they’re moving forward and others like them, as they’re realizing humans aren’t going away. Humans are part of the solution. How can we bring humans together with technology to create a solution that is efficient and effective. So I think the Apple example is perfect. I think their experimentation has shown us that humans are essential. And you mentioned Elon Musk earlier, same thing. I think they were trying to replace humans in all of their assembly lines for Tesla. Humans are essential. We cannot underestimate the role that humans play in assembly and manufacturing.

Joe Sullivan:
And I think that’s a great message to send. What I’m gathering from you here today to kind of wrap this up is that all the technology out there that is maybe feared by some, as a replacement for human labor it’s really, when used properly, it’s there to make people more effective and more efficient, to keep them safer. Is there any last things you’d say here to a manufacturing executive about just the importance of putting technology alongside workers rather than using it to replace them.

Tracy Hansen:
Just that. Technology is beautiful. Robotics are great. IOT, internet of things, is absolutely a way of the future. Artificial intelligence can be so powerful when implemented the right way. Humans aren’t going away nor is technology. And I think the insightful, innovative executive is going to be the one that can look at both and put them together in a way that is meaningful for whatever problem they’re trying to solve. So that that balance and the understanding that we need both is going to be the thing that will set the leading executive apart from the rest.

Joe Sullivan:
I love that. Well, Tracy, this was a super interesting and valuable conversation. I really love what you’re doing at ProGlove and the mindset you’re bringing to the industrial sector, especially during a super challenging time in the world for everybody out there really. Can you tell us the best place to find you online in case listeners would like to get in touch or learn more about ProGlove and about what it might be able to do for them?

Tracy Hansen:
Sure. The best place to find ProGlove is on our website ProGlove.com. You can also find us on LinkedIn. We’re very active and love having conversations with our industry peers on LinkedIn. And you can find me on LinkedIn as well, Tracy Hansen.

Joe Sullivan:
Beautiful. Well Tracy, thank you so much for taking the time to join us on the manufacturing executive. It was a pleasure having you on here.

Tracy Hansen:
Thanks, Joe. It was delightful.

Joe Sullivan:
Great. To the rest of you, we hope to see you next time.

Speaker 2:
You’ve been listening to the manufacturing executive podcast. To ensure that you never miss an episode, subscribe to the show in your favorite podcast player. If you’d like to learn more about industrial marketing and sales strategy, you’ll find an ever expanding collection of articles, videos, guides, and tools specifically for B2B manufacturers at gorilla76.com/learn. Thank you so much for listening. Until next time.

PODCAST: How to Fix a Factory: Influencing the Direction of Your Company w/ Rob Tracy

The Manufacturing Executive Podcast Rob Tracy

The Manufacturing Executive: Episode 6

Listen to this episode here or on Apple Podcasts, Spotify, Stitcher or Google Podcasts.

powered by Sounder

Episode show notes

Something’s not going well, and it’s your job to fix it. Where do you start?

You can’t rely on your charm and good looks to make a change happen. Instead, you have to work through proven processes that alleviate distress at companies.

On this episode of The Manufacturing Executive Show, Rob Tracy, consultant and author of How to Fix a Factory, talked about specific processes that can solve problems at distressed organizations.

Here’s what we discussed with Rob:

  • Why Rob wrote How to Fix a Factory and who he wrote it for
  • How value-add reporting can give distinct insight into P&L
  • The 10 core systems that must be operating with reasonable proficiency for the factory as a whole to have good outcomes
  • Rob’s new idea called The Business Forward Framework

Additional Resource Mentioned in the Episode:

Traction: Get a Grip on Your Business by Gino Wickman

To ensure that you never miss an episode of The Manufacturing Executive, subscribe on Apple Podcasts, Spotify, Stitcher or Google Podcasts.

Transcript of Episode

Joe Sullivan:
Welcome to another episode of the Manufacturing Executive Podcast. I’m Joe Sullivan, your host, and a co-founder of the industrial marketing agency Gorilla 76.

Joe Sullivan:
Today, I have a unique guest in the sense that he can be called both a manufacturing executive and an author. Let me take a moment to introduce Rob Tracy. Rob is the president and founder of Rob Tracey Consulting. With more than 30 years of leadership experience in the manufacturing industry, Rob has become an expert in navigating the sector’s distinct challenges.

Joe Sullivan:
After publishing his first book in 2019, How to Fix a Factory, Rob now uses his unique perspective to reveal issues, reset expectations, and restore working order in manufacturing companies across the nation. Rob understands that every company’s situation is different and he doesn’t believe in just mechanically applying the latest tools and hoping for good results. He works to realign companies with their core values, touching each level of the business to truly provide a holistic analysis of what’s going wrong.

Joe Sullivan:
People-focused and practical, Rob sees through the clutter of everyday obstacles to find the root of the problem. His “boots on the ground” approach ensures that issues are not only identified but solved for good. Before founding his consultancy, Rob held leadership roles with prominent companies, such as Anderson Windows, Pentair, Intek Plastics and CliftonLarsonAllen. In addition to being highly experienced with [Lean 00:02:09] and EOS practices, Rob holds a bachelor of science in industrial and operations engineering from the university of Michigan and is a graduate of the Minnesota executive program at the university of Minnesota’s Carlson school of management.

Joe Sullivan:
A lifelong learner and observer, Rob shares his latest insights about business strategy and life on his website blog. So, on that note, Rob, welcome to the show.

Rob Tracy:
Thanks very much, Joe. Looking forward to our conversation.

Joe Sullivan:
Well, Rob, you and I first connected back in January of this year. So, I think you stumbled across my company, Gorilla 76, online one way or another, and realizing we had overlapping audiences, we struck up a conversation from there.

Rob Tracy:
That’s right.

Joe Sullivan:
So, you have been a long time manufacturing guy, as I noted in the introduction. I know that you’re potentially shifting gears in your career or maybe broadening your horizons a little bit, but regardless, I’d love to hear from you about how you got to where you are today, and also where you see yourself headed?

Rob Tracy:
Yeah, I’ll try to keep the bio brief. Like I said, I’m an engineer. I grew up in Michigan. Been around manufacturing all my life. My dad was part of the foundry industry at General Motors. First job out of school was at General Motors and I found it was just way too big. And I started moving to some different places, each time going to progressively smaller organizations.

Rob Tracy:
And I settled as the CEO at Intek Plastics. After going through some of those other companies that you mentioned. And I found that I just had a passion for that 50, 60, $70 million company, a few hundred people, because you can move fast. You can get things done. You can make an imprint and make a dent.

Rob Tracy:
For the last five years, I’ve been doing consulting work and for the last 20 years… Well, [inaudible 00:03:50] operations is my fast ball. I’ve been more at that senior level for the last 20 years. The last five years as a consultant, I’ve really been focused on helping the C-suite people get a handle on their business on a wide range, general management stuff, not just operations.

Joe Sullivan:
Awesome. And I learned from talking to you months back that you had just published your first book, How to Fix a Factory, which was really interesting. And as you know, we talked more and decided you’d be a really great guest for the show. I read the book over the last few weeks and I found it super interesting. And in particular, there’s so many nuggets in there specific to the manufacturing industry, but so many just great business principles that even I can relate to.

Joe Sullivan:
I’m a marketing guy, so the book’s not written for me, though I had takeaways. But tell me a little bit about who the book was actually… It was truly written for who your audience was and at a high level, really what it’s all about?

Rob Tracy:
I’ll start by saying that writing a book has always been on my bucket list. I wouldn’t have called myself an author, but I guess I am now. It was a challenge, but it was a lot of fun. It was good growth experience.

Rob Tracy:
The book is targeted at senior leaders and small to mid-size manufacturers. That’s the sweet spot. And by senior leaders, CEOs, COOs, VP of ops, CFOs, those kinds of people that can really influence the overall direction of the company. A plant manager would get something out of it. I think other people, all the way to a production supervisor would get some value, but the target was at senior level.

Rob Tracy:
What I was trying to do with the book, first, I believe my goal was to make it practical, short, one plane ride across the country and you got it. Non-jargony, I tried to… I don’t, there’s no lean words in there. None of that stuff, I just want to have common everyday English. But, what I found is after spending time in a lot of companies, I’d always find myself working in some distressed organization. Something wasn’t going well and my job was to go fix it. And for the longest time, I thought that was just my art and charm and good looks that was making that happen. And what I realized is I actually do have a process I go through.

Rob Tracy:
And so writing the book was a way for me to get it out of my head onto a piece of paper. But what is that process? How do I go about that? Because even though the challenges are different, the path that takes us is often very similar. So, that was the goal. That was what I was trying to accomplish and share that insight.

Joe Sullivan:
So, the book is called How to Fix a Factory. What are some examples of situations in a factory or a manufacturing facility that constitute fixing?

Rob Tracy:
Yeah. Well, as you can imagine, it runs a wide gamut, but I’ll give you three examples just to… Because these have been more common lately. One would be a situation where they’re not taking very good care of customers, and not shipping on time, and lead times are extending and they don’t know why. They’ve tried stuff, they’re running over… They’re doing all kinds of things to try and fix it and it’s not getting any better.

Rob Tracy:
And so I’ll go in and I’ll help start peeling back that onion. And I’ve seen situations when one company, the problem was that they weren’t tracking their production throughput very well. And production had dropped by about 5%, which doesn’t sound like much, but over the course of weeks, it starts to add up. And the next thing you know, they’re in a hole and then they got to dig out of it.

Rob Tracy:
Another place, the customer service was placing orders on the factory that were far in excess of the capacity of the factory. They didn’t have any sales and operations plan to keep the two linked together. That’s been happening more… Even as the pandemic has hit, you think we’d have all kinds of capacity. They’re still struggling with that issue. So, that’s one issue.

Rob Tracy:
Another one would be, just misinterpretations of financials. The standard cost systems that have been in place for eons in manufacturing can give very, very misleading information that lead to bad business decisions. And just managing profitability and understanding the role of product costing, but also understanding capacity and throughput and how to really drive financial performance. Standard cost accounting doesn’t help very well with that. So, we use something or I use something called Value Add Reporting, direct P&L’s, so helping them get a little different insight into what the P&L can look like and how to drive it. So, that happens a lot.

Rob Tracy:
And then the third one is talent. We all know talent’s a struggle. Unfortunately, a lot of the clients that I work with haven’t really taken a strategic look at their talent. And I think, talent, the fight for talent is going to get you raised up to almost the same levels as fight for customers. And it needs that strategic view. And so many clients are just going to temp agencies and they’ve got this revolving door of people, which creates all kinds of issues. So, just helping them get re-grounded on it and raise their talent plan to a more strategic level. Something that is a real common issue.

Joe Sullivan:
Yeah. I hear the talent problem so often from the… Because our client base is very similar to yours. It’s mid-sized manufacturing companies and you’d think that, even with… Well, you hear so much about automation and the negative things that the common, the general public, thinks about automation and replacing human beings and taking jobs away. And the reality is a lot of manufacturing organizations can’t find people who want to do the job. They don’t want to do the dirty work. They don’t want to work third shift. They don’t want to do things that put them at safety risks, of course. And that talent recruitment part of it and retention as well as is just so important, but so challenging.

Rob Tracy:
There’s still a lot of factories that don’t look like a cleaner room. You see the ones that look really pretty and epoxy floors. There’s a lot of them that’s still fairly industrial. And it’s really hard to get people that want to do that work.

Joe Sullivan:
Well, a substantial chunk of your book covers a topic that you describe as the “core 10 systems”. And I’m going to read a little passage from here. You had written, “All factories have a set of core systems that must be operating with reasonable proficiency for the factory as a whole to have good outcomes. When a factory becomes distressed, it’s usually due to weakness in one or more of these core systems.”

Joe Sullivan:
Now, I know from reading the book, we could probably do an hour long podcast on each of these core 10, but I’m wondering if you could give us a bird’s eye look at what these 10 systems are. Maybe a synopsis of each so we’ll understand what’s important from your perspective.

Rob Tracy:
And so let’s… I’ll just give a little bit of context. I would call these core 10 related operations. There’s others, there’s financial systems and HR… There’s other systems, marketing sales, this doesn’t cover those.

Joe Sullivan:
Sure.

Rob Tracy:
These are operation oriented. So, I’ll just buzz through them. The talent system. We talked a little bit about that. That’s raising talent up to a strategic level, talent brand. And really how are you going to attract, recruit, hire, retain, great culture, those kinds of things.

Rob Tracy:
The second one is a core 10, is a clean and safe factory. And we can use the buzzwords of 5S. I didn’t do that. I just say it’s a matter of being respectful to our people, we need to have a factory that’s clean, well organized and safe for them to come to. And if you don’t have the discipline to do that, then you probably don’t have the discipline to do a lot of the other stuff that needs to be done to run the place.

Rob Tracy:
The third one is a management system, and that’s really the management structure. That’s having the right ratio of, from the plan manager to how many superintendents, to how many supervisors, to how many leads. Because one of the biggest issues I see is they’ll have a supervisor recovering 50 people, and then they wonder why they can’t follow through on stuff and do continuous improvement, or aren’t running the place well, it’s because he’s spending all day administering because he doesn’t have the right structure. So, that’s been the next one.

Rob Tracy:
The fourth one is an equipment reliability system. And that’s just making sure that the people on the floor have equipment that works and gets the job done and produces a quality product. So, maintaining it well, keeping it up to date. The buzzwords should be TPM and all those things, but it’s just about, do we have equipment that’s reliable and working? And if it’s not, then we can have a problem.

Rob Tracy:
Fifth one is the quality system. Quality system is just making sure that we’ve got the tools and the processes in place to ensure that we are passing good quality on to our customers. And internally that we’ve got good product going from one operation to the next, and that it’s not eroding our capacity and our throughput and all those things. When that happened, well you don’t have good control of your quality.

Rob Tracy:
The sixth one is supply. And so the supply system is managing, who do you choose to buy from? What quantities? How do you flow it in? How do you make sure you got good quality? And if you don’t have a good quality… A good supply base, that’s healthy and taking care of you, then you’re going to struggle inside your operation?

Rob Tracy:
The next one is in the inventory system. So, inventory is just the lean, we will. I just wanted to talk about one piece flow while I’ve never seen it. Every factory has got inventory. And so the inventory system is making sure that it’s under control. You know where it’s at. You can find it. It’s being rotated properly, so that when it does time come to put it to productive use on the line, or in a workshop, you can go get it and you’re not losing stuff.

Rob Tracy:
Eighth one, is the sales and operations planning. Talked a little bit about that problem earlier. Sales and operations planning is creating that linkage between the sales group and the operations, any… Probably the financials as well. And making sure you’ve got that ongoing two or three months forward look to create alignment, and we don’t have customer service putting out more on the factory then they can produce. At the same time, operations has to understand what they need to do to take care of the customer and where they should be adding capacity and taking capacity off of table.

Rob Tracy:
The next one is data and measurement. That’s just about having the right measures up and down the chain from at the cell level, what’s important to them? What do they need to measure? All the way up to the senior leadership team, what should they now be watching? What I see at times is they’re missing a key measure, and performance has slipped in on it, but because they’re not watching it, you get this erosion that ends up having a big impact over time. That was the example I gave about they weren’t watching their throughput and 5% went away and they ended up suffering.

Rob Tracy:
And the last one is the operating system. The operating system is that hard one to describe because it’s the overall framework for how do you run the business. What is your meeting pulse? Whether that’s your weekly staff meeting or your quality system meeting, is how do you set your priorities every 90 days? And that’s really where I’ve been focusing a lot lately on my things.

Joe Sullivan:
Yeah, that’s great. Good synopsis of each. And I love having a framework like this, because I’m sure as our listeners are hearing you talk about these, there’s probably a lot of heads nodding. These are all issues that any manufacturing leader deals with, but to be able to have a structure to follow and say, put them in buckets and have a process for addressing each. I see the value in that, because it’s the same in my business and the way we approach implementing marketing and sales program for example.

Rob Tracy:
Right. But what I see is, when you go in and you look at a company that’s struggling or a facility that’s struggling, they may be fine on nine of them. And it’s just one of those 10 that’s undermining everything. So you get… I think you said it earlier, you have to be reasonably proficient in all of them because any one can turn into a weak spot.

Joe Sullivan:
Yeah. And it provides a great system too, I imagine, for auditing somebody up front and saying, where are you strong? Where are you weak? Where can we move the needle the most and pour our energy? Because you can’t attack everything at once, right? Your resources get thinned out.

Rob Tracy:
Absolutely. Yeah.

Joe Sullivan:
Well, number 10 on that list, I want to talk a little bit more about, and have you really unpack it? And that’s the operating system, because I know that one of your big initiatives right now, personally, is developing a formalized operating system that a company can hold in their hands and take and deploy inside their business. So, tell us a little bit about what you’re doing on that front, what you’re developing as far as an operating system goes and what also inspired you to develop that system?

Rob Tracy:
Yep. Absolutely. I wish I had used a different term than operating system. Because it sounds like MS-DOS back in the eighties. The operating system is that framework for how you run the business. And so if your listeners are familiar with EOS, the Entrepreneurial Operating System, that’s an operating system. Verne Harnish has got Scaling Up, that’s an operating system. I’m creating my own. I got very familiar with EOS, both as an implementer, where I went to all the training, but also work in a company that was using it for three years. So, I’ve got that “boots on the ground” view.

Rob Tracy:
And there are lots of things I like about it. And the thing I’m creating, which I’m calling the Business Forward Framework, it has elements of that, but we’re going to come at it a little differently, because I don’t think EOS is a good fit for all companies. You’ve got to have a certain personality profile that’s different to be an ideal client for them. So, I’ve got six buckets that I’m going to put mine in. You got to have the right strategy. You’ve got to have right culture. Right people. A 90 day focus, this is critical that every 90 days you’re resetting priorities and determining what you’re going to focus on and work on. Having the right data and metrics. And then something I call habits, and they can be the medium habits, but even though one of my favorites is just a habit of “just say it”.

Rob Tracy:
So we set the tone that says, when we’re together and we’re talking, whether that’s just you and I, one on one, or in a meeting, if it’s in your head, we’re going to say it. We’re not going to block out with things being unsaid and then go talk behind people’s backs. And we say things to each other and not about each other, that’s just a habit.

Rob Tracy:
So, what I want to do to fill a different niche with this framework is come at the implementation different. Instead of having just one size fits all that this is how you go about implementing it, is help come in, figure out where they’re at, where the good starting point is, and then create a custom roadmap for them and then be with them to implement. And I’m only going to work in industries that I’ve got experience in. I’m not going to be an agnostic generalist.

Joe Sullivan:
Yeah. It makes sense. The implementation of a framework like this is just so key. And I know, I’m familiar with EOS, which is, for those of you listening who maybe aren’t familiar, Gino Wickman was the author of Traction, which I’ve read three times and we’ve borrowed elements of it for our business. We’ve never fully embraced the full system, although we’re thinking about it at my company Gorilla right now.

Joe Sullivan:
But he describes the implementation side of things as traction. And as you put this framework in place, at the end of it, now you’ve got to actually hit the ground running and you have to… People have to be bought in and you have to follow through on doing it. So, I don’t know if you want to speak to that because I know you’re obviously in EOS, you’ve been there and been an implementer and know that system really well. So, maybe speak a little bit to that idea of gaining traction, or in your case, the implementation element.

Rob Tracy:
The element. Let me think about the best way to talk about that. There’s a lot of things in EOS around how to get that traction. Some of my favorite things is, we talked about the 90 day pulse.

Joe Sullivan:
Mm-hmm (affirmative).

Rob Tracy:
That is… And there’s a 90 day pulse and an annual pulse. So, in that strategy, so you know you’re all stroking the same direction is critical, but then breaking things down into 90 days, where you say, what are the top priorities? And we’ll do facilitated sessions where we’ll come up with all the possible ideas that we could do in the next 90 days, list them out. And it might have 100 on the list, and we’ll narrow it down to five and say… And then we’d scope them. I’m a big fan of writing one-page project charters that talk about what’s in scope? What’s out of scope? What are the milestones? And then you integrate those into the weekly meeting where every week you’re checking in saying, are we on target or are we off target? So, you don’t lose sight of them and they don’t go sit on a shelf. So, those are just some of the tools and techniques about how to drive performance forward.

Joe Sullivan:
Yeah, I think there’s even research out there. I remember reading in Traction that, the human mind is built in a way that it can handle about 90 day milestones and not much more than that. So, when you have these big and these massive goals that you’re trying to accomplish for the year or beyond, you shut down and wind up getting nothing done, unless you can break it down into smaller chunks, right? That could be maybe attacked in 90 day segments.

Rob Tracy:
Absolutely. Yeah, even if it’s a huge project, by doing an ERP implementation that might take two years, you can still say, what are we going to do in the next 90 days? And then we might be in the next 90 days, we’re going to do software selection. In the next 90 days, we’re going to get our data cleaned up. In the next 90 days, we’re getting at least… When you have something that’s a year or two out, it can seem like you’ve got an awful long time to implement, and the things on the back burner and you don’t really work on them. 90 days is that timeframe where it’s long enough that you can get something done, but short enough that you’ve got some urgency. You got to get moving because time is burning.

Joe Sullivan:
Yep. And then I think those weekly touch points become so important because it creates accountability, right? If you wait a month, if you only touch base with your team as you are implementing these 90 day milestones, well, then everybody waits until day 29 and says, “Oh man, I got to get all this stuff done.” And you hack your way through it.

Rob Tracy:
Yeah.

Joe Sullivan:
Versus weekly, you create consistency and accountability for each other, right?

Rob Tracy:
Yeah. Yeah. We want to avoid that college students syndrome where you keep pushing it off and then cram at the end. It just doesn’t work very well.

Joe Sullivan:
It makes sense. Well, Rob, anything else you wanted to touch on in terms of your operating system? I think this was… I’m curious where… Is it available out there for people to look at yet? Is it still in the works? I’m curious if people want to look at your operating system or-

Rob Tracy:
I would say I’m about 90% done.

Joe Sullivan:
Yeah.

Rob Tracy:
I don’t have it out and published anywhere. That’s not up on my website yet. So, probably the best thing to do is reach out to me through LinkedIn, be happy to talk anybody through it. Talk and I can help compare and contrast it with the EOS, I’m still an EOS fan.

Joe Sullivan:
Yeah.

Rob Tracy:
I can help show where there would be different so they can make a right decision. But yeah, best thing to reach out to LinkedIn or go to my website. My contact information is on there. It’s just simply robtracy.net so pretty simple to find.

Joe Sullivan:
Beautiful. Well, Rob, thanks a ton for doing this today. This is a super valuable conversation. I learned a ton. I’m sure our listeners are saying the same and really like what you’re doing. So, appreciate you joining.

Rob Tracy:
Yeah, I appreciate that. I love manufacturing. I’m glad I had a little chance to get to talk to you and your audience.

Joe Sullivan:
Great. Well, thanks Rob. And to the rest of you, we hope to see you next time on The Manufacturing Executive.

Speaker 2:
You’ve been listening to The Manufacturing Executive podcast. To ensure that you never miss an episode, subscribe to the show in your favorite podcast player. If you’d like to learn more about industrial marketing and sales strategy, you’ll find an ever expanding collection of articles, videos, guides, and tools specifically for B2B manufacturers at gorilla76.com/learn. Thank you so much for listening. Until next time.

You do not like anything (or how to give constructive design feedback)

better-design-feedback-infinite-loop

Giving feedback on a design is not easy. Especially if you have no experience with doing creative work or have never worked with a designer before. I’ve been working as a professional designer for nearly a decade — and I still sometimes find myself struggling to find the right words when giving creative feedback. So I can definitely relate to anyone out there that is working with a designer for the first time and who is stuck in endless rounds of revisions that are still missing the mark.

This article won’t solve your problems overnight or give you a magic list of bullet points to follow, but it should help you articulate your feedback in a way that will inspire your designer to create something that’s going to help you achieve your goals.

Design is not art

You first need to understand the purpose of design in the context of B2B marketing, and what it isn’t.

It’s not art. I know some folks will disagree with me on this, but in this context, I firmly believe this to be true. Design isn’t about looking cool and it’s certainly not about what is aesthetically pleasing to you as an individual.

It’s all about appealing to your customers, aiding them in understanding a complex topic while building a professional image that subconsciously creates trust. All of which are pieces of a marketing strategy squarely aimed at achieving specific business goals.

Now that we understand the role of design in this context, we can start to think about design from a more objective or goal-oriented mindset.

The cardinal rule of design feedback:
“You do not like anything”

Way back in design school, at the end of every project, we would meticulously print out, cut and mount all of our work on foam board and hang it up on the wall for the whole class to critique. Each student would get up, give their rationale behind the design, and then it was open season for the rest of the class to tell you why it was good or bad.

It was terrifying. But it was even more difficult to critique my peers.

The “rules” were to always start with at least two positive bits of feedback. When it was my turn to critique someone else’s work, I spoke up and said “I really like this…” and my design professor Čedomir Kostović cut me off with, “You do not like anything.”

He went on to explain that personal taste means nothing when it comes to evaluating whether or not a design is achieving its purpose. He encouraged us to say “This works because…” or “This isn’t working because…” instead.

It’s pretty simple, but it gets you in the mindset of being objective, of evaluating design work on the merits of achieving a goal.

It’s too easy to just leave it at “I really like/don’t like this.” And it’s just not useful or actionable feedback.

Don’t hold back

Designers have thick skin. You shouldn’t ever hold back because you think what you have to say will be hurtful. Just don’t be a jerk, or even worse, turn it into a personal attack. Professional designers work hard to be objective about their work, but we will always be emotionally tied (just a little bit) to what we are putting out there. So keep it objective and try not to sling insults. If you’re constructive, you’ll be empowering your designer to do better work.

Now that we have that out of way, let’s look at some examples.

Bad feedback examples and how to make them better

“This button color is wrong.”

Better: “This button color isn’t working because I think it doesn’t match our brand. We want a more serious tone, and this is too playful.”

Why is this better? It gives the designer some background on why that specific color isn’t working. If the designer doesn’t get the reasoning behind why something is working or not, they’ll be left to guess, which could mean wasted time.

“Find a different banner image.”

Better: “This banner image is communicating the wrong ideas. Here are some examples of images I found online that communicate the concept better.”

Why is this better? First, it gives a reason for why it’s not working. Second, it offers up some examples of images that may not be perfect, but they are closer to what you are looking for. If you can’t put some feedback into words, try finding examples of other images or designs online that you think are closer to what you need.

“Make X element bigger/smaller.”

Better: “The hierarchy is off here. X element should be the focus as it matters the most to our customers. Y element is often an afterthought, and while it’s important, it should be secondary.”

Why is this better? Again, it gives the “why.” You also just educated your designer on aspects of your business and now they are armed with a deeper knowledge of what is important to your customers. The designer can now make better decisions in the future.

“This design isn’t trendy enough.” or “This design is too modern.”

Better: “This design is too modern. Here are a few examples of conservative website designs that I think align better with our brand and our audience.”

Why is this better? Terms like trendy or modern are too vague. What’s trendy to me may be different from what’s trendy to you. If you find yourself having to use vague descriptions, it is always best to follow that up with some examples. That way, the designer knows how you define what’s trendy, modern, conservative, etc.

You are probably noticing a common theme here:

Giving good design feedback is about digging a little deeper into your initial reactions and analyzing why you don’t like something.

If you do that, you’ll begin more clearly communicating with your designer and you should get to a final design much quicker. It’s okay to not give any feedback immediately after a presentation. Take some time to think about the goals, what your customers need, and the “why” behind your feedback. It’s not easy, but it pays off. You will get more effective designs that better assist you in achieving marketing goals, and you should get there faster with fewer rounds of revisions.

PODCAST: How to Create Video Marketing that Drives Results in the Industrial Sector w/ Danny Gonzales

The Manufacturing Executive Podcast Danny Gonzales

The Manufacturing Executive: Episode 5

Listen to this episode here or on Apple Podcasts, Spotify, Stitcher or Google Podcasts.

powered by Sounder

Episode show notes

By 2022 online videos will make up more than 82% of consumer internet traffic. That’s 15 times more than in 2017, according to a recent study by Cisco.

Video is how your buyers want to consume information, so it’s exactly how you need to deliver it to them.

On this episode of The Manufacturing Executive Show, Danny Gonzalez, CEO of both Industrial Sage and Optimum Productions, talked about driving growth through video production in the industrial sector.

Here’s what we discussed with Danny:

  • How some industrial companies are using video to their advantage already
  • Shifting your message from traditional marketing to the way buyers buy now
  • How salespeople can make one-to-one messaging videos using their webcams and distribute them via video cards
  • The way to get started in video marketing right now (and now’s the perfect time!)

Resources Mentioned in the Episode:

Industrialsage.com

Monique Elliot of Schneider Electric

Malika Waller (formely of Landis+Gyr)

To ensure that you never miss an episode of The Manufacturing Show, subscribe on Apple Podcasts, Spotify, Stitcher or Google Podcasts.

Transcript of episode

Joe Sullivan:
Welcome to the Manufacturing Executive Podcast, I’m Joe Sullivan, your host and a co-founder of the industrial marketing agency Gorilla 76. There are a lot of reasons why I’m super excited about our episode today, which is an interview with an expert in video production, and specifically inside of the industrial sector. But let me throw a pretty staggering statistic out there before I introduce him. A recent study by Cisco shows that by 2022, online videos will make up more than 82% consumer internet traffic, that’s 15 times higher than it was in 2017. There are a lot of stats like this out there, that just really point to content consumption shifting to video. Numbers like this just kind of blow my mind. But you can see it happening all around you. You search for something in Google, you scroll through your LinkedIn feed, and you see more and more video.

Joe Sullivan:
So, the reality is this. If this is how your buyers want to consume information, then it’s exactly how we need to be delivering it to them. So, let me take a moment to introduce Danny Gonzales of Industrial Sage and Optimum Productions. As an Atlanta native, Danny discovered his passion for video production while volunteering as a missionary in Mexico after high school. Later, his extensive career experience in the world of digital video creation and marketing with companies throughout Georgia led him to found Optimum Productions, a full service video marketing company, in March of 2007. Danny’s personal mission in life is not only to spark creativity and drive results, but also to be actively involved and to consistently present positive and meaningful messages for the betterment of our local community and the world at large.

Joe Sullivan:
Danny has over 15 years of experience in marketing strategy and video production, working nationally and internationally. Maintaining a detailed marketing strategy, meaningful business insights and creative vision gives Danny the ability to routinely exercise his left and right brain equally on a daily basis for his clients. His unique talents, approach and accomplishments are unmatched as he continually garners award-winning results, including nine Telly Awards for client productions. He’s driven by results, ROI, and ultimately solving clients’ challenges with innovative video solutions. Danny resides in Cumming, Georgia with his wife, Julie, and they have been blessed with four beautiful children. Danny also enjoys spending time with his family, playing golf, cooking on the Big Green Egg, flying his drone, watching movies, and racking up hours in the air with his private pilot’s license. Danny, thanks for joining us.

Danny Gonzales:
Hey, thank you for having me. Super excited to be here.

Joe Sullivan:
Awesome. So, it’s always interesting to learn a few little nuggets about people that you’d have never otherwise known. I got to ask you about your pilot’s license.

Danny Gonzales:
Yeah. That’s just an awesome hobby of mine, it’s one of those … What do they say? One of those bucket list item things. So, I got it a couple years ago after putting it off and putting it off and putting it off because I was busy. And then anyways, I said, “You know what? I don’t think I, in the last several years have gotten any less busy. So, I need to go ahead and do this.” So, got it a couple years ago and I absolutely love it. It’s a great way to kind of take your mind off things. What’s actually an interesting aside that I’ve kind of learned anecdotally after getting this license, there’s actually a lot of manufacturers, a lot of founders and CEOs that are pilots as well. Which I did not-

Joe Sullivan:
Is that right?

Danny Gonzales:
Yeah, I didn’t know that. And then it would just come up all the time in conversation. You’d go to a conference room be like, “Hey, what is that? Is that a Beach King Air?” “Oh, yeah, yeah.” “Oh, wow that’s really funny.” And, “Oh you know Bob over there, he’s got a TBM-850.” You’re like, “Oh wow, that’s cool.” And it was just this small little … I don’t know, maybe it’s because it’s part engineering and part of just the sense of freedom and they’re entrepreneurs. There’s something there I think. But yeah, I love it. It’s awesome.

Joe Sullivan:
Well, a nice way to start conversations with the right people, if there’s some overlap there. That’s pretty cool.

Danny Gonzales:
Exactly.

Joe Sullivan:
How often do you get up in the air?

Danny Gonzales:
Not enough. I would say lately it’s been maybe once a week or maybe a couple times during the month. Yeah, I don’t fly anything fancy, it’s a little two seater Diamond 20, it’s got a kind of glider profile, so it’s pretty big and lightweight, doesn’t go super fast. But it’s a lot of fun.

Joe Sullivan:
Awesome. Love it. Well, I stumbled across Industrial Sage a few years ago and I was immediately drawn to all the video content that you guys produce. Like in the intro I sort of mentioned, there’s just more and more and more video content emerging all around us everywhere we kind of are, especially online. And you kind of see two ends of the spectrum. On one end, there’s all the homemade stuff that people are shooting on their iPhones, which for a lot of purposes is great. Video is accessible to the average person now and it has its place. Recordings of Zoom meetings this year in particular ever since COVID hit.

Joe Sullivan:
And then on the other end of the spectrum, there’s always been this sort of super high budget brand story type of stuff. Multiple professional videographers, lots of post production. And there hasn’t been a lot in between I feel like. A lot of times it’s been sort of both ends of the spectrum. And I think what caught my attention with you guys is you’re bringing that professional quality video production into a really sort of human tangible authentic setting with conversations in the interviews that you do with manufacturing experts. And I noticed also not too long ago at [Modex 00:06:09] you guys interviewed something like 150 manufacturing people. So, I just love your approach there. I’d love for you to first sort of kick this off by telling our listeners a little bit about Industrial Sage and how you came to be, and then we’ll sort of dive into video production.

Danny Gonzales:
Yeah. So, Industrial Sage essentially was what I dub as the great experiment. Really, here’s the back story on it. The set that you’re seeing if you’re looking at the video, I bought a couple years ago. I guess to set the stage is Optimum Productions is traditionally a video marketing agency that I’ve had since 2007. And we kept running into challenges where companies would need to do like a town hall or do some sort of more staged type of content that would be internally for corporation or externally. And you’d go to a conference room or you’d go rent a hotel room, and it was just really hard to make it look great without spending a ton of money.

Danny Gonzales:
So, what we did is say, “Hey, why don’t we invest in something and then they can come here, we build a platform they can go off of?” But it’s one of those things that it’s really hard to sell something you can’t see. So, we said, “All right, let’s show people how you need to be shaping your content and why you need to be doing it on an ongoing basis.” And why specifically we feel that video is a huge valuable asset. And there’s multiple reasons for that, which we’ll get into.

Danny Gonzales:
We said, “Okay, let’s create our own show.” And it was either going to be basically local business stories in the Atlanta area or something that was going to be a little bit more focused. We had a lot of clients in the industrial and manufacturing space and we said, “You know what? Let’s focus on that.” Let’s go there. And that’s essentially what happened. The goal was really, it was a weekly show. We’d interview executives and different people in the sales and marketing space, in the manufacturing and industrial areas. And it just kind of grew from there.

Danny Gonzales:
And then within the last year or so, maybe even before that, started making a little bit more of a pivot. As companies started coming to us and saying, “Hey, how can you guys help us and how can we get on your platform? We’d love to come in and do a series.” Maybe not on sales and marketing, but on ERP or doing something on Lean Six Sigma or what have you. So, we have since started making a pretty big pivot. The goal of Industrial Sage now is really to be an open platform for basically companies to be able to come in and be able to contribute content. It’s for the professionals.

Danny Gonzales:
Think of a [Cheddar 00:08:39] or a BuzzFeed kind of type play. We’re kind of creating that, for the industrial space. So, that’s where I know that you guys have … You’ve got some articles you’ve put on Industrial Sage, it’s great. We’ve got video content, we have other companies that are coming in and they’re starting to kickoff their own series that will live underneath the Industrial Sage banner. That’s really the goal. I think that unfortunately, I think that the industrial manufacturing space is kind of like the redheaded stepchild, when you look at agencies typically. Marketing agencies, PR, whatnot, because they think it’s not cool and they think it’s, “Oh, it’s just dirty and grimy.” And there’s real sentiment to that because otherwise there wouldn’t be workforce development issues that they have, where they’re trying to attract new labor and new talent into the space because there’s an image. There is an image factor.

Danny Gonzales:
So, we believe … I have been in I can’t tell you how many darn warehouses and manufacturing facilities and plants, and I think that what is going on is amazing. And I just think their story has not been told well. And when you start telling it in a better way and you put a good light on it, it totally changes the perspective and it totally flips the script. That’s really essentially sort of our goal, is to really just evangelize and say, “What is happening out here is amazing.”

Joe Sullivan:
That’s awesome, I love it. Yeah, I think in a lot of ways, as somebody who’s been running an agency that is focused on manufacturing for more than 10 years now, you see in general B2B manufacturers kind of lagging behind on marketing technology. That’s kind of across the board. It’s with their websites, it’s with the idea of content production that’s educations in nature rather than brochure type of content. And I think from what I’ve seen, the same applies in video. So, what’s interesting is right now you’re sort of at this point where anybody who can embrace video right now is really going to separate themselves from others who are out there. I’d be curious to hear what your observations are around how you see video starting to enter the industrial sector more. What are companies doing? How are they using it to their advantage?

Danny Gonzales:
Absolutely, yeah. It’s a huge topic of interest right now. I mean, and it was before. But obviously because of the whole COVID situation and everything, it’s been gaslit a lot more, obviously. What we’re seeing is, there’s things kind of across the spectrum. And it depends on where these organizations are. You’ve got a lot of companies that haven’t really done a whole lot of video. And maybe what they’ve done is an identity video, some corporate identity piece or branding piece. “This is us and we’ve been around since 1953,” yada, yada, yada. With the big authoritative voice and it’s very corporate image. To product videos … And by product video, it’s very feature function kind of driven. So, it’s a little bit more like how it works versus the results that it achieves kind of thing, and the basic form of that. All the way to some of the bigger players are coming in and they’re really jumping into thought leadership type content. Storytelling, and really … If you really look at where B2C companies traditionally market, the bigger manufacturers and industrial companies are leaning towards, that’s the direction that we’re going.

Danny Gonzales:
There’s a little bit of a misnomer that a lot of people think, “Well, we’re B2B, we sell … It’s not like a consumer, so we don’t need to have all the big flashy stuff.” Well, the reality of it is, is a lot of these companies are starting to realize that you’re actually selling to another human. Yes, it may be a B2B product with a lot of zeros at the end of it. But there’s still emotion and there’s still interaction that happens there. And that should not discount. Matter of fact, you have a great opportunity to be able to stand out. So, if you can … You were mentioning a lot of people doing Zoom calls and iPhone stuff. And I think there’s a great place and there’s a super strong purpose for that, provided that it’s attached to a strategy.

Danny Gonzales:
But what happens if you really want to stand out, you got to start thinking outside of the box. And this is why you’re seeing a lot of storytelling. I think that like Grainger for example, they did a great series, this was several years ago they did this, it was Everyday Heroes. And what they would do, is they were focusing on their customers. But they weren’t talking about their customers like … It wasn’t like a traditional customer testimonial like, “Tell us how amazing we are.” It was all about you. “We want to know what you guys are doing.” And they didn’t mention really, bring in any products or even say, “Hey, Grainger’s amazing with this.” It was just focusing on the customer and just sharing their stories.

Danny Gonzales:
And I think that, if I were to boil down video content and even just marketing in general for manufacturers and industrial, where they really need to flip and really need to think is, traditionally marketing has been, “We’re amazing. We’re the 800 pound gorilla, we’ve been around since 1925 and our brand stands for … it’s all about our brand and this stands for, we’re strong and we’re consistent and we’re innovative.” The reality of it is the way the buyers buy now, that’s not how they buy. So, you have to shift your message to what’s in it for me? You have to go out and to solve your customer’s challenge to bring value to them. So, you kind of have to come at it from a different angle.

Danny Gonzales:
I think right now is a very pivotal moment where a lot of manufacturers, you’re going to see the ones who are really going to succeed, where they flip that. And they start saying, “Okay, we need to do this.” Versus the ones that say, “No, forget it. We’re going to stick to that.” So, that’s kind of what we’re seeing across the board. But there’s a lot of things sort of in between. Does that answer your question?

Joe Sullivan:
Oh, yeah. I mean, there’s so much good stuff packed into what you just said. I mean, the thing I always say is nobody cares who you are, nobody cares what you do, until they believe that you can identify with the issues they’re experiencing and the things they’re trying to achieve and the questions they’re trying to get answered. I mean, what better way to do it, than to put a camera on other people like them, who are experiencing these same issues, and let them tell their story. Make it tangible, make it very human and relatable. What happens then, is it almost seems a little counterintuitive if this is not your way of thinking about the message you broadcast to your audience. But what naturally happens is that’s what’s going to engage people and then they’re going to start looking at you.

Joe Sullivan:
If you’re the one who’s sort of providing really helpful information and examples of others like them and how they’re solving their problems, you’re the facilitator of all this helpful information now. And you’re going to be the natural first person they call when they’re trying to decide, “How are we going to solve our problem and who can help us with that?” I love everything you just said there.

Danny Gonzales:
Awesome. Yeah, no. I mean, that’s the way it’s going.

Joe Sullivan:
Yeah, totally. So, telling a story, putting the spotlight on one of your customers and not having them talk about you. So, that’s one way to do it. What else are you seeing? How else are you seeing video being used effectively by manufacturing organizations? Try to make this tangible for listeners, as much as you can.

Danny Gonzales:
Absolutely. I can tell you one thing right now … I mean, there’s a lot of different ways. Maybe I’ll focus on two. The first one is making sure, the companies are having more … their content is more wrapped around their sales enablement piece. Typically what will start off with, you know the classic clash between marketing and sales typically in the manufacturing space, marketing makes the spec sheets and does the trade show booth and that’s about it. And then you have this fight between sales and marketing. Sales saying, “Hey, I need this.” And, “Why the heck did you produce that? That doesn’t make any sense. There’s no connection, there’s no synergy, there’s no strategy.”

Danny Gonzales:
What we’re seeing is if you start getting into the mind … as a marketer, getting into the mind of your sales team and saying, “What do you guys need? What content can we provide to be able to help facilitate in the sales process,” is a huge win. Specifically maybe it’s having product videos. Maybe having what we call a bacon wrapped marketing video at the very top of the funnel for your product. And what that means is something that’s going to be really flashy and something that’s going to grab your attention. Something that’s going to be a little bit more of, and I’m not the first to use this phrase, but edutainment. Where you’re educating somebody, but it’s an entertaining way. Where it’s not just, “Here’s the best product for whatever.” You tell a story, but you wrap in the pain points and the challenges, something that’s going to draw in your viewer to say, “Ah, I’m kind of interested in this.”

Danny Gonzales:
And then as they go down the funnel or down that buying cycle, then you get a little bit more transactional. So, maybe we have a longer video that gets into the features and the functions. And then maybe you have some micro content off that, that says, “Hey, here’s a 20 second snippet of this feature.” From [inaudible 00:17:30], we’re going to talk about how easy it is to set up. Then the next one is a quick video on a case study story with a little snippet where you talk about the return on investment for the customer. “Hey, within eight months we were able to turn a profit on this and this is great.” Having that content laid out across the buying journey and the cycle so that your sales people can quickly kind of send those out to them. Or if you’re more sophisticated, using marketing automation or what have you, to be able to kind of get those messages out there. Kind of mapping out that content according to your buyer’s journey is really critical.

Danny Gonzales:
One of the tools that we love using that really help, the sales people love it as well, is having a library of content to be able to send to your prospects, but delivering it using systems like Vidyard’s GoVideo or Dub. We’re big fans of Dub. And what that is, is actually we’re now so predisposed to video a lot more, especially because of Zoom calls and all these Zoom meetings and cameras are open. I can’t tell you how many companies I’ve talked to that, owners that are 75, 80 years old and they’re like, “I never thought I’d be on a darn Zoom call. But wow, this is amazing. This is pretty cool. This is awesome.” If you can get that tool into a sales person where they can create a one-to-one video message using their webcam and just being like, “Hey Joe, I’m Danny here. Just wanted to introduce myself. We met at X, Y, Z show a year ago and I wanted to touch base with you.” Same thing you’d be doing on the phone, but doing it over video. It creates a little bit more of a one-to-one connection. It’s different. It’s differentiated.

Danny Gonzales:
How many emails do you get where there’s a little video that pops up in the email and someone’s waving at you and you’re able to deliver a message? The other great thing with that is, you’re able to be able to send that content library of stuff that you have. “Hey, Joe, we just had this great call. You were a little concerned about the ROI and how long it would take to recapture your investment after buying our machine. I wanted to send you this quick little video snippet from one of our customers X, Y, Z company over here. Here’s a quick little story.” Boom. So, sending that out there. So, it’s making it easy for the sales people. Having content that’s going to help them in the buying journey. And really ultimately help your customer. When you see that, that shows innovation. That’s interesting.

Danny Gonzales:
And if you’re getting a million emails and all this stuff, it’s going to float to the top because it’s just different. People are going to be really curious about that. That would be … I guess that would be my second thing. I guess I threw a lot in there, so there’s really more than two things. But if I were to boil it down, it’s having content that’s mapped out to your buyer’s journey, having high level content at the top that really engages and entertains. And then the third piece is having a good delivery mechanism and kind of mapping all that together. I threw a lot in there.

Joe Sullivan:
No, that’s all gold. I mean, such great thoughts there. And I completely agree with you that the tool, to your third point, using video inside your sales process. I’m a marketing guy, not a manufacturing guy, I work with manufacturers. But I have embraced this over the last year for myself. And it has just completely changed my prospecting process. Being able to reach out to somebody, the tool I use is Loom, Loom.com.

Danny Gonzales:
Okay, yep. I’ve heard of that, yep.

Joe Sullivan:
Probably pretty similar to Dub, I think you mentioned.

Danny Gonzales:
Yep.

Joe Sullivan:
It allows you to put a little Chrome extension in your browser, you click a button and then you can put the camera on yourself, you can record what’s on your screen. So, doing a simple thing like putting their website up right there on the screen, your face over it. Most of these software programs let you just sort of copy and past a link and it shows a little animated graphic. And I think what you said is so true, it breaks all the clutter. 99.9% of the emails you’re getting, especially from people that you don’t know, they’re text-based, they’re long, they’re all about them, they’re lists of capabilities. Nobody wants this. And when you can differentiate yourself and humanize yourself, put a face and a voice behind everything and just to break the clutter.

Joe Sullivan:
And the data’s emerging too, from what I’ve seen. I’ve seen things like five times the click through rates on emails that include video. So, I love that. I think the sales force of people’s teams that should be one of the first to be embracing this stuff. Because that type of video is so accessible. It’s just, anybody can do that. You kind of need a little bit more fire power to produce some more premium content. But there’s a spectrum of all this stuff, and it’s a good way to I think baby step into just sort of embracing video and getting through the technology hurdles. Right?

Danny Gonzales:
Exactly. Yeah, and it’s a great opportunity right now because people … One of the nice things to come out of the COVID thing is that people are more open to technology because you’ve been forced. I mean, really that’s what’s happened. But now it’s like, “Okay, well wait a minute. That was kind of painful, but this is actually really cool. What else is out there?” I think it’s a good opportunity that people are more adept to trying something new.

Joe Sullivan:
Totally. You mentioned Grainger earlier as one example of a series of videos they did. Are there any other specific manufacturing organizations, whether big or small, that … Whether they’re companies you’ve worked with or just others that you’ve observed that are doing some things really well with video? I want to give listeners a few companies they can go look at after this and say, “All right, let’s see what they’re doing.”

Danny Gonzales:
Sure. I’ll share a interesting story with, this was with a client of ours. They are a logistics company, actually a very small logistics company. And one of the challenges that they had, was essentially getting their message, their new pricing message was all around transparency and it was sort of a cost plus. If you’re familiar with logistics and freight, typically the rates kind of go up and down and you’re going to kind of pay whatever it is. And you could be paying a 10% … They charge you a 10% margin or a 40% or 50% or whatever. What they wanted to do is do something that was more transparent and say, “Look, we’re just looking for a 15% markup and that’s it. That’s our thing. And we’ll refund you,” and whatever.

Danny Gonzales:
They were having a really hard time trying to sell that in. Because for a lack of better words, a lot of the shippers felt like they were somehow getting screwed over. There was a lot of issues and stuff going on. So, they would talk to them and talk to them and talk to them and talk to them. And, “No, no, no. I’m not trying to screw you. It’s really true.” And they just weren’t getting it. So, they tried doing several different videos, like those whiteboard animations where the cartoon’s kind of drawing out and it just wasn’t hitting it.

Danny Gonzales:
So they came and they’re like, “Look, this is a last ditch. We’re throwing the ball to half court, the buzzer’s going. We’re just going to try this one last thing.” To make a really long story short, we kind of attacked it by going in with a storytelling piece. We said, “Hey look, let’s look at your audience, how are you guys using this?” You guys are going to use this in an in person setting, they’re going in, they’re doing pitching. They’re talking to people. This would work whether it’s over Zoom video or you’re actually in person with somebody.

Danny Gonzales:
We said, “Listen, let’s kick off that meeting with a two minute video or less that really is going to sell the value proposition.” But we have to do it differently. We have to do something, because let’s analyze how these customers are buying. They’re literally lining up meeting, after meeting, after meeting. You guys are a commodity. There isn’t one of you and that’s it. There’s thousands of you. And you’re all the same for the most part. And you’d line up all these different meetings, so what we need to do, is we need to be able to do something that’s [inaudible 00:25:36] that sticks in their mind, that creates an emotional response. Because typically when you do that, you’re able to attach a memory or something to that.

Danny Gonzales:
Knowing our audience and what we did, we created this way outside the box video, like way outside the box. The furthest thing away from your traditional corporate meeting. We call it the naked man. Basically their story was about transparency, so we literally delivered our message with a story of a guy busting into a sales meeting wearing a transparent suit. Literally, I mean, down to his underwear, transparent suit to talk about transparency.

Danny Gonzales:
When I was talking about bacon wrapping a little bit before, this is something that it’s like the reason why we call it bacon wrapping and it’s kind of a … I don’t know, whatever. You say, how do you give a dog a pill? You wrap it in bacon. If you need to be able to deliver your message, you need to make it a little bit more enticing. That edutainment thing, that’s exactly what we did there. So, put this guy in this suit and whatever and delivers the value prop, and it’s just different. The success was huge. They essentially had 20 meetings set up two weeks after they had this thing. And they used this inside their sales process and they had 100% close rate. And it was $5 million in shipping lines. And the reason why was because it helped to be able to cut through the noise and be able to help to transmit their message and get it across better.

Danny Gonzales:
Some of the feedback from some of these shippers were coming back and were like, “Yeah, that thing was hilarious. I shared it with my wife and I told these people, ‘You’ll never believe it, these guys came in and this guy was in a transparent suit dancing around on the screen and it was like what the heck is this?’ I laughed.” Some people didn’t like it. They were like, “Eh, this is kind of whatever.” They remembered it though. They remembered it. It just cut through the noise. And that I think is really what … That’s one great way. We’re talking to a lot of … There’s a lot of companies looking right now saying, “Hey, we’re trying to start video, what should we do?” And when you look at sort of, I’ll call them maybe the plain vanilla type videos, which you do need to have. All right?

Danny Gonzales:
You need to have a mixture of the stuff. But when you look at some of these things that are more storytelling, there’s more creative, it’s more than just a guy in front of a camera talking head telling you about all this stuff. And we really engage you in the story, really engage you in the pain points, when you’re able as a viewer to identify. Who we’re talking to can say, “Wow, this is really for me.” That’s what’s working.

Joe Sullivan:
That’s great, I love it. Well, are there any resources Danny, that you could point listeners to, whether on your site or elsewhere for people who are thinking here, “Okay, we got to figure this out. We got to start thinking about how to get video going.” Where would you send them?

Danny Gonzales:
First thing, what I would do is I’d recommend go to IndustrialSage.com. We have just a few videos. No, I think we have over probably 200 or 300 videos and resources there with interviews talking to different companies about what they’re doing, how they’re starting. And we have a resources tab in there and that has all kinds of webinars and other types of material. How to Use Video in the Sales Process is a great webinar that I would highly recommend. Another one we did recently was No More Trade Shows: What Next? Talking about COVID and how to respond, different tactics and strategies around there.

Danny Gonzales:
I can send you a short list of several different interviews that come to mind. We had the Chief Marketing Officer from [ADB 00:28:58] her name was Monique Elliot, she just recently moved to Schneider Electric. But she talked about basically their journey. On how when they started going from digital, what did that look like? What were they starting first and then how did they evolve? Another one is [Malika 00:29:14] [Waller 00:29:14] from Landis and Gyr talks about their digital journey as well and how they started. It’s all starting small, looking for cases, communicating that. She has a great phrase, saying, “Nail it and then scale it.” So, trying, measuring, communicating, nail it and then scale it and go from there. Those are a couple resources you can check out right now.

Joe Sullivan:
Great. I’m going to put links to those in the show notes for this episode for sure. Absolutely go look at those if you’re listening right now. I think it’s great to have some really tangible things to give you context and help you sort of picture how could we make this happen for us? So, love that.

Danny Gonzales:
Exactly.

Joe Sullivan:
Well, Danny this has been a super helpful conversation. I’ve learned a ton just listening myself and I’m sure that listeners have as well. It’s just such an important topic and I think there’s nobody better than you to talk about it with your overlapping experience in video and in manufacturing sectors. So, thank you for joining us. Can you tell people how to get in touch with you if they have questions or are interested in Industrial Sage?

Danny Gonzales:
Sure, absolutely. I’d say the best way to get in touch with me is you can check me out on LinkedIn. Danny Gonzales, check me out on my LinkedIn profile, Industrial Sage. You can go to IndustrialSage.com and contact me there, there’s an email address there somewhere on site. But I would recommend LinkedIn first.

Joe Sullivan:
Awesome. Well, Danny it’s been a pleasure having you on the show. Thanks for joining us.

Danny Gonzales:
Thank you so much.

Joe Sullivan:
For the rest of you, we hope to catch you on the next episode of the Manufacturing Executive. You’ve been listening to the Manufacturing Executive Podcast. To ensure that you never miss an episode, subscribe to the show in your favorite podcast player. If you’d like to learn more about industrial marketing and sales strategy, you’ll find an ever-expanding collection of articles, videos, guides and tools specifically for B2B manufacturers at Gorilla76.com/learn. Thank you so much for listening, until next time.

Why and when you should write emotional content

Everything we read makes us think. 

Some of what we read also makes us feel

Those pieces go by many names—features, human interest stories, profiles, even exposés. They’re stories favoring people, their struggles and their triumphs. Stories to which we can easily relate.

I call ‘em “touchy-feelies.” They’re among my favorite pieces to write. 

But we don’t write them that often in industrial B2B marketing. They violate a cardinal doctrine in our niche that emphasizes empirical results and a tangible return on investment.

After all, the technically expert engineers and executives we advise are charged with engaging buyers who value accurate, clear, concise information. That leaves little room for touchy-feelies. There is usually no compelling business case to invest time and resources in them.

And yet, they’re a vital part of making and strengthening an emotional bond between you and your audience.

You might be asking:

“Who the hell cares about emotional bonds? Why should it be a part of my content mix? Every touchy-feely we publish is a strategy-driven asset we don’t. It makes no business sense, so why would I do it?”

That’s what I’ll cover first. 

Then, we’ll talk about when emotional content should be created. Spoiler: Don’t overthink it.

I’ll wrap it up by scolding the marketing-sales-industrial complex for its chronic misappropriation of emotional content—but I do it because I care!

Why you should produce emotional content

Let’s tackle those questions you might have asked above. You ask them because you know your buyers.

And in this niche, those buyers don’t rely on emotions to make purchasing decisions. They’re rational actors—at least during business hours. So you must meet them where they are, providing straightforward, useful, relevant information that aids their decision making. 

But the joy of hearing others’ stories and the urge to tell stories of our own is innate to humanity. Even hyper-rational people seek meaning, and they do it whether they’re on the clock or not.

Emotional content delivers that meaning.

The chore for a nothing-but-the-facts manufacturing executive is to accept that the result of that delivery is different than the result of a strategic asset meant to elicit a response that is visible, measurable and actionable.

I’ll share an example. I wrote this profile of Dan Scott, a longtime construction supervisor, this spring. The Korte Company wanted to highlight Dan and a handful of former employees who were instrumental in shaping the company’s character.

Now, our mandate as marketing strategy consultants is to develop and execute plans that generate and then nurture leads with the intent that they become customers. 

So how does Dan Scott’s profile serve that purpose?

It doesn’t.  

What it does do—I hope—is widen the audience’s field of view and add depth and color to whatever flickers in their mind when they think of this company.

Some strategists assert that there are strategic benefits to emotional content, and I agree. Humanizing the inhuman is a constant thrust of message-making in our world. Touchy-feelies are a great way to do this.

But as far as I see it, there ought not to be any additional motive beyond that. 

I’ll drive this argument home with another example. The Furrow is a John Deere property in publication since 1895 and rightly understood as the prototype for modern content marketing.

I challenge any reader to identify what John Deere is trying to sell in this feature on hemp farming.

The article doesn’t even mention agricultural implements, let alone namecheck the company that made them.

So is Deere wasting an opportunity?

No. Deere uses The Furrow to tell stories for their own sake. 

It doesn’t drive more traffic, generate leads or spur revenue growth. It trades in a different currency, one you can’t see or measure but you know it when you feel it.

When you should write emotional content

Any time you want.

There, done.

Excessive strategic calculation isn’t necessary.

Granted, companies like to share emotional content on “occasions” such as important company milestones or holidays or when founders die. Those are worthy circumstances indeed, but then there’s never a bad time to tell a good story.

Because if it’s a genuinely good story, it will stay good regardless of the effort you put into deciding the timing, venue or manner of publication. Put all the thought into it that you want, but I don’t think it moves the needle that much.

In fact, thinking or planning too hard introduces the risk that you’ll place the burden of added expectations on a story that it should not be expected to bear. 

Ready? I’m going to roast my industry in the next section.

Emotional content must be free to breathe for it to hit the mark

Let’s get back to motive. What do we want to happen?

To drive search traffic, we produce content with relevant keywords and phrases. 

To educate buyers, we produce well-researched content that addresses known problems and offers pathways to solve them.

But what about the touchy-feelies? What do you want that content to do? How much weight should it be expected to carry?

Consider this through the lens of the red ink someone in the C-suite might splash all over a first draft.

“You never mention our company’s name,” they may say. Or, “Where’s the call to action?” Or maybe, “How does this connect with our product/service?” Or, this one’s my favorite: “I’m not seeing a strong enough connection to our brand here.”

Those are examples of the added expectations I mentioned. It’s like when you’re stopped at a red light and someone in a ski mask hops into the passenger seat, jams a Glock into your ribcage and tells you to drive.

It’s a hijacking, plain and simple.

Why do we attach sales-y riders to content like this? If we’re going to produce what I argue is a work of art, why pollute it with business? When we treat touchy-feelies like drug mules, readers are right to be appalled. 

We owe more to the subject of an emotional content piece than to cheapen it in this way. And we owe more to our readers than to invade their sacred emotional territory with ulterior motives.

All right, that was the rant. 

Here’s the bottom line:

You should produce emotional content. You should do it any time you want to. Good stories should be told on their own merits. They won’t juice your KPIs, but they will have a profound impact…

…as long as you honor these stories and the people who will read them.

PODCAST: Stop Giving Away Engineering and Consulting Services for Free With Joe Sullivan

Stop giving away engineering for free

The Manufacturing Executive: Episode 4

Listen to this episode here or on Apple Podcasts, Spotify, Stitcher or Google Podcasts.

powered by Sounder

Episode show notes

I did something a little different in this episode. As opposed to bringing in an outside guest and interviewing them, I did a solocast.

It’s just you and me talking about things I’ve learned while serving the industrial sector for the last eight-plus years as a sales and marketing consultant.

Today, I discuss how to stop giving away engineering and consulting services for free.

Here are some of my thoughts from this episode:

  • How to package your expertise so you don’t go down these long time-suck paths where you give away free insight and engineering work
  • Examples of how paid engagement can work, including a site audit, a second opinion service, a research report, and a product sample
  • An idea I call “The Spectrum of Value Creation”… And how your buyer’s mindset changes when you approach them this way (and why that’s a great thing for your business!)

To ensure that you never miss an episode of The Manufacturing Show, subscribe on Apple Podcasts, Spotify, Stitcher or Google Podcasts.

Transcript of episode

Manufacturers who sell complex engineering-driven solutions are often giving away hours upon hours of technical expertise upfront for free, and just to win the job.

Welcome to the Manufacturing Executive podcast, where we explore the strategies and experiences that are driving midsize manufacturers forward. Here you’ll discover new insights from passionate manufacturing leaders who have compelling stories to share about their successes and struggles. And you’ll learn from B2B sales and marketing experts about how to apply actionable business development strategies inside your business. Let’s get into the show.

Welcome to another episode of the Manufacturing Executive podcast. I’m Joe Sullivan, your host, and the cofounder of the industrial marketing agency Gorilla 76. So, I’m going to do something a little bit different today, and I intend to do this from time to time, maybe once a month or so would be my goal. But what I’m going to be doing here is recording a solo cast or a one person episode. This is just me as opposed to bringing in an outside guest and interviewing them. I’m going to lean on some of the things that I’ve learned serving the industrial sector for say the last eight plus years as a sales and marketing consultant and agency co-owner. And bring some of the topics to the table here that have really resonated, have helped manufacturers that we’ve consulted take big steps forward.

And the first of those topics today has been one that, it’s a more recent topic for me, but it’s really taken off. I’ve been a guest on other podcasts talking about this. I’ve written a series of… well, two articles. A set of two articles on the topic. A lot of the content I’ve posted on LinkedIn has really resonated. And so, I thought it would make a new brain or topic here for a solo cast.

And so, the topic is essentially this, how to stop giving away engineering and consulting for free. And this is a pattern that I’ve started seeing with manufacturers as we consult them. Really what’s going on here is manufacturers who sell complex engineering driven solutions are often giving away hours upon hours of technical expertise upfront for free and just to win the job. This is before there’s ever a purchase order with the customer, they’re diving in and they’re leaning on some of their best internal people to demonstrate that we’re capable of doing this. We can help show you what the solution looks like and to earn trust so that this potential customer winds up saying, “Yeah, you’re the ones for us. We’re going to write the check.”

And I understand why you did this and why you do this if you do it because frankly, there are a lot of parallels to how marketing agencies operate. And we’ve been in this trap in the past too. Now, we’ve figured out for ourselves how to get out of it and to start charging for that expertise in a way that’s not driving away potential opportunities, but actually bringing in more of them and better ones too. And I can’t help but think that the same idea of bringing in a new customer through a small paid consulting engagement can be the way to earn their business for the longterm, for the bigger engagement that you really want to sell.

So, you might be sitting here thinking, not in our industry, it doesn’t work here. The challenges that our customers face are super complicated, and we can’t give them an off the shelf solution. Everything needs to be custom and delivered to them upfront in a very custom way. And we have to earn their respect and attention first. And yeah, that may be true. And it probably is true for a lot of you, but it doesn’t mean you have to give it away for free. So, bear with me here and I’m going to get into it. And I’m hoping that you walk away from here at least thinking, huh, I wonder if this is something we should explore. I wonder if we could think about the way we approach new business a little bit differently, and maybe figure out how to package our expertise in a way that we don’t have to go down these long time suck paths of giving away all this free insight and engineering work or whatever that means for you.

So, let’s get into it here. So, I want to start here by drawing a little bit of a parallel to the way a marketing agency works because it’s really not all that different. If what your customers buy is a complex big ticket solution that requires a consultative sales process, it’s probably a long buying process or probably multiple people involved on their end from engineers to plant managers, to CEOs, to procurement. If all of that is generally true for your business, that you’re not selling a widget off the shelf, then I think this applies to you. And so, the way what I’ve seen for our business over the years is, the expectation is we’re going to come in there and maybe listen to the customer for an hour on a call. And then we’re going to dive into this long process of putting together an unpaid proposal, where I’m pulling in strategists and writers and experts from my team to help figure out what solution makes the most sense for this customer.

And in the meantime, it’s distracting their time from our paying customers. There’s going to be a good chance we don’t win the work anyway, and it’s going to be hard to get the attention of the right people on the customer’s end if we’re just sort of another vendor who’s quoting the job. So, we kind of looked at this a few years ago and said, “Hold on a second here. I think we need to be doing this differently. We need to be paid for this expertise and we need the customer to have some skin in the game, or we’re just going to be another interchangeable company. And it’s going to be very hard to differentiate ourselves from anybody else.”

So, my idea here and what we have done for ourselves with success and what we’ve started helping other manufacturing organizations figure out how to do for themselves is essentially [inaudible 00:06:12] take the first 1% or 3% or 5% of what your flagship engagement you’re generally trying to sell would be, and design and brand a… call it the, your company diagnostic. Or something along those lines where this is step one in any new customer engagement, it always starts the same way. You do some sort of analysis where you’re putting your best people on it because you can afford to, since you’re being paid for it. And you’re helping the customer figure out what solution makes the most sense for them.

And so, I think this could be a lot of different things. And a few examples of the form that this paid engagement could take would be one, maybe a site audit. If you’re say an automation company or somebody who builds custom machinery, can you get on site, be paid to do so? But have a very defined process for coming in and evaluating A, B, C and D leaving, and then providing a report on everything you found and a set of recommendations along with expected ROI or how it would transform operating efficiency on the floor or whatever that might be.

But a site audit would be a great way to do this. And maybe you could charge, even if it’s a few thousand dollars for it. Now you’re covering the cost of sending your person, put them on an airplane, sending them across the country and spending a day in the facility and their time afterwards. I don’t know what the right price tag is for you, but anything is better than zero. I’ll talk about why in a few minutes. I’ll talk about why your customer is probably more open to this idea than you may expect.

Another thing to do would be a second opinion service. We’ve seen this work well in the construction industry, and I think it could work well with manufacturers as well. Where if you think about it, the cost of switching a service providers often enough to delay change. So rather than asking a potential customer to completely make the switch from whoever’s been serving them for years, you can come in and do a small second opinion service and get paid a small fee for that, so that it can kind of baby step in with you, but see your thinking and your expertise come to light. So, that’s another way to do it.

Some kind of paid consultation could be another way. Maybe it’s an hour long free consultation over the phone, followed by some kind of paid consultation or engagement where you can help them figure out the solution and not have to worry about sucking your team’s time away from other paying work. We do something like this for our clients or our future customers that we call the industrial marketing roadmap, where we’ve defined a very specific process. There’s a discovery survey that’s filled out ahead of time. There’s a half day workshop with leadership. There’s a couple of weeks of research and there’s delivery of a plan, what’s your version of that?

Another thing you could do would be a research report. How about conducting some investigative work to explore a variety of solutions, and how could you package up those insights or maybe there’s customer interviews involved there. Where you actually interview existing and past customers of theirs and try to understand what actually matters to them, and then deliver all of that recorded audio files and a summary report to help them figure out what maybe, what changes they need to make, what direction they need to go in. Another thing you could do is knowledge transfer. Could you rather than coming in and doing all the work for them could you arm some of their team members to tackle some of the low hanging fruit and in the process of doing this, so you establish yourself as an expert consultant. So, that’s another way.

Or maybe a product sample. Some of you listening probably give our product samples already depending on the industry you’re in. We work with some companies in packaging and label manufacturing, and that’s a common practice for them. But maybe in your business there’s a way to do a small version, whether it’s free or not free, could you create a small version of a prototype I guess would be another thing to do, but actually be paid for that. So, those are kind of some ideas for what that… taking that first few percentage points of the bigger engagement could be and delivering it in a paid way.

Now I want to shift gears here for a second, because I think that’s one of the early steps, but I think that there’s this concept that I have sort of named the spectrum of value creation. And if you think about all the ways you could create value for your customers, most manufacturers that I see are either they’re doing something like a free consultation like we’ve talked about here. Giving away all this expertise for free, free engineering work. And then there’s the big flagship implementation which is probably some 50,000 to $1 million solution. Whether it’s a product or some service that you provide, but it’s the big sort of flagship thing that you really want to sell, and there’s very little between that.

And so, what I would challenge you to do is say, almost you draw a horizontal line and put that free consultation somewhere towards the left side, not all the way to the left. Put that flagship implementation all the way to the right as the biggest thing. The biggest way you could create value for a potential customer. And then what you need to do is start filling in the gaps between that. So, if you think about all the expertise and experience your team has before you would offer a free consultation, there are other ways you could get your customers engaged with your company. And processing all this knowledge you have and consuming the insights you have to offer. And I think the best way to do that is to simply publish articles on your site. It’s the smallest possible transaction between a prospect and your company.

If you can say, what are the most common questions we get and answer them in the form of say 500 word blog posts or articles published them on your site. Now you’re creating an opportunity for somebody to see the way you think and the problems you’re capable of solving to demonstrate you’ve seen these issues before, and there are different ways to solve them, but here are some of those options. So many manufacturer websites are all about themselves, and it’s just like a digital brochure and nobody really cares about that until they believe you understand their situation and have solved their types of problems.

So, the smallest simplest way you can create value for somebody on the path to the bigger sale is a free published article or short video of you talking, or a webinar you could record for example, so that’s one thing. I think the next step in terms of creating value would be what we’d call a gated resource or something that would require somebody to submit some contact information. And so, now they’re sort of giving you permission to market to them or to pick up the phone and call them because you’re trading them something of value. And that could be a tool like an ROI calculator. It could be asking them to register for a webinar or subscribe to your newsletter, a lot of different ways to do this.

But now you’re sort of moving into this place where your prospect is essentially paying for something, but they’re not paying with cash they’re paying with the currency of online lead generation, which is their contact information. Okay. And then from there, as you start moving more to the right on this spectrum of ways you can create value. Then maybe there is that free consultation. But instead of 40 hours worth of free engineering work that you give away, maybe it’s a one hour call with one of your senior engineers to sort of dive into the situation and determine whether there’s a fit, and to sort of introduce the paid baby step consultation that would follow.

So, that would be the next one, right? The paid consultation, your version of that industrial marketing roadmap that we do, that I described, brand it. Call it the, your company diagnostic or the your company audit or whatever you want to put on it, but think about what all the steps are and clearly articulate those. Create a little PDF and hopefully a page on your website that can sort of say, this is the process everybody goes through with us. This is how much it costs. This is exactly what you can expect to get out of it and from there, we’ll help you determine how to proceed, how to implement this. So, that’s the next one.

And then I think there’s, then you start moving towards the bigger engagements. Once you’ve done those types, that sort of preliminary engagement now you’re opening up the door to a bigger engagement, the flagship thing you sell. So, I think there are a lot of benefits to doing things this way and the mindset of your buyer is just going to change when you can engage them in different ways than just, here’s this free consultation. And then here’s this huge engagement with nothing in between. And so, some of the things that I think are going to change are A, the sale is going to start before you even talk. Your future customers are going to buy on their schedule not yours.

So, if you can create an opportunity to build trust with your customers and your prospects before they’re ready to talk, well, they’re going to consume sort of bite after little bite of your expertise in the form of articles or videos or webinars or white papers or podcasts like this, or whatever medium you choose. This is your chance to start earning their attention before they’re ready to pick up the phone. So, the sales starts before you talk is the first benefit. The second benefit or way that the mindset of your customers is going to change is they all of a sudden have skin in the game that is going to earn the attention of decision makers. And this is really the biggest surprise that I found when we started operating this way ourselves.

Before we had this paid $5,000 industrial marketing roadmap engagement, and we were giving away all this expertise for free which really wasn’t that different process-wise it was just, it was free. Well, the CEO very rarely came to the table. The people we wanted at that meeting would sometimes show up and sometimes not. Ultimately procurement was haggling with us over price if we were being considered for the job. And we were just another vendor, that was the reality. We were another vendor. All of a sudden when we decided we were going to put a price tag on this to find the process, we all of a sudden earned the attention of the C-suite. The VP of sales would be there. The CEO and president would be there. They would communicate to the rest of their team that this is important. So, having some skin in the game just completely changes the way you’re going to be perceived as an expert rather than a vendor.

The third benefit or mindset shift is that now you can give it your all. So, when you’re giving away all this free consulting or engineering, it’s a massive time suck on your most valuable resources. Because of course you want to put your best people on it, your most experienced people to help figure out what the solution should be. But you can’t really do that when you can give the future customer who’s not paying you that your full attention in a lot of cases, because you need the time of those people on paid engagements. But all of a sudden when you’re getting paid for these engagements, you can afford to budget time of some of your experts to give this discovery process or this pre-engineering process the time that it really requires to do it well, and to come up with a solution that makes the most sense, so there’s that.

Number four, the fourth benefit or mindset shift here is your customer is not going to want to backtrack. So, one of the biggest objections that I’ve heard when I sort of talk about this process of not giving away consulting for free is that people are afraid that their prospects are going to take all this information that was presented to them, and then go elsewhere with it, and hire somebody else to actually implement the remaining 95% of that job when you’ve sort of done the first 5% at a smaller fee. But here’s the reality, this is my observation. This is what I’ve seen for us. This is what I see happening for other companies. If you have spent hours upon hours working with that future customer to arrive at the perfect customized solution, how likely are they really going to be to say, I think I’m going to go elsewhere and see who else could implement this for me instead of you. I’m going to go see if I can get the low bid from somebody else.

And even in the unlikely scenario that they do go elsewhere, it’s okay because you’ve been fairly compensated for what you have done to date. So, if they want to run in the other direction, whatever, right? It probably wasn’t the right fit for you anyway. So, that’s sort of the way I offset the objection that, well, what if they don’t hire us? What if we don’t ask for the full project upfront? Probably not going to happen, probably not a problem you’re going to run into.

And then the fifth point or benefit mindset shift that I’ve sort of touched on already is just this idea that you are no longer seen as a vendor. If the stakeholders are now at the table from the beginning, you have the opportunity to earn their trust and attention not just the lower level people at the company and the procurement team. You’ve got the C-suite there, you’ve got the decision makers there and imagine all the time you’ve been able to spend with them now influencing their buying process as opposed to just shooting another proposal out there at them, or some bank of engineering work that you gave away for free along with a whole bunch of other companies that did the same. So, it’s really a differentiator in terms of positioning yourself as the true expert.

So, that pretty much sums it up. I hope this was helpful. I hope this at least got you thinking about whether the way you’ve always been doing it is really the way you should continue doing it. We have a few articles like I said, that we’ve written on this topic. I will link to those in the show notes. So, that’s all for today. Thank you for joining us. I hope it was helpful and we will hope to see you next time on the next episode of the Manufacturing Executive podcast.

You’ve been listening to the Manufacturing Executive podcast. To ensure that you never miss an episode, subscribe to the show in your favorite podcast player. If you’d like to learn more about industrial marketing and sales strategy, you’ll find an ever expanding collection of articles, videos, guides, and tools specifically for B2B manufacturers at gorilla76.com/learn. Thank you so much for listening, until next time.

How to hire a marketing director for your manufacturing company

marketing-director

Lately, we’ve been given an interesting opportunity. And not just on one occasion, but on a few. In short, clients are asking us to help them vet candidates for an internal marketing hire.

Knowing that about 50% of new hires fail, this always makes us nervous. The last thing we want to do is to point a client in the wrong direction – especially for a decision that can be as expensive as a bad hire.

In this article, we’ll detail some things that will give you the best possible chance for success as you look to hire a marketing lead. Is it a guarantee that you’ll nail your hire? Of course not. That’s an impossible promise. But we do know that you’ll at least have a great shot at a great hire.

This is not a comprehensive list. And there’s definitely room for improvement (I’d love if you’d email me anything you’d add). But it’s reflective of our process, and overall, we’ve done a good job of hiring at Gorilla. Employees are happy, clients are happy and our turnover rate is low (0% in 2020!).

Build your pipeline

This is obviously big. And we could probably write a book about it at this point. But in short, if you don’t have a good pipeline of candidates, you’re going to be facing an uphill battle from day one.

While your industry is totally different than ours, we do know how marketers operate and how they go about looking for jobs. So when it comes to building a pipeline, we have a few thoughts that should help you in your process.

First, we keep all of our jobs open at all times. This doesn’t mean we’re actively hiring for them all (or any) and we clearly explain that on our careers page. But it does mean that we’re always collecting resumes and applications. Then, when it’s time to actually hire, we’ve got a nice pool of folks to pull from. We’re vigilant about staying on top of all applications and responding to each submission we get. In our correspondence with all applicants, we also encourage them to check us out on the social channels (especially Instagram and LinkedIn), so that they can start to see what our culture is like. It’s similar to nurturing contacts in your sales funnel – and we’ve found it to work well in hiring.

We also pay careful attention to the online job forums/channels. Glassdoor, Indeed, LinkedIn — the usual suspects. Ensuring our company is well-represented in those places ensures that when it’s time to hire, we’ve got our ducks in a row.

And of course, we’re always making notes of impressive folks we meet in the industry and community. While there might not be an opportunity now, there’s always a chance that something could line up down the road. And no – we don’t go to many networking events. We’ve already served that sentence early on. We’re simply always on the lookout for educated, driven, interesting people. Often those make great marketers.

Background of ideal candidates

What I’ve learned in marketing, especially recently, is sometimes the best candidates do not come from the traditional marketing background.

For instance, we hired someone this year who was a barista before working at Gorilla. However, in his downtime, he was teaching himself everything there was to know about digital marketing, writing for the web, and the ins and outs of strategy. We loved his initiative and his drive to grow. Now, he’s a full-fledged marketer contributing much to our company’s success.

But, as we know in the business world, the best indicators of future success are often told on a resume in the form of previous experience and educational background. So finding someone with five-plus years of relevant experience and a degree from a good business or journalism school is ideal. These are folks that have likely known, for a long time, that they have a deep interest in marketing, advertising, writing and business.

Strong writer

Your future marketing lead must be a strong writer. It’s the foundation of all communication. And marketing, well, it’s a lot of communication. With the exception of designers and developers, there’s no room for poor writing if you’re a marketer. And even these positions still must be able to communicate clearly.

As candidates apply, look for errors, big or small, in their resumes, applications and in any communication they have with you. If they’re sloppy early, they’ll likely be sloppy later on, and for this role, that’s a big risk to be taking. Additionally, look for writing that’s easy (and even enjoyable) to read. We all know the difference at this point so hire accordingly.

Clear, concise, error-free writing is a non-negotiable, as it will provide a better, more efficient, more effective process. I’m proud to say that all of our employees are strong writers…and only four of whom are required to be such by job title.

Wanted: strategic critical thinkers

At Gorilla, you’ll notice that all of our positions have the word “Thinker” in the title. This wasn’t an accident or just some quirky agency thing – it’s something we simply have to have in all of our employees.

No matter the role, all of our employees must be able to think strategically first and foremost. We of course want executors and doers, but it’s a dealbreaker if someone doesn’t think before they act. What’s the old adage – measure twice, cut once? Yep, that applies to the marketers of the world as well.

As you evaluate critical thinking skills, observe the questions the applicant asks of you. We always tell people we’re interviewing that it’s a two-way interview. They need to be interviewing us as much as we’re interviewing them. If they don’t, it communicates that they might not be critical thinkers. And that gives us major pause. After all, how do we get better for our clients, our employees and our community if we’re not thinking critically?

Self-starter…

If you have someone that’s going to truly be guiding your marketing efforts and related sales efforts, they need to be a self-starter and need to be thinking far beyond what you’re asking of them.

Look for candidates that are challenging themselves in different ways. Maybe they’re training for a marathon, maybe they’re contributing regularly to a blog, maybe they’re taking course upon course to make themselves smarter. Regardless of how it manifests, you need to find someone that is looking to always improve. Anything less, and you’ll be putting the wrong person in the wrong seat. What books have they read? What marketers do they follow? What podcasts do they listen to…and do they really listen to them?

We need folks who are hungry. And to be successful in marketing, this is a non-negotiable. Marketing is always evolving. If you don’t have someone in the role that is constantly wanting to learn and to stay on top of trends, you’re not in a position for success. Self-starter or bust for this role.

…and constant learner

As Mark Twain once said, “If you don’t like the trends in marketing now, just wait a few minutes.” Or was that his quote about the weather? Either way, you get the idea.

Literally, our industry is changing by the day. I could hit publish on an article tonight and tomorrow it could be irrelevant. That’s probably a little drastic, but it could happen. New products, new tools, new updates from Google, new social channels – the marketing world is evolving at an insanely fast pace. If your marketing hire can’t stay on top of it all, you’re up a creek without a paddle.

Being a constant learner is frankly the number one thing we’re looking for. Anything less, and you’re hiring a dinosaur. And they’re extinct.

The importance of tactical experience

No one is going to be a one-stop shop when it comes to a marketing skillset. In fact, that’s why agencies like ours exist (more on that and why you should hire an agency shortly).

Often, we see job postings trying to attract someone that can design, write, code, manage a PPC campaign, think…

STOP. It ain’t happenin’.

These people don’t actually exist. They’re unicorns. But, finding someone that understands these components at a base level, and maybe even has experience managing a few of them, is a must. If they can’t walk the walk, they won’t be able to talk the talk. So some tactical experience is a huge plus.

Regardless of the actual tactical experience they do have, they must be tech-savvy. No, they don’t have to be able to code a website from scratch. But if they’re asking for help logging into Facebook, their time may have passed. The digital marketing world will not be kind to them.

Works well with others…

Meaning, “Will they want to work with Gorilla or an agency like Gorilla?” Some internal marketing folks simply aren’t comfortable working with outside help which can make things tough. Sure, in a perfect world, you have an entire agency in-house: strategist, developer, writer, designer, project manager, the works. But, those salaries and benefits start adding up fast. And what might cost you $100,000 to $200,000 in agency fees quickly turns into $350,000-plus in employee costs. Oh, and did I mention you have to manage it all?

Obviously we’re in the agency business, so our opinion might be biased. That said, the math, and quality of work, doesn’t lie. Agencies are cheaper and almost always do better work. Having a marketing director that can work well with an agency is a must. It’s important that you trust their ability to do such — and you need to grant them the power to give approval and make decisions.

Let us help

By no means are we hiring experts. But, we have had a lot of success in this area. The employees we have are outstanding and we’ve gotten a ton of interest from others wanting to work at Gorilla. If we can ever give you an opinion or talk through your process, please let us know. Hell, we just might even have someone in our system who could be a good fit for you.

PODCAST: The Power of the CAD Model With Adam Beck

The Manufacturing Executive Podcast Adam Beck

The Manufacturing Executive: Episode 3

Listen to this episode here or on Apple Podcasts, Spotify, Stitcher or Google Podcasts.

powered by Sounder

Episode show notes

Are you really doing content marketing if you don’t create white papers, write blog posts, and deliver long speeches about the benefits of your product? Can a CAD model help educate your prospective buyers just as effectively as a nice, fat e-book can?

On this episode of The Manufacturing Executive Show, Adam Beck, Director of Marketing at CADENAS PARTsolutions, talked about how manufacturers can create value for their audiences (and generate qualified leads for themselves) by making CAD models available for download on their websites.

Here’s what we discussed with Adam:

  • How to protect real manufacturing models while using a CAD model as a form of content marketing
  • The day-long event he put on for content marketers in industrial manufacturing
  • How to use CAD files as a marketing tool

To ensure that you never miss an episode of The Manufacturing Executive, subscribe on Apple Podcasts, Spotify, Stitcher or Google Podcasts.

Transcript of episode

Joe Sullivan:
Welcome to the Manufacturing Executive podcast. I’m Joe Sullivan, your host, and a co-founder of the industrial marketing agency Gorilla 76. We have another really interesting guest today. Adam Beck is the director of marketing at CADENAS PARTsolutions. A marketer for nearly 20 years, Adam is working to transform industrial marketing from, “Look at me,” to, “Look at my customer.” Adam’s all about going above and beyond to ensure his customer has the best possible experience. This often isn’t considered a direct function of marketing, but Adam knows that those relationships pay dividends into the future. Adam believes that nobody cares about the features and benefits. Instead, people care about how something has transformed a business, a process, or a life. By showing how smart, creative, and forward thinking his customers are, Adam can tell a story which is far more relevant and interesting, and puts everyone in a position for success. And that’s exactly why we have him here on the show today. So on that note, Adam, thanks for joining us.

Adam Beck:
Thanks for having me.

Joe Sullivan:
Absolutely. Well, I can’t help but notice, in this crazy era where we’re all working from wherever we’re able to work from, what’s going on in your background there. What’s the story behind the guitars.

Adam Beck:
Yeah. We’re in my basement, extra bedroom slash closet, which also happens to have my guitar collection up there on the wall. I play guitar, but I also make guitars for myself from… It’s just one of those things. I go on a vacation and buy a hunk of wood and come home and make a guitar, and that’s my souvenir. So that’s a couple of them hanging on the wall. Yeah.

Joe Sullivan:
That’s awesome. Wow. What a hobby. I know you’ve been a builder of many things. Personally and professionally, I suppose, being a manufacturing guy, but tell us a little bit about yourself and your background.

Adam Beck:
Yeah. So I’ve worked as a marketer for roughly 20 years. I did have about a three year stint in there where I went and was a car builder out in California. So I got to see and be hands on, and really making a thing from the ground up. And I think that helps give me a different understanding of the approach to parts and components and the overall end product of a manufacturer or a builder.

Joe Sullivan:
Yeah. Totally makes sense. I appreciate you turning the camera on despite, it’s funny, what’s in the background these days of everybody’s Zoom meetings and everything. And I know from talking to you prior to hitting record here, that somewhere upstairs, you’ve got a couple of crazy kids running around, which is familiar to me as well. So you lock yourself wherever you can, I guess.

Adam Beck:
Yeah. My wife is on duty right now, on her shift. We basically tag in and out all day. I do have a two year old that has recently mastered jumping, and that’s his preferred mode of transportation. So if it sounds like there’s an earthquake directly above us, that’s what’s going on.

Joe Sullivan:
Great. Love it.

Adam Beck:
Yeah.

Joe Sullivan:
Awesome. Well, do it however we can these days.

Adam Beck:
Yeah.

Joe Sullivan:
Awesome. You and I first met, I think it was about a year ago or so. And what really caught my attention was CADENAS was in the throes of planning the first ever industrial marketing summit. And so first I want to talk a little bit about that. But can you give me a little bit of background first about your company, CADENAS PARTsolutions? I think you guys are doing some really interesting, and innovative things in the manufacturing space.

Adam Beck:
Yeah. So really to take it even a step more removed from that, engineers have a difficult job and that’s how we help manufacturers. We help them. These engineers are out there, they have to come up with creative designs, but they also have all these parts and pieces that go into that design. Things that they don’t necessarily make. We kind of describe it as a Lego set or whatever, if you’re snapping Legos together, you can make something pretty quick. If you had to create every Lego in the process, that really slows down the process of making that, and sort of stifles creativity.

Adam Beck:
So a lot of engineers are online, they’re hunting for parts, they need bearings, and gears, and motors, or a bench, or a receptacle, if they’re an architect. Whatever that thing is that they need to put in their greater design, they’re hunting for them online. They’re looking on manufacturer’s websites and they want to find those models, or a file and grab it, make sure it’s the correct one, and they want to put it into their design and move on. And that’s what we do. We help manufacturers create a safe representation of their products that they can put on their website. It’s super portable. It’s safe because all the IP that you could… You can’t manufacture that product from that, it’s a representation to go inside of another model. And it enables outputs in a 150 formats. So they can make sure that everyone in their audience gets exactly what they need. And it’s a great lead-gen tool, but it’s also a customer service tool.

Joe Sullivan:
Yeah. It’s super interesting, because it’s something I imagine a lot of manufacturers struggle with, is how do we deal with CAD models? We know our customers want them, but it’s a lot of work to have a solution for this online, from scratch. And so you have this packaged solution that can be deployed.

Adam Beck:
Yeah. So if a manufacturer was going to put up CAD models on their website, there’s so many hurdles there. It’s just the volume formats. You don’t want to put up your real manufacturing models, because someone could take that down and take it and make it. So you want to have all your IP pulled out of it. And then the timing and delivery and all of that, it all becomes a challenge and it starts to snowball. And that’s where we have our tool. It’s a cloud-based application. And we don’t really have CAD models. We have the recipe for each of those CAD models, which is what makes it lightweight, and portable. And you can put this on a website without it being this huge storage situation.

Adam Beck:
An engineer looks at it on the website, spins it around. It comes with the 3D preview. When they’re happy with it, they hit download. And that starts a instance of that actual CAD tool in the cloud, which generates a model on the fly, has a configured part number and all that. And they get an instant download. The exchange is, the engineer or architect leaves their email address. So it’s an understood content marketing tactic exchange.

Joe Sullivan:
Yeah. But so unique. It’s almost like this overlap in this area of their product and content marketing, which is something I don’t know if I’ve really seen too often. It’s something that stood out. When I first saw the CADENAS website, and I was looking at your solution and trying to understand exactly what it was. Because it’s the idea of say somebody downloading an ebook, or signing up for a webinar. It’s a very similar concept there. And something that a lot of B2B companies are doing. Not so many doing it well, maybe. But you’re essentially allowing your customers to create value for their customers in a way that most companies just wouldn’t even know where to begin with, I guess.

Adam Beck:
Yeah. I think the closest analog he could maybe have is the music industry. If a band is giving away a free download of a song to promote their album or their tour, it’s sort of in the vein they kind of have to give the product away, which is a difference. This is, it’s almost a SoftSale. We’ve done surveys over the years, four or five times, and our manufacturer partners tell us again and again, that this it’s not always a one-to-one. Usually we see that 80% of the time when a engineer downloads that model, they do buy it. It’s sometimes a six, eight, 12 month lead time, but they can see and they can forecast and they can see how this is going to affect their business into the future.

Joe Sullivan:
Yeah. That makes sense. I was kind of starting to mention a few minutes ago here that, about this time last year when we first talked, you were planning the first ever Industrial Marketing Summit, which was sort of an event that was tacked on to content marketing world. A big marketing industry event, for any of our listeners who aren’t familiar with that, that takes place in Cleveland every year. Right? And what was interesting is, and I think something that just caught my attention about you guys and your philosophy, personally, is the idea of creating value for your audience, as opposed to just, I always describe it as blasting a megaphone in their ears. And talking about, “Me, me, me.” And here’s all this stuff we do and things we sell and why you should buy from us.

Joe Sullivan:
And you guys clearly were taking a different approach. And so it’s one thing to publish blog posts, or to record some short videos of yourself. But you guys want as far as to say, “We’re going to create an entire event just to educate our customers, prospects, and really the manufacturing industry around the idea of how to market your company here in the industrial sector.” And so we’d love to hear just sort of what your inspiration was. And tell us a little bit about how that event played out, maybe.

Adam Beck:
Yeah. So our inspiration was that I was looking for events to have the typical trade show booth at. And I was going to all kinds of marketing events. And I couldn’t find anything specifically in the industrial marketing niche. There was some B2B things, and there was some that were way, way B2C, which that’s so different marketing, a lot of times, from what an industrial manufacturer is doing. So we started kicking the idea around. And Content Marketing World seemed to have a really good industrial audience already in attendance. And so we started talking with them, what if we had a day of content? And we found some manufacturers and other marketers and just put them in the forefront, and let them talk and create this more is more atmosphere. Where they can all share ideas and meet each other and talk about successes they’ve had and failures they’ve had and ways that they can all grow their business.

Joe Sullivan:
That’s great. And so tell me, what was the turnout? Did the event go well? Anything you learned from it?

Adam Beck:
Yeah. It was a really good turnout. So we had two days of… We had a big cocktail party the night before, and everybody came out, and we had pizza. And that was a lot of fun, because a lot of our team is virtual. A lot of our clients are all over the country. Some are all over the world. And it was a great time just to get everybody together and put a lot of faces with names. There’s some people we hadn’t even met in person before, which is pretty fantastic to do that. And then the next day we had basically six hours of content, five speakers, and about 150 people at that last year.

Adam Beck:
So it was a great opportunity to just see how some of these… We have companies of all sizes. We have companies that have 10 products and we have companies that have 10 trillion products, once you look at all the configurations. We have companies with huge marketing departments, and we have companies without a marketing department. So it was really cool to compare and contrast and hear them share ideas and kick new, fresh ideas around about how they can all grow their business.

Joe Sullivan:
Yeah. It makes sense. And I love bringing together people with different perspectives, and sort of using it as a time and place to purely educate. It’s one thing to do a live webinar, everybody attends webinars where it’s really just a product pitch. Right? Sort of in disguise. And that’s not what this was.

Adam Beck:
Yeah. No, we didn’t even take the stage. Yeah. I went up as a MC. And it’s a shift. It’s a philosophy shift. I think there’s a lot of times where four or five, 10 years ago, if someone from our company would have given an hour pitch about our features and benefits, and it’s just tiring, nobody wants to hear it. They want to hear about it in the application. They want to hear how the rubber hits the road, and what that did for somebody. Otherwise, it’s just kind of all fluff and a bulleted list. And it’s tough to make it interesting.

Joe Sullivan:
Yeah. You said it kind of in the intro that you sent over to me, that people are not interested in hearing about features and benefits. At least not right away. Right? They trying to solve a problem. Right?

Adam Beck:
Yeah. As a marketer, I have 500 blog posts that I’ve created on our website over the last eight or so years. If I was talking about features and benefits, every time, it would just be boring for me. And it’s tough to create relevant content when I can meet and discuss what these manufacturers are doing, and talk about the reality of their situation and their audience. And talk about it in a genuine way. I think it’s more interesting for me to write, and it creates more interesting content at the end of the day. And everybody wins.

Joe Sullivan:
Yeah. Absolutely. Well, the content marketing world, for those who don’t know, is put on by… Well, the creator is Joe Pulizzi, who’s the founder of the Content Marketing Institute, and author of the handful of really great best-selling marketing books. And I know a big part of his philosophy is, you build the audience first. Right? You figure out who you’re best at serving. You figure out how to create value for them around the things that they care about, the questions they have, the problems they’re trying to solve, the things they’re trying to achieve. You build trust with that audience. And then you kind of figure out the best way to monetize it, or turn them into customers, as opposed to just blasting this marketing and sales message at them. Content Marketing World is a perfect stage for you guys, because it’s exactly the way… It seems like you’re operating on the marketing front. Right?

Adam Beck:
Right. Which it’s kind of funny. It was questioned by a few people, our audience. And it didn’t understand, what’s the content part? Isn’t that all white papers and stuff. Well, no. That is if you’re that kind of a business. We’re not replacing white papers and blog posts. But if you think about each of these CAD models as a relevant piece of content for a manufacturer’s audience, they have such an arsenal at their fingertips, but they have to see it that way. They have to see that, “Oh, wait, my actual CAD data, or CAD information, or product information is content that I can put a form in front of or not. But that someone wants to consume and creates a marketing opportunity for me, and our future sales opportunity.”

Joe Sullivan:
Yeah. And I think that’s something that I see manufacturers struggling with a lot, the idea of feeling scared to give away too much. “If I put this out there, whether it’s written content, or CAD files, or whatever. Video of me talking about some topic that I’m an expert in, there’s a lot of worrying that happens. It’s too much, our competitors are going to copy us. They’re going to steal our customers.” And I always make the argument that there’s a lot more risk in not publishing than in publishing. Because the benefits just far outweigh the risk. When you can earn the attention and trust of somebody. And all of a sudden you have the right customer engaged with you, content helps you get found in search engines. It helps you start answering questions and earning trust. And all of this is a part of the industrial buying process now. Right? People are out there looking for information and trying to educate themselves before they’re ready for a sales conversation.

Adam Beck:
Yeah. They’re not going to talk to you. If you’re a manufacturer, and you think they’re going to just call you up out of the blue and want to shoot the breeze before they’re fully educated, it ain’t happening. And so you have to put information out there so they can self-educate. They can test, they can try on your product, basically. See how it fits. And then you can start to have a conversation about delivery and pricing and all those things.

Joe Sullivan:
Totally. I’m completely on board with that. I love how you guys are practicing… Can you speak at all to, at least from your experience, what kind of impact it’s had on your business to take this approach? You mentioned all the articles, or blog posts you’ve written over the years, you’ve done this Industrial Marketing Summit. You guys are clearly there to educate and teach your audience. What kind of impact has it had for you guys?

Adam Beck:
Yeah. Our company has been on steady growth for years. From our marketing metrics, we had, in the first few years, I think we five or six exed our web traffic. And a lot of it is, we were writing and writing and writing, and then we take another look at it and we say, “Hey, our audience or the manufacturer still needs this.” They need help educating their customers. What’s another value add that we can do. So with the new catalog, it comes with a new product, with a whole announcement that we push out there to the press release wire, but also social media email blast. We still do all of those type of marketing, but it’s all in a… The strategy is help our customers be more seen, help them reach their audience and make them be the experts and the smart forward thinking companies. And we get brought along for the ride. And that’s the great part for us.

Adam Beck:
So we do these announcements. We have taken that a step further in last couple of years, in that we create basically a howto demo for each manufacturer. So we shoot a video on their website, walking through the picks and clicks, how to actually use the tool. Because we found we’re too close to it. Sometimes we assume, “Oh, everybody knows how to use this.” But some of these manufacturers, their audience, they’ve never seen one of these tools before. A 3D configurator on their website is kind of a foreign idea. So we make a 90 second video, and that’s just something that we include because we want it to be easy for them to educate their audience. And who better to help them educate their audience than the people who created the tool.

Joe Sullivan:
Totally. Makes perfect sense. And you started touching on this already here a little bit, but one thing you mentioned before we hit record, in some of the communications you and I’ve had leading up to this conversation, is this overlap between customer service and marketing. I know you had talked specifically about delivering tools and data and value on demand with the goal of creating a great customer experience. I know this is something you’re passionate about, something that’s core to the business model at CADENAS. And so wonder if you could unpack that a little bit more for the listeners.

Adam Beck:
Yeah. So on the manufacturing side, the delivery of CAD models has traditionally been a customer service function, maybe even engineering function. Someone would call into manufacturer X and say, “Hey, I see you’re one, two, three, four, five, six bearing online. Can you send me a CAD model.” Or maybe they’d email about that, but it would be sent to engineering. They create this model and then email it back. It was kind of slow. It was maybe in one format, two formats, whatever they had available. And it took somebody to actually do work, somebody out of their function.

Adam Beck:
If it was customer service, I’m sure they have real customer service functions they could have been doing. Or it was the engineering team, they have work to do too. So by putting this online, they sort of shift that customer service, and they provide the ownership to the marketing team. This becomes a marketing tool, but it’s also serving their customers better. So they make it on demand. They can now deliver these any time of day to their customers, in whatever format they want, in any configuration they want. And they get the leads in exchange for it. So it really provides marketing for a lot of content.

Joe Sullivan:
Yeah. It’s a really interesting approach. I’ve consulted a lot of manufacturing organizations over the last 10 years or so, and my company has done work for them and help try to transform them into more helpful content focused organizations. But the perception of marketing inside of manufacturing organizations is often… It’s kind of in its own silo. They’re making brochures, and they’re doing, who knows what, with the website. Right? Trade shows. Exactly. And it’s just looked at as an expense, and this thing we do. We do our marketing stuff over here. And often the marketing department’s very disconnected from sales. And it’s absolutely not tied very well into customer service from what I’ve seen. So I love that. I talk to people sometimes who have figured out in the manufacturing space, how to get marketing and sales working together really well. But this is the first time I’ve really talked to somebody about how marketing needs to be such an integral part of customer service.

Adam Beck:
Yeah. It’s funny, because I’ve had other marketers say, “How do you get your sales team to give you access to their customers?” I say, “My sales team doesn’t slow me down in the least.” They know once I get ahold of them, or my team gets a hold of them, they’re going to love us. Because we don’t ask for anything. We know that we are a marketing tool. We are marketing to industrial marketers, and on behalf of industrial marketers at the same time. So we are all about whatever value add that we can come up with to help our manufacturing partners look awesome, and reach their audience and create the customer experience they’re trying to create.

Joe Sullivan:
That’s great. You guys are… You have a product. In a lot of ways, you’re a product company. You’re also a company that offers a marketing service, which is kind of unique. So trying to put this all back in context, to kind of put a bow on this conversation here. Considering who our audience is here, executives at manufacturing businesses, what kind of advice can you give to take some of these concepts that you’ve embraced and sort of apply them into their business? This idea of being a helpful marketer, the idea of tying it to customer service.

Adam Beck:
I think you have to understand your customer, and you have to understand the pain, and you have to understand what they’re trying to do for their customer. So this is such a chain of different customers. And what our customer needs, and what their customer needs, and what they’re trying to do at the end of the day. And how can you help them do that better? So the manufacturing side, they know that their audience is the engineer or the architect, so they need to help them get the data for their products.

Adam Beck:
Our audience is that manufacturer. So how can I help them educate their audience or provide something of value to their audience, or just do their job faster? Or what can I offload from them? What is their challenge and how can they help them do that? And for every industry or every market, it’s going to be a little bit different, but I’m always looking for ways that I can shine the spotlight on our manufacturers and help them look great. At the end of the day, a lot of who I deal with is the marketing departments at these manufacturing companies. I want them to look great to their boss. So how do you help them look great to their boss? And what can you do to continue that in the future?

Joe Sullivan:
It’s such a simple concept, but I think one that just gets overlooked with all in all the tactics and fancy tools out there. I see too many companies go in there first throwing darts, and trying this tactic, or that. And really, if you just start with who are my best customers? What do they care about? How can I help create value for them? Well, Adam, this was a really great conversation. I’m thrilled that you came on to talk about this, because you’re in this really interesting overlapping world of manufacturing with a product and being an industrial marketer. You just have a unique perspective on things. So can you tell listeners where the best place to find you is? In case they have followup questions, or would like to get in touch. Or probably, for some of them, explore the product you guys have to offer.

Adam Beck:
Yeah. So our website is partsolutions.com. Our company is called CADENAS PARTsolutions. We’re an international company. partsolutions.com though is P-A-R-T solutions, plural .com. Or they can email me directly at Adam.beck@partssolutions.com.

Joe Sullivan:
Awesome. Well, Adam, thank you once again for joining us. And for the rest of you, I hope to catch you on the next episode of the Manufacturing Executive.

Speaker 3:
You’ve been listening to the Manufacturing Executive podcast. To ensure that you never miss an episode, subscribe to the show in your favorite podcast player. If you’d like to learn more about industrial marketing and sales strategy, you’ll find an ever expanding collection of articles, videos, guides, and tools specifically for B2B manufacturers gorilla76.com/learn. Thank you so much for listening. Until next time.

PODCAST: Create Sustainable Growth By Knowing Your Market With MJ Peters

The Manufacturing Executive Podcast MJ Peters

The Manufacturing Executive: Episode 2

Listen to this episode here or on Apple Podcasts, Spotify, Stitcher or Google Podcasts.

powered by Sounder

Episode show notes

When a lot of industrial companies start out, they’re lean. Nimble. Close to their customers. But as business scales and becomes more complex, they lose the opportunity to be in constant contact with the market.

Often, when you go into an industrial company as a new marketing hire, you have to rebuild strategic marketing as a core competency. Know what your customers care about, how the industry is structured, and how you are positioned. Then, tell a story with that information.

On this episode of The Manufacturing Executive Show, MJ Peters, VP Marketing at Firetrace International, a $35 million business with approximately a hundred employees, talked about creating sustainable growth for your manufacturing company.

Here’s what we discussed with MJ:

  • Three key areas where marketing impacts the business
  • Using tangible metrics to sort out what’s working and what’s not in marketing
  • How to create sustainable growth when you sell in a cyclical market

To ensure that you never miss an episode of The Manufacturing Show, subscribe on Apple Podcasts, Spotify, Stitcher or Google Podcasts.

Transcript of episode

Joe:
Welcome to The Manufacturing Executive podcast. I’m Joe Sullivan, your host, and a co-founder of the industrial marketing agency, Gorilla 76. We have a killer guest here today and someone who I see as a trailblazer in the manufacturing space. So let me take a moment to introduce MJ Peters. MJ is the Vice President of Marketing at Firetrace International, a $35 million business with approximately 100 employees. Firetrace designs and manufacturers automatic fire suppression systems for high-risk equipment. MJ is Firetrace’s first VP of Marketing, and is an executive member of the Global Board of Directors. Before joining Firetrace, MJ worked in various product and marketing roles across the Halma Group and FTSE 100 conglomerate of small to medium-sized manufacturing businesses. She’s also the cohost of a new podcast called The Industrial Marketer, which I absolutely recommend any listeners to this show check out as well. MJ, welcome to the show.

MJ:
Thank you for having me. I think it’s a really good podcast organized around this topic of manufacturing leadership.

Joe:
Awesome. Well, I’m super excited to have you here because I met you right about the time that you were beginning this complete transformation of Firetrace’s marketing program. And it’s been really cool to watch from the outside over the last year or so, as it’s taken shape. Yeah, it’s great to have you here talking about that a bit.

MJ:
Yeah. I’m excited to take people through it. It’s been great learning experience for me, and I think there’s going to be some takeaways for others as well.

Joe:
Definitely. When my firm begins a consulting engagement with a manufacturing organization, I find all kinds of things in terms of what marketing actually means for them. Worst case scenario, you’ve got companies that really don’t even have a marketing function. They’re traditionally sales heavy and relying on repeat business, trade shows, referrals, cold calling. And then best case I usually find companies playing around a little bit in Google Ads, maybe doing some SEO, starting to dabble in content creation. But when I met you a year ago or so, what I saw looked very different from my perspective in terms of where you were taking things. So I’d love to start out here by going back in time a little bit, because I think you have a really interesting story to tell about how you got where you are today. So can you first give our listeners some background on how you found your way to Firetrace and earned a seat at the executive table so quickly?

MJ:
Yes. Let me talk a little bit about my background first and then I’ll address that issue specifically of getting a seat at the executive table.

Joe:
Great.

MJ:
You mentioned in your intro for me, very kind intro that Firetrace is owned by Halma. I started in Halma’s Graduate Development Program right out of college. And in that program over the course of two years, I got the opportunity to work at four different Halma operating companies, which are all small to medium-size manufacturing businesses. And that allowed me to get experience in different parts of the business. So I worked in manufacturing, in product development, product management and marketing, and I was moving every six months and changing jobs every six months. So once that program came to a close, after two years, I took a role with one of the Halma’s subsidiary companies that manufactures water quality sensors and my official title there was product manager, but I was also in charge of all the marketing. So I was kind of a one woman product and marketing team.

MJ:
And then most recently, I got this opportunity to lead my first marketing team. I came over to Firetrace and I started out as a director. So I was not a full executive, but I was a member of the board. And then after 10 months I got promoted to the vice president level, which makes me a full executive member of Firetrace’s board of directors. That’s kind of my career story.

MJ:
And then in terms of how I reached the executive level so quickly, I think there’s really three things that stand out to me. First of all, I benefited immensely from the visibility that that graduate development program provided. In other words, the Halma leadership sort of knew who I was and I can’t deny that that really helped me.

MJ:
Second, working in different areas of the business. I mentioned manufacturing and product management as well as marketing helped me understand as a marketer, not just my impact on marketing results, but also my impact on business results.

MJ:
And then third, I have to highlight that there was just this one really high visibility project that definitely changed the course of my career. And that was this 12-week innovation accelerator that Halma was running, where teams were challenged to combine technologies from two different Halma companies to create and market a new product in 12 weeks. So my team ended up taking the water quality sensor hardware from Sensorex and combining that with technology from another company that specialized in data transmission, cloud data storage and analytics that they actually used in leak sensing applications. And we made this IOT sensor product that we ended up selling to transporters of live fish, which is obviously a very niche market, but through talking to customers over the course of that 12-week sprint, we discovered that there was a real need for that kind of sensing data management capability in that application. And that venture ultimately broke even within five months. So basically the company had this new product in their range. They had a customer for it already, and we had covered the entire cost of development through sales after just five months.

MJ:
And what that really highlights is that product innovation is really important to Halma and it was at the time and it still is now. And as a young person coming up through the ranks, I recognize that, and I really tried to succeed in that area. I definitely failed a couple of times along the way, but ultimately we were successful with this fish transportation venture and that was when I got rewarded with this opportunity to lead.

Joe:
Wow, that’s really cool. What an interesting program and a great experience for someone to kind of get their feet wet in the industry.

MJ:
Oh, it’s an incredible program. If somebody listening to this has a person who’s college age about to graduate. I definitely recommend looking into it.

Joe:
Yeah, no kidding. And you’re one of a few people that I know who has come through this program. Through my network online, through LinkedIn, I’ve heard very good things. So super interesting.

Joe:
So it’s a good segue, I think into my next question for you. Something that stuck out from a prior conversation that we had was you’ve mentioned that you’ve created a marketing function inside of Firetrace that impacts the business in three key areas. One, strategic marketing. Two, product management. And three, communications. I was hoping you could unpack that for us. I see where you’re going when you were talking about product development, but dive into those three areas for us a little bit and tell us what you’ve been able to do with the marketing function in those three places.

MJ:
Yeah. Fundamentally I think the role of marketing in an organization is to bring the voice of the customer unbiased into the business. And I think a lot of industrial companies struggle here because when they first start out, they are lean, they’re nimble, they’re really close to their customers. But as the business scales and becomes more complex, you lose the opportunity to be in constant contact with the market because you’re managing the complexities of the day to day. So once you get to scale, you really have to be deliberate about strategic marketing and it has to be this continuous process. So I find a lot of the times when you go into an industrial company as a new marketing hire, one of the first things you have to do is rebuild strategic marketing as a core competency. And what I mean by that is just knowing what your customers care about, knowing how the industry is structured, how our competitors position, how are you positioned and being able to tell a story with all of that information.

MJ:
And building that back up as a core competency can be pretty challenging because sometimes you have to rebuild relationships with the end users of your products. A lot of industrial companies go through distribution and the business models can be really complex. So it takes a while to build those relationships, get the information from the end users and understand the whole business model and how your company can adjust to be as successful as possible.

MJ:
I also think a challenge that marketers face is that oftentimes they don’t share a lot in common with the end users of their product because fundamentally they are a marketer and the end user might be a production manager or a machinist. So you don’t have that natural built-in empathy with your customer and you really have to cultivate it. But it’s really important for manufacturing companies to build that strategic marketing competency and nurture it, because if you don’t get the strategic marketing piece right, you can’t get the product management or the communications right.

MJ:
When I started at Firetrace, I started with this strategic marketing objective. I was doing the work myself, but I was also hiring strategic marketing talent and building out that competency and building out that bench strength. After about six months when definitely the main focus in building this marketing department was on strategic marketing, then we started to do things like launching a new website, building out our tech stack with CRM and analytics, and then we started to produce content. And I think that producing educational, informational content is a really great next step to take, because it allows you to leverage some of the market insights from the strategic marketing work that you’re doing on the one hand. But it also feeds back information into strategic marketing because you can see how customers react to and respond to your content and what kind of information and messaging is driving conversions. So you can see how strategic marketing and content marketing really feed one another and play off one another.

MJ:
It’s the same thing with product management. Product management was the third competency that we built out after strategic marketing and marketing communications. And we rationalized and relaunched our entire product range. We took it from 2,000 part numbers down to less than 500, and I did a lot of that work myself because I didn’t yet have a product manager on the team. So actually product management did not become a full-time position at Firetrace until I had been in the role for over 18 months in the marketing leadership role. And so doing this work, I benefited immensely from the strategic marketing that we had done because I had the customer and the market knowledge to make commercially sound decisions about the product range. Which products do we need to make obsolete because they are not delivering value to the right kind of customers anymore? What needs to be on the roadmap and what do we need to more adequately support in terms of our products in the mature stage of their life cycle? So strategic marketing really drives decisions through product management, as well as communications, and they’re all really interconnected in a triangle.

Joe:
Yeah, that’s a really interesting perspective on it. And I think it’s so smart because I think a lot of business to business companies and particularly those in the industrial sector, from my experience, they wouldn’t necessarily look at marketing as a vehicle for informing decisions about their spectrum of products or how they deliver solutions to customers, but so much can be learned from what you’re doing on the strategic marketing front. Right?

MJ:
Yeah. I think a big area that manufacturing companies struggle with a lot of the time is launching new products. And I think a big reason for that is because they’re not applying marketing at the beginning of the product development process. They’re only thinking of marketing as something you do at the end. And in reality, if you have strong marketing that feeds into new product development decisions, then it just becomes so much easier to launch new products successfully because you know exactly which customers you’re going to be selling them to and what aspects of those products are most attractive to those customers.

Joe:
Yeah, it makes a ton of sense.

Joe:
Shifting gears a little bit here, I know that you’re big on data and I’m just curious to hear you talk a little bit about how you’ve been able to use tangible metrics to understand what’s working and what’s not on the marketing.

MJ:
Yeah. I have to be big on data because I am very light in the experience category relative to most manufacturing executives. So I have to admit that. I think the challenge with marketing data is that there is a lot of it and not all of it is really helpful when you’re trying to make business decisions. What we do at Firetrace is we really focus on the data that we can tie to business results. And so fundamentally we’re looking at things like inbound pipeline or marketing source pipeline, what is the total value, dollar value of opportunities that are sourced through marketing communications campaigns? What is the number of opportunities that are sourced by marketing communications campaigns? And we look at that because you can’t always control the size of the opportunity depending on what kind of marketing activity you’re doing. So sometimes the number is indicative of success as well.

MJ:
And when we’re looking at these things like inbound pipeline, marketing source pipeline, we only focus on pipeline where the opportunity has been generated with a type of customer that I would define as our ideal fit customer. Because the role of marketing should be to generate more opportunities, more sales opportunities with exactly the right kind of customer that closes at a very high win rate. So you should be designing your marketing campaigns to generate that kind of customer. And so it doesn’t make sense to measure opportunities that are generated with non-fit customers because your marketing activity probably didn’t produce those. So we really focus on how many sales opportunities with the right customers are we producing for the business because ultimately that is going to be what leads to increased revenue for our business.

MJ:
And when you look at that kind of data, a caveat that I feel like is important to mention is that sometimes you have to be comfortable just trusting correlation. You can’t have exact last touch attribution data for every dollar of revenue. So you do have to have a sense for what channels produce what kind of results and what shape is that data likely to take. And you have to be comfortable making some assumptions because if you obsess over attribution, you’re just going to lose valuable time and energy that you could be investing into more experiments and more activity that can drive business results.

Joe:
Yeah, that’s all really well said. Something that I struggle with sometimes that I’m curious to hear your take on it is, with all the data that is available to us these days… And keep in mind, I’ve been running, co-leading this agency for 14 years now. So I’ve seen a lot of changes on the marketing front and what can be measured and how much is available to us. I mean, it’s pretty amazing how much has changed in that period of time on the measurement front, but with so much that you can measure now. I see some companies becoming so obsessed with, “We need to be able to trace every activity that we’re investing in to revenue or to pipeline.” And I think sometimes I see companies going too far where they’re looking to short term and a lot of manufacturing organizations have long sales cycles. They’re not selling widgets off the shelf. They’re selling things with complex long buying processes to committees of buyers. And these sales happen over the course of a year or two years in some cases yet they’re still trying to measure results within that window.

Joe:
I’m just curious what balance you like to create, or you think should be created between doing marketing that is more lead generation focused, where you can see the numbers very quickly, versus things that sort of build the brand and build trust with prospects over the long haul so that you’re cultivating this audience of the right people from the right companies so that when they are ready to buy, you’re the first one that they’re going to think of.

MJ:
Yeah, it’s a good question. I think the beauty in some ways of being a new marketing leader in a manufacturing company or a manufacturing company that’s just starting to use marketing communications techniques for the first time, is that there will be a lot of low-hanging fruit. The good news is you can go out and grab that low-hanging fruit and generate a bunch of leads and harvest existing demand quickly, while at the same time investing in some of those longer term initiatives, whether it’s SEO or content marketing to build a brand, or building owned social media channels. You can benefit from the harvesting of demand quickly in the short term, but you have to remember to invest for the longterm. Because eventually you’re going to reach a ceiling with some of those short term lead gen focused tactics, and your next level of growth is going to be spurred by investment of some of these longer term activities.

MJ:
Although it feels like, “Okay, I’m laying out cash right now, and I’m not going to see the results until later,” you have to compare it to any other function that you would invest in in your business. For example, if you’re going to hire a new salesperson in a new geography, you don’t expect to see tremendous results from that sales development exercise within one or two months. You’re going to give it 18 months to really build into a successful territory. Some marketing initiatives you have to look at on those same types of time horizon.

Joe:
Yeah. That’s a good comparison or analogy and I agree with you on pretty much everything you said there. Can you tell me a little bit like what’s been the impact of what you have done today on Firetrace? Is there anything you can speak to from a results’ standpoint about where you guys have gone so far with this?

MJ:
Yeah. What Firetrace is looking to achieve with our strategy right now is we want to create sustainable growth. And to create sustainable growth you have to know which markets that you can sell into that are growing in a sustainable way. So I think this is particularly pertinent for manufacturers because manufacturers sell into a lot of markets that are cyclical, oil and gas being a big example of that. Some other markets that manufacturers sell into are very project based. So construction comes to mind. But to grow sustainably, you need to deliberately target growth in those markets that are growing three, four or 5% year over year, over year, and that will provide you with a base of revenue that’s reliable and repeatable year after year. And then the cyclical or project-based wins are kind of like your big wins or icing on the cake.

MJ:
And so our strategy is to really focus on that sustainable growth and that doesn’t have to be every manufacturing company strategy, but marketing has been really critical for us in chasing sustainable growth because first of all, strategic marketing has uncovered for us which markets are attractive in terms of both being sustainably growing markets, as well as being markets where our product has a strong value proposition. So we understand which markets we are trying to target and trying to grow sales in. We understand which geographies are going to be critical for us because we need to target geographies where the market that we’re going after is particularly strong. For example, machining is one of the markets we sell into and machining is growing rapidly in places like Eastern Europe, Brazil, India, and it’s not so rapid in places like the Middle East or South Africa, for example. So we can kind of base our geographic strategy off of that.

MJ:
But to come down really to the nuts and bolts of it, over the last year, our marketing transformation has meant that we focused on various of these sustainably growing markets. And just to give you an example, one particular market that we focused on and that we started building a brand in, started doing content marketing, started honing our messaging. Over the course of one year, we increased new inbound pipeline, which is one of my key metrics, 100% year over year. And that ultimately resulted in 30% revenue growth within that target segment over that same year. And the 100% new inbound pipeline translating to 30% revenue growth is exactly what I would have expected to see, because we knew going into this, that those deals with that particular type of end user closed at a rate of 30%.

Joe:
That’s spectacular and so powerful to be able to look back on that and see that we came in with knowledge about this market. We knew that we had to create focus here as opposed to taking a scattershot approach, which I see so often. And like you said, the results were what you would have expected them to be. So congrats on what you’ve accomplished there. It’s really cool.

MJ:
Thank you. Yeah, I think it can be challenging to stay disciplined in the longterm, especially because a lot of manufacturers are fundamentally product companies. And so it can be so tempting to try to sell into every application all at once, because you feel like you’re limiting yourself by only focusing on a few applications. But if your energy and your resources are divided and spread too thin, what often happens is you don’t make significant progress in any one application and you fall behind where you would have been if you had just focused on one or two or three and done those really, really well.

Joe:
Yeah, totally makes sense. MJ, you’ve built a marketing function from the ground up in a lot of ways here, and I’m just curious, what advice would you give a manufacturing organization that’s not sure where to start because that’s what I run into a lot? I step in, I have a first conversation. And like I said, at the beginning of this episode, it’s a lot of these companies have been in sales in the past. They have done very little marketing or what they’ve done has been kind of throwing darts. And so you’re an example of somebody who kind of figured out how to do something in a very strategic well-planned out way. Where would you tell somebody to start? What would you have them do?

MJ:
I think the best piece of advice that I can give to manufacturing companies that are starting to look at improving marketing as a core piece of their strategy is that you have to look at that decision as a really serious investment. And just as with any investment, it’s a bet that you have to make. You have to make a bet that marketing is going to produce more results than anything else that you could make that investment in within your business. So maybe you’re thinking about overhauling your shop floor and implementing lean and bringing in new capital equipment. That’s a big investment that you would think really hard about, and I think companies should be thinking about making an investment in marketing the same way.

MJ:
So when you look at that, do I want to make the investment in new capital equipment or do I want to really build up my marketing function? Compare those to one another. Which one’s going to produce the best results for your business, which one is riskier versus a sure thing, and make the bet that you think is going to pay off in the longterm. Because I think companies fall into this trap of thinking that they can make their bets in terms of investments, in all the things they want to make their bets on, whether it’s operations transformation or adding new salespeople. And then they think that they can do marketing really well without making a bet on it and without investing in resourcing it appropriately. And that’s where those marketing efforts fall flat.

MJ:
I’m not saying that marketing has to be essential piece of an industrial company strategy, but just know that if you’re not making a bet on marketing and you’re not trying to resource it, that you’re unlikely to achieve the results that you might think that you can achieve in a really lean kind of scrappy way.

MJ:
Now, if you do decide that, yes, we’re going to place a bet on marketing, I would say the place to start in my opinion is to hire a leader for the function. And I mean, it comes right back to this idea of making an investment because a leader in terms of their salary, in terms of what they’re going to ask for, in terms of resources from the business, is going to cost you a lot more than making more of a junior marketing hire. But if you’re committed to marketing being a key piece of your strategy and something you want to invest in longterm, it shouldn’t be daunting to invest that level of resources and bringing a leader in the business. And then that leader will be able to articulate a plan for how all the future investments should be made right. Should you be working with specific agencies? Should you be bringing on internal hires? How are you going to allocate ad spend? They’ll help you make the right investments from that point, but the first investment in my opinion is bringing in a leader.

Joe:
I think that’s great advice. I think there’s too much of a perspective on marketing in so many organizations is just sort of a tactical thing. Let’s do a little bit of this, let’s try this, let’s throw some money here. And I see a lot of companies that just aren’t being strategic about it. And you really like any other major investment in your company, you’ve got to think strategically, it’s got to be planned out, it needs somebody quarterbacking it, who can think that way and can really lead the department. So I like that advice.

Joe:
Well, MJ, this has been a super valuable conversation. I really appreciate you taking the time to do this today and I’m more than certain that our listeners are feeling the same way right now. So tell our listeners where the best place to find you is online in case they have follow-up questions or would like to get in touch.

MJ:
Yeah, the best place to connect with me is on LinkedIn. My LinkedIn is just MJ Peters or /MJ Peters1. And I connect with anybody. Free to send me a DM. And if you liked this episode, check out my podcast, The Industrial Marketer Podcast. It’s a little bit of a different focus. It’s more marketing focused, and it’s definitely appropriate for both marketing leaders as well as mid-level, junior-level marketing employees looking to up their game. So if you liked this, I think you could get a lot out of our show as well.

Joe:
Great. Well, thank you for joining us MJ, and for the rest of you, I hope to catch you on the next episode of The Manufacturing Executive.

PODCAST: You Don’t Have to Blog: Content Marketing for Manufacturers That Works With Nick Goellner

The Manufacturing Executive Podcast Nick Goellner

The Manufacturing Executive: Episode 1

Listen to this episode here or on Apple Podcasts, Spotify, Stitcher or Google Podcasts.

powered by Sounder

Episode show notes

Try describing a mechanical thing with a blog post. It’s not easy. It’s not the right format. But try taking a 3-D model, making it photorealistic, and then doing animations of how it works. Now, you’re on to something.

So when you think about content marketing, do you think blogs, social media, and podcasts? Or do you think, “What’s going to help my audience?”

On this episode of The Manufacturing Executive Show, Nick Goellner, Sales & Marketing Director for Advanced Machine & Engineering and Managing Director of Making Chips, talked about content marketing in the industrial sector.

Here’s what we discussed with Nick:

  • The role content marketing should play inside a manufacturing organization
  • Why content is your job even if you are not a marketer (it’s all about the function of content)
  • The reason you shouldn’t be scared your competitors will rip off your content
  • The books Nick’s reading this summer

To ensure that you never miss an episode of The Manufacturing Show, subscribe on Apple Podcasts, Spotify, Stitcher or Google Podcasts.

Transcript of episode

Joe:
Welcome to the official episode number one of the Manufacturing Executive podcast. I’m Joe Sullivan, your host, and the co-founder of the industrial marketing agency, Gorilla 76. We’ve got our first guest here today that I’m really excited about, and I think he’s going to help us kick this thing off with a bang. Let me introduce Nick Goellner. Nick is leading a new generation of manufacturers, combining the traditional values of his family’s global metalworking business with innovative, modern marketing strategies. After starting on the shop floor at Hennig Inc. fabricating machine protection components or CNC machine tools, Nick, became a designated certified machine tool sales engineer, CMTSE, and received his BS in entrepreneurial marketing from the Florida Institute of Technology.

Joe:
Nick now serves as the sales and marketing director for Advanced Machine & Engineering. In 2018, Nick became a partner and cohost of the popular manufacturing leadership podcast, MakingChips. Shortly after joining Nick helped expand the podcast platform into MakingChips 2.0, a full scale marketing agency specifically targeting the metalworking industry. He’s able to combine his passion for content marketing and metalworking by collaborating with a team of dynamic industrial marketers, serving the MakingChips clients with results-driven marketing programs. Nick, welcome to the show.

Nick:
Thanks Joe. It’s an honor to be the first manufacturing executive on the Manufacturing Executive podcast. That’s pretty cool.

Joe:
Well, I figured we’d start with somebody who’s got some experience with this whole podcasting thing, so it seemed like a natural fit.

Nick:
Yeah. I’ve got a few episodes under my belt.

Joe:
Yes you do. We’ll mention it again at the end, but for those of you listening MakingChips podcast, this is one you should all be listening to. These guys have been doing it for years and Nick joined them and added a whole additional dynamic to it, so go check that out. Nick, did my introduction do you justice or anything you’d like to add to that?

Nick:
No, it was good. I appreciate it. It’s hard to say what I do in a concise way, because I wear so many hats like a lot of other manufacturing leaders. But really I’m just a third generation manufacturing kid from a company that designs and builds machine tools. It was founded by my grandfather, and coming up with clever ways to optimize processes and design the machinery that does that, that’s like my family’s DNA. I just happen to love marketing, specifically content marketing like this.

Joe:
Awesome. Well, you and I have known each other for, it must be about five or six years or so. We met when-

Nick:
At least.

Joe:
Yeah. Maybe it might be [crosstalk 00:03:21] longer.

Nick:
I think, yeah. Because I think I launched my new website that I actually called you for about five years ago, and we were talking a couple years before that, just to… I was trying to [inaudible 00:03:34].

Joe:
Yes, you were. I remember you guys, you came through, you and some of your crew came through St. Louis where we’re located, and I think you maybe had a customer down here that you were visiting or-

Nick:
It was one of my sales guys.

Joe:
Sales trip, okay.

Nick:
Like you mentioned, I’m a sales director too, so I was bringing one of my younger sales guys who was one of the, “Hey, we got to start doing some better marketing.” And I was like, “Okay. We’re going to go find this agency.” I ended up finding you guys through one of your guides that you created, and I thought that was really well-crafted.

Joe:
All right. Awesome. Well, very good. But I can remember we grabbed lunch down the street here in the Central West End of St. Louis at the Gamlin Whiskey House. I can remember sitting there with you guys and hearing your story. I remember sitting here thinking, “I don’t know how I can justify trying to sell Nick and his crew marketing services, because I’m pretty sure they know what they’re doing, and they’ve got it figured out.” While there are probably some skillsets you could have used from the outside, I can remember flat out emailing you the next day saying, “You know what? I think you’ve got this.” I think, I’d be curious to hear your perspective, but a few years down the road here, I feel like I might have been right about that one.

Nick:
Well, yeah. I remember being pretty disappointed because I had kind of sourced you guys out, and I loved your story too. How it’s a bunch of journalists who created an industrial marketing company. I think journalism is like the skill, the number one in demand skill for me, at least with my own agency is people who can pull a story out of something. And so I wanted to hire you guys and I remember being disappointed that you were like, “I don’t think we’re the right fit for you because you’ve got so many other pieces in place.”

Nick:
You were pretty much saying like, “We’re not just like a boutique writing agency, we want to do a full holistic turnkey marketing program for you.” I was really looking for you guys as the storytellers to add an element to a program that I had already built. But after that, I thought about it more and I just really appreciated the honesty. In hindsight, I think maybe you were right, that it was better for me to go through the lumps and bumps of trying to build my own program than just at the time, hiring an agency to guide me through it.

Joe:
Cool. Yeah. It makes sense, and I think you’ve done an amazing job both on the AME side of the business and then, of course with MakingChips as well. I’m excited about this conversation because I know you and I obviously, I think when we started our first conversations it’s because we shared a lot of similar perspectives on things, industrial and marketing related. But what’s interesting is we’re coming at it from two different angles. You came up in manufacturing, in a manufacturing family. I came up in through marketing, and design really was where I started. And then we’ve sort of found our way from different angles to this middle ground, which is the industrial marketing world or sales and marketing for manufacturing organizations.

Joe:
And so I thought this would be a really interesting conversation. I wanted to start out by talking specifically about content marketing. I know it’s a passion of yours, it’s a passion of mine absolutely. And so I think what I see and I’m guessing you agree, but I want to hear your perspective is that, in general, the industrial sector is lagging behind dramatically on this front. One of the things that really stood out from our first conversations years back was that, I felt like you were kind of all over. And that was rare for me to see where you get it. Where for most manufacturers, content is about talking about how great we are and all the things we do, and our capabilities and why our competition is garbage. And our customer service is better than everybody. It’s all about me, me, me.

Joe:
What I saw from you was that, your perspective on it was, we need to build and cultivate an audience by helping solve problems, answer questions, guide them through the buying process. I’d love to hear you talk about this. What’s your perspective on what content marketing is and specifically the role you think it needs to play inside of a manufacturing organization?

Nick:
Yeah. I think one way to help understand what content marketing is, at least to me, and we read a lot of the same people so they describe it this way as well. But when the content is your product, then you’re likely doing content marketing. So instead of describing the value of another product, like we make the best widget and like all the things you just said, where the content is describing the value of something else, when the content is the value and when your content is the product, and that product adds value to your target audience, then you’re probably doing content marketing.

Nick:
I think that’s an important distinction because that’s one of the reasons why I did what I did with forming this joint venture with the MakingChips guys. Both of my partners have businesses where they’re in the manufacturing industry and are owners and operators of manufacturing businesses. But the MakingChips podcast wasn’t about Carr Machine & Tool, or about Zenger’s Industrial Supply company. It was about the manufacturing leader, the audience that they wanted to get to know. They actually took the time to understand that audience, what’s keeping them up at night? What are the topics that they want to talk about? How can we all build this community and grow together? And of course, when it was natural in conversation, they mentioned their businesses and what they did, but the product was the MakingChips podcast and the mission to equip and inspire other manufacturing leaders.

Nick:
No one would’ve listened to it if they just talked about how great their machine shop was or how they supply the best tools with the best customer service at a great price. It was about creating a community. To me, that’s when the content becomes the product and you’re doing content marketing. And so I really liked what they were doing, and I was like, “Okay. How do I just let these guys know that I appreciate them?” I sent them a storytelling video that we had created just about like the broader meaning behind our company and our mission to bring more work back to the States and why it matters, and why it’s an issue of national security. Those guys liked it and they were like, “Oh, great story telling. You should be a guest,” and one thing led to another.

Nick:
But I think it’s hard for our industry for most people to understand, okay, I can’t just talk about myself or my products. You kind of feel like you have to, like everything I create needs to be about me and what I do. And that’s actually one of the most destructive things you can do for your marketing program is just be self-centered.

Joe:
Totally agree.

Nick:
They’re my two cents on it.

Joe:
Well said. It’s almost just, it’s so natural for somebody to just jump to, here’s who we are and what we do and why we’re great. The reality is nobody is listening. Your prospects and your customers, they have their own problems they’re trying to solve. The things they’re dealing with, whether they’re engineers or plant managers or whoever they are, they’re dealing with their job and what’s in front of them today. And the last thing they need to do is hear somebody shouting some marketing or sales message at them, especially when it’s not something they need and right now. That mindset shift is when I see it happen with manufacturers, it’s like this light bulb goes off and then they can start turning a corner and thinking the way their customers and prospects think.

Nick:
Yeah. I’m a fan of product marketing. I watch commercials. I enjoy commercials. I like watching people explain the value of a product. I just don’t really think that’s the content marketing that all the content marketers are talking about. That’s like great product copywriting and great branding. And all those things are important. Don’t get me wrong. It’s just when we think content marketing, the product is the content itself, not the description of some other product.

Joe:
No, I think that’s a really, really interesting and great way to look at it. So you’ve got MakingChips, you’ve got AME. When you think about an organization like AME or maybe someone who would be a customer of the MakingChips Agency, something that I’m guessing you maybe hear that I certainly hear is from a sales person, or an engineer or a technical professional, they say, “Content is not my job. That’s the marketer’s job. The marketers, they need to go make that stuff.” And it’s a red flag immediately when I hear that, or maybe not a red flag, but something that makes me say, “Well, hold on a second.” And here’s why, and I want to hear your take on that.

Nick:
Yeah. So I think it comes down to understanding what content does, what’s the function of content. And if you’re a sales person, and you’re in a room and your job is to communicate with these people, whatever you say is your content. So if you’re giving a PowerPoint presentation to a bunch of prospects, that’s your content. If your job is to stand up in front of a group of potential customers and describe why they should work with your business, that’s your content. So if you’re in a job where a huge part of your job is communication, then content should matter to you and it does matter to you.

Nick:
I think where people get tied up is, “Well, I’m not a graphic designer, or I’m not a great writer or I’m not more of a tactician.” When it comes to content where I actually build and create the content, that’s what we have great marketers, and marketing agency and creatives. They can really help with that. But content is everyone’s priority. Whether they want to admit it or not, they think it’s their priority. They just need to kind of maybe reframe how they think to understand like, “Oh, so I have something to communicate, therefore I should care about content.”

Nick:
And so I think one of the things that’s detrimental to that kind of alignment we’re trying to create is when we’re dividing, “Okay, marketers do this and salespeople do that.” And I think Peter Drucker’s got this definition of marketing, which is to create and deliver value to a target market at a profit. It’s like, whose job is that? Is that a sales person’s job or is that a marketer’s job? The answer is yes. It’s everybody’s job. So people do too much of this, and all throughout our society where they’re trying to kind of create distinctions and create divisions, they polarized things.

Nick:
And I think the best companies don’t really think about like, “Well, I’m a sales person, so I’m going to cold call, and knock on doors and give presentations.” “And I’m a marketer, so I’m going to sit on the computer all day and I probably won’t talk to customers that much, but I’ll do a lot of writing and a lot of graphic design.” But those companies aren’t going to get anything done. I almost don’t even like calling it a sales department and a marketing department. Just call it like the customer success department or something like that, because I think that the division hurts.

Joe:
Yeah. No, it makes sense. I think something you said a second ago that sort of struck a chord is, when you’re an expert in something, whether you are a sales or marketing person in your organization, or you’re an engineer or whoever you are, the things you say are your content. And I think it’s the marketer’s job, at least from my perspective, it’s a marketer’s job, maybe the sales person’s job to package and deliver that content, in a way that might be more scalable or can reach the right people.

Joe:
And that’s why I believe that the expertise in the brains of your company’s subject matter experts, have to be the source of anything that say gets published, whether it’s a written piece of content, whether it’s a video or an interview like this. I think it’s the marketer’s job to sort of extract that knowledge and figure out how to package it, how to deliver it, how to get it in front of the right people. But it’s got to come from the expert.

Nick:
Right. Yeah. That’s a great way to say it. It can’t be like, “Okay marketers, write a bunch of articles about how I do engineering.” Well, you’re the one who knows that. So that’s why I was talking about journalism earlier. I love journalists. It’s their job to kind of distill and extract knowledge from others, and recreate it in a way that more people can understand it, and that it can have broader appeal. And so I’m always looking for a good journalist.

Joe:
Awesome. So the word on the street is that you’ve got a little hidden gem, that’s been gold for you on the content front. And I wanted to hear you kind of enlighten our listeners a little bit.

Nick:
Yeah. We don’t think of this as content marketing. It’s not one of the traditional forms of content marketing. But to me, it’s like the most valuable form of content marketing for my audience, and we give away CAD models. So it’s a digital representation of a physical product. It describes the product, it does a job for the audience. It saves them a bunch of time. They can plug it directly in their application to see if it fits, to see if it’s something they want to purchase the physical manifestation of. So why is that not content? It is.

Nick:
And so for us, we have a lot of engineers who need to buy our products and they need to apply them in their system. And if I can get them to download my CAD, there’s a huge chance that they’re going to buy the actual product from us. So we do a lot with 3D models. And it’s not just offering the CAD downloads for free. Like you guys have great writers, but try describing a mechanical thing with a blog post. And it’s not the easiest way. It’s not the right format in most cases. In some cases you can elaborate on it, and tell a story about it or explain it, and the written format might help you. But for us, we’ve been taking 3D models and making them photo realistic and doing animations of how they work, and that has just been gold for my eyes.

Nick:
So I like to think about like 3D models and whether it’s giving away a CAD, or animating it or making a photo realistic image, as like the number one content format for my audience which is what we built our agency for, for the Metalworking Leader. And so I just think, “Okay, is it an article? A blog post? Probably not. Is it a YouTube video? Maybe the animation will end up on YouTube, but it’s not all the conventional forms of blogging or content marketing that everyone thinks of, but it’s what’s going to help my audience.” So I always like to have the story dictate the format instead of the other way around. What’s the story you’re trying to tell?

Joe:
And what a smart way to operate.

Nick:
Yeah. Thank you.

Joe:
Yeah, absolutely. I mean, you got to think about how … And people who are out there talking and interfacing with customers, the sales people, account managers, engineer to engineer conversations, these are the people who understand how your audience consumes information and wants to gather information. And so I think it’s just such a smart way to do it. Why write some long form piece of content, when what they want from everything you’ve experienced is CAD models? Let’s put it out there and give them what they’re looking for. And that’s the thing that’s going to help them move forward in the buying process and earn your trust in the process, right?

Nick:
Yeah. And sometimes a long form piece of content is great. It’s just not always the answer. So what I found when I was looking for a lot of different marketing agencies before I had my own, was most of the proposals would be like, “Okay, we’re going to give you this many blog posts a month or this many videos.” And it’s like, “Well, you don’t really know what you’re trying to communicate yet. So how do you know what format you should communicate it in?” And for me, it was like, “Am I more likely to get someone to give me an email address in exchange for a CAD model, or in exchange for a written article that describes the CAD model?” They just want the damn CAD model. So why don’t we just give it to them?

Joe:
What would you say to someone who might be listening right now that’s saying, “Oh, geez, you just put that stuff out there for free? I mean, couldn’t our competitors just sort of copy that, and take that and make it their own? We need to keep that stuff behind closed doors for after we start the conversation.” What’s your answer to that?

Nick:
Well, you don’t always have to give like the most detailed, possible CAD model to where they have all of your intellectual property. In this industry, you want to protect your intellectual property. That’s important. But if they really want something, they can buy it, and reverse engineer it and there they have it. Or they can call someone else to get the model from you, and then it’s going to happen if they really want to get it. So why not just give it to them?

Nick:
And they’re probably not going to reverse engineer it and build it themselves. If you understand like how things cost, what they cost, that would be unwise and a waste of money and time. So for me, it’s like I’m a little bit more open innovation and open source with my thinking. And I might as well be the one who gives it to them. Because if my competitor gives it to them, they’ll get the order anyway.

Joe:
Yeah. And I think it’s a hard adjustment for a lot of companies to make. But the reality is, in a situation like that, more often than not the reward is going to outweigh the risk. Because if you’re not doing it, eventually one of your competitors is, who’s going to have their attention? The company that was scared to put it out there? Or the company that said, “No, we’re going to make this buying process as straightforward and helpful as possible for our prospects”?

Nick:
And you kind of want to transfer ownership before the sale. So you want them to feel like it’s their thing. That’s why I’m such a fan of like product selection tools, and product configurators and things where, what would be the questions that your applications engineer would ask before you get to the product that’s being built? Is there a way to kind of answer those questions digitally, and save both people a bunch of time and get closer to the solution? Or even take it a step further and actually configure the product, and have a price or a price range minus the final details that you would have to have that one to one conversation with somebody to get?

Nick:
And if there is a way to do that, in some cases, it’s just too customized and then it’s impossible. But if there’s a way to do that, what happens is that person who went through that and kind of built their own solution, they feel like they already own it a little bit. The ownership has been transferred. It’s my thing now and I want this thing. I put in all the parameters. I said no to the things I don’t need, yes to the things I do. And now here I am with the price and I’m going to buy that now. All right, I’m going to have like the final conversation with someone, to hash out the last few details and then buy it.

Nick:
So a lot of people are like, “Hey, I just want them to call me right away.” It’s like, “Well, time is money. It’s going to take a bunch of time to go through all that with them. And if they can configure it themselves and get close, you’ll save a bunch of time.” And that psychological transfer of ownership, I think does a lot to make someone want to buy from you.

Joe:
Makes total sense. So I published an article recently about 12 B2B marketing and sales books to consider reading the summer. And I think you commented very quickly on my LinkedIn post when I featured the first ones, because you and I have read a lot of the same books, like you mentioned earlier. And first one on my list which is one of my all time favorites is, New Sales. Simplified. by Mike Weinberg. And I think your comment was, “Yeah, this one’s mandatory reading for my sales team.” I was curious from your perspective, what was it about that particular book, the sort of golden nugget that you took away from that, that made it mandatory reading?

Nick:
Well, that it’s about new sales. I think in the title it can be confusing. Is it new sales simplified like a new book or? And what he means is new sales, sales you don’t already have. Customers you don’t have yet. It’s about going and finding that next opportunity, that next relationship, that next partnership. And for me, the guys I have in the field, the guys who have their head up looking around for that next opportunity, I want them to be focused on hunting, not farming. So I want them to focus on getting us a new customer, not babysitting an account going on the same milk run. And that’s what that book is all about.

Nick:
And it doesn’t just say what I just said. It gives you some actual, simple but tactical ways to have success with hunting for a new business. And one of those ways is what he calls the sales story, or you call it like your elevator pitch, or your unique sales proposition or whatever people call it. And I liked the format of that sales story, which is number one, talk about the issues or the problems that you solve for your target market, then briefly discuss what you actually do. Make that the shortest part of it. “Here’s what we offer. Here’s our products, here’s our services,” keep that the short part. And then end with what’s different and unique about your approach.

Nick:
And so if you follow that structure in sales conversation, you’ll have a lot of success on that. What I found it being like a sales and marketing dude, is that structure works super good for marketing content as well. So it’s like that being able to tell a good story, and making it about them and not yourself is consistent through sales and marketing, which is one of the reasons why I don’t like to create distinctions when I don’t have to.

Joe:
Totally, love it. And what I mentioned in that article I wrote was exactly what you just said, I think it’s chapter eight of that book, is this idea of the sales story, and I agree. It’s the best way that I’ve seen to articulate in very concisely the value you create and for who, and it translates perfectly to writing positioning for your company, that there’s so many generalists out there. It’s in my world as a marketer, it’s in manufacturing world. What really sets you apart and who is the audience you serve? You need to-

Nick:
Everyone’s the one-stop shop or the one-source solution. I still have one of the mouse pads that we made that says like, “One-source solution.” It’s like, we’re really not. I mean, there’s so many things that we don’t do. So I’m trying to squash all of that, but it goes back to what we were saying with, what you communicate is your content. And so if you know how to communicate in a way that’s audience centric or buyer centric, and the sales story is one of those ways, then you’re going to have more success whether you’re a salesperson or a marketer trying to help a sales person.

Joe:
Love it. Totally. What else is on your summer reading list?

Nick:
Well, you mentioned New Sales. Simplified., and that was the book we started with, but he wrote a followup book called Sales Management. Simplified. And I thought that one was super good too. It’s not on my list for this summer, but I reread certain sections of it when it comes time to like think about how I’m going to do my sales meeting. His structure for sales meetings was, number one, you start, you don’t have a long meeting and you just review the results, the actual sales that the person got. And the reason you start with results, because at the end of the day, that’s what sales is about getting actual sales. Not doing all your activities or “How many doors did you knock on? Or how many posts did you put on LinkedIn?” or whatever.

Nick:
It ultimately comes down to the results. “Did you bring revenue into the business?” So you start with that. But any good manager knows you can’t really manage results. This COVID thing is a perfect example. It’s hard to push all of your salespeople, and to push your company to have the best sales year ever when the economy shut down for months. So what’s next after results. That’s when you review the pipeline, the opportunities that could turn into a sale and you talk one on one with your sales person on, “Okay, what’s in your pipeline? How did it get there? And how can I help you close it?”

Nick:
And then ultimately pipeline creates results. And so what creates pipeline? And what creates pipeline is like your day to day sales activities. So that’s where CRM systems or however you log activity becomes immensely valuable, because I need to see how they’re creating pipeline. Where are they finding their new connections? What’s on their calendar for next week? What did they do last week? And so if the results are killing it, chances are they have a very full pipeline and that’s because their activities are solid.

Nick:
So those meetings are a lot shorter than the meetings I have with people where, “Okay, you don’t have results, why not? Okay. Well, your pipeline is not that full and okay, so what are you doing? How do you spend your time? And how can we work together to figure out how you can have more success with how you spend your time.” And so for me, that structure totally changed everything. And my sales guys know I’m going to communicate with that structure and they know what to expect, and they know what’s important and what’s important is the results. That’s why we start with the results. But at the end of the day, you can’t really manage results. You can just create pipeline through your activities. So I thought that was really valuable for a sales manager.

Joe:
Yeah, totally. It makes sense. Yeah, check out those books, New Sales. Simplified. and Sales Management. Simplified. by Mike Weinberg. I think any manufacturing sales leader would greatly benefit from either of those. Okay. Well, Nick, this has been a really awesome conversation. It was great to catch up and to do it publicly with the recording on, and I think you’ve brought a lot of really great insights to the audience. Can you tell our listeners what’s the best place to find you or get in touch with you, if they have follow up questions? And please, give your MakingChips podcast a plug too because like everybody here should be listening to that as well.

Nick:
Yeah. So as far as MakingChips, you can find us at makingchips.com, M-A-K-I-N-G, chips, C-H-I-P-S.com. It’s also available on any of the podcatchers, so iTunes, Stitcher, Spotify, whatever you use to listen to podcasts. And then at AME and Hennig where I’m the marketing director and the sales director, the best way to communicate with me would be through LinkedIn. You could just search Nick Goellner, G-O-E-L-L-N-E-R, and you’ll find me on LinkedIn. That’s the social media platform I’m most active on.

Joe:
Awesome. Well, Nick, thank you for taking the time to join us on our official first episode of the Manufacturing Executive. And for the rest of you, we will see you next time.

How to get (some) bang for your buck advertising with trade publications

trade publication advertising roi

Thought we’d try something new. 

Historically, we’ve always said ‘no’ to accepting articles in our Learning Center from outside contributors, but this one stood out to me.

So I figured, why the heck not.

Out goal is to deliver the best sales and marketing guidance we can to manufacturing folks. And the insights in this article absolutely fit the bill.

In the manufacturing sector, most companies deal with trade publications one way or another. But as you’ll learn below, maybe the true value of these journals simply isn’t being harnessed the right way.

The author of this article, Matt Sciannella, spent his last four years directing all marketing activities in the U.S. and Canada for the welding torch and laser product manufacturer Abicor Binzel.

Just this past month, Matt was offered (and accepted) a position as the director of content marketing at Gravy – the leading customer retention and failed payment recovery service for businesses with recurring payments.

Matt is also a cohost of The Industrial Marketer Podcast.

This post was originally published natively on LinkedIn, but Matt asked if we’d be interested in syndicating it here. I was fully on board.

So on that note, preach, Mr. Sciannella….

___

How to get (some) bang for your buck advertising with trade publications

by Matt Sciannella

Prints ads suck.

There’s really not a lot of good I can say about advertising in magazines.

You do them because everyone else does them.

You do it because it because it gets you favored status for other related things to your industry trade organization like priority space in the big trade show, committee memberships, getting an article published, etc.

When you do trade industry publications, you recognize a few things immediately as a marketer:

  1. Nobody looks at or notices advertisements on these magazines
  2. Nobody will contact you based on that advertisement; your best hope is they somehow recall your brand when they encounter it in a more direct manner. And even that would require a concerted efforts of thousands of dollars month after month

Truthfully, it’s not a great investment and predicating your ad spend on it isn’t wise in this day and age.

Nevertheless, I recently saw a post from my podcast partner, MJ Peters, asking about how trade publications leverage their core competency to compel advertising from members.

trade journal advertising

And it got me thinking 🤔: There actually is ONE particular offer some trade publications offer that many companies don’t even think to take advantage of that gives you good return.

Unsurprisingly, it’s a digital offer.

Perhaps more surprising, it isn’t web banners on their website or largely non-trafficked buyer directories.

It’s their social media pages.

😲😲😲😲😲😲😲😲

You might be surprised, but some of these trade publications have pretty robust, 100% organic social media followings. Some of them have smartly offered up that audience to savvy advertisers who know it’s a good way to get some bang for the buck on what’s usually high spend with little return to show.

To give you an example, I’ll show you my own experience with one such publication called Fabricating and Metalworking and how we were able to leverage their 88,000-plus member Facebook page.

First, some good news and bad news on these ad inventory offers:

  • The good news is they are typically underpriced, usually anywhere between $500 and $1,200 compared to a full page print ad, which can set you back five times as much or even more. Seriously, I’ve seen full page ads in small publications listed at $9,000.
  • The bad news is these publications will insist you get some standard ad inventory to take advantage of the social media channel, but you can buy a less valuable print ad or a few web ads, lower your overall spend, and get this much more valuable advertising slot.

For instance, with Fabricating and Metalworking, I got six social media posts on Facebook throughout the year at $800 each for buying two print advertising spots (1/3 page ad at $1,575) and six months worth of banners ads on their website (a little better ROI and far better priced than the print ad at $200 per month, but still very little referral traffic. The value is in the Facebook spot).

The best part about these ads is you can tag your company in these posts, monitor and respond to comments, and track the URL by building a basic UTM parameter or having them send you stats.

Isolating the $800 investment in the post, we shared a product page for a prominent product of ours with a lot of surrounding content nested within the product page.

Here were the results:

social media trade publication

This publisher in particular is also good enough to send you post stats, but again, you can also build UTM parameters to track yourself to either verify or see if there were any leads generated.

results trade journal social media

For an $800 investment, that’s a pretty good return for really not a lot of effort.

And what’s better, you get to jump in as your company in these posts and interact directly with individuals who ask follow-up questions or comments:

social interaction 1 on linkedin

social interaction 2 on LinkedIn

All things being equal, I would still rather spend this money on a Facebook advertisement from my company page.

Even better, I’d like to use Fabricating and Metalworking’s audience as a target parameter (currently not possible, but they’re a great partner so I don’t mind 😁).

But if you’re already doing paid social ads, and looking for ways to get more exposure and access to potential customers unaware of a solution they may need, this is one way to leverage a trade publication audience for little cost and a lot of easy-to-measure return.

Next time you’re up to renew your advertisement with your trade publication, ask them about these kinds of offers and see what they say. Also do your research and look for publications within your industry that have large social followings and inquire about social media posts.

It can be a nice addition to your advertising arsenal if you struggle to gain traction on your own social media channels or don’t feel skilled enough to run paid social media ads.

___

Looking for more marketing insights? Be sure to check out The Industrial Marketer Podcast, Matt’s weekly podcast with MJ Peters.

Subscribe on Apple or Spotify. Please leave a review if you listen.

PODCAST: Introducing The Manufacturing Executive Show

The Manufacturing Executive Podcast Joe Sullivan

The Manufacturing Executive: Episode 0

Listen to this episode here or on Apple Podcasts, Spotify, Stitcher or Google Podcasts.

powered by Sounder

Over the past two years, I’ve written 50,000+ words of content to help manufacturers figure out how to grow their businesses. And collectively, our team of 18 Gorillas has published a whole bunch more.

So it was natural to ask:

What other media could we explore to publish these insights?

That’s how we made the decision to launch The Manufacturing Executive, our podcast to help leaders of manufacturing companies grow their businesses.

On this show, we bring in voices from outside our company to talk about their successes, their struggles, what they’ve learned, and what’s working and what’s not in industrial marketing and manufacturing sales.

To ensure that you never miss an episode of The Manufacturing Show, subscribe on Apple Podcasts, Spotify, Stitcher or Google Podcasts.

Transcript of episode:

Kelsey:
Welcome to the introductory episode of the Manufacturing Executive. We’re here today with Joe Sullivan, a co-founder of the industrial marketing agency, Gorilla 76, and the host of the show. How’s it going today, Joe?

Joe:
It’s going great. And I’m excited to get this thing off the ground.

Kelsey:
Absolutely. We’re going to have a lot of fun today, talking about what this podcast is going to be. To give everyone a bit more context, my name is Kelsey Kohrs. I’m one of the producers of this show, and today we’ll be talking about what you, the listener, can expect from this podcast. But before we jump into that, Joe, tell me a little bit about yourself and about Gorilla.

Joe:
So I would consider myself a consultant to manufacturing organizations, on the marketing and sales front. My agency, Gorilla 76, I co-founded with my business partner, John Franco, back in 2006. And we have evolved over the years. It was probably, I don’t know, maybe eight or nine years ago when we officially committed to working specifically with mid-size [B2B 00:01:50] manufacturers. Our earliest days, we were an agency serving anybody who was ready to write us a check, and we found very quickly who we were best at serving, who we liked working with, who we could actually produce results for. And we decided to just own it and brand ourselves as an agency specifically in the industrial sector. So we’ve been doing it ever since. We’ve built a team of, at the time I’m recording this, 18 people, all based in St. Louis, Missouri. And yeah. So here we are today.

Kelsey:
That’s phenomenal. Tell me a little bit more about why you guys wanted to start this podcast.

Joe:
Sure. So for years, really, ever since we committed to serving the industrial sector, we have also been committed to producing resourceful, helpful, objective content that is literally just there to help manufacturers figure out how to grow their businesses. So a lot of sales and marketing advice. A lot of it’s been in written form, and we’ve really picked up content production the last few years, as well. I think I personally have written over 50,000 words of content in the last two years, which is about a book, about a business book. And so it was a natural transition for us to say, “Well, what other media could we explore here, to publish these insights?” And then the other thing was most of these insights have come from inside our company. A lot of my own, a lot of different experts inside of my company, strategists and copywriters, journalists. People who have different skill sets in the marketing world that could be applied to manufacturers.

Joe:
But what we wanted to do here is bring in voices from outside our company. So leaders of manufacturing companies, CEOs, and presidents, VPs of sales and marketing. People who are in the trenches trying to grow manufacturing businesses. Let’s bring them in, let them tell their stories, let them talk about their successes and their struggles and what they’ve learned and what’s working and what’s not, and be able to share that with their peers. And then we also wanted to bring in others who may be consultants in sales, or marketing in the B2B world, that can also bring perspectives from the outside. So making this less about just what’s in our brains and more about everybody else out there who can bring something to the table for our audience.

Kelsey:
I love that. And I feel like that will really resonate with your listeners, hearing stories both internally and externally, bringing in those people. That’s really cool, kind of what listeners can expect as they’re tuning in. And if a listener wants to connect with you, if they have got ideas for topics, guests, episode ideas, how can they connect with you?

Joe:
Sure. So I always direct people to gorilla76.com/learn. So that’s Gorilla, like the animal, G-O-R-I-L-L-A 76.com/learn. This is our industrial marketing strategy learning center. It’s essentially an ever-expanding bank of tools and articles and resources, and now podcasts, that are all there to purely educate and help. So I always send people there. If you want to click connect personally, you can fill out the Request a Consultation forum in the top right corner of our site. That goes directly to me. And then I’d also encourage you to find me on LinkedIn. So just look for Joe Sullivan, Gorilla 76, and I’ve built a network there and publish a lot of content there as well. So that’d be the best way to get in touch.

Kelsey:
Awesome. And that actually wraps it up for our introductory episode. Joe will be taking over the reins for episode one and beyond. Thank you so much for tuning in today. And I’m really excited to see this show grow. It’s going to add so much value to your listeners.

Joe:
Super-excited as well.

Speaker 2:
You’ve been listening to the Manufacturing Executive Podcast. To ensure that you never miss an episode, subscribe to the show in your favorite podcast player. If you’d like to learn more about industrial marketing and sales strategy, you’ll find an ever-expanding collection of articles, videos, guides, and tools, specifically for B2B manufacturers, at gorilla76.com/learn. Thank you so much for listening. Until next time.

How to run a content strategy workshop

content ideas

I’ve written, talked and filmed a lot over the last few years about why manufacturers need to publish their insights.

But today we’re gettin’ tactical.

Some things are better shown in video than in writing. And this one of them. So in the video below, I’ll take you through how to conduct a content strategy workshop inside your company.

The purpose is simple:

To generate a wide range of content topics that’ll engage the right people from the right companies with yours.

We facilitate these workshops all the time and I’m going to show you exactly how to do it.

So watch and learn. Then go make it happen!

Here’s what I’ll cover in the video

We’ll start by breaking down the characteristics of the types of companies you want to target at an account level.

For example, are we creating content for Tier 2 automotive parts manufacturers in the U.S. and Canada? Midwest injection molders that do $20 million-plus annually? Food manufacturers who sell high-end, low volume products into specialty stores?

The more specific you can be, the more relevant, valuable and engaging your content will be for them.

And that’s what this is all about – creating value for your best prospects and customers.

Next, we’ll break down the characteristics of the individual buying process influencers (or buyer personas) inside of those exact types of companies.

Who are the ones experiencing technical problems they need to figure out? Plant managers? Process engineers? Operations folks? And who else will influence the buying process as the sale progresses? Senior engineers? Procurement (duh)? The C-suite?

Each of these people care about different things. Plant managers need their machines running smoothly to mitigate downtime. Engineers need CAD models and technical specifications to help them deliver their solutions. CEOs care about total cost of ownership and ROI.

You’ll document as many of these issues, goals and common questions as possible on the spot.

Finally, we’ll start applying content ideas to each of these topics.

The process is simple. But it’s super effective.

So get to it. Watch the video below. And then finish up with my recommended next steps and tips that follow.

What to do next

Now that you know how to conduct the workshop, below are a few considerations and next steps.

But first, here’s the spreadsheet from the video.

Go ahead and make a copy for yourself. No form fill required to download it. (Note that you’ll just need to be signed into your Google account to access it since it’s a Google Sheets file.)

Get the right people in the room

When we run these workshops for our clients, we make sure the CEO/President, the VP of sales, the head of marketing, a few key sales people and ideally a few technical professionals (often engineers) all attend.

More often than not, I’ve found this is the group that knows your customers the best. They interface with them regularly and know the ins and outs of their challenges and goals deeply.

You’ll want to lean on their expertise.

Block a full day

Nail tab #1 from the spreadsheet (ideal accounts) in the morning and tab #2 (personas) in the afternoon. Fill in tab #3 (content topics) as you go.

Give it the time it deserves and you’ll walk out of there energized with 25-50 great content ideas that will resonate with these exact individuals.

Prioritize your ideas after the workshop

You can’t write 25 blog posts or film 50 videos at once. So which should you prioritize? Which will have the most impact and are the most feasible to produce?

Order them accordingly, pick the best 5-10 and get ready to do the work.

Put a camera on your subject matter experts. Then interview ’em

Look at the list of content topics you’ve chosen to pursue and identify the deepest experts inside your organization for each.

Then interview them one by one.

Ideally, you’ll schedule a handful of interviews the same day and invest a few thousand dollars to have a professional videographer put a camera and lights on them.

Now you’ve got insights in video format that can be used on your website, on YouTube, in the social channels, in paid ads, etc. You can have them transcribed and use the raw text or hand the transcriptions off to copywriter to turn them in written content for white papers, blog posts, and other applications.

In this episode of the B2B Growth podcast, I broke down how to do what we call “Knowledge Extraction Day” if you want to learn more: 3 Benefits to Content Creation “Batching”.

I also recommend reading this article by our content director Toby Wall to guide you: How to extract expert knowledge from your team and turn it into incredible content.

Good luck making it happen.

And shoot me a message on LinkedIn if you could use some more guidance!

How keyword research can elevate your website content

One of the biggest drivers for SEO (search engine optimization) on your website is having content that answers the questions your prospective customers are looking up on search engines – such as Google.

But how do you figure out what to write about and what are people even asking? And when you get your list of topics, how do you optimize the content so it shows up in search results?

Performing keyword research will help answer these questions.

Backlinko.com states that “Keyword research is the process of finding words and phrases (aka “keywords”) that people use in search engines in order to optimize content around and rank for those terms in search engines.”

Simply put, what are the phrases that your customers are using online to find products and/or services provided by your company and your competitors. The important thing to remember is that they could be different than what you are used to calling them.

Adding these keywords to your content will help drive organic traffic to your website.

Step 1: Discover your content triggers

The best place to start is by paying close attention during conversations with prospective and current customers. What questions do you find yourself answering over and over again?

Reading They Ask, You Answer by Marcus Sheridan will power you with an outline of how to figure out what your audience wants to learn about. This book is a company favorite and was recently featured on our summer reading list.

Here’s how Sheridan summarizes how to discover the questions that your prospects want answered:

“Have a brainstorm session – Brainstorm every question you’ve ever been asked by a prospect or a customer. Focus on his or her fears, issues, concerns, and worries. State them on paper exactly as the consumer would ask (or search) them, not the way you (as the business) would state them. Once you’ve completed your list, you have the foundation for your entire digital marketing editorial calendar – be it articles, videos, and so on – to put on your company website.”

Each one of those questions could become something that you write about on your website – this is what we like to call a content trigger. In this article, we walk you through our process for discovering content triggers and how to translate them into content marketing ideas. At the end of the article, you can download our content planning worksheet to help keep all of your ideas organized.

Step 2: Prioritize your content topics

Okay, now you have a long list of topics that you want to write about. How do you know which one you should start with?

There are different things to consider based on your company, topic ideas and website.

Which topics do you have the capability to write about right away vs. which ones need more thorough research? Do you need to interview subject matter experts with busy schedules? Do you need to get approval to mention specific a customer or product line?

All of those things could hold up the process of getting the article published. It is always good to interview subject matter experts for any piece, but if you can’t get on their schedule for a couple of months, it might be good to start with topics that you know would be quicker to knock out.

Our suggestion is to pick several topics that you think will really resonate with your audience to do a more in-depth analysis.

Looking at data in Google Search Console will show you what keywords your website already ranks for. Under the ‘performance’ section, there are options to view your current keyword and page rankings. You can see where your website ranks in SERPs (search engine results pages) for specific keywords by looking at the average positions. First page rankings will be anything from 1-10, second page rankings will be anything from 11-20 and so on.

Best case scenario – you find a topic that you aren’t ranking for yet but have the potential to.

But if you are ranking on the second page or after for the keyword – this is good too! Writing a new content piece (or updating an old one) on that topic could bump your ranking to a higher position on Google. This is beneficial because websites typically receive more clicks with improved rankings.

If you are already on the first page, you may want to deprioritize that topic. The return on the investment in Google rankings isn’t going to be as high as the previous two scenarios.

Step 3: Make a list of your keyword options

In the next step, you will need to figure out if are short-tail or long-tail keywords that you can use to target the content to optimize for search engines. You won’t be able to keyword target an article that nobody is searching for on Google.

The easiest way to explain how to find this out is to walk through an example.

“Understanding NFPA 110 regulations” is a topic that we wanted to create a thought leadership piece for our client CK Power.

Use Google to your advantage to determine what people are searching for.  Type in the most relevant word or phrase for your topic – in this case, I used “NFPA 110”.

There are a few things to look for in the search:

What are other search terms that Google auto-populates in the search bar?

What are other related terms that are listed in the SERP titles and/or descriptions?

For example, “NFPA 110 emergency generator testing requirements” from the last result would be good to add to the list.

What comes up in the ‘searches related to NFPA 110’ section at the bottom of SERP?

These are typically similar or identical to what Google auto-populates in the search bar. It is just another way to manually sift through the results.

All of these phrases are commonly searched alongside ‘NFPA 110’. I made a list of the ones that were relevant to the topic to start my keyword research base.

There are also tools that will give you more insight into the keywords that you want to target and suggestions for additional ones.

You can get deep in the weeds here very quickly by digging into every piece of information until you have exhausted all of your options, but you can always go back and repeat this process if needed. Once you have a solid list you can move on to looking up monthly search volume for the keyword list.

The same tools listed above will give you an estimated monthly search volume. But it is likely that they all are going to be a little different.

For example, these are the results for ‘NFPA 110’:

  • Google keyword planner: 1,300 searches per month
  • Moz keyword explorer: 200-500 searches per month
  • Ahrefs keyword explorer: 900 searches per month

I tend to lean towards using Google keyword planner because it is what I feel comfortable with. However, it has been researched that Keyword Planner will occasionally group like search terms together and that may inflate the search volume numbers.

After using Google’s keyword planner tool, it looks like ‘NFPA 110’, ‘NFPA standards’, ‘NFPA 110 generator testing’, ‘NFPA generator testing requirements’ and ‘NFPA 110 free access’ could be viable options to use in this content piece.

In the next step, we will look at how your website stacks up against other websites also creating content around this topic.

Side note: If users aren’t searching for your topic, it could be because the topic isn’t broad enough or they don’t know the solution/product exists. This doesn’t mean the content shouldn’t be created if you think your prospects will find it valuable, but maybe it should be used in an account-based marketing campaign or another direct approach.

Step 4: Determine the viability of your keywords

After cleaning up the keyword list, here is where we are at:

How competitive are those keywords? Are there a lot of other websites covering those topics? Are those websites more authoritative than your website?

To get the list of websites that are ranking on the first page of Google, I like to use the keyword analyzer tool in Term Explorer

Now, I need to determine how CK Power’s website stacks up against the ones on the list from Term Explorer. By using a tool like URL Profiler, I can easily compare website domain authority.  To compile the domain authority data, we have our URL Profiler account linked to our Ahrefs account. But as you can see in the image, you can use Majestic, Moz, SEMrush and more.

To compare website authority, I need to know what my client’s website domain rating is. This will vary slightly depending on which the tool (Ahrefs/Moz/Majestic/etc) is used. After sorting the sheet by domain ratings, I look to see where the website will fit in. If the rating is better than or close in rankings to the rest of the list there is potential that after time the new content piece could replace ones listed.

Comparing monthly search volume and competitiveness of keywords for all of your content ideas will help you paint a clear picture of which topic (or a few topics) is your best bet to start with.

Step 5: Create your content

Finally, you settled on your content topic and keyword/s! Now you just have to write the content.

It is important to remember to put yourself in your prospect’s place when writing content. Would you want to read an article that goes on and on about how great a company is? Or would you rather read an article that outlines the problems you are experiencing and gives realistic advice on steps to solve them?

Learn how to extract knowledge from subject matter experts and then translate it into helpful content that your prospects want to read.

Side note: Once your content is published it won’t automatically start ranking on Google. There is no magic trick to speed up this process. It will take time post-publication for Google to recognize the article and bring it into the SERPs. The best secret to ranking in Google is to consistently create good content that people want to read.

Need more help? We have a variety of services that can help you with your marketing strategy.

How to optimize for branded search and own your online reputation

Five Star reviews

What do people see when they Google your company name?

Your website, right? Yeah … that’s a given. Of course they’re seeing your website. Unless something is seriously wrong with it, that is. In which case, get a professional on it pronto.

But I’m not just talking about your website here. Sure, it’s the most important digital asset you own, but that’s exactly the point — you own it. You completely control the messaging, the content, the images. Everything is filtered through your perspective, as it rightfully should be. (However, if everything on your website is about you rather than about your customers and their problems, perhaps it’s time to think about rehabbing your site.)

No, I’m talking about all of your digital properties, including the company profiles you have on other websites. Some of them you may already own and some of them you may have never even known about, let alone thought about.

I’m talking about your online reputation.

What is branded search?

Branded search is exactly what it sounds like: someone searching for your company name or the name of your proprietary product(s) online.

For better or for worse, your potential customers, investors, job prospects or partners/vendors are doing due diligence with their research. If they already know you, they’re Googling your company to learn more. And they’re not just going to your website. They’re getting other opinions, checking out what others say about you.

And what if they don’t like what they find?

Chances are, they’ll turn elsewhere. They’ll go from high intent and high interest to a lost cause.

You can brag all you want about your company in person, on the phone, in an email, but if your online presence as a whole tells a different narrative, then it’s:

Game over man, game over gif from Aliens

So, I’ll ask again. What do people see when they Google your company name? Go ahead, open a new tab and do it yourself.

Here’s our first SERP (search engine results page). Your results will probably look somewhat similar.

Maybe your results include a profile piece from a local newspaper or industry publication. In which case, congrats!

Maybe there’s a competitor bidding on your name as a keyword with Google Ads and showing up above your website. In which case:

  1. Shame on them.
  2. It might be time to spend some money on a branded Google Ads campaign yourself. Here’s how to set up an Ads account if you don’t already have one.

Maybe you searched for a shortened version of your name that’s shared by another company and their results outrank yours. In which case, if you want to stand a chance of competing here, the best way is to work on building the authority of your domain. We recommend doing so through guest publishing where it matters most.

Maybe there’s some regrettable news from the past that shows up with your branded search. In which case, there’s some work to do to reclaim your reputation. Some of the following recommendations can help in that process.

Regardless of what the SERPs for your branded search look like, here are a few things you should know about the results and how you can get the most out of your digital properties.

Your website

Your website’s homepage will likely be one of the first results for a branded search. Attached to the result will be the page’s title tag, the meta description and potentially a set of site links.

Sealco

Since this is your chance to make your website shine on the SERP, it’s best to do some basic SEO work.

If your current title tag and meta description aren’t ideal, you can update them using a simple SEO tool. A free plugin like Yoast is the way to go if your site is built on WordPress.

Title tag

Make sure this includes your company name at the start, followed by a quick summation of what you provide. You have about 50-60 characters to work with here, so make sure you keep it brief.

Meta description

This is where you can expand on the title’s quick summary and give more context for the searcher. Again, this needs to be brief (typically under 160 characters). One note, Google may occasionally automatically populate meta descriptions themselves and take your set description as more of a suggestion.

Site links

These may also be extended out with a quick “mini-meta description” (as they are in the Gorilla 76 SERP example). Unfortunately, there’s really no way to completely control what links Google shows here. A lot of it comes down to the popularity of the pages on your site.

Google My Business profile

Google My Business profile for The Korte CompanyUnless your company is brand spanking new, you more than likely already have a Google My Business listing. You’re probably just not using it to its fullest. If the listing isn’t claimed and owned by a member of your company, someone should claim and verify it.

Once claimed and verified, it’s time to optimize the listing to make sure all of the information is accurate and complete. Add or edit your logo, images, a business description, your business hours, website links, products/services and look into what reviews you have (if any).

Reviews play an essential role in optimizing the listing as they can either attract or deter interested parties. The quality and quantity of reviews are key. If you only have a few, or if they are generally negative, consider running a review campaign. Pick some of your best customers or vendors (avoid employees here) and shoot them an email requesting they write you a review and post it. Chances are they’ll be more than willing to help out. You can also respond to their reviews (and those of others — both good and bad) on Google, giving further context for anyone who might read through them.

An optimized Google My Business profile is imperative in this day and age. Not only does the listing come up for branded searches, but it can also come up during more localized searches. 

When people search things like:

  • “[your service] near me”
  • “[your product] [your location]”
  • “best [your service] companies in [your location]”

Google adds a SERP feature called a Local Panel that includes a map near the searcher’s location as well as three relevant businesses. An optimized listing is more apt to show up in this feature.

C-P Flexible Packaging local pack

Job boards

Yes, I’m talking about Indeed and Glassdoor here. Like it or not, these sites aren’t just used by potential employees.

Recently, a company I work with who is in acquisition mode had a meeting with a potential selling company. The meeting seemed to go well, but then the other company did some online research. Needless to say, the acquisition didn’t go through due in part to a few rogue employee reviews on job boards.

Have HR claim your company profiles on these job boards and fill them out to the best of their abilities. Add photos that accurately represent the culture, list relevant information on benefits, etc. And respond to reviews in an appropriate and sensitive manner.

This is another instance where a review campaign could come in handy — this time only employees. Don’t feel the need to incentivize employees in any way, just shoot them an email kindly requesting that they consider leaving an honest review.

Social media

No, I’m not saying you need a company account for Pinterest or Snapchat or TikTok or Flim Flam or whatever new app the kids are on these days. Unless you want to be. In which case, more power to you.

But if you’re on LinkedIn or Facebook, that counts. Beef up your company profile with more detailed information. Share a few updates every once in a while. Aim to gain a few more likes or followers every month or two. Your follower or like counts shouldn’t be KPIs, but potential customers or employees do see those stats and may subconsciously allow them to sway their opinions on a company.

Although our recommendation at Gorilla is to primarily use LinkedIn on a more personal level to broaden reach, an updated company profile looks more natural if you’re considering running Sponsored Posts through LinkedIn advertising. The same goes for Facebook. I’ve seen comments on Facebook ads before that mention the fact that the ad is new, but the company profile page hasn’t been updated in years. 🤔 You don’t want to be that company. 

Directory & review sites

Hot take: Don’t pay for directories. They’re not worth the investment. That said, your company is probably on several free directory sites already. Some of these are more relevant and of a higher quality than others, but if they’re showing up in branded searches, you may as well take advantage of them.

The more general directory sites include Thomasnet®, Manta and Yelp. Yep, you read that right, Yelp. And before you say anything about Yelp being primarily for B2C companies, again, chances are you’re actually already on it as a result of data aggregators. Oh, and did I mention that Apple Maps tends to pull data from Yelp? So if someone is looking up directions to your office, the information they’re seeing (category, hours, etc.) on their phone is typically from that site.

Have a company representative take ownership of these existing directory listings. Add business descriptions, contact information, photos, appropriate categories. If no exact match category is to be found, use a more general category like Davron did for their Yelp page.

Davron Technologies Yelp

Online reputation is an ongoing process, and we recommend monitoring brand mentions with a tool like Google Alerts. (Pro tip: use quotation marks around your company name for more accurate results.) But taking some time to tackle the low-hanging fruit listed above is an excellent place to start.

If you have any questions about any of this, please feel free to send me a message

And if you’d like us to audit your online presence or need any help with improvements, send us a note using the form below.

PODCAST: Free gets no respect – How to stop giving away your expertise

An interview on the Make It Right podcast

I was recently interviewed on the Make It Right podcast – a show where “manufacturing industry experts discuss the advancements, challenges, solutions and opportunities in this highly technical industry.”

In the episode, titled “Free Gets No Respect – How to Stop Giving Away Your Expertise,” I broke down a two-part article I recently published on the topic.

You can listen to it below or find it here on Apple Podcasts.

Here are some key takeaways:

  • I’ve learned from many conversations with manufacturers over the years that they tend to give away a lot of engineering time from their best people for free – just to win the job.
  • But maybe it doesn’t have to be this way. My recommendation is to take the first 1-5% of your customer’s budget and do a paid diagnostic.
  • This diagnostic could take on a variety of forms – a paid consulting engagement, a site audit, a second opinion service, a research report, a product sample or a custom prototype. (See our article “7 ways to generate revenue on the path to the big sale” for more ideas).
  • I recommend creating what I call a “spectrum of value creation” for your customers – a natural progression in the relationship – where more value is delivered as you move from left to right (see the graphic below). And simultaneously, more commitment from the customer is required in exchange.
  • Implementing a spectrum like this carries a number of benefits: 1) The sale starts before your first conversation with the prospect as they consume your content online. 2) Your prospect now has skin in the game because they’ve made (a small) financial investment. 3) Your team can give it your all since you’re now being compensated for your best people’s time. 4) Your customer becomes more bought in – not wanting to backtrack and start over with another company once you’ve begun earning their trust. 5) You’re no longer seen as “just another vendor.”
  • It’s very possible that your customers already want to buy some type of introductory service from you (as oppose to going all in or getting half-hearted unpaid consulting from you). Maybe you’re just not offering it to them yet.

Here’s the spectrum of value creation mentioned above:

spectrum of value creation

Summer reading: 12 lessons from 12 books for 12 weeks

summer reading

Summer’s here!

The kids are home from school (well – still home from school, I suppose). The pool is open (it was $34 at Target). And vacations are underway (by ourselves, in our own backyards, drinking grocery store piña coladas out of frozen pouches).

OK, the summer ahead might be looking a little bit weird.

But your summer reading doesn’t have to be.

If you’re planning to add any business books to the mix, I’ve got 12 great ones for you. Each has significantly influenced my own thinking in some way – both as a business owner and marketing/sales consultant.

These 12 books span the following four topics:

  • Positioning
  • Prospecting and selling
  • Content marketing
  • Building customer relationships

I went back to my notes from all 12 and pulled the quotes that best represent my most powerful takeaways. Hopefully a few of these will inspire you too.

Regardless of what the summer ahead looks like in your world, happy reading!

New Sales Simplified by Mike Weinberg

new sales simplifiedLet’s kick it off with one of my all-time favorites.

Although New Sales. Simplified. is a sales book by name and by nature, Chapter 8 provides the best framework I’ve seen for putting your brand positioning down in writing. We even used it to write our own Who We Help and How page.

Though he may not have intended it this way, Mike’s book is about a lot more than sales. It’s about how to differentiate your business in front of the right people from the right companies by focusing on what they care about instead of what you do.

Most influential quote:

“Prospective customers are not interested in what you do; they are only interested in what you can do for them. Said another way, no one cares how smart you are or how great you think your company is. They want to know what’s in it for them.”

Here’s New Sales. Simplified. on Amazon.

Building a StoryBrand by Donald Miller

building a storybrandIn Building a StoryBrand, Donald Miller applies hero-guide stories we all know (Frodo-Gandalf, Luke Skywalker-Yoda, Katniss-Haymitch) to the business world. Side note: Yes, I read the Hunger Games trilogy, but Lebron James was reading it at the same time as me so I’m OK saying that out loud 😉.

In a nutshell, this new classic is about making your prospect the hero – rather than assuming that role for yourself. They’re Luke. You’re Yoda. Guide them to the solution with your lightsaber.

Most influential quote:

“If heroes in a story could solve their own problems, they would never get into trouble in the first place. That’s why storytellers, through the centuries, have created another character to help the hero win. Depending on the scholar you talk to, there are many names for this character, but the term we use at StoryBrand is the guide.”

Here’s Building a StoryBrand on Amazon.

The Win Without Pitching Manifesto by Blair Enns

the win without pitching manifestoLet’s do one more about positioning before we move on to other topics.

Blair Enns is an advisor to creative marketers (not manufacturers). But his principles in The Win Without Pitching Manifesto transcend my industry.

The most powerful common thread that I’ve seen throughout the advice Blair publishes on his blog, his podcast and in his book is this:

We tend to assume in business relationships that the “power” lies in the hands of the buyer. After all, they hold the money. But the less interchangeable you become to the buyer (the more valuable your expertise is perceived to be), the more power you hold in the relationship.

Since Blair says it much better than I do, he’ll take it from here…

Most influential quote:

“When we drastically reduce the real alternatives to hiring our firm, we shift the power balance away from the client and toward us. This power shift allows us to affect the buying process and increase our ability to protect ourselves from having to part with our thinking for free, from having to respond to wasteful and inefficient tenders or requests for proposals (RFP), and to otherwise devalue our own offering or increase our cost of sale.”

Here’s The Win Without Pitching Manifesto on Amazon.

Same Side Selling by Ian Altman and Jack Quarles

same side sellingTime to talk sales strategy.

It’s been a good five or six years since I read this one, but some key concepts remain with me – a testament to the lasting insight this book delivers.

When a new prospect is ready to cut you a check, the easy thing to do is smile, cash it and start grinding away on the work.

But the smart thing to do is take a step back, think about who your best customers are and what differentiated value you deliver to them. Then – go and proactively seek out others who resemble these customers rather than taking whatever falls into your lap.

When you don’t exercise this discipline, you wind up on a spinning hampster wheel – spending your most valuable resources serving customers who aren’t even profitable.

We’ve all been there before. But no more.

Same Side Selling is a book about first identifying the fit. And once you do, finding the most impactful solution with your prospect. Coauthored by Ian Altman (a sales expert) and Jack Quarles (a buying expert), this book brings a fresh dual perspective to the sales front.

Most influential quote:

“The puzzle pieces you have are your resources. They are relevant, but only because they lead to results. Your pieces are valuable only if they fit the holes in the client’s puzzle. If you and the client have trouble seeing why her company needs your products or services, then perhaps your pieces are not a fit for their puzzle.

It is natural for buyers to ask questions about vendor costs, personnel, and process. These factors can all affect the quality and delivery of the end product. But an emphasis on the seller’s costs, rather than on the buyer’s value, can derail a possibly great deal. Ultimately what matters is the puzzle piece. The people and process behind it matter to the extent that they determine its shape.

Are you looking at each other or looking at the pieces?”

Here’s Same Side Selling on Amazon.

ABM is B2B by Sangram Vajre

abm is b2bThe first four books I covered will help you create focus – both in terms of identifying the right people from the right companies and crafting a message that will resonate with them. This book’s about how to go get ’em.

Sangram Vajre is the co-founder of the account-based marketing software company Terminus and a pioneer in that arena. His FlipMyFunnel podcast (614 episodes as of the date I’m writing this!) has over 430 five-star ratings.

The premise of ABM is B2B is that the future of marketing lies in a joint, account-based approach where sales, marketing and customer success teams are working hand in hand to drive growth.

And at the center of an account-based marketing approach is your ideal customer profile. Understanding what that customer looks like – both at a company and human level lets you target and pursue the right types of future customers.

Most influential quote:

“Not all accounts are equal in value, so why are you creating equal experiences for them? It’s okay to play favorites – in fact, it’s necessary! Assigning tiers is the fairest way to make sure you design experiences that reflect what each account is worth. Your top tier gets wined and dined; your bottom tier gets Sprite and takeout.”

Here’s ABM is B2B on Amazon.

The Challenger Sale by Matthew Dixon and Brent Adamson

the challenger saleSales professionals come in all shapes and sizes. But after surveying over 6,000 of them, authors Matthew Dixon and Brent Adamson categorized them into five profiles: 1) The Relationship Builder; 2) The Problem Solver; 3) The Hard Worker; 4) The Lone Wolf; 5) The Challenger.

What they ultimately discovered (as I’m sure you’ve guessed from the book’s title) is that the top performers overwhelmingly fit The Challenger profile.

Challengers don’t say “yes” by default.

They push their prospects by bringing unique insights to table and by helping them see potential solutions in a different light. And by doing so, they take charge of the sale – positioning themselves as expert advisors rather than undifferentiated vendors.

If that’s the type of company you’re striving to be, this book’s gold.

Most influential quote:

“Customers will repay you with loyalty when you teach them something they value, not just sell them something they need. Remember, it’s not just the products and services you sell, it’s the insight you deliver as part of the sales interaction itself.”

Here’s The Challenger Sale on Amazon.

Killing Marketing by Joe Pulizzi and Robert Rose

killing marketingLet’s start our transition into books about content marketing with one coauthored by the guy who dubbed the term itself. As founder of Content Marketing Institute, proprietor of Content Marketing World and author of seven books on the topic, Joe Pulizzi is the O.G. (as the cool kids would say) of content marketing.

Here’s the common thread I’ve latched onto across everything I’ve read by Joe:

We need to stop thinking about marketing and sales as a short-term transactional game and instead as a process of building an engaged audience of people who genuinely like you, trust you and value your expertise.

When you do that, the sale will follow.

Most influential quote:

“The key is looking to the investment we are making as one that is not focused on the immediate return of transactional clicks, visits, paths, time on site, or even purchases, but rather the accumulation of attention and access to an audience we can monetize over time.

This is not just a marketing tactics transformation — this is a business transformation. This is looking at marketing as a business model — a profitable investment that is meant to provide access, and accumulation of attention and loyalty from a true investment: an audience.”

Here’s Killing Marketing on Amazon.

They Ask You Answer by Marcus Sheridan

they ask you answerWhen planning the structure of this article, I arranged these 12 books to create a natural flow by topic.

Had I instead chosen to order them by their level of influence on my thinking, They Ask You Answer would unquestionably sit alone at the top.

If you’re a marketing or sales professional and aren’t familiar with Marcus Sheridan, do yourself a favor and go follow him on LinkedIn right now. Then buy this book and start reading.

The success story that drove Marcus (the owner a of local Virginia-based fiberglass pool company on the verge of bankruptcy in the late 2000s) is the greatest testament to the power of content marketing that I’ve ever seen. Here’s a New York Times interview with him from 2013 if you’d like to hear it.

Today, Marcus is one of the biggest names in marketing. He’s also one of the most charismatic, genuine business people you’ll ever encounter. (Back in 2017, he even joined live via Zoom when we did They Ask You Answer for our company book club!).

What I love the most is the raw simplicity of his platform:

They ask.

You answer.

It’s that simple. Listen to your customers. Pay attention to the things they’re trying to learn during the buying process. Then answer their questions as thoroughly and resourcefully as you can on your website.

Most influential quote:

“If I was on a sales appointment, as soon as the prospect would ask me a question my immediate thought was, Have I answered that on our website yet?

“And remember, I’m not talking here about one- or two-sentence answers to questions. I’m talking about really answering the question, including deep explanations while approaching each with a “teacher’s” mentality — without bias and trying only to educate the reader.”

Here’s They Ask You Answer on Amazon.

Leveraged Learning by Danny Iny

leveraged learningIf They Ask You Answer is about teaching by answering common questions on your website, Leveraged Learning by Danny Iny is about taking that teaching mentality to the next level.

In the first half of his book, Iny looks at the inefficiencies and unsustainable rising costs of higher education and puts a spotlight on the opportunity this presents for professionals and subject matter experts to fill that gap.

And in the second half of the book, he shows you what to do about it.

Most influential quote:

“If not colleges, who will provide the lifelong learning of the future? From the only place that it can come from: the experts and professionals on the cutting edge and front lines of their respective fields. They’re the only ones whose knowledge and skills will be sufficiently up to date to provide what learners will need. While their skill level and opportunity cost will command a premium, the transformation that they will deliver will justify paying it.”

Here’s Leveraged Learning on Amazon.

Top of Mind by John Hall

top of mindThe last three on my list I’ll classify as books about building authentic relationships with your customers (and future customers).

Earlier this year I wrote an article titled “Give” – a look into my (and Gorilla’s) philosophy that when you put helping ahead of selling, the selling will naturally follow.

John Hall’s Top of Mind embodies this idea. It’s a book about building genuine relationships in your business life – just like those you strive to build in your personal life.

When you’re authentic and helpful, it all comes back around to you.

Most influential quote:

“As a philosophy, You Marketing revolves around a singular question: How can I make life better for you? Notice that the question is neither “How can I make life better for you so that you’ll buy whatever I’m selling?” nor “How can I trick you into believing that I care?”

Here’s Top of Mind on Amazon.

Content Based Networking by James Carbary

content based networkingIf you’re a podcast listener (like 32% of Americans), stop and think about the business podcasts you regularly consume. Most take the form of interviews, right?

The host facilitates a conversation with an expert, shining a spotlight on them and drawing out their expertise in a way that benefits the listeners.

James Carbary is the founder of Sweet Fish Media – a company that produces podcasts for other B2B companies and co-host of the wildly successful B2B Growth podcast.

James’ experience in the podcasting world has taught him that starting relationships with both industry influencers and future customers is simpler than we all might think.

His big secret?

Interview them.

As James writes, “Content-Based Networking is figuring out the relationships you need to build to achieve your goals, going directly to those people, and creating content with them.”

Most influential quote:

“We all agree that a relationship with the right “someone” could be our ticket to starring in the movies, our “in” with the hiring manager of our dream job, or the monetary investment we need to take our business to the next level.

The problem is that most of us don’t know how to create those relationships. We chalk them up to, “Being in the right place at the right time.” We sit back, wait for serendipity to run its course, and hope that great opportunities somehow fall into our laps….

“But, should we really live our lives waiting for that chance encounter to change our course?”

Here’s Content Based Networking on Amazon.

Never Lose a Customer Again by Joey Coleman

never lose a customer againAs I mentioned earlier, over the last few years, our team at Gorilla has done a quarterly book club.

And no book has driven more tangible changes to the way we operate than this one.

Never Lose a Customer Again was born out of Joey Coleman’s “First 100 Days” concept – his philosophy that a lasting customer relationship is rooted in the interactions and experiences they have with you during the first 100 days after the sale.

Joey defines eight very distinct phases that the customer goes through during those 100 days and how you can respond to them in a way that eliminates buyer’s remorse and builds a sustainable, rewarding and fruitful relationship.

We’re all in the business of customer service. And this book is a must read on the topic.

Most influential quote:

“The lifetime value of a loyal customer can be greater than ten times the value of their first purchase. Like money left in the bank account, investments in customer loyalty compound over time.”

Here’s Never Lose a Customer Again on Amazon.

What did I miss?

Boiling down my list to 12 was challenging. What else would you add? Please comment below because I could use some fresh summer reads too!

In the meantime, I’ll go set up the inflatable pool.

PODCAST: How industrial buyers have changed and what to do about it

An interview on The Industrial Marketer podcast

I was recently interviewed by MJ Peters and Matthew Sciannella on The Industrial Marketer podcast.

In a discussion that touched on a range of manufacturing marketing subtopics, we unpacked in detail – “How industrial buyers have changed and what to do about it”.

You can listen to it below or find it here on Apple Podcasts.

Here are some key takeaways:

  • So many manufacturers have been doing sales and marketing the same way for years (trade shows, knocking on doors, print ads, relying on referrals, etc). But in a time when the industrial buying process is quickly moving online, for many, these strategies are no longer getting the job done.
  • Manufacturers who sell through dealers or distributors need a two-pronged marketing approach. The first targets the distribution network who often needs to be educated and armed with tools to sell. The second targets the end users to make them advocates for your solution (even though they’re buying though dealers/distributors).
  • Your content strategy should stem from the issues that matter most to your best customers and prospects. This means pain points, goals, common questions and buying triggers (both inside the company like new product lines or equipment reaching end of life, and outside the company like seasonality or EPA regulations on the horizon).
  • Marketing needs to be viewed as an investment in driving business – not just a necessary expense. And CEO buy-in is critical to changing this mindset. Once this happens, marketing-sales alignment becomes much more achievable.
  • Since COVID-19 hit, there’s been an expedited sense of urgency in the industrial sector to move business development online. Manufacturers tend to rely heavily on trade shows and face-to-face interactions with customers and prospects. And at least for the time being, that’s been out the door. But this has presented opportunities to evolve. (See our recorded webinar “Prospecting in the absence of trade shows and travel” and our article “While the world’s upside down: 7 things sales and marketing can do”).
  • Don’t shy away from talking about pricing in your content. Your customers want that information, so let’s not beat around the bush. Even if what you sell is custom and complex, you can compare and contrast the cost of different solutions, talk about total cost of ownership, provide buyer’s guides, etc. The more helpful and transparent you can be, the more trust you’ll earn.
  • Here are a few examples of industrial sector companies doing marketing right: 1) CK Power; 2) AME (see their Sawing Academy in particular); 3) Rodon Group; 4) Cadenas PARTsolutions (see their “Resources” tab and also their Industrial Marketing Summit).

Why client-agency relationships fail when they fail

broken link

So you’ve invested hours of research into finding the right marketing partner for your business. You’ve likely spent countless hours poring over the site; reading through each page and trying to gather as much information about the agency as possible. Maybe this is the first agency you’ve worked with or maybe it’s the second or third. Every agency will vary, but you’ve confirmed they’re a good fit by vetting pages on their website that verifies: 

And you’ve checked out pages like the Our Team, Careers and maybe even the company Instagram to see how the company treats their employees and more importantly, to make sure there are real people and not robots doing the work. You’ve been subscribed to their company newsletter for months now (maybe even years) and have even crept on a few LinkedIn profiles of key employees at the company. (If you’re from St. Louis, you’ve probably discovered that you went to the same high school.)

From what you can tell, things look good and you’re ready to take an even deeper dive. 

You’ve gone through the process of reaching out to the agency to learn more, you’ve looped in your CEO and key decision-makers at your company and you’ve gone through the agency’s Discovery process and have been presented a roadmap of recommendations on how to proceed. 

Phew! That was a lot of work, right? You’re probably thinking that you’ve made it through the hardest part. The 40-, 50-, 60-plus hours you’ve spent researching the agency should pretty much guarantee that the client-agency relationship won’t fail. Yep, you’re right! And that’s actually where this article ends. Thanks for tuning in, folks. See ya next time!

 Okay, I’m obviously kidding.

Unfortunately, client-agency relationships can fail even after you’ve gone through an extensive vetting process. But here’s the thing — they don’t have to. So let’s start by identifying some of the key reasons why client-agency relationships fail when they fail. It requires an honest evaluation on your end, but by identifying these critical areas you can proactively take careful measures to eliminate the chances for a partnership failing. 

Your internal business organization isn’t structured to support your marketing strategy

Let’s say you need to get from point A to point B. What does that look like for your organization? Is it a pretty straightforward path where there may be a few stops along the way but the time and effort it takes to get from A to B are relatively short and effortless?

Maybe it’s more like you’re running through a maze and in that maze, the walls are 15 feet high and you’re blindfolded and there’s constantly something grabbing at your feet trying to slow you down?  

Or, maybe it’s like Indiana Jones and the Temple of Doom and it’s that scene where you’re looking for the lever so the spikes don’t close in on you?

Be honest with yourself. Is your company structured like the first example? Or are you more of a Maze or Temple of Doom structure? 

If the right structure isn’t in place, then the client-agency partnership will require tremendous time and constant effort on both parties to keep things from falling apart. 

Your organization needs to be structured to support you and your marketing strategy. An article by the Harvard Business Review, “Is your company actually set up to support your strategy?” goes into detail about the importance of your operating model. 

Think about what they said here: 

“If your company’s operating model can’t deliver on your strategy, or needs to be upgraded to match the evolution of that strategy, start the redesign with your leadership team not by digging into the details, but by pulling up and agreeing on a few basic principles.”

In that same article, it asks if your model has the right combination of people, process, technology and tools. What we see from our perspective is that it can fall on one person on the client’s side — our main point person. It shouldn’t, but it does. And why is that? My guess is that a lot of the “defects” in the operating model come to light because a partner (your agency) is brought into the mix. All of a sudden, things that weren’t a huge issue before becoming a bigger problem. Now you have to hold your team accountable in the delivery of projects in order to work with this new partner. No longer can the weaknesses in your structural organization be put on the backburner to address at a later time. 

Now think about the person that’s assigned to be the day-to-day contact to your agency. All of a sudden, the weaknesses in the structural organization fall on one single person. Usually, it’s a marketing director or a marketing coordinator. And they already have one of the most important roles that determine the success or failure of the client-agency relationship. No pressure, right? That means having the right person in the right seat for the role. 

Let’s break down that combination a little more with a few examples. How many of these can you realistically agree with for an existing or future marketing partnership?

  • People
    • I have five to eight hours a week to devote to my marketing partner
    • I can delegate tasks out to my team and know the task will get completed
    • I have decision-making power for day-to-day tasks
    • The person I report to supports me and my mission
    • I have the involvement (both the time and attention) of the right people. Including the C-suite. *Read further down for more on this
    • My C-suite and team trust my decision-making 
    • I can look at the high-level strategy and big picture without getting bogged down by the details

  • Process
    • My company’s operating model allows for the successful delivery of projects
    • I can get approval on projects in a timely manner
    • If there’s a roadblock, I know how to navigate it
    • I can introduce new processes to my team and after some coaching and training, my team is willing to try out and adopt these processes 
    • I don’t have to micromanage people or projects

  • Technology / tools
    • I can overcome any hurdles in technology
    • I can introduce new technology to my team and after some coaching and training, my team is willing to try out and adopt these processes 

How many did you agree with? If you agreed with the majority, you’re in a good place. If you didn’t, it might be time to honestly evaluate and grade yourself and your internal business structure. Doing so will help you set yourself and your team up for successful integration with your marketing partner. 

Your agency doesn’t have a direct line to your CEO

When asked what makes a successful partnership with a client and an agency, one of the most important things is having direct access to your C-suite. 

Their involvement helps: 

  • Serve the company’s business goals and objectives (meaning you’re all on the same page on what Q1 – Q4 goals and expectations are, what your one-year, five-year and 10-year plan looks like)
  • Eliminates the “big reveal” (meaning it saves you a bunch of rework and frustration) 
  • Helps with “buy-in” for all the hard work you do (the CEO is on your side!)
  • Creates a clear brand vision (they know your brand better than anyone)

This one is so important that it deserved its own article

Your communication with your agency and your internal team is poor

In real estate, you’ve probably heard the cliché of “location, location, location.” Well, when it comes to the client-agency relationships, it’s “communication, communication, communication.”

Communication comes in a lot of different forms. At some point, almost all client-agency issues go back to communication. Here are a few of the biggest culprits: 

  1. Unclear expectations and goals. Your marketing goals should be aligned with the overall business objectives set by your C-suite. If it’s not, then what’s everyone working towards?
  2. Poor information sharing. This is between you and your agency and between you and your team. Whether it’s about a great lead that turned into a sale or a high-level business discussion, keep your agency in the loop 
  3. Lack of transparency and honesty in feedback. If you’re unhappy with something you need to speak up
  4. Too many cooks in the kitchen. There should be one clear line of communication so your agency isn’t chasing down everyone you work with
  5. Unresponsiveness. Regular communication is essential. You and (your agency) shouldn’t do a disappearing act 

Everything regarding communication is a two-way street. This isn’t to say that it’s all on you. Far from it, in fact. This requires both parties to be excellent communicators. 

You don’t value the agency as a strategic thinking partner

“Wait a second, isn’t that what I hired you to do? I want your strategic thinking!”

Yes, it is what you hired us to do. I thought I’d slip this one in as a reminder. It’s easy to remember that early on when we’re all in the honeymoon stage, right? But what about when we get down to the nitty-gritty work? Are you still listening? 

Ah, time to insert the ol’ doctor prescription example *cracks knuckles*. When you go to a doctor and you describe your symptoms and your doctor recommends what you need, do you question it? Or do you trust them since they’re the expert?

Did you hire us for our strategic thinking or did you hire us to debate over the shade of a call-to-action button in a newsletter? Catch my drift?

Trust me, there’s no one who knows your business better than the people in your organization. That’s why we insist on interviewing your subject matter experts. Our conversations and interviews with your team, our hours of research into your business and our areas of deep expertise in marketing strategy are what formulate our recommendations. 

Moving forward

At this point, you might be thinking, “If I check all these boxes, does that mean we’re doomed for failure?”

If you’ve made it this far, it means you’re willing to learn and ready to take on the challenge of building and maintaining a long-term relationship with your agency. It’s never too late to turn things around and it’s most certainly a challenge that can be overcome together. 

Think you’re up for the challenge? We should talk

Basic training for B2B marketers

T-Shaped Marketer Abstract

I realized I enjoyed marketing sometime during grad school.

So I wanted to learn more about it. But have you tried Googling “marketing books”? Or “digital marketing courses”?

It’s overwhelming. There are hundreds of marketing topics to explore. I had no idea where to begin.

Five years later, I have a better grasp on what skillsets matter in marketing. 

Without having mastered all of them, I now feel comfortable categorizing skills that make a great marketer. 

The T-shaped marketer

Surprisingly, I’m not the first to do this. Crazy, I know. In fact, it’s been done so often that one “skill map” has emerged as the most popular: the “T-shaped marketer.”

According to this approach, your areas of expertise should be shaped like a ‘T.’ A broad education across disciplines at the top. A deep expertise in few channels at the bottom. Here is what I suggest that should look like for B2B marketers.

T-Shaped Marketer: Areas of Expertise
*Business is too broad of a category to recommend specific resources. So it isn’t part of this discussion. Events and social aren’t our strong suit, which is why they’re mentioned here but not explored later on.

Getting a foundation in both base knowledge and relevant channels is like the first year of college. You get a feel for everything that’s out there before picking a degree. That’s what this article should do for you.

You may want a less-wordy version of it to print out.

You can access a checklist here.

Without further ado, let’s start with what I’d consider the most important base knowledge area.

Positioning and storytelling

Many marketers that are just getting started often overlook this skill set at first (I plead guilty). It’s easy to get entranced by new and shiny marketing technology or out-of-the-box ideas. When I started at Gorilla, I was trialing $30,000 attribution software and was fascinated by one company’s idea of sending miniature Ferraris to prospects.

These tools and tactics can be useful, of course. But before you use them, make sure you have a firm grasp on your company’s story. You should be able to answer questions like:

  • Who does your company help? And more importantly: Who shouldn’t you be helping?
  • What problems do you solve for them and how do you accomplish that? 
  • What makes you different? 
  • How do you communicate all that to the right people so they buy from you?

Below are the resources I recommend for answering these questions.

(Maybe you weren’t planning on reading sales books. But give them a chance. Your job is not so different from sales. Except that your ad, email or website is selling to hundreds or thousands at a time.)

Dave Gerhardt

Dave helped grow the software startup Drift into a $40 million company. He discusses marketing tactics, copywriting and positioning. You can follow Dave on LinkedIn and join his Patreon for $10/month.

Book: New Sales. Simplified. – Mike Weinberg

Weinberg provides a fantastic B2B positioning framework in chapter 8 and great sales & marketing advice all around (thanks to Joe for the reco).

Josh Braun

Josh is a sales trainer with great advice on crafting sales messages that resonate with prospects. Follow him on LinkedIn and check out this video for an introduction to his approach.

Book: Building a StoryBrand – Donald Miller

A great positioning and messaging framework for your toolbox. Miller teaches a simple but key marketing lesson: Each story has exactly one hero — your customer. Also highly recommended by fellow B2B marketers MJ Peters at Firetrace and our very own Trevor Wallis.

Book: Ca$hvertising – Drew Eric Whitman

Okay, the title is over the top. The dollar sign makes me die inside every time I see it. But this book has great tactical advice that’ll give you a solid foundation for creating ads.

Book: Obviously Awesome – April Dunford

A more recent (2019) addition to positioning literature but with a spin on product positioning, backed by 16 product launches worth of experience. Thanks to Matthew at Abicor Binzel for this addition.

Planning and measuring

For some, this is the place to nerd out. For others, this is spreadsheet hell. But without proper planning and measuring, you’re driving with your eyes shut (10 points for Gryffindor for that metaphor).

Basics on planning and measuring

Victor Cheng is the godfather of management consulting and training applicants for the interview process. This may seem a bit outside the marketing realm. But it has helped me structure my thinking and provided some great frameworks for solving business problems. Cheng’s website is a bit of a mess but read his book Case Interview Secrets.

In addition to that, read our article on visualizing your customer acquisition funnel. It will help you understand how to achieve revenue targets by reverse-engineering funnel metrics. 

Make sure you’re striking a balance between short-term and long-term goals. This piece will help you understand the importance of brand marketing (despite the challenge of measuring it).

Tools

Providing training resources for each of the following tools would blow up this article. My goal is to show you which ones you really need (and maybe show you what you don’t need). Here’s our tech stack for measuring results:

  • Google Analytics: Measure activity on your website
  • Google Search Console: Detailed insight on keywords your site ranks for
  • Google My Business: Calls and clicks from your local listing
  • Google Tag Manager: Track conversions and install code snippets without a developer
  • Google Data Studio: Create reports automatically (vs. manually pulling data every week)
  • CRM: Measuring contact source, quality, sales cycle, close rate, revenue, etc; HubSpot works well for us
  • CallRail: A great, intuitive tool for measuring phone calls and their origin
  • Excel/Google Sheets pivot tables: Turn any dataset into segmented tables and graphs; it’ll save you thousands of hours throughout your career

You’ll find free courses on Google’s own training platforms or by experts on YouTube. If you’re looking for more advanced, in-depth courses, I recommend getting the CXL All-Access Pass for a few months ($59/month).

Content production

Done right, content marketing is the most powerful tool in B2B. By repeatedly solving your customers’ problems through content, you generate trust and demand. The below resources will give you a good idea of what makes great content and how to create it.

They Ask You Answer – Marcus Sheridan

When his swimming pool company tanked in 2008, Sheridan turned to content marketing to turn around his company. By answering every possible question about fiberglass pools (among other things), his company quickly became the go-to resource in the space. His story is a great primer for how to approach content production — simply answering your prospects’ questions.

Epic Content Marketing – Joe Pulizzi

Joe Pulizzi is the founder of the Content Marketing Institute and one of the first big names in content marketing. After reading it, print out the six principles he shares in this book and revisit them every time you’re about to write or as you plan upcoming content.

Gorilla on content marketing

Okay, let us brag a little here. We think we’re pretty darn good at content marketing. So we write about it often. Below are three pieces on our site you should read.

Design and UX

Whatever it is you’re doing in marketing, chances are that something visual needs to be created. Images, email templates and pages on your website are the vehicles that transport the message to your audience (that’s another 20 points, Harry).

Our design & UX team recommends the following two pieces as a small but meaningful foundation.

Book: Don’t Make Me Think, Revisited – Steve Krug

This is an introduction to usability. In Krug’s own words: “I wrote it for busy people who don’t do usability for a living, so it only covers what you really need to know.”

Design for non-designers (David Hall)

Hall briefly (and very entertainingly) summarizes five key design principles that you should be aware of. Read it here.

Website design: A few pieces on our site

We’ve designed our fair share of B2B websites. While doing so, we’ve identified a few keys to a great website build. If you’re planning a website project, you’ll find these articles helpful.

Acquisition channels and how to use them

Many (digital) marketers start out learning how acquisition channels work. At Gorilla, I started in SEO and inbound marketing. Others first learn how to optimize Google Ads or Facebook campaigns.

Understanding acquisition channels is fun because you can learn and get results fast. It’s very satisfying to see website traffic grow, more leads coming in, cost-per-click going down and so on.

But be careful not to get tunnel vision on your channels. Having a holistic training (i.e. other categories listed here) will help you understand how acquisition channels fit into the context of the business.

Here are foundational resources for key channels for B2B.

Paid social & email (content distribution)

Even the best content is useless if you don’t get the right eyes on it. For many B2B companies, content isn’t keyword-targeted. That means you need to find other distribution channels. Start by reading our article that addresses this distribution problem. Then read our introduction to Facebook & LinkedIn Ads for B2B, as well as Chris Walker’s article on Facebook Ads (and follow Chris on LinkedIn — he is THE expert on this topic).

Google Ads

Google’s own training is free and provides some basic understanding of how Google Ads works. But Google Ads is much more complex than that. Follow the “tips to minimize unqualified clicks” in this article religiously and get the CXL All-Access Pass for a month ($59) to take their Google Ads course.

SEO

SEO is often overcomplicated. In the end, ranking on Google comes down to three things: Great content answering questions (keywords), links from authoritative websites pointing to yours, and an easy-to-use website. Moz, the Google guru, dives deep into each of these factors in this guide. Sign up for the Moz Top 10 and Backlinko newsletter for ongoing education.

How to get started

Maybe you’ve already covered a lot of these resources and only want to fill some gaps. If you’re new to all this, you may not know where to start.

To get some momentum going, I would recommend reading Building a StoryBrand and New Sales. Simplified. Aside from learning a ton, they’re both fun reads that’ll motivate you to keep learning.

From there, work your way through these resources one week (or month – progress is progress) at a time.

You can use this downloadable overview as a quick reference. Print it out and cross things off as you go.

And if you think I missed something important on the list, shoot me a message.

How to stop giving away engineering and consulting for free (part 2)

This article is the second in a set of two. If you haven’t yet read the first, I recommend starting there.

In part one, I planted the seed that it might be time to stop giving away free, pre-contract thinking to win future customers.

Here’s a summary of what I covered:

  • Manufacturers who sell complex, engineering-driven solutions often give away hours upon hours of their technical expertise upfront for free – just to win the job.
  • There was a time when my own business (a marketing agency) operated in a very similar way. But we managed to escape and never looked back. Maybe, there’s another way for you too.
  • Encouraging your future customers to break off the first 1-5% of their project budget for a low-commitment, high-value consulting engagement (examples: pre-engineering, facility audit, prototype creation, etc.) might be your way out of the trap.

Here in part two, I’ll introduce a concept that I call “the spectrum of value creation” – a progression of interactions and engagements with future customers that progressively build from low to high commitment for both you and your prospect.

I’ll share how we’ve designed this range of engagements for our own business at Gorilla to provide context for what yours could look like.

And I’ll conclude by explaining how your buyer’s mindset will change for the better one you’ve begun positioning your products and/or services along this kind of spectrum.

OK – let’s do part two.

The spectrum of value creation

Years back, there were only two ways our agency engaged with (and therefore created value for) our prospects and customers:

  1. The long, drawn out (free) diagnostic process I described in part one
  2. Our flagship marketing implementation services that typically cost $60-120K+ per year

That was it. No precursors and nothing in between.

But today, things look much different.

Here’s what I call our “spectrum of value creation”:

spectrum of value creation

Notice how we’ve filled the gaps both before (orange) and in between (blue) the two original engagements (black) we offered.

What we’ve created here is a natural progression in the relationship, where more value is delivered as you move from left to right. And simultaneously, more commitment from the customer is required in exchange.

Let’s unpack each of these seven engagements along this spectrum.

1. Article

This is the smallest possible “transaction” between a prospect and our agency. And it’s exactly what’s happening between you and us at this moment.

You’re reading a publicly-available article we’ve published (as we do at least once per week). We’re exchanging a small nugget of our expertise in exchange for 10 minutes of your attention.

Our goal here is simple: to incrementally earn a little bit more of your trust.

2. Gated resource

The next level of transaction between us and a prospect is the exchange of a resource for permission to market to them.

In the “Tools” section of our Learning Center, we offer resources like our Content Planner Worksheet and our Customer Acquisition Funnel Worksheet. We also prompt visitors to subscribe to our bimonthly newsletter, download in-depth guides and sign up for webinars (both live and on-demand).

But in order to access this premium content, we ask our visitors to “pay” for the extra value we’re delivering with the currency of online lead generation (their contact information).

3. Free consultation

For us at Gorilla, “Free consultation” once meant the beginning of a long, time-intensive process consisting of a discovery meeting, research and eventually the delivery of (free) recommendations. I detailed this ineffective time suck in my part one article.

But our current version of a free consultation is much simpler. You get 30-60 minutes of our time at no cost. We get the opportunity to earn an additional bite of your trust and attention via a human-to-human conversation.

If we both agree there could be a fit, we discuss whether a relatively low-commitment, paid engagement (the “paid discovery and action plan” described a little further down the page) makes sense as a next step.

4. Paid content

Here’s where things start to get interesting. This one is experimental for us – very much in beta mode. And depending on when in time you’re reading this article, we might have even killed it. But here’s the idea…

We recently launched a membership site through a platform called Patreon.

Here, our prospects can subscribe to access exclusive content for $20/month, attend live trainings and Q&A sessions for $100/month or receive private coaching for $500/month.

We’ve created this platform for three primary reasons:

  1. To create significant value at lower levels of financial commitment for those who can’t (or aren’t ready to) invest in a full-scale agency engagement
  2. To create that value in a scalable way using a one-to-many (instead of a one-to-one) delivery method
  3. To deepen relationships and trust with our most engaged followers

5. Paid discovery and action plan

Our thought process behind this step made up the bulk of my part one article.

This first (paid) client engagement always looks exactly the same. We begin with a tightly defined, branded process that we call the Industrial Marketing Road Map.

Our Road Map process starts with a half-day Discovery Workshop with the client’s president, VP of sales, director of marketing, a few key salespeople and ideally a few technical professionals.

And it concludes two weeks later with the delivery of a concise Road Map consisting of a documented marketing and lead generation strategy, tangible action plan and options for implementation – all backed by research. This project costs exactly $7,500 with no additional commitments required.

The Road Map is our “break off the first 1-5% of their project budget for a low-commitment, high-value consulting engagement” project. Yours may be something similar. Or it could be something along the lines of pre-engineering work, a facility audit or development of a prototype. You’ll find more ideas like these in our article “7 ways to generate revenue on the path to the big sale“.

Regardless of the shape your introductory paid engagement takes, you’re asking your customer to put some skin in the game (both financially and in terms of their time). In exchange you’re giving them the full attention of your experts and access to all the knowledge and experience that comes with it.

6. Preliminary implementation

The recommendations that emerge from our paid discovery in the previous step make up the first stage of implementation for our clients.

If we’re hired to implement the Road Map’s action plan, more often than not this set of priority projects plays out over six to nine months. Typically that implementation involves both foundational work to set up long-term success and lead generation work to jumpstart results.

7. Flagship implementation

We’ve had the luxury of working with one client on retainer for over ten years. A handful of others have been with us for five to seven. And in most cases, these scenarios are ideal for both us and the client.

Our revenue becomes predictable and they have a partner who incrementally develops a deeper and deeper understanding of their business.

But the trust required in these kinds of relationships doesn’t build overnight. It builds over years.

Before we added steps 4, 5 and 6, we were essentially asking a client to go from a first date to getting married – which in retrospect was a ridiculous ask.

And that’s exactly why we created our Spectrum. 🙂

So back to your world…

Take another look at this graphic. From step one all the way through to step seven, what could this progressive series of engagements with prospects and future customers look like for your business?

spectrum of value creation

Just as we had once isolated potential clients who didn’t have six figures to spend on marketing from day one, have you created a situation where your prospects can only choose between #3 and #7?

What’s your version of this Spectrum of Value Creation?

How your buyer’s mindset will change

I’ll conclude by summarizing the key benefits to your business when you implement a progressive range of engagements.

A. The sale starts before you even talk

Here’s a reality check:

Your future customers will buy on their schedule. Not yours.

So on the left side the spectrum (steps 1 and 2), you create an opportunity to build trust before your prospects are ready to talk.

They’ll consume bite after little bite of your expertise in the form of articles, videos, webinars, white papers, podcasts or whatever medium you choose.

Read our article “Give” to dive further into this topic.

B. Having skin in the game earns the attention of decision makers

One of the biggest (and most pleasant) surprises we experienced after introducing our Industrial Marketing Road Map (the step 5, paid discovery and action plan engagement described earlier) – was that we instantly earned the full attention of the presidents and VPs of sales at our prospects’ companies.

Back in the days when we gave away 30-plus hours of free consulting just to win the job, the top dogs rarely came to the table with any consistency.

But once they had some skin in the game, they were all in.

C. You can now give it your all

Giving away free consulting or engineering is a huge suck on your most valuable resources.

And when you’re already busy, it becomes difficult to give the free stuff the attention it really requires.

But when you’re being compensated fairly for that work, you can do it right. And doing it right earns you even more work.

D. Your customer doesn’t want to backtrack

One of the biggest objections to everything I’ve laid out in this article is the fear of a customer taking the solution you helped them decide upon to another provider.

But consider these two points:

  1. If you’ve spent hours upon hours working with that new customer to arrive at the perfect, customized solution, how likely are they to say, “I think I’m gonna go see who else could implement this for me”?
  2. Even in the unlikely scenario they do go elsewhere, at least you’ve been fairly compensated for the work you’ve done to date.

E. You’re no longer seen as a vendor

In my part one article, I broke down the long and drawn-out discovery process we once gave away for free to win the job.

I mentioned how new stakeholders would unpredictably enter the picture at inopportune times, how the president would randomly pop his/her head in and out of the engagement and how procurement would haggle over price.

This was all because we were “just another vendor” to them.

When your prospects and customers perceive you as an advisor (instead of a vendor), your solution suddenly commands a price tag that sits above those of your competitors.

That sums it up

If you’re still with me, you probably either think I’m crazy or your mind is overflowing with new ideas. I’m hoping for the latter!

Regardless, if you’d like to chat about how to put a spectrum of value creation into play for your company, I recommend requesting a free consultation (you know – step 3, right?).

How to stop giving away engineering and consulting for free (part 1)

I’ve started noticing a pattern.

Manufacturers who sell complex, engineering-driven solutions often give away hours upon hours of their technical expertise upfront for free – just to win the job.

If this sounds familiar, here’s my question for you:

Does is absolutely have to be this way?

More often than not, I hear, “yes, it does in fact.” And here are some of the reasons why:

  • “The challenges our customers and prospects face are complicated. We can’t just hand them an off-the-shelf solution. So we need to do some legwork before we give them a proposal.”
  • “We need to demonstrate to the prospect that we’re capable.”
  • “It’s kind of just the way it works in our industry.”

OK, I get it.

And I get it because I’ve been there before. 

Not as the president of engineering-driven OEM or manufacturing organization, but as the co-owner of a strategy-driven marketing consultancy. 

We’re actually not so different.

In both of our scenarios, we investigate a prospect’s problem – which can often be very complex. Then we combine the findings from our investigation with our expertise and experience to bring an applied solution to the table.

The problem:

Arriving at that solution is often a time-intensive process with no guarantee of compensation.

So in this article (part one in a set of two), I’ll start by showing you how we used to fall into this same trap (and also explain how we escaped). Then I’ll do my best to convince you that there just might be a different way for your business.

And if I still have your attention, in part two, I’ll help you design what I call your “spectrum of value creation” — or a progression of future customer interactions and engagements that range from low- to high-commitment for both you and your prospect. 

In other words, I’ll show you some potential paths out of the giving-your-thinking-away-for-free trap.

Let’s get into part one.

How we used to give away our expertise

If you’d discovered our agency three or more years ago in your search for a marketing firm, things would have likely unfolded like this:

  • You’d have found us in a Google search for something like “marketing for manufacturers” and explored our website a bit (Learning Center, Who We Help and How page, case studies, etc). You might have subscribed to our newsletter. And on a return visit to our site, you’d have requested a free consultation.
  • You and I would have talked for 30-60 minutes, decided there could potentially be a fit and proceeded with booking a (free) two-hour Discovery Session. I’d have requested that you bring your CEO, VP of sales and few other key sales people to that session. At best, maybe one of them would have shown up with you (but left early to catch up on emails).
  • After the (free) Discovery Session, we’d have gone our separate ways for two weeks while my team conducted a boatload of (free) research and formulated our recommendations in a detailed and polished deck. Then, we’d have shared those with you over another (free) two-hour opportunity review meeting. Your president would have popped his head in by surprise for the last 20 minutes, derailing the session by asking for a concise summary of what’s been discussed to date.
  • After the meeting, your procurement manager would have sent me an email asking why our proposal was 20% higher in price than the canned one she received from a different “vendor” and asked for a discount.
  • At this point, my team would have been anywhere from 30-50 hours into this “relationship.” And even if the fit wasn’t right, it would have been tough to just walk away, being that invested already.
  • So we’d plug away trying to win the job by answering more questions through long, intricate emails to justify our price tag and explain our solution in more detail to those who never attended the consultations.
  • Based on our historical data, our odds of wining your business would have been about one in three. Not awful. But not great. And even if we did proceed together, a majority of your team would have viewed us as interchangeable vendor – just another company that does SEO and makes websites and runs advertising campaigns.

Excuse me for a moment while I wipe the cold sweat from those memories off my forehead. 😰

Does this sound at all familiar?

How often do you find your most skilled engineers and technical professionals sinking precious hours into analyzing (free) drawings for prospects, conducting (free) research on their behalf, designing (free) prototypes for them and so on — and with no guarantee of a dollar in return?

Listen, as some outside marketing guy, I can’t sit here and tell you definitively that you’re wrong for doing it. I know — it’s just part of winning the job.

But maybe, it doesn’t have to be.

Breaking off the first 5%

My idea here is simple.

Can you take the first 5% (or heck, even 1%) of your prospective customer’s budget, break it off from the total cost of the solution you would have likely proposed, brand it as the “The [YOUR COMPANY] Diagnostic” and sell is as the standalone first step in a new customer engagement?

For many of you, “The [YOUR COMPANY] Diagnostic” is probably pre-engineering work – a discovery consultation, paired with analysis of drawings and detailed, engineer-to-engineer calls with your prospect.

For others, this diagnostic might be an on-site, full-facility audit, followed by the delivery of a buttoned-up report that shares your recommendations for how to reduce costs on the production line and improve OEE.

Maybe it’s a defined, step-by-step prototype creation process to test a potential solution.

For us at Gorilla, it’s our Industrial Marketing Road Map – a paid strategy engagement consisting of a half-day Discovery Workshop, followed two weeks later by the delivery of a research-backed action plan. This project follows a very specific process, costs exactly $7,500 and requires no additional commitment. It’s step one – every time.

Our business has taken exponential leaps forward since we implemented this process in 2018. And we haven’t looked back. 

So what’s your version?

You’re the one who knows what due diligence needs to happen first with a new customer – before you can deliver your flagship product or service with confidence that it’ll solve their problem.

I’m just not convinced that you have to give that due diligence away for free.

In my 2019 article “7 ways to generate revenue on the path to the big sale,” I wrote:

“What we sometimes forget as expert practitioners in our respective fields is that the value of our high-margin, flagship solutions isn’t exclusively limited to our physical product or service in and of itself.”

So much of the value we create is wrapped up in the delivery of thinking and insights derived from the collective expertise and experience of our team. 

That thinking stems from everything we’ve learned by both succeeding and failing over the years. And from all the complex problems we’ve solved for tens or hundreds of other similar customers.

My argument is that you should be paid for the thinking that precedes the doing.

So if you’re on board with that line of reasoning, then in part two, we’re gonna unpack it.

Here’s what’s in store for part two:

  • I’ll introduce a concept that I call “the spectrum of value creation” – a progression of future customer interactions and engagements that range from low to high commitment for both you and your prospect.
  • I’ll show you how we’ve designed this range of engagements for our own business to provide context for what yours could look like.
  • And I’ll conclude by explaining how your buyer’s mindset will change for the better one you’ve begun positioning your products or services this way.

Click here to read part two.

How to get published where it matters most

Your favorite industry trade publication is probably well known around your office. Their print magazines reside on your coffee tables and their email newsletters are always welcome in your inbox — maybe you’ve even considered buying ad space from them. These publications can do so much more for your business than educate and promote ads, though. They are powerful tools to leverage your expertise and rise up as a thought leader in your industry. 

In this piece, we’ll go in-depth on how to get published where it matters most. Before we dive in, though, I want to highlight some of the key benefits of guest authorship:

  • Exposure: You now have access to the publication’s audience. Guest authorship helps you reach those not already familiar with your brand (so make a good impression!)
  • Credibility: If a trustworthy and highly respected trade publication allows you to write for them as a “subject expert,” then their readers are likely to see you as a credible source.
  • Traffic: If your post links back to your site (which it should as long as the publication allows it), you may see increased traffic due to clicks on those links.
  • Search engine optimization (SEO): When a credible source links to your website, Google takes it as a signal that your website is also credible. This gives you higher domain authority (discussed more later in the piece), which gives you a higher ranking in search results, which gives you more clicks, traffic, and ideally more leads.

Why do publications want content from your business?

Publications want content that provides value to their readers. As an industry expert, your voice has authority! If you have a fresh perspective, in-depth information on a complex topic or insight into a developing industry trend, you’re helping that publication create value. That’s something they’re likely to be interested in. 

How to find relevant publications

The important questions to ask yourself when looking for relevant publications to pitch to are: “What is this piece about?” and “Who does it benefit?” You’ll want to look for publications based on your industry and based on the content’s topic.

It’s good to develop relationships with industry-level publications because you’ll likely find yourself pitching to them multiple times. You can compile this list before you even know exactly what you want to write about. They’re pretty simple to find. Here’s how I usually go about my search:

  • Start with what you know. Your favorite trade publication should be the first one on your list.
  • Conduct a simple Google search. Type in “best [insert your industry] publication” or “publications for [insert your profession]”

Depending on what you write, your piece may fit on publications outside of your industry. A good way to build a pitch list is to start with those industry publications and then ask yourself, “Who benefits from this piece?” Think about what that person would read and add those publications to your list. For example, if your piece is about how small businesses can find the right product manufacturer, you may want to pitch to some small business magazines. Here are some potential Google searches to find them based on that example:

  • “Manufacturing advice for small business”
  • “Resources for small businesses”
  • “Small business magazines”

Not all publications are created equal — some are spammy, some don’t take guest content and some may even require that you pay for guest blog posts. Here are my general tips for making sure you’ve found a good site:

  • Avoid company blogs. These are blogs that a company has created on its website, and you can spot them easily if there is a “products” tab at the top. Use the keyword “magazine” or “publication” in your search to yield what you are looking for — simply typing “blogs” can work, but it will still yield company blogs. 
  • Check to see if they accept guest content. Look for pages that say “contributors” or “submission guidelines” or see if they have an opinion section on their website. Check out their staff, too. Do they already have staff writers? If so it probably means they won’t publish you.
  • Check for domain authority (DA). Domain authority is a measure on a scale of zero to 100 that indicates how authoritative the website is in the eyes of a search engine, and it is measured by sites like Ahrefs or Moz. If a publication has a high DA, it means that Google is more likely to recommend it in search results, which basically means it is an overall high-quality site. Getting links from sites with a high DA can help your website raise its own DA, so it’s a good metric to look at when considering where to pitch.
  • Look for opportunities both in print and online. Print magazines don’t offer SEO benefits but are great for developing thought leadership.

How to find the right contact person to reach out to

Once you’ve figured out which sites to pitch to, you need to find the right contact. Most of the time, you will be looking for the editor of the publication unless the website explicitly lists who else is in charge of guest content.

My first step is to go to the publication’s “about us” page. Most of the time, the editor’s email address will be listed right there. 

If it’s not, you can usually find their name at least. Then I like to try a handy tool called Hunter.io which you can download as a browser extension. If you click on the extension, it will show you all the email addresses it can find attached to that domain. Look for the editor’s name and copy and paste.

If you can’t find anything with the help of an email finding tool, you can reach out to their general info[@]company.com or editor[@]company.com email addresses. These should be a last resort though because they tend to be checked less frequently.

My final tip: Check if there is a submission form. You don’t want to flood an editor’s inbox with pitches if they have a preferred method of gathering guest content.

What are editors looking for when you send them content?

In my experience with pitching, editors are looking for six major things in the guest content they publish:

  • Exclusivity. This isn’t always the case, but lots of publications will want the exclusive right to publish your piece. Is this a bad thing? It depends on your strategy. If you are trying to get lots of links or a really broad exposure, it’s not ideal. It’s important to be honest, though. Don’t promise exclusivity if you plan to pitch it elsewhere.
  • Fit with their site. What content of theirs is your piece related to? Does it fit with their style? Does it appeal to their reader?
  • High-resolution images. This is especially important for print. Most publications will want 300dpi.
  • Value for their readers. As discussed above, this is the whole reason editors want your content. Make sure it is valuable to their audience.
  • Professionally written content. Make sure the piece has good grammar and spelling, along with accurate research and an interesting perspective.
  • Non-promotional writing. Publications will never publish a piece that explicitly promotes a company or a product. If they do, they’ll make you pay for it.

Pitching 101: structure, tips and tools

Crafting the perfect pitch is crucial. You are potentially fighting with hundreds of other submissions in an editor’s inbox, so keep it short and simple. Convey what you have to offer and what you hope to gain as quickly and clearly as possible.

Be sure to personalize every email, even if you are distributing the content on a mass level. We use Mailshake to send our pitches, because it allows you to insert personalized tags. 

You also want to pitch as a human being. Use your email address rather than a designated pitching[@]company.com email. It’s also important to be personable and friendly in your email as if you were reaching out to a friend or coworker. 

You can take a look at pitch structure in this downloadable template based on our best practices. It includes notes and tips for getting started on your first pitch.

The power of follow up

We’ve already established that editors are busy and get lots of pitches, so don’t be discouraged if they don’t reply right away. I’ve had plenty of editors get back to me after my first or second follow up email, sometimes even weeks later. It’s important to be respectful of their time and workload when pitching — here’s how:

  • Leave about five days between follow up emails. Pitching software like Mailshake will allow you to schedule and automatically send follow-ups. Make sure your settings are configured to stop sending follow-ups to recipients who have already replied to your email.
  • Don’t send more than two follow-ups, and be sure to state when it’s the final follow up.
  • Send follow-ups as replies to your original pitch. This makes it easier for the editor to stay organized and remember your pitch.

You can find examples of follow up emails in the pitching template as well. 

Pitching software is also useful because it allows you to check opens and clicks. Those metrics can tell you a lot about your pitching strategy. For example: 

  • If you have a low open rate, rethink your pitch list and subject line. Are you targeting the right publications? Do they accept guest content? Is your piece interesting enough?
  • If you have low replies, but high opens, rethink your pitch and the content. You’ve caught their attention, but just couldn’t get them to bite.

Here’s my parting piece of advice: Don’t get discouraged.

Pitching is a challenging process, and depending on your industry, it can be very difficult to get pieces picked up. That’s why it’s worth it though. If it were easy, a guest post wouldn’t carry nearly as much weight or benefit. 

This piece will serve as a good checklist for all your future pitching endeavors. If a piece isn’t pitching well, come back to this and ask yourself: Is the content well written with editors in mind? Am I targeting the right publications? Is my pitch effective? Then, adjust your strategy accordingly.

My business card says I’m a “writer,” but here’s what I actually do

If you take a peek at my business card, it’ll say I’m a “Thinker & Writer” here at Gorilla. But my job isn’t to think about writing or write about thinking …

… and it certainly isn’t just writing.

If it were, they’d chain my hands to the keyboard and have me type, type, type until I finished a 500-word blog post. And then I’d (click! clack!) keep cranking out one after another until the clock struck five and I could grab the key, unchain my hands and go home.

In reality, I spend surprisingly little time hacking away on my keyboard.

“Then what is your job?” I can hear you ask through the screen.

My answer may seem simple: Answering your prospects’ real-world questions and solving their real-world problems.

But it’s not simple at all.

To meet that objective, I spend an exorbitant amount of time combing through industry publications, diving deep into research rabbit holes and asking subject ­­matter experts the hard questions (“Okay, but why?”).

Sure, it’d be easier to spend 90 minutes barfing up 500 words of fluffy marketing-speak.

But has an article titled “5 unique ways [insert product/service] saves you time and money” ever resolved the work-related problems that keep you up at night? Or led to you purchasing that product/service?

I’d bet good money it’s a “no” on both counts. Engineers, facility managers and procurement folks can smell wet-dog content from a mile away.

Your prospects don’t want to take a Buzzfeed quiz. They want help answering technical questions:

  • A specifier at an MEP engineering firm might ask: Is it worth specifying against Miami-Dade/Florida Building Codes (FBC) for this power systems project based on its tornado risk?
  • A co-packer might ask: How do I eliminate package distortion and product spoilage on my horizontal form/fill/seal packaging line?
  • An injection molder might ask: When I process biocomposites, voids keep forming in the finished parts … why is this happening and how do I stop it?
  • A packaging buyer might ask: How do I minimize risk in my label supply?

My job is to do whatever it takes to track down the complete answer to these questions. Then — and only then — do I sit down at my desk and put it in writing.

Join me on my quest for answers

I hunt down answers to complex questions — it’s what I do. To give you an idea of what my job actually looks like, let’s narrow in on an example of my ideation, research and interview process for one article, from start to finish.

Setting the scene

One of my clients, CK Power, provides off-highway power solutions: Think generators, engines, design-build power products, fully installed standby power systems and everything in between.

We’ve worked with them for years, and a big focus of their content strategy has centered around educating their prospects about Tier 4 Final (T4F) emissions regulations — what they are, how prime power diesel technology has evolved to meet them, case studies on how they custom-built compliant solutions, etc.

There’s just one problem: We’ve largely answered all the questions their prospects have about this regulation, and they already dominate the search engine results for nearly all T4F-related keywords.

That’s not a bad position to be in, but we needed to pivot our content strategy and find new questions to answer.

Finding new questions

The client suggested we focus on their power systems division, which designs, builds and delivers permanently installed standby power systems.

Because we haven’t covered that service offering much before, we wanted to make sure we first had a comprehensive understanding of the target audience. That meant speaking with the people that interact with prospects most: The sales team.

Salespeople are founts of wisdom when it comes to prospect questions, pain points and triggers. And, because of that, sales team discussions are a great source of content marketing ideas.

So I hopped on a call with a sales guy that everyone at CK Power affectionately calls Mr. Generator.

Mr. Generator is the type of seasoned power systems engineer that:

  • Offers practical design advice: “A 24-hour fuel tank can in reality become a 36- or 48-hour tank because you’re only running the generator at 40-60% capacity.”
  • Can reference specific sections of regulatory standards off the cuff: “You’ll see in section 7.13.4.3 of NFPA 110 …”
  • Shoots it straight: “I proved to [other engineers] about 10 or 12 years ago that their means catalog is wrong. I just said, ‘Quit using that means catalog [for estimates] and call me and I’ll give you a budget number.’”
  • Is chock-full of fun stories: “So anyway, my colleague shot a coconut gun into the side of this generator enclosure to test its wind impact rating … ”

If Superman were an engineer, he’d be Mr. Generator.

After just 55 minutes and 40 seconds with him, I was armed with a dozen incredible content ideas that would serve as the foundation for our ongoing content strategy.

The most interesting find?

The MEP engineering firms he works with often have questions about how to refine their master power systems specs to meet the needs of a particular project. Say, a VA hospital emergency power system or the standby system for City Hall.

Mr. Generator not only answers the specifier’s questions — he also makes all the necessary revisions to the master spec. And he does it for free in 24 hours or less.

When he said that, I knew we had to write an article about it. I pitched the idea to our client contact, and he gave us the green light to get started.

Cue the interview

A few weeks later, I called up Mr. Generator (whose real name is Frank) to discuss his spec review process in more detail.

I had prepared this nice, glossy, comprehensive list of interview questions I wanted to ask him. And then the first thing Frank says when we get on the call? “Yeah, so I have four specs I’m going to email you right now. I figured we’d go through them one by one.”

So I threw out my list of questions and buckled in for the ride. Sure enough, he shoots me the specs — 40 pages total of documentation! — and says, “Let’s start with the hospital project. You have it open?” and launches in.

The entire document is marked up with red recommended changes like the ones below. Frank walked me through about 10 changes one by one, explaining why he recommended it and what the consequences would be if he didn’t.

By the end of our call, I realized that Frank’s 24-hour spec review answers a whole host of questions MEP specifiers have regarding power systems. Questions like:

  • What starting KVA should be specified, and what voltage dip is acceptable for this application?
  • Is a remote fill tank required on this project?
  • Is a day tank required if you have a sub-base fuel tank and the generator system will be located in an outdoor enclosure?
  • Is it worth specifying against Miami-Dade/FBC building codes for this project based on its tornado risk (as in the Midwest) or proximity to the ocean (as on the coasts)?
  • What’s missing in this spec that will affect the long-term performance and serviceability of this power system?

Not only that, but his suggestions also prevent a lot of costly problems MEP firms know all too well:  Building code non-compliance, poor performance outcomes or spending precious man-hours fielding questions about unclear specs.

When I finally caught my breath after the interview and reviewed my notes, I realized I had struck content marketing gold.

Actually writing the dang thing

There’s not much to say here. With all the information and advice Frank gave me, the piece practically wrote itself.

Of course, I looked up terms and concepts I was unfamiliar with, and lingering questions I had (like why a 35% voltage dip makes owners uncomfortable). And I obviously spent time editing for accuracy, tone and to generally make it sOuNd GoOd.

But this isn’t the exciting chapter of the story. I more or less sat down at my desk and (type, type, type!) cranked out the article. Here’s the finished product if you want to take a look.

I’m not alone in my quest

Toby and Mary, the other two writers here, are some of the most inquisitive, curious people I’ve ever met. As a department, we take our mission seriously. When we’re given a question to answer, we don’t stop until we feel like we have a satisfactory response. And, you know what, we’re pretty good at writing, too.

Tired of 500-word marketing-speak content?

Us too. Let’s start with a consultation. Then, if we both think there’s a fit, we’ll schedule a workshop to help you develop compelling content ideas that actually answer prospect questions.

PODCAST: Balancing Fast Marketing Results With Sustainable Success

An interview on the Sales POP! podcast

I was recently interviewed by John Golden on the Sales POP! podcast about how to create the right balance in your marketing plan between activities that will produce short-term results and those that will drive sustainable success.

You can listen to the episode – “Marketing Balance for Fast Success and Sustainable” below or find it here on Apple Podcasts.

Here are a few key takeaways:

  • Many of the decisions you make for your business’ long-term success require patience, but that doesn’t mean you have to give up on quick wins. You can achieve both fast results and sustainable growth as long as you’re okay with trade-offs.
  • Your content’s main focus should be on your customer’s needs. If you focus on the right people, then the right traffic will follow.
  • Outbound and paid media can have a valuable place in the fast-results side of the equation as long as you’re focused on the people and organizations that benefit the most from what you offer.
  • You and your people are the experts in what you do. Let your knowledge and expertise drive your marketing and sales approach as you guide your customers and prospects to a solution.
  • The future of marketing is hyper-focused. As social platforms and targeting tools become more sophisticated, you’ll have the ability to beta test every small detail of your marketing until you have a winning formula.

While the world’s upside down: 7 things Sales and Marketing can do

world upside down

Don’t go to work. Stay six feet apart. Only one package of toilet paper per customer.

So much of what we hear right now is about what you can’t do (and mostly for good reason).

But while much of the business world has dropped into a holding pattern, opportunities are also staring you right in the face.

So look up.

Here are seven things your Sales and Marketing teams can do despite the chaos around us.

1. Move your no-longer-an-option biz dev practices online

No more trade shows in the foreseeable future. If you’re knocking on doors, nobody’s in there to answer. And cold calls are falling on deaf ears.

You’ve been talking about modernizing your biz dev strategy for years. But suddenly you don’t have another choice.

So let’s do this thing.

Last week our firm conducted a free online event called “Prospecting in the Absence of Trade Shows and Travel” and over the course of 45 minutes (plus another 45 minutes of Q&A) I broke down this exact process:

  1. Identify who your best and most profitable types of customers are and document them in writing (here’s a worksheet to help).
  2. Use LinkedIn Sales Navigator with Prospect.io to build a list of those companies, identify the specific people you need to reach and collect their email addresses.
  3. Craft genuinely helpful content around what these people actually care about (their individual pain points, personal objectives and most common questions).
  4. Deliver that content via personal, customized outbound emails to those exact people.
  5. Pair your campaign with paid social ads (LinkedIn, Facebook, YouTube, etc) that specifically target those same individuals and companies (as well as others who look like them).

317 registered for the event and over 200 attended live. If you weren’t among them, I recommend watching the recording.

2. Follow the demand (and channel your Sales and Marketing energy accordingly)

Pause for a moment and think about who’s actually buying right now.

Most companies aren’t exactly itching to invest in large capital expenditures at the moment. But maybe some are. So who? And if not, what are your customers buying?

Here’s a quick story to inspire you – and fresh off the press too.

Our client J-Pac Medical does outsourced assembly, packaging, and sterilization of single-use medical devices.

Or at least – that’s what they did a week ago.

But in literally five days’ time, their incredibly smart and nimble crew shifted an entire production line to manufacturing face shields that are desperately needed to protect medical workers in New York City and elsewhere as COVID-19 cases have spiked exponentially.

J-Pac found a way not only to meet a dire need, but to keep their business moving forward during a super uncertain time.

Our job as their marketing team? To help them get this message in front of Procurement staff at hospitals, State Health Departments across the country and other organizations that needed thousands of these products yesterday.

Over the course of a few (very busy!) days, we helped J-Pac craft their message, write a press release, film the simple video of their President above, build a list of private and government organizations who are looking for this product and launch a targeted digital ad campaign to reach them.

I realize of course that an operational shift like this may be more natural for a company already manufacturing single use medical equipment.

But the lesson is simple:

Follow the demand.

Who’s still buying? And what are their needs during this time? How can you adapt quickly to meet that demand?

Channel your sales and marketing resources accordingly. Because elsewhere, much of that energy may be wasted.

3. Extract and publish the knowledge of your company’s experts

A handful of our manufacturing clients live in the packaging world, the medical device manufacturing space or other industries that are so busy they can’t keep up.

But others in the automotive or oil & gas industries have more time on their hands than they’d prefer right now.

If that’s you (or you fall somewhere in the middle), here’s my advice:

Use this time to extract knowledge from your own people to help you produce amazing content:

  • Your Engineers
  • Your Sales Professionals
  • Your Account Managers

The people on your team who interface with your customers every day are the ones who know the ins and out of their businesses best.

These experts on your team see your customers’ problems and challenges in action all the time.

So while they’re sitting at their dining room tables in the coming weeks (or months) hammering out whatever they can, ask for permission to interview them. Tap into their brains and pull out the amazing insights stored up there.

And then:

  • Record your interviews using Zoom
  • Publish those video interviews on YouTube
  • Break them into smaller videos to use on LinkedIn
  • Transcribe them using Rev.com and publish the text in your blog
  • Break down that long-form text into snippets you can use in email newsletters for your existing customers and leads

The possibilities are endless.

But you can’t fake great content. It all starts with your company’s experts.

So grab their time while it’s more readily available. Hopefully it won’t be for long!

Here are two articles and a tool that should help:

4. Learn how to do video-based prospecting

Wait! Don’t skip ahead to number five yet.

This is actually a lot easier than you might think.

Five years ago, sending a talking-head video of yourself in a sales outreach email might never have crossed your mind. But here we are in March of 2020 and the tools we need are both accessible and idiot proof.

Just a few months ago, I wrote a thorough (and unintentionally well timed) article titled “Video-Based Prospecting: An Easy, But Comprehensive Guide“. So if this topic interests you, I recommend reading it.

In the meantime, here’s the quick summary:

Free or very inexpensive software tools like Loom (my preference), Soapbox and Vidyard let you record yourself (and/or your screen) right from your browser. They host the videos for you. So all you need to do is push a button, start talking and then copy and paste the link into your outbound emails.

Here’s an example of one I made:

So why video?

I’ll give ya three reasons:

  1. Video breaks through the clutter. When everything else in your prospect’s inbox is long-form text, your video message is immediately different.
  2. Video humanizes you. When the recipient of your emails sees your face and hears your voice, you magically transform from some guy or gal behind a curtain of words on their screen into a real human being.
  3. Video lets you say (and show) things that are hard to do with text. Walk through your facility and show your equipment in action. Record your screen and point out what their competitors are doing better. Hold up a product and tell them about the problem it solves.

Yes, you might feel some technology intimidation at first. But the hurdle is a heck of a lot smaller than it was a few short years ago. Consider yourself lucky!

And yes, stage fright may set in when the camera starts rolling. But no one’s watching your practice rounds. And isn’t now a good time to be courageous anyway?

5. Focus your message

Up for a quick activity? Great.

Answer this question out loud right now:

What does your company do?

(I’ll give you a few seconds).

Did you stumble? Have to think about it? How quickly were you able to answer?

And most importantly, what percentage of your answer was about the problems you help your customers solve or the goals you help them achieve (as oppose to the stuff you sell and how amazing you are)?

Everyone needs a wakeup call from time to time. If that’s you, brace yourself because here it comes…

No one cares about you. Especially right now.

Here. I brought these for you (for the tears)…

Maybe your prospects will care about you soon.

But not until you’ve demonstrated that you’ve seen their issues before, that you understand those issues and you’ve helped others like them address them.

So instead of talking about ourselves, how about if we reframe our positioning language around our customers?

Maybe something like this:

We help ____ achieve ____ when they’re struggling with ____ or trying to achieve ____.

Instead of this:

We sell the world’s best ____. Here are some of the incredible features: ____, ____, ____, ____, ____, ____ and ____. Also, our customer service is unparalleled. You’ve never worked with people like ours. Oh, and our competitors are a bunch of phonies.

There’s no better time than now to create focus and articulate who you help and how.

Here’s our version at Gorilla.

We followed Mike Weinberg’s formula from Chapter 8 of New Sales. Simplified. to craft it. I highly recommend the $12 investment.

Another great resource for helping you craft your positioning language is Donald Miller’s Building a StoryBrand.

You’ll be amazed at how a consistent, focused and customer-centric message across your website, emails, other marketing materials and conversations with current and future customers will change the perception of your business in their minds.

6. Market to your existing customers

I’m often stunned by the answers I get when I ask these two questions during strategy workshops with new clients:

  1. How big is your email database?
  2. How are you currently using it for marketing?

Answers to the first question usually go something like:

“Oh I don’t know – maybe two or three thousand people”.

And the typical reply to question number two?

“Well, we’re really not doing much with it. We’ll sometimes send out an e-blast before a trade show to let them know we’re gonna be there”.

🤯

People, your email list is gold.

These individuals already know you. And for many of you, they also like and trust you. This is your lowest-hanging fruit.

Go pick it.

Just consider that the same principles I’ve touched on throughout this article still apply when marketing to your existing and past customers and leads too:

Be helpful, make it about them (instead of you) and create value.

Do that and they’ll listen.

7. Build future relationships – now

For some of you, this is simply gonna be a tough stretch. No way around it.

Hopefully some of the first six ideas above will help you focus your time and energy productively while we anxiously wait for things to turn.

But regardless of what things look like for your business right now, here’s one thing you absolutely can do:

Build relationships.

Last month I published an article titled “Give”.

It was very different from most of the content I write. But I was both surprised and excited by how positively it was received. I got more replies to that newsletter than any in the past. And now (five weeks later), I think the message is more relevant than ever.

Here’s an excerpt:

It was a good company.

Exceptional products. Smart, skilled people. Honest, hardworking folks who did their best every day for their customers and for each other.

But they were stuck.

One day, this company discovered a little, unassuming four-letter word and it caught their attention.

They brought it home, examined it, thought about it.

After careful consideration, they agreed to put this simple word at the center of everything they did.

They used it to help real people find what they needed, to earn the trust of those people, to build authentic human relationships with them and to showcase their expertise with modesty all along the way.

Before long, this company was no longer stuck.

Then, they grew.

The little, unassuming four-letter word was give.

Now’s the perfect time to put this four-letter word into practice on the marketing and sales front.

Offer what you can to your customers and prospects. Run a webinar. Publish insights on LinkedIn, on your company blog and/or in your industry’s trade journals. Send a helpful, personal video with some customized tips. And expect nothing in return.

When you make giving a habit, you earn fans. Fans become avid followers. And in time, avid followers become customers.

Being patient is difficult. Especially right now.

But I’ve been co-leading Gorilla 76 for 14 years and I can promise that few things have propelled us forward more than simply giving our insights and creating value for our audience time after time.

On that note – if there’s anything I can help you figure out right now, email me – joe@gorilla76.com.

I’ll do what I can to offer advice or point you in the right direction. And the team of 18 uniquely specialized industrial marketers standing right next to me (well, virtually for the time being of course) will absolutely do the same.

PODCAST: Producing a Substantial Volume of Expert Content – Quickly

An interview on the B2B Growth podcast

I recently sat down with Logan Lyles of Sweet Fish Media on the B2B Growth podcast to break down the very similar methodology both our firm and theirs have developed for creating a substantial volume of expert content in a condensed period of time.

You can listen to the episode – “3 Benefits to Content Creation Batching” below or find it here on Apple Podcasts.

Here are a few key takeaways:

  • The best way to produce exceptional content is to leverage the collective knowledge of your company’s subject matter experts.
  • By interviewing your experts and recording everything on video, you maximize content creation opportunities.
  • Spending a full day (or more) with your experts not only helps you develop a better understanding of their insights, but helps you build relationships and trust with them.
  • The efficiency gains of producing content in large batches (as oppose to bit by bit over time) are significant.

Why your marketing team needs a direct line to your C-suite

When asked what makes a successful partnership with Gorilla, one of the first things that come to mind is this: 

Direct access to your C-suite. 

You’re probably thinking, “That’s a HUGE ask. Why do they need to be involved when I can answer for them?”

I understand that this is easier said than done. Your executive team is extremely busy, especially the CEO. Their time is valuable, and you want to feel like you’re providing them with value in every interaction you have. 

Here’s what you’ve probably experienced

They’re busy people. Maybe you run into them in the hall so you see if they have two minutes to spare to discuss something. Or maybe you’re in a meeting and they’re checking their phone to answer a pressing email or looking at the clock to keep an eye on the time. And now based on your experience with that, you’re probably thinking: 

  • Can’t I just get you the answer without taking up their precious time?
  • They’ll just be a bottleneck —we shouldn’t include them
  • You want me to invite my boss’s boss?? My palms are sweaty just thinking about it!! Cue “Lose yourself” by Eminem

It can feel like a lot of pressure to have them involved. You want to make sure you’re not wasting their time. And you want to make sure that you look good (and that your marketing agency makes you look good). 

Over the years, I’ve picked up on patterns that point to what makes a successful relationship. And I can confidently say that the involvement of our client’s C-suite and the ability to have open communication makes a world of a difference. 

Their involvement should not be a one-time or quarterly thing. 

What we don’t want is for them to be involved in the very beginning, then disappear to only show up again at the end of Q2 for the marketing review. 

I’ve had this happen. The CEO was completely looped out with the Marketing Director thinking 1. They didn’t care 2. They’d just be a bottleneck if they were involved. What followed was a very confused CEO who had no clue what their marketing agency was doing. 

There really shouldn’t be any surprises when your C-suite talks to your marketing agency. That doesn’t mean that they need to know the nitty-gritty details of everything. What they need is a general pulse of what’s going on. That’s where that direct line comes in.

Below, I’ve laid out why your marketing partner needs to have access to your C-suite’s direct line. What it comes down to is the value that they bring to the table, and how your marketing partner can leverage that to meet your company’s shared business objectives (and the added benefit of making you look good to your boss). 

Your C-suite’s involvement … 

Serves the company’s business goals and objectives

Your C-suite has clear financial goals and is thinking in terms of long-term investments. They’re projecting financials for one year, two years and five or more years out. That information needs to be clearly communicated and should be the foundation of your engagement with your marketing partner. 

We’ll work to define your business’ greatest challenges and opportunities and will create a strategic marketing plan that aligns with your company’s business goals and objectives.  

Hearing exactly where your business stands and where it’s going from the top eliminates any confusion on where we should focus our efforts, and it creates an ongoing dialogue to ensure that we’re hitting on our shared goals. In the end, they’re concerned about the bottom line and how you’ll help them get there. 

Eliminates the “big reveal”

Having a consistent touchpoint means that you’re getting frequent feedback that keeps you on track. It eliminates the “big reveal” since they’re involved from the start. There’s less pressure around your work because you know how they’re going to react. 

Which would you prefer? Months and months of preparation to have a “big reveal” with your CEO only to have it shot down at the end? Or, more frequent touchpoints where you’re involving them throughout the process and they get to see all of your hard work in smaller, more digestible chunks? They’ll let you know what’s working and what’s not. In the end, the latter will save you a lot of time (and sanity). 

Having that direct line to your C-suite is the difference between a successful relationship that’s built for long-term, sustainable success and one that’s not.

Helps with “buy-in” for all the hard work you do

One of the key roles of the C-suite is to serve as a positive role model. Every member of your organization will look to your CEO for direction. Whether that’s related to business goals, your company’s mission and values, or even things like new processes or tech adoption, it’ll be a lot easier to get buy-in from everyone on your team when your CEO is leading the charge. 

Think about all of the challenges you face every day at work. Maybe people aren’t responsive. Or maybe they are but they’re just busy and your work just isn’t being prioritized. Now imagine if you have the CEO involved who understands the importance of your work. They care about the bottom line and they know that you’re an important piece of the puzzle. All of sudden, priorities shift and projects get completed better and on time. 

Creates a clear brand vision

Let’s talk about your CEO specifically here. Your CEO is your brand. They are living and breathing it day-in and day-out. They know exactly what their brand is and where it’s going. There’s no better person to hear about your brand than the CEO of the company. 

When a CEO speaks about their brand, they speak passionately. And if you take a look around the room, you can see how impactful their words are on each member in the room. Think about the greatest CEOs of all time – Steve Jobs, Bill Gates, Jeff Bezos and the likes. They create a sense of pride and passion for their brand. Your CEO’s brand vision is what we want to communicate in every single piece of content and design that we create. 

I had a CEO sit in on a wireframe meeting for a new website once. Definitely not the typical meeting that a CEO would attend. But he wanted to be involved. His direction and input were so valuable we ended up making the wireframe even better. And it was a crucial point in the build since we were heading into our design phase and we hadn’t had face-to-face with him since our initial website conversations. Had he not attended that meeting, we would’ve missed out. 

It can be intimidating to include your C-suite. But at the end of the day, you share the same goals and objectives. It’s just up to you whether you want to get there running down a straight path or through a maze that may have no clear end in sight. 

Marketing By Teaching Instead of Preaching (on Industry Today)

A guest article on Industry Today

I recently wrote an article for the manufacturing journal Industry Today titled “Marketing by Teaching (Instead of Preaching).”

Here are few key takeaways:

  • People care about themselves, their businesses and their problems. When you lecture prospects about your amazing solutions, unmatched customer service and how much better you are than your competitors, they’re not listening.
  • So put them at the forefront of your marketing strategy. Earning the trust of your prospects comes before earning their attention.
  • Your prospects often need guidance through the buying process. By arming them with genuinely helpful resources (question-answering articles, problem-solving white papers, case studies that demonstrate real-life success stories and tools that help them evaluate what they need), you’ll earn their trust and attention naturally. Trust leads to real, human-to-human conversations. And real conversations lead to sales.

Click here to read the full article on Industry Today.

So you acquired a company. Now, what do you do with their website?

You’ve been in acquisition mode for months (maybe years). But after a lot of legwork, a few headaches and countless discussions / meetings, you’ve done it.

Congrats! You acquired a company.

There are plenty of things to do. But one important item may not have even crossed your mind.

During the acquisition process, you undoubtedly thought about old-school assets like the company’s inventory or equipment.

But have you thought about their digital assets? Have you thought about their website as an asset? And their current SEO value?

Given that you’re even reading this article, you’re probably familiar with the fundamentals of search engine optimization — you know that, at a basic level, Google cares about high-quality, relevant content and backlinks. And you know that a website that performs well in the eyes of Google (and customers) isn’t something to scoff at.

So what do you do with an acquisition’s website?

At the heart of it, you have two options — leave it as is or take it down completely. 99% of the time, we help our clients do the latter.

But before we jump into the specifics, here are the questions you should be asking (and getting answers to) regarding your acquisition’s website before you make a decision:

  1. Does the acquisition have established brand equity?
  2. Are there any keywords that are bringing significant (or super relevant) traffic to the site?
  3. What pages are bringing in the most traffic?
  4. Are there certain pages that current customers use regularly? Like a payment page or a file upload page?
  5. Are there pieces of content or other assets that are exceptional and worth keeping?

First, let me say that if the answer to number 1 is “hell yes” then you might want to consider leaving the site as-is and simply post something on the site that notes the change in ownership or merger.

But for the sake of this article, let’s assume you know you want this new brand to be nested under the umbrella of your company.

But you can’t just take down their site.

You want to make sure users who may still be looking for old pages can find what they’re looking for — and easily. You also want to capture as much of the site’s current traffic as you can. And even keep ranking for the right keywords in the SERPs (search engine result pages). To do that, you want to retain the acquisition’s SEO equity or “link juice”.

Let’s talk about how to do that.

Save any (and all) assets

Whether or not you have a plan to use any or all of the assets on the site (pdfs, content, videos) it’s in your best interest to save those files. But if there are items that are valuable and can be utilized on your company’s website, use them! Add them to your learning center or add supplementary copy to your existing website pages — whatever you can do to utilize these new, valuable assets at your disposal.

Map their website

You’ll need to make a spreadsheet of all the acquisition’s website pages. Rather than manually creating this list, I’d recommend using a tool like Ahrefs. Not only is it faster but it will pull pages that you might miss, like a 404 page.

Now that you’ve got the list of pages — you’ll want to go through one by one and find the closest match to each of the acquisition’s pages to your website. For the sake of context, let’s say Gorilla 76 is acquiring a little company called Chimp 67.

Here are some example pages:

  • www.chimp67.com/blog
  • www.chimp67.com/markets

And here are the pages that are a best-fit match to those:

Pretty straightforward, right?

What if there’s not a good match? What should you do?

You might consider creating a new page on your current site so that you can use it to redirect to. Chimp 67 had a thriving videography offering and a corresponding page dedicated to it, but guess what? We don’t. If that’s a service we want to continue, we’d draft up a new page to the website about videography and use that as our one-to-one match for the videography page.

The goal here is that a user should be able to find what they’re looking for in the least confusing way possible even though the acquisition’s site is no longer live. You want to make sure Google still sees these new pages as super relevant and helpful just like it had with the old pages.

And what about the homepage?

It might be your first instinct to just redirect the acquisition’s homepage to your homepage. But that’s not necessarily the best option. Assuming time and money aren’t an issue, think about creating some sort of locations page for the acquisition. This gives some context for the user. Without blatantly saying it, you’re letting them know that Chimp 67 is now a part of Gorilla 76. It’s also an opportunity to direct users to other places on the site. Think about what products / services are particular to this location and include any special contact information here. And if an important page exists that needs to be kept (a pay invoice page or a file upload page) it can be linked to from this page.

Redirect pages

You’ve done the hard work. You’ve decided which pages need to be redirected where. Now it’s time to actually make those redirects.

Make sure you do a 301 redirect.

I know, you’re thinking “there are types of redirects?”

Yes.

Yes, there are.

I won’t overwhelm you with the other options but the importance here is that a 301 redirect is a permanent redirect rather than a temporary one. And it’s the best way to ensure that users find what they’re looking for AND you get the “link juice” from the acquisition’s site.

And if you’re like most of our clients operating websites using WordPress, here’s an easy tool to help: https://wordpress.org/plugins/redirection/.

Test & wait

Once you’ve made the changes (including redirects and maybe a new page or two and / or a locations page), you’ll want to make sure everything is in working order. Test the redirects, either using the redirect plugin I just mentioned or Google. If you do the latter, you’ll go through the pages in Google’s index and make sure they actually redirect to the main company site. Keep in mind that you shouldn’t expect to see the exact same search positions right away. It may take some time. SEO isn’t an exact science. What we do know for sure is that doing what we laid out here helps improve the likelihood that it’ll happen.

Remember, with the required investment (both time and money) considered, this is our go-to option to get the most out of your acquisition’s website.

You’re growing — which is a wonderful thing.

Enjoy knowing that you’re utilizing all the new assets at your disposal.

And if that growth will require you to reassess your marketing needs, reach out to us.

Why the Brains of Your Engineers Are Your Best Marketing Tools (on Industrial Sage)

A guest article on Industrial Sage

I recently penned an article for the manufacturing media company Industrial Sage titled “Why the Brains of Your Engineers are Your Best Marketing Tools“.

Here are a few key takeaways:

  • In an ever changing marketing technology landscape, it’s easy to get immersed in all the fancy gadgets and tools designed to help us do our jobs better.
  • But with so many shiny objects distracting us, we often overlook the most valuable marketing tools at our disposal – the collective knowledge stored in the brains of our companies’ experts.
  • The Engineers and technical experts who spend their days solving your customers’ problems are often the best source of content that will help you earn the trust and attention of future customers.
  • So tap into their brain power. Translate their technical knowledge into problem-solving, questions answering marketing content that your prospects actually crave.

Click here to read the full article on Industrial Sage.

But I’m worried our competitors will see it

evil competitors

Ever found those words coming out of your mouth when contemplating what (and exactly how much) you’re willing to share with the world?

Case studies and customer success stories.

White papers, guides and articles.

Published expert insights.

All of these things expose you. You’re suddenly vulnerable – revealing information that will make onlookers say, “Interesting. These guys really know what they’re talking about.” Or, “Huh, I never thought to do it that way.”

And what if those onlookers just so happen to be… [QUEUE UP SCARY, SUSPENSEFUL MUSIC]… your competitors?! 👺 👿 👹

Well, my response is quite simple:

Who cares?

Let’s stop worrying so much

When it comes to publishing your insights, I say: “Go ahead. Tell the world”.

Here’s the thing:

I’m not asking you to open the vaults where you store your top-secret, classified documents and host an open house. I’m talking about publishing smart nuggets of expert advice, publicly.

For Gorilla, this means writing articles like this one you’re reading right now. Or other marketing and sales advice for manufacturers, like:

For Resource Label Group, it means penning expert content for their buyers about the ins and outs of label manufacturing:

For CK Power, it means breaking down industry regulations like Final Tier 4 that deeply affect their customers and prospects:

None of these examples breach company security or expose the secret and proprietary inner workings of these respective businesses. Nope. They simply address issues and questions their customers and prospects are experiencing all the time. That’s it!

They’re the reason a Google search for “beer can labels” turns up this (after the ads):

beer can labels serp

And the reason CK Power was able to accomplish this :

Case Study: Inbound marketing generates $800,000 in Q2 revenue for generator distributor

And the reason we consistently generate engagement (look through the comment string) from the insights our team at Gorilla publishes online:

If you don’t publish your expert insights, your competitors eventually will (if they’re not doing so already).

And who do you think your future customers will discover, begin to trust and eventually pick up the phone to call? The company that’s laying on the expert guidance? Or the one they don’t even know exists?

The case study dilemma

When it comes to case studies or customer success stories, I get that things can be trickier.

It’s the same dilemma I’m presented by our clients all the time about whether or not they should be on LinkedIn – publicly exposing who their customers are to evil poachers lurking in the shadows.

But generally speaking, my response remains consistent:

Who cares?

Here are the questions I want you to ask yourself:

1. If you’re featuring actual customers in your case studies, will your competitors even take notice?

Sorry to deal a blow to your pride, but – probably not.

2. And if they do take notice, will their minds automatically go to “Oh, I should go try to steal this customer that probably loves [your company] because they clearly did a friggin’ amazing job for them!”?

Pretty unlikely.

3. And finally, if they do go try to poach them, will your happiest customers even entertain the conversation?

That probably depends on how replaceable you are in those customers’ minds. Are you a commoditized vendor or an expert partner?

Was the success in your success story as powerful as you made it out to be? If so, I think you’ll be alright.

We show case studies with real clients on our site and welcome our competitors to go try to steal them. Good luck. They love us too much! It would take a pretty darn compelling argument to steal that business.

Where the REAL risk lies

When organizations hold back from publishing their insights and success stories, it’s usually because they’re afraid of the risk.

And how ironic.

I can’t really imagine where our business would be today if we’d let that fear stop this from happening over ten years ago.

This Learning Center has been our pot of gold.

It’s filled with years worth of insights. Pretty bad stuff from the early days (go take a look back in time if you’d like, though I don’t necessarily recommend it!). And pretty good stuff from the recent days (not “ good” because I’ve said it’s good, but because the numerous clients who have hired us after months or even years of successful nurturing via this exact content have overwhelmingly told us so).

The risk isn’t in publishing. It’s in NOT publishing.

So if you’d like, sit back and play it safe. Watch your competitors overcome their fears and start building your their captive audience.

But don’t say I didn’t warn you. 😉

The sometimes inverse correlation between traffic and good leads

inverse correlation graph

Here’s some unconventional advice about how to double or triple your qualified leads:

Tank your website traffic.

I suppose I should explain this one.

There’s lots of bad marketing / SEO / lead generation advice out there:

  • Pick out keywords that get searched hundreds or thousands of times every month and put them in your page titles, urls, headers, sub-headers and sub-sub-headers. Then watch your Google rankings (and resulting traffic) climb!
  • Write as many blog posts as you can and traffic will soar!
  • Blast your audience by email. Then do it some more on LinkedIn and Facebook. And heck, while you’re at it, pour it on with Twitter, Instagram, Snapchat and TikTok too. Just wait and see how much more traffic you’ll get!

But here’s my question for you:

Have you stopped to think about who the people are that make up all this great new traffic?

Who exactly are you trying to reach with all this stuff you’re doing?

Anyone willing to look?

Anyone who’d conceivably cut you a check?

What does it really mean for your business if traffic starts going like this?

increasing traffic

Isn’t it possible that all those extra eyeballs accumulating as you move East aren’t even the right people?

Any if they’re not, isn’t all this traffic growth just a vanity metric in the end?

7 or 8 years ago, we said “screw it.”

We were done being generalists at Gorilla.

We were done talking to anyone and everyone.

We were done worrying simplistically about “getting more traffic”.

We knew who our best customers were. We knew what those companies looked like. We knew who the buying process influencers were inside of those organizations, what kinds of problems and challenges those people faced, what kinds outcomes they were trying to achieve and what questions they were trying to get answered.

So we decided to own that – and for them.

We set our sights on the traffic we actually wanted. Because frankly, the rest didn’t matter.

We even changed our positioning from this:

“We make your brand stronger”

to this:

“We help midsized B2B manufacturers identify, attract, engage and drive sales opportunities with ideal-fit customers.”

See the difference there?

Now – we knew that by ignoring the rest of the world, our traffic would probably go like this:

declining traffic

And our leads would probably go like this (dark gray):

declining leads

And we were right. They both did.

But guess what?

Here’s what our happened to our qualified leads (orange):

increasing qualified leads

This lesson is one of focus.

Know who you want to target. And target them.

The rest simply don’t matter.

Traffic is a leading metric (and an important one, too). But it’s only relevant in the context of the more significant trailing metrics.

In other words, more traffic is fantastic, as long as it’s driving:

  • The right opportunities…
  • That produce the right customers…
  • Who generate the right level of revenue…
  • And at the right margin

So go ahead. Tank your traffic. Focus on the right types of companies and people.

Swallow your pride and ignore the rest.

Then take the time to notice and appreciate the growing number of high-quality conversations you begin having with right-fit future customers.

Give

open door

It was a good company.

Exceptional products. Smart, skilled people. Honest, hardworking folks who did their best every day for their customers and for each other.

But they were stuck.

One day, this company discovered a little, unassuming four-letter word and it caught their attention.

They brought it home, examined it, thought about it.

After careful consideration, they agreed to put this simple word at the center of everything they did.

They used it to help real people find what they needed, to earn the trust of those people, to build authentic human relationships with them and to showcase their expertise with modesty all along the way.

Before long, this company was no longer stuck.

Then, they grew.

The little, unassuming four-letter word was give.

And from that day forward…

This company gave their prospects honest guidance without trying to persuade, but instead lead those individuals to the solutions that made the most sense.

They gave away smart, resourceful, expert insights – publishing their collective wisdom week after week to fill knowledge gaps, so their prospects could make more informed and confident buying decisions.

They gave objective comparisons of thing A and thing B – regardless of whether they sold thing A, thing B, both or neither.

They gave their prospects tools to help them weigh the short versus long-term effects of the complex decisions that lay in front of them.

They gave taste after taste of their secret sauce. And they gave it without fear of their competitors stealing it. And those competitors? Well, they were lost in the crowd somewhere, alongside other interchangeable and oblivious wanderers who were too busy asking and taking (instead of giving).

This company gave their growing assembly of spectators a glimpse inside their walls. They opened the shades and unlocked the doors, exposing their team and their culture to the outside world – unafraid that someone would “poach” their people. Because they understood that people want to work with people they like. And respect. And trust.

They gave uncensored looks at the faces and the voices of their teammates. They let the cameras roll and shined a spotlight on this diverse collection of expert practitioners – to broadcast the unique perspectives of those individuals to the outside world, unabridged and with authenticity. And they didn’t worry if they were having bad hair days or if they sneezed at minute 1:42. (Their prospects sneezed sometimes too, because they also were real human beings).

They gave their prospects respect, always. They weren’t pushy. They never tried to sell something that wasn’t needed. And whenever the fit wasn’t quite right, they didn’t force it. Instead they helped their prospects find a partner who was a fit.

This company gave all of these things.

And they asked for nothing in return.

They didn’t need to.

Instead, they spent the weeks and months and years ahead answering knocks on the door from individuals reaching the end of their long buyers’ journeys. These people already liked them, trusted them and were ready to choose them. And their minds were full from consuming every bit of genuine, honest wisdom and guidance they’d been given along the way.

Just like this company chose to give, so can yours.

Customer interviews: The case for talking to the people who matter most

customer interviews

A lot of companies we consult hesitate to let us speak with their customers. That’s for a number of reasons, most of which are perfectly reasonable. 

  • They don’t want to bother good customers
  • Marketing people might ask the wrong questions
  • Chasing down customers for interviews can be a pain

But the risk of not talking to customers outweighs the risk of these fears coming true.

We’ve learned this lesson the hard way many times. Not long ago, our team made an elaborate plan to generate quote requests using a combination of content promotion, landing pages and marketing automation. We didn’t plan for customer interviews.

The first part of the campaign ran for a week and fell flat. Not a single person even clicked on our ads, despite thousands seeing them. We optimized and experimented with targeting options to no avail.

So we called a local company that fit the target audience and ran our campaign by the owner. His feedback was the following: 

We would never request a quote for a product we’ve never tried before. If you want to get a foot in the door, send us a sample of the product so we can compare it to what we have.

Offering samples never occurred to us because we never took the time to talk to the people we advertise to.

In this case, we got lucky. We caught our mistake early in the campaign. But what if you’re investing $50,000 in a priority segment? How about hiring a marketing agency for $100,000? That’s where you stop trusting your gut (and that of everyone else at your company) and talk to the people you want to buy your products.

Knowledge and empathy aren’t measurable in dollar amounts upfront. But soon, they’ll eliminate wasted time and money.

And the best part is that almost no one in the industrial marketing space is doing this. Empathy is a competitive edge.

Three ways to get started

1. Interviews

Compile a list of ten companies you love doing business with. Ask your key persona at these companies for 20 minutes to chat and just ask away. If they’re comfortable on camera, record the conversation and use it to create content later on:

  • What does a typical week look like for them?
  • What are things they struggle with in their job, especially in relation to your product or service?
  • What do they look for when vetting [insert your industry] companies?
  • How does their team come to a buying decision?
  • Is there anything they wish they could do but can’t?

2. Tag along with a sales rep

Ask a sales rep if you can shadow them for a week. Go visit prospects and customers and listen in on sales calls. Aside from getting to know your customers, it’s an opportunity to discuss how marketing should tie in with sales efforts.

3. Develop campaigns with your audience

Run a marketing campaign by an existing customer or someone in your target audience. Chances are they’ll catch gaps in your logic.

As you’re gathering information from customers, follow a few ground rules

Offer incentives

If you’re concerned about bothering your customers, reimburse them for their time. Interview them over lunch or send them a gift card in exchange for their time.

Compile and prioritize questions

What exactly are you trying to learn from your customer? Before asking away, think this through. A tip from Toby, one of our writers: “Ask your team to poke holes in your list of questions. And compile your questions well enough in advance for you to look at them again and revise. I end up editing question lists as heavily as I edit copy”.

Document everything

Make sure insights are documented and shareable with others – this is especially important when working with an outside agency. Record calls and interviews, take pictures and videos during tours and summarize key information in one central document.


I know that going out there and talking to strangers can be intimidating. Start by spending just one day every month getting to know your audience better. I promise it’ll be one of the best marketing investments you ever made.

Content marketing STILL speaks to technical buyers

In late 2016, a Content Marketing Institute survey took stock of the adoption of content marketing among manufacturers.

Content marketing wasn’t new then, but by no means had B2B manufacturers adopted it en masse.

“The old wisdom says highly technical buyers are immune to content marketing messages,” I wrote in this summary of that survey. Which wasn’t necessarily true. Technical buyers aren’t immune to online messaging, they just have a keen sense of smell.

And the problem at the time was that there was too little information of any value online once they sniffed out the rot.

Now, technical buyers still have sharp noses. And most online marketing is still useless.

What’s changed is that over the last three-plus years, internal marketing teams and agency partners each have improved at developing sound strategy and creating compelling content targeted to technical buyers. New CMI survey data published late last year shows more manufacturers are buying in as a result.

Use the key takeaways provided below to help plot your next moves.

(Credit to IEEE Global Spec, who publishes these reports in partnership with CMI.)

Measuring maturity then and now

The way manufacturers perceived the maturity of their content marketing programs in 2016 compared to now is noteworthy.

In 2016, less than 20% of respondents characterized their programs as mature or sophisticated. According to the new data, 24% believe their programs are mature while 5% scored their programs as sophisticated.

Content marketing programs were in an adolescent stage for 37% of respondents in 2017; 28% stated their programs were young. Today, 39% say their programs are adolescent and 26% say they’re young.

While 14% of respondents claimed their programs were in their infancy in 2016, only 6% made that claim this year.

Key takeaway: Manufacturers are methodically advancing their content marketing programs. As fewer manufacturers report programs in an infant stage, expect the effectiveness of rudimentary tactics like SEO blog posts and monthly email newsletters to decrease in the face of greater adoption of similar or more advanced tactics.

Content marketing program maturity also relates to the stages of a buyer’s journey for which content is created. The 2019 study reports:

  • Half of the content manufacturers create is aimed at generating initial awareness among top-of-funnel buyers
  • 21% of content is mid-stage and 15% is late-stage
  • 10% of content is geared toward buyers after the sale to drive brand loyalty

Another key takeaway: Companies executing content marketing programs must pay close attention to how their audiences evolve over time. The goal of such a program is to grow awareness among your audience by becoming a thought leader. If you succeed, consider how your content mix must change to continually feed a finite audience’s hunger for useful information.

HINT: We’ve veered away from creating top-of-funnel content for some of our longer-term clients. There’s a severely diminished return on persistent production of 101-level content among an audience that already knows who you are and what you do.

Insourcing vs. outsourcing? It’s a mixed bag

Not knowing whether to outsource content marketing remains common among many manufacturers, especially small- and medium-sized ones.

Even progressive companies who buy into the theoretical virtues of content marketing confront this conundrum. Should we hire internal staff to do it? Is there enough marketing to warrant those hires? Is a third-party agency better suited to develop and execute content marketing for us? Should we rely on a mixture of in-house staff and outsourced providers?

Consider this 2019 survey data:

  • 29% of respondents stated they have no content marketing staff
  • 28% stated they have a single full-time employee dedicated to content marketing
  • 34% reported having between two and five full-time content marketing staff
  • 9% of respondents have six or more full-time content marketing staff (these are probably larger companies that expect to do content marketing on a large enough scale to warrant employing large full-time teams)

Now, consider that two-thirds 64% of respondents reported outsourcing at least one content marketing activity, with content creation being 87% of that outsourced work. That’s despite concerns over whether agencies are truly up to the task of crafting high-quality content.

The data show that many manufacturers trust third-party agencies with understanding complex concepts and creating highly technical content that reaches sophisticated buyers. We believe small- and medium-sized manufacturers make up the bulk of those clients for the reasons described here.

Key takeaway: Upon deciding to outsource at least some content marketing, small- and medium-sized manufacturers should be prudent in their choice. The right agency understands how to apply limited resources for the best effect and recognizes burden-sharing opportunities that make the best use of personnel.

Content marketing spending still trends upward

An analysis of manufacturers’ stated content marketing spending goals should provide some clarity for those still wondering whether such an investment will pay off.

Spoiler: it likely will.

In 2016, 36% of respondents said they planned to increase their content marketing budget while 48% of respondents said they would keep their spending steady.

It flipped last year, with 43% stating they would boost their spend and 38% choosing to keep theirs the same.

Are manufacturers coming around to the idea that marketing is an investment and not merely an expense? It sure looks that way, and the timing couldn’t be better for this apparent collective change of mind.

Key takeaway: More companies plan to spend more money on content marketing, proving its overall value and signaling greater potential difficulty ahead for those who have yet to implement programs of their own. As progressive manufacturers’ marketing programs become more mature, those without programs will need to work even harder to earn their audiences’ attention.

Okay, so now what?

Like you, we try to make decisions based on good data. And there’s a ton more of it in CMI’s report—here’s the link again.

But data is far from the only factor you should consider. If what you’ve read above makes sense but you want to talk through your unique circumstances, we should talk.

If you want to do some more prep work first, consider using our free industrial marketing audit scorecard.

The case for maintaining marketing spend when business slows down

Yeah, you read that right. And no, we haven’t lost our minds.

You, a healthy skeptic: We can see this obvious attempt to salvage revenue from a mile away. Nice try.

Us: That’s what we would have guessed, too, if we were in your shoes. But no.

The world economy is stuttering. Trade wars, geopolitical instability and natural market cycles have combined to take certainty away from international commerce. C-suites and shareholders are predictably twitchy.

When leaders cut costs to weather the storm, marketing is always on the chopping block. But we urge manufacturers to fight the popular impulse to pull back. In today’s uncertainty lies a compelling opportunity.

To see it, you just have to open your eyes a little wider.

Uncertainty breeds reactionary decision making

Macroeconomic indicators started painting a worrying picture last year. The U.S. Treasury Bonds yield curve inverted. Manufacturing indices dipped into negative territory. Decreased freight volumes proved fewer buyers were buying stuff.

As a result, many firms started missing their revenue and profit targets. Some are straight up losing money. When the C-suite searches for costs to cut, nothing is sacred—especially not marketing.

You might be seeing some of these marketing-specific impacts:

  • Overall marketing activity or output is reduced
  • Strategy shifts to prioritize quick wins over long-term success
  • Marketing teams are cut to the bone, with skeleton crews playing defense instead of offense

You, a healthy skeptic: The numbers don’t lie. We wouldn’t do this if we didn’t have to.

Us: But you don’t have to.

The impacts above are evidence that company leaders believe marketing is an expense and not an investment.

But strategic, long-term marketing plans are investments that position firms for stronger, more sustainable growth. It’s a fact, full stop. Changing trade winds do not make it less so.

That’s why we encourage you to think critically about whether the reactionary abandonment of long-term strategy is really a good idea.

Read more about achieving fast results vs. sustainable success here.

Recognizing the opportunity

Many factors inform the recommendations marketing strategists make, and chief among them is how difficult or easy it is to achieve a desired impact.

It’s basic cost-benefit analysis, and while executives respond to today’s economic uncertainty with nervous retrenchment, we see an equal and opposite side effect: A relative rise in the value of your marketing spend.

You, a healthy skeptic: Are you saying we could get more for our money?

Us: Exactly. Like bringing a sack full of Euros to the U.S.

Applied appropriately, your marketing expenditure creates awareness, fosters engagement and builds loyalty among your target buyers, all resulting in a return on that investment.

The problem is that you’re not the only one clamoring for your audience’s finite attention. In crowded and competitive markets, it takes more and more effort and expense to maintain the foothold you’ve earned. The cost of a static good—awareness, engagement and loyalty—rises.

But what if the yield curve inverts, trade wars flare up and markets cycle down? Most decision makers see storm clouds gathering, pack up the picnic and head for shelter.

What if you didn’t? What if you stayed put?

You, a healthy skeptic: Why would we spend big on marketing when no one’s buying? We could light that money on fire and at least we’d be warm.

Us: The side effects of marketing nearsightedness cause more problems than they solve.

Firms seem unable to cope with the shock of negative growth and do their best impressions of hermit crabs when danger comes close.

And I don’t mean to downplay the danger. Changing circumstances often require changes in tactics.

But unless your firm is fiscally overextended or lacking true differentiators, weak markets aren’t the end of the world. They’re normal, healthy phenomena most folks plan for in advance.

And given that your competitors will probably scale back their marketing activity, weak markets are also a lot less saturated with competing messages.

There lies a compelling opportunity within this dynamic for those willing to stick their necks out.

Making the case for sustained marketing investment

You, a healthy skeptic: Something’s getting cut. If not marketing, then what?

Us: Find something that you can show doesn’t result in a return on investment or for which a supposed positive return is impossible to empirically determine.

And if you’re about to make that argument to the higher-ups, you’re going to need data. Start by learning more about measuring marketing success. Then, download and complete our Marketing KPI Worksheet.

You said it yourself earlier, the numbers don’t lie.

What’s next? Answer these 3 questions

  1. Are you willing to sacrifice hard-won progress for the sake of meeting short-term cost reduction benchmarks that serve no other purpose?
  2. Do you agree with the premise that weakened economies make marketing expenditures more valuable?
  3. Can your firm weather near-term slowdowns and remain committed to marketing toward stable, long-term growth?

Our argument, essentially, is this: When business is slow, you can buy awareness, engagement and loyalty among your audience at a discount.

We’re not delusional, just different. If you agree with our argument, you’re different too—and that’s why we should talk.

“I need what’s in your brain” – Why we insist on interviewing subject matter experts

We tell prospects and new clients that access to their technical experts is critical to our work.

“No problem,” they say. Sounds logical in theory. But it can end up being more challenging in practice. Why?

That’s just it. After initial agreement, clients eventually ask why.

And that means we haven’t communicated the stakes clearly enough.

In B2B marketing, content which isn’t informed by technical expertise fails to provide useful information, context or guidance for an audience whose decision making requires all three.

The goals of this article, then, are to:

  • Clearly define who is—and isn’t—the sort of technical expert we want to talk to
  • Suggest ways these experts can interact with us on an ongoing basis to guarantee our dialogue is always productive
  • Share specific examples of our own work that hit the mark thanks to our partners’ technical expertise

Who’s the expert here?

Industrial customers lay awake at night worrying about specific challenges. Will new NFPA Life Safety code requirements mean we need to rethink facility layout? Can my outsourced heat treater’s vacuum furnace achieve OEM-required mechanical characteristics for the jetliner wing attachment bolts we manufacture?

The most effective industrial marketing comes from information stored in the brains of production managers, prototype designers, facility engineers or project supervisors. Their mix of academic and applied knowledge makes them the ideal source of accurate, contextual information your ideal customers can act on.

I don’t want beef with PR pros, sales VPs or anyone in the C-suite. Those voices matter, too. But when the goal is to publish content that guides technical minds toward a technical decision, I need clear, specific information not colored by the ridiculous corporate ipsum that pervades B2B communication.

I’ll put it more bluntly. Every time a generalist tells me their company addresses Important Issue X by “collaborating to create innovative solutions” and “providing superior customer service,” I want to swan dive onto a freeway.

Keys to the best subject matter interview

Most engineers, supervisors and project managers aren’t accustomed to sharing information with third-party copywriters. Here’s how we can work together to make this partnership work.

Mark up interview questions in advance

Sending questions in advance isn’t always necessary, but we’re always happy to do it because it makes for a more productive conversation.

If we miss the mark, we’d rather know it in advance and work to close those knowledge gaps before things get awkward over the phone. Tell us what’s relevant, what’s not and what we should research more.

And if we need to pull the plug and go back to the drawing board, we will. Muddling through despite an obvious disconnect violates my cardinal rule as a writer: Don’t guess.

For more on how our copywriters unlock vital information, read up on the tactics we use and download our Research and Interview Playbook.

Provide supplemental material

Every writer knows the adage “show, don’t tell.” Sometimes, phone calls and email exchanges don’t cut it. In our quest for useful, actionable information, it’s not uncommon for our team to ask for any of the following:

  • Correspondence between your sales staff and customers or prospects
  • Purchase orders, invoices, bid submissions or other project documentation
  • Process or manufacturing specifications
  • Part/process/system schematics, blueprints or renderings
  • Technical manuals, training materials or internal presentations
  • Lab reports, white papers and patent information
  • Local, state or federal regulatory documentation

Don’t wait for us to ask, either. If there’s something in your files that you think will help us, we want to see it. If the information is proprietary, we’ll gladly sign an NDA.

I love using resources such as what’s listed above in case studies. And in my personal opinion, case studies are the best way to share relevant, practical information about a product, service or process. Want to hit pay dirt? Start by downloading our Case Study Starter Kit.

Email us just because

There’s no rule saying we can’t talk outside of a specific assignment.

Share news, trends or discoveries with us. We’ll log it in our content ideas pipeline. Ideas generated in this way often become the most popular among our clients’ audiences. So don’t censor yourself.

We won’t, either. I estimate that for every thousand words we write, we probably read ten grand. We’re bound to have questions to which you’ll have answers. Be ready for an active dialogue.

Why subject matter expertise makes a difference

Merely passing information to buyers isn’t that hard. Demonstrating that your product or service is a viable solution to their problems is the challenge.

I could tell you more about why this is so important, but I’d rather show you. Grace Wright, Mary Tomlinson and I share these observations from work we did thanks to our clients’ technical experts:

Cutting through the noise to debunk bad hype – Grace Wright

It didn’t take long for a certain manufacturer’s release of a new rigid core flooring product to make waves in the industry. The trade pubs and product manufacturers kept saying that it was God’s gift to floors and it should be specified for almost any application.

Meanwhile, I’m assigned to write on the topic for the largest contract flooring provider in the country. I hop on my interview and the guy is like, “Listen, everyone says that. But we work on a ton of jobs and I’ve only seen it specified once.”

I threw out my questions, asked what the limitations of the product were (and why it isn’t being used in commercial facilities), and came up with this.

If not for my conversation with someone who has extensive field expertise, this would’ve been another throwaway “rigid-core-is-perfect-for-everything” piece that would have helped no one.

The fault in our technical manuals – Mary Tomlinson

Pretty much anything you need to know about how protective coatings interact with substrates and the environment can be found within two massive SSPC technical manuals we keep on a spare desk in our writing room.

The manuals brim with important technical information, but to simply regurgitate it would be unhelpful to someone trying to weight the practical implications of choosing one coating alternative over another. For instance, the manuals tell you all about how zinc-epoxy-urethane coatings work, but they don’t say why using one for an interior structural steel application would be an exercise in overkill.

An end user who didn’t know better might mistakenly pay—out the nose—to coat an interior beam with a formula better suited for naval destroyers.

The added context and insight provided by the expert I interviewed made this article on corrosion prevention and protection methods for structural steel stand head and shoulders above regurgitated junk.

It’s CSI but for metallurgy – Toby Wall

Automotive suppliers always have a target on their backs. To be successful, they must guarantee the parts they make will perform the way OEMs demand. When part quality issues arise, suppliers need to find out why—fast—and fix the problem.

If they fail, the best that could happen is that they get fired amid global recalls. The worst? People die.

Naturally, the suppliers often need help.

I spoke with the metallurgist who led the part failure investigation that uncovered a flaw in the way variable valve timing plates were manufactured that resulted in cracks forming during thermal processing. The result was this case study, which quickly became our client’s most popular and useful content item.

It hit a nerve with trade pub editors, too, who gladly re-published the piece and told our client to keep it coming.

Let’s talk about you

Who are you trying to reach? How do you capture their attention? What information do you have that they’re not getting from anyone else? What expertise does you team possess that makes them indispensable in your industry?

Answering those questions is critical to directing your marketing efforts toward their greatest effect, and subject matter experts play a vital role in that journey.

If you think we can help you navigate, let’s set up a consultation.

How to give your content writer constructive feedback

how to give your content writer feedback

Think about content creation like a 4×400-meter relay race. Your agency or freelance writer will carry the baton for the first three laps around the track — researching, interviewing, writing — but will pass it off to you for the last lap: Editing.

Editing is the final, and arguably the most important, leg of the content creation relay. Your feedback will take content from “almost-there” to “I-can’t-wait-to-publish-this.”

The feedback you give will also lay the foundation for your ongoing relationship with this writer. Any writer worth the ink in their pen will document your preferences to reference when writing all future content pieces — so the longer you work with them, the less time you’ll spend wielding a red pen.

I’m going to give you a crash course on how to deliver feedback that establishes a good client-writer relationship and ultimately results in better content.

Don’t make any changes before reading the whole thing

Read through the whole article before unsheathing your red pen. That way you don’t spend five precious minutes writing out a comment about how important it is to include a detailed description of Tier 4 emission control technologies. And when you get to the next paragraph, you see … a detailed description of the Tier 4 emission control technologies.

On your next read-through, start making notes about:

  • Phrases or words you especially like (or dislike)
  • Any technical inaccuracies you notice
  • Overarching edits like flow, tone and structure

And as you do, make sure your comments are honest, specific and respectful.

Be honest about what you don’t like …

Personally, I’m never looking for an “atta boy” when I pass an article off to a client. I’m looking to get it 100% right. And while I can get it to 95% on my own, I need honest client feedback to take it through the finish line.

You need to take editing seriously, only giving the green light on articles, white papers and case studies that are technically accurate and match your desired tone. If anything at all isn’t up to your standards, your writer needs to hear about it.

You’re not doing anyone any favors — least of all yourself — by giving an article a cursory glance before approving it or, worse, avoiding giving your writer negative feedback.

If your writer is anything like me, they’ll treat all edits, client preferences and approved copy as a working encyclopedia of your brand and business. Giving honest feedback is insurance against stuff you dislike (tone that’s off, technical inaccuracy, etc.) cropping up in future content pieces.

… but tell your writer when you like something, too

Not to stroke their egos — but to give them a better idea of your preferences. Often, edits are about what we should change. Telling your writer when something’s good lets them know what to keep doing as they write more content for your brand. Plus, it’s never bad practice to balance negative feedback with positive.

When delivering feedback, deal in specifics

If something’s technically inaccurate, tell your writer what specifically needs to change. If you dislike the tone, give them examples of articles that achieve the tone you’re going for. Doing so allows them to come back with a second draft that makes you say, “Exactly. They get it.”

Before you hand your edits back to your writer or agency, look for vague comments like …

  • “This is the wrong tone for our brand.”
  • “I don’t like this.”
  • “Something feels off.”

… and make them more specific.

“This is the wrong tone for our brand,” for instance, could be made more specific (and therefore more useful) by changing it to, “The tone is off here — I’d prefer something more conversational. I’ve marked the words that are a little too formal.”

Vague comments leave too much room for interpretation. Specific comments allow your writer to get to the root of what, exactly, you don’t like, and make sure it gets cut in the second draft.

Whenever you make an edit, explain why

This is the cardinal rule of editing, in my opinion.

If you only tell your writer what’s wrong, or what word you dislike, they can only incorporate that edit in this piece. If you tell them why it’s wrong, they can apply the same logic to other situations in the future — saving you time in the long run.

If, for example, you tell me to remove the last sentence in paragraph 2, I’ll happily oblige.

But if you tell me you’d like it removed because it explains something your target audience already knows, then I won’t waste valuable real estate on that topic in future pieces. This means you’ll have one less edit on the next piece I turn in and, more importantly, I’ll have a greater understanding of your audience and industry.

Your writer must turn in a solid first draft, but they aren’t solely responsible for the quality of your brand’s content. It’s on you, too. Arm them with the information they need to make each piece they write better than the last. Do it by explaining the “why” behind each of your edits.

When in doubt, pick up the phone

Whether it’s to discuss a bigger edit, or to talk through a concept, writers are almost always receptive to more explanation. And phone conversations invariably result in fewer miscommunications than long emails.

How to transform your feedback

I want to give you a few tangible examples of how to transform incomplete feedback into the type of feedback that will get you better content and build a good relationship with your content writer.

Feedback example 1

Instead of saying, “This isn’t the right tone for our brand,” try saying something like, “The tone is off in this article — we’d really prefer more of a conversational tone for our brand. I’ve marked the words and phrases that are a little too formal.”

Feedback example 2

Instead of quietly marking the Oxford comma throughout an article, say something like, “Let’s use the Oxford comma in all copy for our brand. Can we add that in throughout this piece, and moving forward?”

Feedback example 3

Instead of giving prescriptive feedback like, “Remove the last sentence in paragraph 4,” try offering more context. Say something along the lines of, “Remove the last sentence in paragraph 4. It’s not something our clients would be concerned about knowing because [X].”

Feedback example 4

Instead of giving a vague comment like, “Something’s off in this section,” give your writer an idea of what you’d like to see in the second draft. Say something like, “Is there any way to rephrase the third paragraph to more clearly communicate [X], [Y] and [Z]?”

Feedback example 5

Let’s say you’re displeased with a section of the article — it mischaracterizes a major concept in your industry. Don’t avoid giving negative feedback. Say something like, “I’m not sure you quite understand this topic. Instead of [X], it’s really more [Y]. Why don’t we hop on a call and I’ll walk you through it?”

After you send off your edits …

Remember that it’s a two-way conversation.

Sometimes, your writer will disagree with an edit or two. It’s not out of malice. We’re professional wordsmiths who’ve published hundreds of pieces and written millions of words in drafts (not exaggerating). Our job is to develop clear, compelling, accurate content that resonates with your audience, addresses their challenges and meets your strategic objectives. To get it right, sometimes we get tough.

Giving good feedback is how you get better content

You and your writer are on the same team — you both want to create incredible content for your company.

By giving better feedback, you’ll lay the foundation for a strong client-writer relationship. One where you’re comfortable giving very honest feedback about their work. One where, by the time you’ve worked together awhile, you shouldn’t have to give much feedback at all.

The Side Effects of Marketing Nearsightedness

marketing nearsightedness

In the 13 years since my business partner Jon and I started our agency, the marketing analytics landscape has changed dramatically.

We’ve watched:

  • Google Analytics evolve from its infancy into a mature, sophisticated tool
  • The rise Hubspot and a world of person-based, full-funnel measurement tools
  • The emergence of heat mapping software like Hotjar and Lucky Orange
  • And the birth of marketing AI and machine learning

A lot of good has come from the accessibility of all this incredibly powerful data – from creating accountability for marketers to understanding the ROI of both campaigns and specific tactical deployments.

But this ROI-driven marketing culture hasn’t come without its share of side effects too.

What we sacrifice when we think too short term

In this era where everything is measurable, we tend to make marketing decisions that favor caution over creativity and instant gratification over patience.

In other words, we become more inclined to do only the things that will pay off in a quantifiable way, and quickly.

In particular, I see neglect occurring in three areas:

  1. The things we do persistently to grow results over the long term
  2. The investments we make to build brand equity
  3. The experiments we run that have potential to yield significant results

I’d like to be very clear that this article is not an excuse for pushing accountability to the side. Not at all. Instead, I wrote this as a reminder about what’s sometimes lost in an era consumed both by data overload and a “results now” mentality.

So we’ll do a couple things here.

First, we’ll take a closer look at these three things you may be in danger of neglecting. And second, we’ll conclude with recommendations about how to create the right balance in your marketing strategy.

Area of Neglect #1: Builders of Long-Term Results

Countless people will enter the new year with resolutions to get in better shape – to lose weight, lower blood pressure and generally feel healthier. But to expect a noticeable difference by the end of January (after replacing cheeseburgers with salads and hitting the gym a few times per week) would be unrealistic.

Results require both time and persistence.

The same applies to a number of the most important things we do on the marketing front. Particularly with our inbound activities, results rarely materialize overnight.

The following graphics are real inbound marketing results curves from three different clients of ours. On the left is traffic from organic search. On the right are the resulting leads generated from that traffic.

inbound results curves

Notice the similarity in these three examples.

And consider the missed payoff had these organizations quit after six or twelve months because “the results just weren’t there”.

Instead, each client exercised persistence.

They deployed smart SEO strategies, backed by resourceful thought-leadership content – establishing expertise in front of prospects and search engines alike.

One of my greatest lessons learned over the past few years as a marketer (and agency owner) is to properly set expectations. These builders of long-term results are so important and can’t be neglected. But expectations about the role they play and the runway to results need to be appropriately set.

Area of Neglect #2: Builders of Brand Equity

Some of the marketing decisions we make will never lead to a result we can hold in our hands.

That may be tough to stomach, but think about the power of consumer-facing brands like Coca-Cola, Ford, Nike or Apple. Or in the industrial B2B world, household names like Rockwell Automation, FANUC, Grainger or Siemens.

It’s hard to imagine building a powerful trademark on the back of a pay-per-click campaign.

Of course these brands would never be great without a history of exceptional products and services to begin with. But they take their outward appearance very seriously too.

Consider the things you do at a personal level to present yourself professionally – in front of customers, in job interviews or at industry events. You iron your clothes, speak professionally, shake hands firmly and so on.

Great industrial brands do these things too. Their marketing and sales communications are clear and well positioned. Their websites are buttoned up. They proactively take thought leader positions by conducting and publishing industry research reports, guest authoring in trade journals and speaking at events.

These things aren’t always directly measurable. But we know they matter. So we do them.

Area of Neglect #3: The Experiments

The third place we’ll sacrifice when we overvalue short-term results are in the measured risks we may never be willing to take.

In other words – trying new things.

We let our Strategists use Gorilla as a playground to experiment with new marketing technologies and methodologies. Many will fall flat. But some will win big. And we’d never uncover those big wins if we just kept doing the same thing month after month and year after year.

Back in 2012 or so, we experimented with Hubspot (and marketing automation) for Gorilla. This was an almost immediate big win and we subsequently rolled out the software for a number of our clients.

Around the same time, we did the same with methodologies like gating content and guest authoring in industry journals.

More recently, we’ve run experiments with various account-based marketing strategies, paid social and surrounding technologies.

Just as you balance your investment portfolio with safe, steady performers and low-floor, high-ceiling risks, you should allow flexibility to do the same in your marketing initiatives.

Creating the optimal balance

Though I don’t have a canned formula for you, here’s a starter template for balancing producers of short term results, builders of long-term results, builders of brand equity and experiments:

marketing balance pie chart

Start here and adjust as you see fit. But do your best to allow for some of each.

There’s nothing wrong with short-term thinking (we all need to pay the bills). Just keep a clear perspective on the bigger picture too.

Visualizing Your Customer Acquisition Funnel

customer acquisition funnel graphic

$10M in new sales over the next 12 months.

25% top-line growth in the new year.

5 new customers per month.

Goals are great. But how exactly do you plan to achieve them? Where will the leads you’ll need to support these goals physically come from? How many of those leads will actually be qualified? And how many qualified leads will your sales team need to reach your revenue or new customer acquisition target?

We created the funnel below to help you design an achievable plan for getting where you need to go.

full funnel no numbers

In this article, I’ll break it down section by section. Or if you’re the type that prefers watching to reading, here’s an 8-minute recording that’ll take you through the same content in video format.

But before you dive in, I recommend downloading this working funnel template (click here for PowerPoint / click here for Keynote) so you can pencil in your own numbers as you go.

Start with New Customers and Opportunities

Because this is an exercise in planning your customer acquisition strategy, let’s start at the very bottom with the end goal – new customers.

funnel customers and opportunities

Let’s say your monthly new sales target is $500K. And your average sale with a new customer is worth $100K. Doing some simple math, your new customer goal will be 5 per month.

Moving North one section, we now have to identify how many new Opportunities (leads you’ve engaged in conversation who are actively considering your solution) will be required to meet that new customer target.

If your Sales team’s close rate is 50%, then you’ll need to produce 10 new Opportunities.

Now let’s jump way up to the top of the funnel.

The three ways to generate leads

For simplicity’s sake, we’ll assume there are three ways to fill the top of your funnel:

  1. Inbound
  2. Paid media
  3. Outbound

Collectively, these three streams in your funnel need to produce enough Sales-Qualified Leads (which we’ll refer to as “SQLs” for the remainder of this article) to reach your newly established target of 10 Opportunities per month.

sales funnel sqls

So how many total SQLs will you need?

Let’s say your Sales team is capable of engaging 25% of your SQLs in active buying conversations (converting them into Opportunities).

Under this assumption, your funnel will require:

  • 40 total SQLs, in order to produce…
  • 10 Opportunities, in order to produce…
  • 5 new customers

With these targets established, let’s break down each of the three streams that will feed your funnel – so we can plan for where those 40 SQLs will actually originate.

The Left Stream: Inbound

Inbound is the logical starting place because we can benchmark your current state using existing website analytics data.

Let’s say:

  • Your current unpaid website traffic is 3000 unique visitors per month
  • 1% of those visitors are converting into new contacts through form submissions (30 new contacts/month)
  • And 20% of those new contacts will actually be qualified leads (6 new SQLs/month)

inbound sales funnel 1

Having established that you’ll need to generate 40 SQLs (not 6), you’ll still need to account for 34. And those SQLs will come from some combination of the following:

  1. Investing more resources (time and/or money) in inbound
  2. Leveraging paid media
  3. Launching an outbound campaign

Say you start by making an investment in inbound. So you formulate a plan to begin crafting exceptional problem-solving, question-answering content on a regular basis, engage in smart SEO and social media strategies to amplify the visibility and reach of that content, and invest in conversion optimization on your website.

Through these initiatives, you aim to improve your inbound lead generation numbers so they look more like this:

inbound sales funnel 2

Although 15 SQLs are better than the original 6, you’re still well shy of the 40 you’re trying to produce in the short term.

This is where your other two streams in the top of your funnel come into play.

Let’s take a look.

The Middle Stream: Paid Media

Let’s say you commit some marketing dollars to LinkedIn ads and PPC (pay per click) – aiming to generate 60 new contacts per month, where 25% of them are qualified.

sales funnel paid media

Now, between your Inbound and Paid Media streams you’ve accounted for 30 of the 40 SQLs required to reach your bottom-of-the-funnel goals.

The Right Stream: Outbound

This leads us to the third and final stream in your funnel: outbound.

To close the gap in this funnel and hit your target of 40 total SQLs per month, you still need to account for 10 SQLs.

But you’ll need to treat this third stream a little bit differently. Here’s why:

The SQLs you’ll produce through inbound and paid media will willingly take a step on their own (likely through a form submission on your website) to engage with you.

But with outbound, you’ll be the one proactively attempting to engage them. And because these prospects aren’t raising their hands, saying “I’m interested in what you’re talking about”, outbound will be a volume game (requiring a bigger pool of target prospects).

So your approach here is to define a segment of your audience and build a comprehensive list of as many target organizations (and specific buying-process influencers inside of those companies) as possible.

Then, you’ll design a joint Marketing-Sales blitz including tactics like cold email outreach sequences, phone calls, direct mail and maybe some other creative tactics as well to engage them.

For the sake of our example, let’s predict that 1 in 25 cold target prospects that you reach out to will become engaged enough to warrant the “SQL” label.

So you’ll target 250 individuals per month to meet your quota of 10 monthly SQLs from outbound.

sales funnel outbound

And with that, your funnel targets are in place:

completed sales funnel with numbers

Rather than chasing a pie-in-the-sky customer acquisition target, you’ve now established leading KPIs (key performances indicators) inside a visual funnel to guide the formulation of your lead generation strategy and action plan.

Deciding where to invest

Earlier this year I published an article titled Fast Results vs. Sustainable Success: Take Your Pick.

So which matters more to you?

Fast results?

Or sustainable success?

It’s not a trick question. But it’s an important one to ask yourself, and here’s why:

If your inbound pipeline is currently weak, your competition online is heavy and you need to produce results quickly, inbound probably isn’t your answer.

Lead generation through inbound marketing is the result of a persistent effort to turn your website into an authoritative source of information for your audience.

In most cases, that simply takes time.

By no means should this be your excuse to avoid the inbound investment. Because in time, a well executed inbound strategy can be your most sustainable driver of leads.

My point is that you’ll likely need to temper your expectations about inbound results in the short term – with the understanding that you’re investing in the future of your business.

Paid media and outbound can usually get you where you need to go faster. But these efforts aren’t self sustaining. Unlike with inbound, when your budget runs dry, your lead generation results will follow suit.

If you’d like help planning your lead generation strategy, I encourage you to consider requesting a consultation. Here’s a snapshot of who we’re best at helping.

The Perfect Case Study

How to write the perfect customer success story

fireworks celebrate customer success story

We’ve already established what makes the perfect home page and the perfect B2B knowledge center. Another tool in your industrial marketing toolbox that’s worth perfecting? Well thought-out, customer-driven case studies that will demonstrate to potential customers you’re right for the job.

You’re likely already familiar with publishing case studies — hey, who doesn’t want to talk about the success of their past projects? But today we’ll focus on the elements that will take your case study from a run-of-the-mill regurgitation of project details to a compelling piece of content that will leave potential customers saying, “Wow, I want them to do that for me!”

Let’s get started.

Selecting a project for a case study

Before we dive into the elements that make up a perfect case study, let’s take a moment to discuss project selection. Just picking a random or most recent project from the top of the pile isn’t going to cut it. When evaluating a project, consider these questions:

  • Is this the type of work we want to complete in the future?
  • Is there a distinctive problem we solved or a unique solution to discuss?
  • Is there enough information to create a substantial piece of content?

If you answer these questions with a resounding “Yes!” this will be a great project to highlight. If not, go back to the drawing board and select another project from the vault.

The elements of a perfect B2B case study

To visually represent what we like to see on a B2B manufacturer’s case study pages, here’s a wireframe (or page blueprint) of the ideal case study:

perfect case study wire frame

Now let’s dive in.

The intriguing headline and image

Simply put, a quality case study headline will engage your reader’s attention as he scrolls through your site or reads from your email newsletter.

perfect case study headline

How to catch their eye with the headline? There are two things I like to keep in mind: 1. Utilize impressive stats or statements and 2. Highlight what the customer got out of the project (as opposed to what you accomplished).

Read this first draft of a case study headline from a conveyor belt provider focusing on what the B2B manufacturer accomplished:

case study headline example

Now compare it with this option highlighting what the customer gained from the project:

case study headline example

If I’m searching for a belting partner for my facility, I know which one I’m going to read.

You may encounter case studies in which a specific dollar amount, percentage or other statistic isn’t feasible to include with the project. But just because your headline doesn’t include a flashy figure doesn’t mean you can’t still achieve engaging specificity.

For instance, in this case study from an engine and generator manufacturer and distributor, their team engineered generators that were some of the first of their kind.

case study headline example

Not necessarily a statistic, but still an impressive characteristic of the case study with the greatest chance of catching reader’s eye.

To help get the gears turning for your case study headline, here’s a formula I like to use:

How a [insert brief solution descriptor] led to [insert result, either a figure or high-level improvement] at a [insert customer business descriptor]  

It may not work in every case study you publish, but it’s a good jumping off point for brainstorming headlines that will encourage visitors to read further.

In addition to the headline, project images are a simple way to represent your project visually and snag the attention of the reader. It also can help her quickly filter through case studies that relate to the type of project she hopes to complete. For example, check out this case study overview page from a geotechnical contractor:

case study overview images example

Here, potential customers can easily pick a case study showcasing services that fit their needs, whether that’s university construction project or renovations to public service buildings. Include a high-quality image from the project (or for projects where security measures prohibit sharing actual images from the job, stock photos come in handy) and you’re one step closer to engaging the reader with your content.

The executive summary

This part is pretty straightforward: Simply summarize the major takeaways from the body copy into easily scannable bullet points. Why is this important? It allows for an easy point of entry for those who may not read the whole piece, but can still get the gist of the case study (and still get blown away by your work).

perfect case study executive summary

The executive summary should include the problem, solution and results at minimum (more on those later). It’s also best to write the executive summary last, pulling out key points is easier once the full body copy is complete.

Here’s an example of an executive summary from a conveyor belt provider case study.

case study highlights section example

Also, if it’s relevant for your line of work, a section with technical stats can provide more quick takeaways. The contents of the “case study facts” or “project details” section will vary from manufacturer to manufacturer, but consider including information such as:

  • Industry or market.
  • Company name or description.
  • Services provided.
  • Location.
  • Year completed.
  • Basic stats of project (square footage, material conveyed, product engineered).

If you decide not to employ an executive summary, use clear subheads through the body copy to ensure the content is scannable.

The problem

Now getting into the bulk of the case study, start out by describing the problem (soon to be followed by the solution and the results). This naturally creates a narrative arc with a sense of conclusion for the reader and facilitates the organization of a wide swath of details into a more comprehensible format.

perfect case study problem

When you describe the problem, don’t just explain what was wrong; set the stakes for the reader. What was at risk for the customer if a solution wasn’t found? Did they stand to weaken customer relationships, decrease throughput, jeopardize safety qualifications? This is also an excellent place to “set the scene” and provide context for the project. Include demographics of the customer’s company, scope and stages of the project, and other environmental / contextual descriptors. Even better, include visual elements from the project such as:

And images aren’t only for the problem section — use them throughout the body copy to help visualize each stage of the project. These facilitate a complete understanding of the work you accomplished.

The solution

In the solution section, clearly describe how you completed the job. Include as many details as you can, from material selection to team members involved to installation process — the whole nine yards.

perfect case study solution

With our case studies, we think of these both as a chance to demonstrate expertise and function as a persuasive piece of content. When a potential customer finishes reading your case study, they should not only understand the nuts and bolts of what you did; they should feel like they got a peek into your thought processes and problem-solving capabilities — and want to replicate that experience for themselves.

You should also talk through any unique or innovative aspects of your work. The reader may not know that hauling 80,000 pounds of generator equipment down the highway is actually an extraordinary feat — explain that to us!

If there were any challenges or roadblocks your team encountered during the project, mention those as well. Periods of trial and error — such as this conveyor belt provider’s multiple rounds of belt testing for an X-ray belt — showcase a problem-solving mindset and give readers a taste of your consultative abilities.

The results

This is arguably the most important section for a potential customer. Any statistics, percentages, dollar amounts that you can share here, do it. And don’t forget to talk about the soft benefits as well: Time saved for management, increased sense of customer safety, a streamlined manufacturing process. Showcase the invaluable nature of your solution for this particular customer.

perfect case study results

For the results section (as well as the problem and solution sections), don’t feel like you’re tied to a particular word count. As we like to say in our writing department, “Make it as long as it needs to be.” That may seem cryptic, but it’s really about understanding the core purpose of a case study, which is to explain a project in detail to a potential customer. If that mean an 1,100-word odyssey on how metallurgists used subtly different process temperatures to improve automotive component performance, do it. If it only takes you 300 words to describe your solution, that’s great, too. This prevents you from adding unnecessary “fluff” to bulk up the case study or cutting essential details to get under a certain word count. Tell the story you need to tell and an appropriate length will follow suit.

Also, across the entire case study, be sure to employ specific, descriptive language. This doesn’t mean peppering in empty adjectives — no “cutting-edge solution” or “ecstatic customer” usage, please. Instead, rely on verifiable details — “a heating solution that led to a 22°F increase in natural gas temperature and reduced hydrate formation” or “a customer with fewer stress test failures and ultimately lowered manufacturing costs.” Instead of relying on lazy, easy adjectives, this pushes you to be specific about your project — and helps the work resonate with potential customers.

Our final recommendation is to have a team member from outside the project look over the body copy. This is a great chance to catch any jargon that might have slipped in and ensure the problem, solution and results are clear.

The compelling customer testimonial

Discussing the work you completed on a project clearly demonstrates expertise — but it carries even more weight coming from the recipient of the services. You can still have a robust case study without a customer testimonial, but this element adds an extra “oomph” and only strengthens your case as a provider of quality services.

perfect case study testimonial

Customer input can come in many formats, depending on the level of involvement you can get from your client. Quotes (like this one from an engine and generator manufacturer and distributor’s case study), are fairly easy to come by from a quick phone call or email.

customer testimonial example

A full-on customer testimonial — essentially a longer version of a customer quote where they detail the experience from their perspective — gives your customer a bigger platform from which to share their story. Finally, a video interview will involve greater time investment on both ends, but the immediacy and resonance of their story in video format is invaluable. Plus, you now have a great asset to use within the case study, throughout your website and in future outreach campaigns.

The call to action

perfect case study call to action

You’ve given your reader ample insight into your engineering process and showcased impressive results — now put a bow on it and tell him how to take the next step.

cta example

For case studies, a tried-and-true CTA is a downloadable gated asset related to the topic you covered in the case study, such as the example above where a guide to risk management in heat treating follows a case study involving unconventional heat treatment. Other options include an offer for a consultation (like this conveyor belting provider’s offer for a facility audit) or something as simple as a newsletter signup.

cta example

This CTA allows you to convert a case study reader into a lead and engage with the potential customers reading your case studies.

You’re ready to start

By reading this article, you’re already one step closer to creating the perfect case study — and repeating that process to build a library of impressive past projects. All you need to do now is pick a project and start writing.

Case study: Good things happen when your blog post dominates Google for 18 months

Paulo provides advanced thermal processes that enhance the performance of metal components for customers across North America. Five U.S. divisions and a sixth in Mexico serve major automotive, aerospace, agriculture, power generation and oil & gas suppliers as well as smaller local machine shops.

The problem: The lack of a sustained inbound marketing program restricted Paulo’s ability to generate leads online, a venue they knew was critical to maintaining a healthy sales pipeline.

The solution: Gorilla 76 developed a content strategy focused on alleviating confusion as well as showcasing emerging processes and process alternatives.

The result: One of the articles we wrote became the #1 Google search result for its target keyword within a year of publication. Still ranking #1 today, it’s responsible for over 4,100 sessions and has harnessed 165 new contacts in its lifetime.

Paulo
“Working with Gorilla 76 has enabled us to share our knowledge with our customers and the marketplace at large. We’ve gotten great feedback and have seen an increased volume of inquiries as a result.”

– Phil Harris, Marketing Manager, Paulo

Inbound marketing is mature enough by now that any client-side marketing manager with a pulse knows it works.

They also know it takes time. It could be a few months before it moves the dial. Deciding whether to move fast or play the long game is a barrier to action we’ve seen time and time again.

But inbound success is worth waiting for. This case study highlights:

  • The initial development of a marketing strategy targeted to Paulo’s buyers and their challenges
  • Execution of highly technical content pieces in service of that strategy
  • The resulting traffic and lead generation that has persisted for years

The problem

Founded in 1943 in a rented St. Louis storefront, Paulo made a name for itself by investing in the most advanced thermal processing equipment. Their engineers and metallurgists liked to mod furnaces in-house if “most advanced” wasn’t advanced enough for them.

(Company lore has it that frustrated engineers once sliced a continuous belt furnace in half long-ways and then welded in the furnace equivalent of a dining table leaf to make it tall enough to process artillery shell casings.)

Today, Paulo’s metallurgy staff is arguably the envy of the industry; its quality systems brought thermal processing into the digital age. They’re serious pros by necessity: If their processes aren’t executed perfectly, seatbelt buckles might crack in half in car wrecks, wings might fall off planes mid-flight and rocket boosters might malfunction during liftoff.

But in early 2017, it was apparent to Paulo that a lack of buyer-focused thought leadership online was a missed opportunity. If they did not reach the growing share of their audience searching for solutions online, someone else would.

The solution

Getting answers to unanswered questions is a prerequisite for developing rational strategy. In this case, it was critical that we understand Paulo’s buyers more intimately. So we started asking questions.

Who were these people? Who do they work for? What do they know? What don’t they know? What problems do they have? Which of those problems can Paulo help solve?

Material and design engineers in the aerospace, automotive and other industrial sectors knew thermal processing was vital to the performance of parts they create. Some understand metallurgy well despite its complexity, but they don’t always know how advancements in the science can apply to their work. Thermal processors are successful when they demonstrate to these key personas that they can repeatedly execute specified treatments perfectly.

With that in mind, we elected to develop a library of content to help buyers make more sense of complicated topics.

Metallurgy suffers no shortage of complex topics, so we then asked Paulo: In an ocean of obscure technical principles, which would you start with? Which is your audience most interested in right now?

The answer: nitriding. And more specifically, the differences between carbonitriding and nitrocarburizing.

Here’s a primer if you’re curious: Carbonitriding and nitrocarburizing each are “case hardening” processes in which carbon and nitrogen are dissolved into the surface of a steel part. Adding these elements to the surface of the part makes it harder and more wear-resistant on the outside while preserving ductility throughout the rest of the part.

Consider gears: Their teeth need to be very hard or else they wouldn’t keep their shape. But they must also remain softer and more ductile on the inside so that they don’t snap under the constant stress of their service.

Choosing this topic shows how the planning process should work. The questions we asked helped us to identify the topics we needed to address. Those topics led us to the keywords we needed to target.

The order matters. Inbound marketing isn’t about targeting the best keywords. It’s about targeting the right ones.

After several hours of additional research and an interview with Paulo’s head metallurgist, we wrote Case hardening basics: Nitrocarburizing vs. Carbonitriding. It was published in February 2017.

(By the way—if you’re having a hard time generating ideas to turn into content on your website, you need to read this.)

The result

The immediate results were predictable.

As the chart below shows, the article earned only nine sessions and generated no leads in the first two weeks it was live.

Over the following several months, performance slowly improved. Paulo collected a handful of leads each month. But then the flood gates opened.

Sessions skyrocketed in October 2017. Contacts bumped up significantly, too. What had happened?

This is textbook inbound. Traffic and leads crept up slowly at first as search engines tried to determine the content’s value. It became clear as 2017 ended that this article was accomplishing its goal.

It’s hard to pin down exactly how long the article has ranked first on Google for the search term “nitrocarburizing vs carbonitriding.” The best we can tell, it earned the spot in January 2018.

It’s still there. And each of the 165 contacts it’s generated in its lifetime is a compelling argument for why firms in highly technical fields should implement inbound marketing.

Why stop there?

We weren’t finished.

In addition to the data showing the article clearly addressed a knowledge gap among Paulo’s target audience, continued discussion with Paulo revealed that buyers in the industry remained curious about nitriding in general.

So we wrote more. You can see how we expanded on this subject over time:

Our data show this bank of subsequent articles so far has been responsible for another 150 new contacts for Paulo.

In all, that’s 300-plus new contacts over two and a half years from six blog posts. It’s mighty impressive for a firm that consults with massive OEMs and upper-tier suppliers whose buying decisions sometimes are measured in decades.

Expertise in patient planning

Maybe you’re a believer in inbound in general. And maybe you’re convinced it can address the specific challenges your industrial B2B business faces.

But if you aren’t equipped to create and implement a plan, or if the higher-ups need more convincing before they funnel resources to the effort, read and share our seven core elements of industrial marketing strategy. After reading, you’ll be equipped to find your business’s place in the world and then make the most of the opportunities that await it there.

And if you need a hand plotting the right course for your business, a consultation with us will help.

Why Hitting “Publish” Isn’t Enough

Publish button

Today I’m here to debunk a myth:

That simply publishing great content will automatically fill your pipeline with qualified opportunities.

This assumption, my friends, is an incomplete and misunderstood statement that deserves a seat on Snopes.com alongside claims like:

Donald Trump was wounded and taken prisoner by the Viet Cong in 1963, only to be rescued by Vladimir Putin

and:

The state of Michigan threatened local beavers with a $10,000 per day fine for failing to remove their dam

As a long-time proponent and practitioner of content marketing, I realize this article might seem a bit out of left field.

So I’ll start by explaining myself.

The truth about digital content

You’ll find thousands of white papers, guides, articles and videos out there telling you that if you want to generate leads, all you need to do is publish great content. Answer questions. Solve problems. Publish. Publish. Publish.

But here’s the all important missing insight that most content marketing “experts” don’t tell you:

Visibility for your content is either A) earned or B) purchased. It’s not awarded by default.

A website filled with great content is kind of like a great restaurant on a side street.

No matter how incredible the food might be, unless your name is Emeril Lagasse or Gordon Ramsay, you’d be a fool to assume customers will automatically line up around the block the night of your grand opening.

Instead, you’d devise a smart, targeted and intentional plan to fill seats (probably through some combination of PR, advertising, social media, direct marketing, etc).

Similarly, in the industrial sector, unless we’re DOW Chemical, Fanuc or Rockwell Automation, we can’t simply hit the “publish” button and assume our content will start generating RFQs.

Unless you come with a plan to navigate around them, a number of hurdles are likely to stifle your content’s visibility. Here are four big ones:

  • Demand for information about your topic. Are enough people out there actually looking for information related to your content topics? Cross checking real search volume data in Google’s Keyword Planner can help you set expectations for the potential SEO impact of your content.
  • Saturation of similar content. Is there already a ton of information out there about the same topics? If so, what makes your content more worthy than the rest of ranking first, second or third in a Google search?
  • Your website’s authority with Google. How credible is your website from Google’s perspective? If your domain authority is dwarfed by that of industry giants, trade organizations and other authoritative sources, SEO can be an uphill battle.
  • Your website’s lead generation system. If you’ve successfully navigated around the challenges of these first three bullet points and you’re driving a healthy volume of qualified visitors to your site organically, congratulations. You’ve accomplished what most B2B manufacturers won’t. But have you equipped your website with appropriate offers, calls to action, landing pages and user flows to convert those anonymous visitors into tangible leads with names and email addresses?

Listen, inbound marketing is a beautiful thing.

But it requires hard work – because the quality of your content alone isn’t enough.

Organically building visibility takes time, smart strategy and sound execution (see our article Fast Results vs. Sustainable Success: Take Your Pick). And in most cases, that means you need to support inbound marketing with proactive efforts to create visibility.

What follows are five ways to layer some firepower on top of your content so it can produce the tangible results you’re seeking.

1. Deliver your content by email to existing and past customers and leads

This is probably your lowest-hanging fruit.

If you’re already producing thought-leadership content for inbound and SEO purposes, why not also deliver it directly to those who already know, like and trust you?

Sitting dormant inside the collective Outlook accounts of your Sales professionals, Account Managers and C-Suite is almost certainly an abundance of qualified businesses contacts (existing and past customers and leads).

I’ve found this to be true even among our clients who actively use CRM and/or marketing automation software.

So start with them and begin delivering your insights by email at least once per month.

Over time, these simple touch points (that create value instead of hammering promotional messaging into their ears) will keep you top of mind and incrementally build trust in your expertise.

2. Deliver your content by email to new prospects

Your Sales professionals are already knocking on doors and cold calling potential future customers. But how effective is it?

How about this instead (or at least in tandem)?:

  • Build your list of target accounts and individual prospects
  • Craft a series of three or four very brief outreach emails that not only communicate elements of your value proposition and ask for sales calls, but also deliver a supporting piece of thought leadership content each time
  • Use an automation tool to deliver these emails following a predetermined cadence

Now you’re extending your reach, expanding your number of touch points with prospects and creating value by delivering your expertise along the way.

3. Promote your content with paid social

If you’ve already built your list of target accounts, try LinkedIn Ads to push your content into the feeds of specific job title holders at these exact organizations (and others that resemble them too).

Yes, it’s possible to do this.

And while we’re on the topic of paid social, how about using Facebook (where your cost per lead will be significantly lower than LinkedIn, by the way) to target followers of Automotive News, Oil & Gas Journal or whatever trade publications and industry organizations your customers are already following?

Before you write off Facebook as a B2B marketing platform, take a look the demographics of Facebook’s user base and tell me your audience isn’t part of it’s 2.2 billion members.

4. Pitch editorial content to industry trade journals

Trade journals are thirsty for great content. And no, I’m not referring to advertorials.

I’m talking about your company’s subject matter experts crafting unique and insightful editorial content for the audiences of business publications in the industries you serve.

Think about it for a second. Who’s more qualified to help address the biggest challenges and answer the most important questions of their readers than the experts on your team who are in the trenches with them every day?

If you can write objectively (instead of promotionally), you’ll be pleasantly surprised by how many media sources will welcome your thought leadership with open arms (and without a required fee!).

Guest authorship accomplishes a few things at once:

  • You’ll add credibility to your content by publishing it inside of a respected journal’s platform
  • You’ll leverage their (much bigger) audience to exponentially extend your visibility
  • You’ll likely earn an inbound link from their site to yours (which signals credibility to Google and drives up your rankings in search results)

Some SEO experts will try to convince you that guest authorship is a stale tactic. I disagree because I continue to see it work. If your content is authentic and creates value your readers, it’ll be hard to go wrong.

5. Syndicate your content across media outlets

An alternative to publishing exclusive content for individual trade journals is syndication.

Content syndication can be executed manually or through a paid service. Our experience is mostly limited to the former – where we’ve helped our manufacturing clients pitch targeted content to a variety of relevant media sources simultaneously.

Some trade journals only accept entirely original content. But many are open to syndication – sometimes just requiring slight alternations to help make it their own.

As a form of guest authorship, similar benefits apply to syndication – from credibility to exposure to SEO improvement.

So there you have it

When your content is wrapped around the problems, goals, common questions and objections of the most important buying process influencers from the right types of companies, you have something that will resonate.

But don’t stop after you hit the publish button.

Promote your content, get the right eyes on it and then watch your sales pipeline grow.

Before we part, I’ll leave you with one more gem from Snopes for the road: Cargo lost in the Titanic’s sinking led to the creation of the Cinco de Mayo observance.

What Your Content and Wet Dogs May Have in Common

5 reasons most manufacturers’ content stinks (and what to do about it)

wet dog

I know. That was a “click bait” headline (where I say something dramatic and you can’t resist looking inside to confirm whether or not I just insulted you).

But…

Seriously. Your content stinks.

At least for 97% of you reading this, that statement is almost certainly true.

And that’s because a majority of B2B manufacturers publish nothing but self-serving fluff about how great they are and all the things they can sell you.

Then they wonder why their websites don’t show up in Google searches and why they can’t generate a good lead more than once or twice a month.

If you’re among the majority out there whose wet-dog content isn’t gaining any meaningful traction, here are five reasons why that might be the case.

1. You’re using the wrong pronouns

I. Me. My. We. Us. Our.

Everything is about you. What you sell. How great your people are. How great your service is.

But here’s the truth:

No one cares about who you are or what you do until they believe you understand their problems, have seen them before and know how to address them.

So how about less product and service pages and more problem-solving, question-answering content that gets to the core of the issues your prospects, leads and customers are trying to address every day?

Shift the pronoun usage from first to second person.

2. You sound like a robot

How come we’re perfectly capable of conducting normal human-to-human conversations in person or over the phone, but when we put pen to paper, our voices magically transform into that of some futuristic robot from a bad movie?

People want to do business with real people. So simply write like you talk.

3. You’re scared

“We don’t want to publish too many insights because our competitors will see it and steal business from us.”

News flash:

Your competitors are already publishing this kind of content while you’re sitting around worrying. And who do you think your prospects are finding first in the search engines?

Meanwhile, through a collection of product and service pages that look and sound pretty much the same as everyone else’s, you’re reinforcing your position as an undifferentiated vendor.

Be courageous. Demonstrate your expertise in the public space. Believe me – much more good than bad will come from it.

4. You’re encouraging inaction

Earlier this year, I wrote an article titled “Rest in Peace, My Dear Contact Us Button”. The main point was this:

Most of your website visitors aren’t sales ready. They’re seeking answers to their questions, investigating their problems, and maybe starting to compare solutions.

Yet the only call-to-action on a majority of manufacturer websites is a tiny little “Contact Us” or “Request a Quote” button somewhere in the top right corner.

Your content should encourage a natural next step, and do so contextually.

Guide your visitors through their respective journeys at their own pace.

Share a related white paper, tool, or a buyer’s guide if they’re not ready for a sales call. Invite them to a lunch and learn or a webinar. Help them apply the expertise you’ve just shared.

Whatever you do, don’t leave them wondering how to move forward.

5. You’re talking to everyone at once

(And as a result, you’re really talking to no one).

Most of the manufacturing organizations I consult aren’t in the business of selling commodities. Instead, their products and services are complex. Their sales processes are consultative. Their customers’ buying cycles are long. And as a result, their buyer is typically not a buyer (singular), but instead a committee of buyers (plural).

Among that buying committee are Engineers gathering technical specifications, Procurement Managers compiling pricing information and C-Suite executives seeking an understanding of ROI and long-term cost of ownership.

Your content simply can’t address the needs of all these people simultaneously.

So for each piece of content you plan to create, ask yourself this one simple question:

Who am I writing to?

Making the investment in content

Of course one thing I didn’t mention in this article is that creating non-wet-dog content isn’t always easy.

But that can’t be an excuse either.

If you’re new to the subject and could use some guidance, I recommend reading our article – How to extract expert knowledge from your team and turn it into incredible content.

Or if you simply don’t have the internal resources or skills to produce the content yourself, then I encourage you to consider hiring an agency or freelance writer to do it for you.

Case study: how a niche podcast delivers global thought leadership

Every day, in places like eastern South Dakota and southern Wisconsin and central Michigan, dairy farmers milk cows and think about their problems.

Weird way to start an article by a B2B industrial marketing agency, right?

Right. But despite our industrial and manufacturing marketing expertise, we’ll step into other sectors if a client’s goals and our skills align.

Our client, T.C. Jacoby & Co., is a major dairy product and ingredient trading firm. They also provide administrative support to dairy cooperatives in the U.S. And after a year or so of win-some, lose-some inbound marketing, we agreed we still weren’t effectively reaching a key audience segment: dairy farmers.

Podcasting was new territory for us and the client alike. We didn’t know what to expect. We didn’t know if our show would be good.

But our client knew that farmers thinking about their problems needed regular, informed analysis of a changing industry. We had to try.

 

Today, 19 months later, episodes of The Milk Check have been downloaded almost 8,000 times. Its audience spans 48 U.S. states and territories. It’s reached 53 countries around the world.

This is how it happened.

Zeroing in on an underserved audience

While dairy farmers and cooperatives aren’t the only personas T.C. Jacoby & Co. serves, they’ve been the foundation of the business since it was founded in 1949. And after 70 years, the industry had changed.

Dairy farmers’ main goal is simple: Get the highest price possible for the milk they produce. T.C. Jacoby & Co. relies on its broad industry expertise to achieve that goal for its customers. But economic conditions, globalization and an imperfect patchwork of federal agricultural policies have helped push thousands of farmers out of business. Thousands more are on the brink.

Farmers are famously reluctant to discuss their paychecks with strangers. Many fear leaving their current cooperatives on a gamble. If you’re going to get anywhere with them, they must trust you. Building that trust can take years.

We agreed that there must be a way to widen the dialogue with farmers. Past marketing efforts showed that SEO-focused articles and downloadable guides weren’t the way. “Traditional” inbound marketing tactics had not addressed farmers’ need for accurate, timely market analysis.

Farmers are better positioned to thrive when they understand more intimately how their changing industry works. The shortest distance between two points is a straight line. Why not gather T.C. Jacoby & Co.’s industry experts to talk to farmers directly?

The Milk Check is anchored by T.C. Jacoby & Co.’s chairman of the board, its CEO and its dairy support manager. With 90-odd years of collective industry experience among them, you’d be hard-pressed to find a more authoritative industry panel.

“What should we discuss?”

Almost every recording session since The Milk Check first went live in early 2018 has started this way. The panel asks the question even when they come prepared with topics they know they want to cover.

It’s their way of staying focused on the farmers they’re trying to engage.Will the conversation be worth listeners’ investment? Will they care?

Episodes tend to meander, with topics ranging from grain prices and rainfall totals to tariffs and quotas to the shapes and sizes of farms in Belgium or The Netherlands vs. those in Texas or Kansas.

But no matter how far afield the panel gets, they always make their way back to what matters most to farmers: Explaining the potential impacts of industry trends and events in the clearest and simplest terms — dollars and cents.

Distribution and data analysis: Is the podcast ‘good?’

Prior to launch, we believed dairy farmers would find the podcast valuable. But we couldn’t know for sure. It took a couple months before we had enough solid data to judge the answer to a simple but critical question: Is this podcast any good?

The answer began to emerge last spring.

Email and social distribution

If you’re starting a podcast from scratch that targets an audience never before targeted, building that audience is slow going. We’re not affiliated with a mainstream podcast production house. We couldn’t cross-promote our show on someone else’s. Our first step was announcing in one of T.C. Jacoby & Co.’s regular monthly emails that The Milk Check was on the air.

We knew that alone wouldn’t be enough.

While podcast subscribers who listen on smartphones are always notified when new episodes drop, we assumed not all target listeners would hear the show via directories like iTunes or Stitcher. We assumed some would be active only via desktop, and only if they were practically spoon-fed new episodes. To support that segment of our audience, we placed “subscribe” CTAs on the website inviting them to receive email updates every time an episode was published.

Our email marketing strategy has shifted somewhat since then, but it was a good call at the time: Those emails routinely saw open rates approaching 60% and click rates well over 20%.

On another front, we needed to grow our audience beyond T.C. Jacoby & Co.’s backyard, the St. Louis metro area. To do this, we encouraged company staff to send personalized email or LinkedIn messages to contacts in different regions if they believed a particular episode was relevant to them.

Here’s an example. Today, more listeners to The Milk Check are in California than any other state. It’s the biggest dairy state in the U.S., so that makes sense, but the podcast had to get there first.

 

It got there when someone on the T.C. Jacoby & Co. team sent a quick note and a link of a relevant episode to their contacts out west. It hit a nerve and the California audience grew. In a similar fashion, our audience has expanded in other dairy states like Wisconsin, New York, Minnesota, Michigan and Ohio.

Our audience has grown beyond the U.S., too: Canada, Australia, Mexico, Brazil, the U.K. and Ireland lead foreign nations with The Milk Check listeners. With no concerted international distribution strategy in place, we conclude the podcast is heard around the world due to word of mouth.

 

We love when listeners do some of the distribution for us. It’s free and it’s incredibly effective.

Another metric we watch closely is audience engagement. The podcast is approaching 8,000 lifetime downloads, but so what? That doesn’t tell us much. It’s vital to know how listeners behave after they hit “play.”

We were in the dark for 14 months until two important things happened.

Partial plays metric from Blubrry

When our media host Blubrry unveiled its “partial listens” metric, we got our first glimpse of audience engagement. It’s a breakdown of an episode’s total downloads according to what percentage of the episode the listeners stuck around for.

For the three episodes that partial listen data are available, we earned 1,733 downloads. Of those, 1,016 (58.6%) were complete listens and 717 (41.4%) were partial listens. It may not seem so impressive when over one-third of the listeners over that span didn’t complete episodes. But let’s go deeper: Of those 717 partial listens, 637 of them heard between 75 and 99% of the episodes.

That means that 1,653 listeners (95.4%) heard 75% or more of the episodes; only 80 (4.6%) listened to less than three-quarters of the episodes.

This empirical evidence supported what we’d heard anecdotally from listeners: The Milk Check was good.

Audience engagement from Podcasts Connect

We also integrated Podcasts Connect, Apple’s podcast analytics tool. Its dashboard provides quick-hit information including listening devices, total time listened and average time listened per device. (Note, however, that this tool only collects data from newer-generation Apple devices.)

The tool also shows that information (plus a couple other metrics) broken out by episode.

I especially love episode line graphs. These help us visualize how audiences degrade over time by showing how many devices were listening moment by moment.

A specific example of why we cared about this is because we recently began inserting calls to action within episodes. Notice in the graph below the dip in listeners about eight and a half minutes into the episode.

Indeed, we’d stuck one of these CTAs in at that spot. At the moment the CTA began, 96 Apple devices were listening. At the low point of the dip, 85 were listening. What happened?

Well, the music bed I used under the CTA voiceover was a snippet of the song we also use as the podcast’s theme music. I accidentally led 11 people to believe the episode had ended.

Oops.

I remade the CTAs using a different song, and we’ve observed no similar dips resulting from CTA placement.

That’s a very specific example of how to use the line graph feature. But it can help you make much more general observations, too:

  • If engagement stays very high for the duration of episodes, you might consider lengthening episodes or publishing more frequently. If your audience is going to give you their attention, capitalize on it.
  • If engagement always drops off after a certain amount of time, your episodes might be too long. Consider editing them down to the essentials. Folks folding clothes or doing dishes at home might tolerate extraneous nonsense. But potential customers? No.
  • If engagement is sluggish from the beginning, you might need to adjust the structure of the show. It could also mean episodes don’t sound good. Don’t skimp on audio quality.

What were people saying?

Industry feedback matters to us, too. Of course, opinions are subjective. But it turns out some pretty important people across the industry (not just the dairy farmers whom we primarily targeted) were listening on a regular basis.

Among repeat listeners to The Milk Check are high-level regional USDA officials and professors at the University of Wisconsin, home of arguably the nation’s leading collegiate agricultural curriculum.

Can podcasting work for your business?

We don’t have millions of loyal listeners. No one’s getting rich by extolling comfortable mattresses or credit card debt consolidation.

You could characterize The Milk Check as much by what it is not as by what it is.

Here’s what it is: A way to regularly put our client’s brand and expertise in front of hundreds of stakeholders and potential customers. It fosters dialogue between an established company and its highly engaged but dispersed ideal customers who ordinarily are hard to reach en masse.

Here are the basic requirements if you’re considering launching a podcast of your own:

  • A team of true experts committed to recording episodes with relevant, useful information on a regular basis
  • Decent recording equipment (you don’t need NPR-grade studio equipment to sound really good)
  • The ability (whether in-house or outsourced) to edit and mix high-quality episodes
  • The ability to optimize your website infrastructure to support podcast episodes
  • A sound distribution strategy based on the characteristics of your ideal audience

Consult with us

Nineteen months ago, we didn’t know what to expect when we launched The Milk Check. All we knew was that dairy farmers were doing the best they could. And T.C. Jacoby & Co. had the right people in place to help them navigate a changing industry—and a changing way of life.

Have you considered starting a podcast targeting your ideal industrial buyers? Are you getting hung up on the logistics or having trouble deciding what to discuss?

Let’s talk it through. Podcast consulting from Gorilla 76 can help you:

  • Identify your listeners and the value your podcast can provide them
  • Implement hardware, software and website infrastructure to optimize the show
  • Develop a distribution strategy that grows your audience and keeps it engaged

Contact us now to get started.

Sales-Marketing Alignment for B2B Manufacturers

What an integrated Sales-Marketing unit looks like

sales marketing alignment

See that big, formidable monstrosity of a wall down below?

On the other side are some people I’d like you to meet: The other half of your business development team.

I’ve been consulting B2B manufacturers for long enough now that running into one of these big ugly walls that divide Marketing and Sales teams isn’t so surprising anymore.

wall

Marketing (whether that’s an individual person, a small department or an agency) does their thing. Sales does theirs. Each has their own goals. Each has their own responsibilities. Each executes their own set of activities.

And that’s a damn shame.

Because ultimately, we’re here to accomplish the same end goal – to generate revenue for our organizations. If we pooled our brains, experiences and skills, we’d all be that much more effective.

According to a Marketing-Sales alignment study conducted by Marketo, among companies with well-aligned Sales and Marketing teams:

  • There’s a “67% higher probability that marketing-generated leads will close”
  • There’s a “108% better lead acceptance” rate among leads provided by Marketing to Sales
  • These companies see a “209% stronger contribution to revenue from marketing-generated leads”

So what does a well aligned Sales-Marketing unit look like?

From my observations, something like this:

1. High-level goals are shared

High-margin sales with the right customers will be the ultimate shared success metric for this collaborative business development unit.

That means revenue goals are a joint responsibility. Marketing not only needs to produce qualified opportunities, but they also need to support Sales in bringing them home.

2. The “Ideal customer” is defined, documented and agreed upon

Marketing and Sales need to agree about what an ideal account looks like and whose attention and trust at those organizations must be earned.

If Marketing-generated leads are unqualified, Sales will either:

  • Ignore them
  • Pursue them (but struggle to close them)
  • Or close them, despite the fact they’re not a good fit

Nothing good comes from a lack of communication about what the ideal customer looks like.

3. Messaging is consistent

If you pulled together your best Sales professionals and asked them how they would describe what your company does, for who, the problems you solve for them and what differentiates you, how consistent do you think their answers would be?

And how closely would that messaging resemble your Marketing communications – on your website, in print materials, in your advertising and elsewhere?

Well aligned teams reinforce positioning through a consistently delivered value proposition.

4. Responsibilities are clear

Generally speaking, Marketing creates visibility, captures attention through compelling messaging and generates leads. Then Sales initiates human dialogue, develops leads and closes them.

But these roles have blurred in an increasingly digital business development environment.

Well aligned Sales and Marketing teams will define responsibilities so questions like these don’t remain unanswered:

  • Who will qualify leads, and using what criteria?
  • How will newly generated inbound leads be approached? Via automated emails (or through manual emails or phone calls)? And by who?
  • What messaging will be used?
  • And what will the cadence of outreach look like?
  • Who will own lead development responsibilities for sales-qualified (but not yet sales-ready) leads?
  • What thought leadership content can support the sales process? Who will create it? Where will it live and how will it be distributed to prospects, leads and customers?
  • What KPIs will be used to measure success? And who’s responsible for reporting on each?

5. Two-way dialogue is the norm

Communication will always be key. That means defining processes for sharing insights, feedback and data about open leads and opportunities. It also means establishing a consistent time and place for this dialogue to play out. (More on this one below).

How to start tearing down the wall

So how do we get that bulldozer in motion?

I recommend one simple first step: call your first soon-to-be-monthly Sales-Marketing Alignment Meeting.

Once per month for 60 minutes, your Marketing and Sales teams will meet in the same place at the same time with the same agenda.

Whether that means physically in person or via a web conference using Zoom or GoToMeeting, these recurring meetings will serve as consistent open dialogue sessions between the two parties.

Heres’ the meeting agenda:

  1. Review and discuss open and closed opportunities (10 minutes)
    Which opportunities have closed as customers over the past month? What was the deal value (and/or expected LTV)? Which didn’t didn’t close and why? Wrong fit? Price tag? More compelling competitor offerings? Which Opportunities are still open? And what road blocks stand in the way of moving them forward?
  2. Review and discuss new leads (10 minutes)
    Among Marketing-generated leads over the past month, how closely do they match the ideal customer profile? Sometimes new leads might look fantastic to your Marketing crew, but your Sales folks may tell you otherwise. What’s happening to engage these leads in conversation? What’s hurdles are preventing conversations from happening?
  3. Prioritize and adjust (30 minutes)
    What adjustments to your lead generation and lead development strategies need to be made over the next 30 days? Which opportunities and leads should be given special attention? Which should take a back seat?
  4. Assign responsibilities and go (10 minutes)
    Specifically, what will Marketing do to help Sales over the next month? And vice versa? Who will be responsible for what? What outcomes are we going to achieve together before next month’s meeting? And what activities will have been initiated to support them?

So much good comes from simply communicating. Tear down that wall and everyone wins.

The Perfect B2B Knowledge Center

perfect-b2b-knowledge-center

How to design the front page of your B2B Knowledge Center

Just a few weeks ago, we published an article titled “The Perfect Home Page.” Given the abundance of positive feedback received, I thought I’d keep the momentum going.

In that article, I said your home page is the most important page on your website. So with that one behind us, let’s take a look at your second most important page.

That’s the front page of your Knowledge Center.

It goes by many different names, like Knowledge Center, Resource Center, Learning Center, Content Hub or Blog. Whatever you call it, we’re talking about the same thing: A place where your thought-leadership content lives.

What exactly is “thought-leadership content”?

When I say “thought-leadership content,” I’m talking about genuinely helpful content that creates significant value for your prospects, leads and customers.

That means:

  • Articles that help solve problems and answer common questions
  • White papers and guides that explore those topics at a deeper level
  • Tools, videos, buyer’s guides or anything else you’ve published to objectively help the key buying process influencers from the types of companies you serve

What I’m not talking about are:

  • Company news updates
  • Press releases
  • Information about your products and services
  • Anything that preaches about how great your company is

It drives me nuts when I visit a company’s blog and find nothing but recaps of company picnics, updates on people they’ve hired and announcements of accounts they’ve won.

Visitors come to your Knowledge Center to get questions answered and problems solved. There’s a time and place for talking about yourself. It’s not here.

End rant. Here’s how I recommend structuring your Knowledge Center.

The perfect Knowledge Center wireframe

The wireframe (or page blueprint) below is for the front page of a Knowledge Center.

Think of this page as an index for all the incredible content you’ve published (or will publish into the future).

knowledge center wire frame

Let’s start up at the top.

Headline and mission statement

The first thing you want to do is to reassure your visitors they’re in the right place.

knowledge center mission statement

I personally love the idea of giving your Knowledge Center a branded title or name. It’s a simple way to make your content hub feel more substantial.

At Gorilla, we call ours “The Industrial Marketing Strategy Learning Center.”

Follow that up with a brief, one-sentence clarifying statement. Or better yet, a mission statement for your content. Author and founder of the Content Marketing Institute, Joe Pulizzi, talks about the importance of a content mission statement in this article.

Ours reads like this:

“An ever-expanding collection of articles, videos, guides and tools to help manufacturers identify, attract, engage and drive sales with ideal-fit customers.”

The supply chain optimization experts at Dematic run an exceptional blog that I highly recommend flagging for inspiration. They call theirs “Dematic Connections” and offer a simple but effective descriptor right under the title.

dematic blog

I also recommend placing a simple call to action to subscribe beneath the title and mission statement.

This is a quick and easy way to build your email list. So simply ask, and keep the barrier low. Request only the most essential information here. Anything beyond a name and email address is probably too much.

Notice how Dematic handles their “Subscribe” call to action in the side bar above.

The machinery manufacturer Okuma also manages a great content hub. In particular, I love how they introduce their Knowledge Center and follow the summary by prompting visitors to ask a question:

Okuma Knowledge Center

Featured Content

The next section of your Learning Center should highlight your absolute BEST content.

knowledge center featured content

This is a great place to feature some of your most popular articles, videos, tools or guides.

Whether you draw from your website analytics to decide what’s “most popular” or make a gut decision, the idea is to show your visitors content that’s most likely to capture their attention and keep them engaged.

One of our clients, Arnold Machine, Inc., features some of their best guides near the top of their Learning Center:

arnold machine learning center

Swap out these highlighted content items periodically as you see fit. As long as you’re using a flexible content management system like WordPress, this should be simple enough to do.

Offer

If you read our article about The Perfect Home Page, this next section should look familiar.

Use this area to call attention to your absolute best content offer or something of value you can trade your visitor in exchange for contact information.

content offer

You can see how the thermal processing experts at our client Paulo handle calls to action in their Learning Center. They pull in various calls to action throughout the page, starting with one at the very top:

paulo learning center

Most Recent Content feed

Next up is a significant chunk of real estate for brief intros to every piece of thought-leadership content you publish, displayed in reverse-chronological order.

knowledge center content feed

I recommend prominently displaying the title of each piece and following with a brief description of what it’s about.

Often by default, your content management system will show the first few lines of copy from the piece here, with a “keep reading” call to action. This works fine, but I also think it’s a wasted opportunity to sell your visitor on why he or she should click through.

With a simple development hack, you could set up a custom field to write whatever you wish in this space. Customize it with a one-line teaser advertising the article, video, tool or guide.

Or, as we do on the Gorilla site, you can code the page to pull in your meta descriptions (short overviews that help your audience and the search engines understand what your content is about).

Regardless, keep the teasers short and sweet. It makes it easier for visitors to scan the Knowledge Center front page and quickly find what’s most relevant to them.

Here’s an example from the manufacturing automation company Nitco’s blog:

nitco blog

Adding filters that let visitors easily sort through content to locate what most interests them can make a Knowledge Center even more useful.

Until you have at least 10-20 content items in your Knowledge Center, I don’t recommend filters. But once you’ve committed to publishing a variety of exceptional thought leadership content, you want to make it as simple as possible for your visitors to find what they’re looking for.

You can see below how our client CK Power’s Resource Center content can be filtered both by media type (White papers and guides, Product catalogs and brochures, Case studies and Articles) and topic (Custom power solutions, Engines, Maintenance and efficiency, etc).

ck power learning center filters

One more subscribe call-to-action

Finally, if your visitors have taken the time to scroll all the way through this page (and now have a sense for what this content is all about), let’s ask them once more to subscribe.

subscribe call to action

Another way to do it is with a pop-up prompt to subscribe like the printing equipment manufacturer Mark Andy does here:

pop up subscribe prompt

Wrapping up

Without question, your Knowledge Center’s success depends on the quality of your content above all else.

Without truly exceptional, problem-solving, question-answering content for the right people from the right companies, a conversation about its layout is moot.

But once you’ve committed to consistently publishing thought-leadership content, this wireframe should serve as your guide.

Industrial Marketing All Stars #1: CADENAS PARTsolutions

How CADENAS PARTsolutions grew inbound leads by 700-900% by publishing helpful content

As a consultant for B2B manufacturers, I see my share of cringeworthy websites and self-serving content on a regular basis. But every so often, I cross paths with a manufacturing organization that just gets it.

Recently, I had the pleasure of connecting with Adam Beck of CADENAS PARTsolutions – a sharp and forward-thinking manufacturing guy who made me say, “Heck yeah. This is what I’m talking about”.

In my discussion with Adam (Director of Marketing) and Jay Hopper, we dove into their content and lead nurturing strategies — and how each are driving quantifiable success.

Now, to clarify what I mean by “quantifiable success”, I’m talking about 700% to 900% growth in inbound leads. That’s no joke!

Above, you’ll find the full 27-minute video interview. And below is a written summary of my three biggest takeaways.

Before you jump in, I want to call attention to what should be an incredible event the CADENAS crew is planning this September (2019) at Content Marketing World in Cleveland:

Industrial Marketing Summit

Taking place on Friday, September 6, 2019, the Industrial Marketing Summit is the event for sales and marketers to connect, inspire and grow their business.

Click here to learn more about the Summit.

If the event has already passed by the time you’re reading this, visit the CADENAS site and subscribe to their newsletter to be sure it’s on your radar come next summer.

Now on to my key takeaways…

Takeaway #1: Let your customer — their success stories, their FAQs — do the talking

Talking about yourself and how great your products and services are doesn’t attract or engage anyone.

The CADENAS crew understands this, and instead, they’ve committed to consistently publishing content that speaks to their customers’ problems and common questions.

“People are engaged with people who are asking questions about them, providing something of value or telling an interesting story,” Jay Hopper said.

And that’s how we want to approach our marketing. We don’t want to talk about ourselves. We want to talk about our customers.”

To help them identify and produce exceptional customer-centric content, CADENAS keeps a running list of customer questions, objections they hear from manufacturers, stumbling points, project roadblocks — anything relevant to a buying and usage experience.

From there, creating the content has been simple for them:

“We take each of those [questions and objections] as an opportunity to tell a story, understand why this manufacturer is having a problem, or why their website launch is holding up projects.”

The result? A learning center filled with helpful content about the topics they know matter to their customers and leads. Here are a few examples:

cadenas learning center example

Takeaway #2: Offer premium resources to generate tangible leads

Not only has the CADENAS team committed to the consistent production of helpful content, but they’re using it to generate leads.

And really good ones too.

The articles in their learning center drive traffic to their site via search engines and social media channels. And because the content is genuinely helpful, visitors happily exchange contact information for premium content like CADENAS’s B2B Guide to the Digital Customer Experience.

“We’re just trying to help them as thought leaders and say, ‘Hey, here are some ways that you can go about your job to make your job better, easier and get better results,’” Jay Hopper said.

The potential customer gets a resource to address his or her pain points. CADENAS gets a lead.

In the example below, CADENAS published a 64-page guide with chapters on the elements of the digital customer experience, 12 customer case studies and a glossary of terms.

cadenas ebook

They put the guide behind a gated form and use eye-catching calls-to-action to encourage downloads.

Takeaway #3: Nurture leads immediately — and for the long-term

Long, complex buying processes and consultative sales involving buying committees is the norm for a lot of manufacturers.

Sometimes weeks or months of research, analysis, comparison and evaluation can pass before a future customer is ready for a sales conversation.

After CADENAS’s website visitors fills out forms to grab their resources, they’ll get an email and a phone call from Adam simply starting a dialogue and showcasing CADENAS’s value as a resource during the buying process.

This approach creates trust and positions CADENAS as an expert advisor in the minds of prospects so when they’re ready to talk, CADENAS will likely get the first call.

Adam referenced a firsthand example of a lead they nurtured not just over the course of weeks or months, but years:

“[The visitor] would come to our website and download an eBook. They kept getting our emails. They would visit our social sites and watch our videos.

And then lo and behold, something changed and they were ready to become a customer. We love just keeping them in our community, keeping them in the loop.”

Drum roll, please: The results

A robust marketing strategy doesn’t mean much if it’s not driving verifiable results.

But with CADENAS’s content marketing and lead nurturing strategies, they saw a 5x increase in monthly website visits over the course of two years, which has translated into significant lead generation growth.

“We’re talking numbers like 700% to 900% increases in inbound leads” Jay Hopper said.

“We don’t have a floodgate of leads coming in, but the ones that we do are qualified. And we know we’ve reached the right person.”

What we can learn from CADENAS PARTsolutions

It was genuinely exciting to speak with Jay and Adam at CADENAS. This organization has fully embraced a changing industrial buying process – rather than ignoring the shift that’s clearly underway.

Keep up with they’re doing here – CADENAS PARTsolutions. And consider joining them at the Industrial Marketing Summit on September 6, 2019 in Cleveland.

The Perfect Home Page

perfect home page spotlight

How to design the perfect B2B website home page

Chances are more than half of your website visitors will enter through your home page. And within 15 seconds, they’ll decide whether to stay or go.

So if you’re a believer in making a good first impression, it’s fair to say that your home page is pretty darn important.

But how do you design the perfect home page?

If this is the first look a future customer will get at your business, what bits of information do they need in those critical opening seconds?

How do you capture their attention fast? And retain it long enough so they stay and explore for another 15 seconds?

How will you help them uncover not only what they want to find, but also what you want them to see?

Here’s your blueprint

What you’re looking at here is a sample home page wire frame.

perfect home page wire frame

If you’re not familiar with the term, a wire frame is essentially a blueprint.

It’s a simple, graphic representation of the information hierarchy for a specific page on your website – in this case, your home page.

The idea is to plan what information needs to be present, where every element will sit on that page and how much real estate to give each, relative to everything else.

Take a quick look through the layout and when you’re ready, let’s start our tour. Below I’ll take you through each section one by one and explain their roles.

Throughout the article, I’ll also reference a real-life manufacturer home page for context (and inspiration for how to do it right). So open up the Midwest Industrial Rubber website in a new tab.

We’ll bounce back and forth between here and there as we go to give you some context for what we’re looking at.

OK, ready? Let’s start at the top.

1. Positioning statement

When the right people from the right companies land on your site, you want them to say immediately, “Yep, I’m in the right place”.

home page wireframe positioning

So give them a big, bold five-to-eight word headline that identifies your company. Then follow with a super concise, one-sentence positioning statement that looks something like this:

We help [TYPES OF COMPANIES] achieve [DESIRED OUTCOME] with/by [YOUR SOLUTIONS].

If you only have 15 seconds to capture their attention, let’s use the first five to state simply who you help and how.

Here’s how Midwest Industrial Rubber (let’s call them MIR) does it:

MIR home page positioning

The topic of Positioning is one for another article (or white paper (or 300-page book)), but here’s my simplest bit of advice on the subject:

When you try to be everything to everyone, you’ll only spread yourself thin, posing as a jack-of-all trades who’s really a master of nothing at all.

So who are you trying to speak to on this website? Who are those ideal customers? And what is your value proposition for them?

State it simply and find an image thats complements your positioning statement without overpowering it.

Finish strong with a call to action.

‘Whether you send them to a Who We Help and How page, a products or services overview page or a lead-capture landing page, provide some guidance on where they should go next.

2. Audience Identifiers

Next up are what we call “Audience Identifiers”.

home page wire frame audience identifiers

The idea – now that you’ve succeeded in keeping your visitors past the five or ten-second mark – is to help them quickly identify with key issues they’re experiencing or goals they’re trying to achieve.

We need to make them say, “these guys understand companies like ours”.

You could use these icons and snippets to say:

“We solve problems like… [BULLET, BULLET, BULLET]” 

OR…

“[TYPES OF COMPANIES] come to us when… [BULLET, BULLET, BULLET]”

Here’s how MIR handles their audience identifiers:

MIR home page audience identifiers

At the end of the section, you once again want to give your visitors a next step. So point them in the right direction with another call to action.

3. Proof

News flash: Your audience does not care who you are or what you do until they believe:

  1. You’ve seen their issues before
  2. You understand those issues
  3. You’ve tackled them for other companies like theirs

This is your place to demonstrate you’ve walked the walk.

home page wire frames proof case studies

If you already have some documented cases studies in hand, great. Use this section to highlight your best one (or two or three). And drive your visitors there.

If you don’t, now’s as good a time as any to get a few success stories in the works.

Here’s my recommended format for how to tease them on your home page:

  • Head shot of a REAL happy customer
  • One-sentence testimonial quote
  • One sentence summarizing the problem solved or outcome achieved
  • Call-to-action linking to the full case study

MIR keeps theirs simple:

MIR home page proof case studies

4. Offer

An offer is something of value you can trade your visitor in exchange for contact information. This is your chance to generate a lead, right there on your home page.

home page wire frame offer

There are a few directions you could go with your offer.

You could promote a downloadable asset like a free white paper, buyer’s guide or tool.

For all the anonymous visitors on your site that may be sales-qualified but aren’t yet ready for a conversation, we need to give them a reason to convert into a tangible lead.

If your resource is well-positioned to your audience and appears valuable, it could become a lead-generation machine for you.

Alternatively, you could deploy a more sales-focused offer like suggesting a free consultation or promoting a site audit service like MIR does:

MIR home page offer

When you go this route (bottom-of-funnel offer), you’ll get less bites, but your leads will also be more sales-ready.

5. Thought-leadership content

The last key section of this home page wire frame is an area to highlight some thought-leadership content.

And by that I’m referring to the problem-solving, question-answering resourceful content you publish for your ideal customers.

home page wire frame thought leadership content

There are a few ways to do this.

You could feature one blog post or article, one video and one white paper or tool that you’ll manually select and update from time to time.

A simpler option is to let your website auto-populate this area with your three or four most recent pieces of content, as MIR does in the left and middle columns below.

MIR home page thought leadership content

Regardless, this is your place to feed fresh, helpful insights for your visitors into your home page.

Grab a hammer

Time to start building.

This wire frame may not be 100% right for you. But if you’re a B2B company in the industrial sector, I’m willing to bet it’ll get you 90% of the way there.

So use this wire frame as your guide and alter as you see fit.

Robotic Arms (for your Sales and Marketing Operations)

industrial marketing and sales automation

Robotic Arms (for your Sales and Marketing Operations)

Go ahead and do a Google image search for the word “automation.”

95% of the images you’ll find are from the manufacturing world:

Complex, computer-run facilities with robotic arms moving boxes onto conveyor belts and IOT-enabled machinery assembling equipment.

Google image search for automation

So you’d think if anyone understood how to apply automation to sales and marketing, it would be the industrial sector, right?

Well, not so much.

Instead, the same manufacturing experts who have mastered the complex practices of automating assembly lines with robots, designing smart factories and 3D printing components from digital files are the same people spending $5K/month on print ads to drum up awareness and manually tracking leads in spreadsheets.

I can’t be the only one thinking that something doesn’t feel right about this picture!

But here’s the good news:

When compared to the complexities of manufacturing automation, sales and marketing automation look like child’s play.

In this article, we’ll take a peek at seven ways manufacturers can apply the very familiar concept of automation to their methodologies for filling the sales pipeline and closing new customers.

Automation in Prospecting: Outreach Email Sequences

A simple Google search for “email outreach software” will turn up an abundance of tools for email prospecting. Some our favorites, to name a few, include Woodpecker, Prospect.io and LeadFuze. And typically, a core feature you’ll find in these tools is the automated email sequence.

Automated sequences are essentially series of prewritten prospecting emails you’ll draft and then deploy with a predetermined cadence to initiate contact with an entire list of individuals at once. If your first email doesn’t generate a reply, the second will automatically send after three or five days, and so on.

The downsides to automated email sequences are their limitations in regard to personalization, and of course the risk of being perceived as a spammer. That said, both of these negatives can be minimized with a smart segmentation strategy and on-point messaging. The upside is the efficiency of one-to-many communication.

Automation in Advertising: B2B Facebook Campaigns

I know. You might see Facebook here and think, “this is B2B marketing, not consumer advertising”. But given Facebook’s wealth of data and massive user base, it absolutely warrants a look in your B2B marketing mix.

The intriguing application of automation within Facebook’s advertising platform is the ability to sync with a list in your CRM or marketing automation software and serve up ads to those exact individuals.

For example, if you use Hubspot or Salesforce to manage leads, you can tell Facebook to show ads to your “SQLs” or “Active Opportunities” lists in those databases. And as your lists grow and evolve, your Facebook ads will keep pace.

Automation in Website Lead Generation: Chat Bots

We’ve all seen and used live chat software. But live chats are quickly evolving and in many instances, being replaced by chat bots. A leading software company in this space, Drift, recently coined the term “conversational marketing”.

Here’s how they describe it:

“Unlike traditional marketing, conversational marketing uses targeted, real-time messaging and intelligent chatbots instead of lead capture forms — that way leads never have to wait for follow-ups, and can engage with your business when it’s convenient for them (like when they’re live on your website).”

A well-programmed chat bot can guide visitors through your website by helping answer simple questions and direct them toward the most relevant information.

When effectively implemented, not only will a chat bot create a more seamless user experience, but it will help you generate more sales conversations with leads that have prequalified themselves.

Automation in Lead Qualification: Behavioral Lead Scoring

Speaking of lead qualification, one of the most common complaints I hear from B2B Sales professionals is that it’s too hard to sift through the unqualified inbound leads to uncover the good ones.

Behavioral lead scoring lets you score leads not only based on the information they provide through form submissions (like job title, geography, company size, etc), but also but also based on whether their actions on your website indicate buying intent.

Isn’t it fair to say that a website visitor who spends ten minutes looking through a handful of your product pages, reads three case studies and examines your Leadership Team page warrants more attention that a visitor who landed on your home page and left ten seconds later?

Automation in Lead Intelligence: Real-Time Notifications

You can configure marketing automation software like Hubspot to alert you in real time (by email or pop-up banners on your phone) when leads take specific actions on your website like:

  • Opening one of your emails
  • Clicking a link in those emails
  • Revisiting your website
  • Viewing a specific page (or set of pages) on your site
  • Crossing a predetermined lead score threshold that indicates strong buying intent

Timing can be everything, and this kind of real-time intelligence helps you understand when specific leads are most engaged.

Automation in Lead Development: Triggered Email Workflows

When a lead is both sales-qualified and sales-ready, it’s time to be on the phone with them.

But if you have any experience with inbound lead generation, you already know that many of your leads might be qualified (just not yet ready for a sales conversation).

Email workflows are prewritten, automated series of emails triggered by specific actions taken by your leads.

Note that what I’m referring to here is different than the outreach sequences covered earlier in this article. While those focus on prospecting among large groups (and generating immediate sales calls), the email workflows I’m talking about are here are designed to gently nurture and develop earlier-stage leads in the background.

Here are a few applications for triggered email workflows:

  • When a visitor subscribes to your newsletter, a prewritten “welcome” email hits their inbox the next day. Then two more automated follow ups in the coming days deliver your best, most-helpful content in a non-salesy manner.
  • When a visitor downloads your Product Catalog, a series of three automated emails (one per week) deliver a related a Buyer’s Guide, a case study and a white paper. Then a fourth email suggests a phone consultation.
  • When a previously active lead hasn’t returned to your site in a month, a reengagement campaign is triggered, delivering four helpful pieces of content over the next four weeks.

The possibilities with email automation are endless, with plenty of room for creativity.

Automation in Sales Communications: Starter Templates

How often do you find yourself composing a follow-up email or responding to a prospect’s question, while thinking to yourself, “I just answered that same question for someone else last week”.

These scenarios scream automation (or at the very least, partial automation).

Tools like Hubspot let you compose and store not only full email starter templates, but also predrafted “Snippets” that you can drop into an original email.

A few examples of helpful Templates and Snippets you might prewrite include:

  • Answers to your most commonly asked questions
  • Follow ups to preliminary conversations that link to helpful articles, pages or case studies
  • “Yes” replies to consultation requests
  • “No” replies to consultation requests
  • Language to further qualify a lead before committing to a conversation
  • An overview of your company’s experience and credentials

Every time you write an email to a prospect or lead, ask yourself, “Will I likely write this same thing again for someone else?”. If the answer is yes, then save the content as a template.

There’s no replacement for personal interactions

Before wrapping up, I’d like to be clear that I’m not suggesting automation as a replacement for real, face-to-face communication. Not at all.

Instead, I’m recommending automation as a means to optimize the time of your human talent.

Automation exists to arm sales and marketing professionals with intelligence and tools that increases their efficiency and effectiveness, while minimizing the grunt work.

When your time is better spent, your customer acquisition ROI grows. And no one’s gonna argue with that.

7 ways to generate revenue on the path to the big sale

mountain

One of the defining characteristics of an ideal customer is that they buy your high-margin, flagship solutions.

But ideal customers are tough to come by.

And when we’re fortunate enough to earn the attention of one that fits the bill, selling those flagship solutions is usually no easy task either. From the customer’s point of view, these solutions:

  • Are often complex
  • Command a significant financial investment
  • Require involvement from a committee of decision makers
  • Come with consequences (if they fail)

When our prospects hesitate from all the perceived risk of buying what we’re selling, we tend to make concessions. Often, we’ll force ourselves down one of two less-than-desirable paths to win their business:

Path #1:

We chase the prospect on a long, consultative, time-sucking journey to prove our worth, spoon feeding expert advice along the way with no guarantee of a dime in return.

Or…

Path #2:

We settle for selling a “foot-in-the-door” solution. You know what I’m talking about – those low-margin, undifferentiated products or services we push in hope of establishing rapport.

But despite our intentions, these somewhat insignificant transactions typically just cement our role as vendors of, well… low-margin, undifferentiated products or services.

So how do we steer clear of these two paths?

No matter how perfect your solution feels, how many bells and whistles you attach to it or how many credible sources vouch for you, your sales pitch to a new customer will almost certainly be light on one key feature:

Trust.

Until your future customer has experienced working with you or physically put your solution to use, the perceived level of risk will be high.

But what if we could physically sell trust?

What if we could package up a little bit of trust and trade it for actual dollars before we climb the uphill battle to selling our big, perfect solution to that big, perfect customer?

Seven ideas for selling trust

What follows are seven ideas for earning the trust you’ll need to close the bigger sale, while getting paid for your expert advice along the way.

1. Site audit

If, for example, you’re in the business of factory automation services or you sell complex, custom machinery that’s used inside of manufacturing facilities, you’re probably no stranger to site audits.

But how do you position this service to a prospective customer?

If the opportunity looks right, would you willingly hop on a plane across the country, burning cash and worse yet, a day or two of your time to give away your expertise for free?

What if instead, you packaged up that site audit along with defined, proprietary process and promised a buttoned-up set of written recommendations following the visit?

What price tag might that deliverable command?

And because it’s not a free giveaway, might the service feel more substantial to the customer?

2. Second opinion service

The cost of switching service providers is often significant enough to delay change.

So rather than asking a future customer to dive in head first and put all their eggs in your basket, could you first offer a paid second opinion service?

If you were considering switching doctors, the price of a second opinion would warrant a $40 or $50 copay and a few hours of your time. If it didn’t work out, you’d stick with your current doctor or keep looking.

What low-risk equivalent could you as a B2B manufacturing organization offer your prospective customers?

3. Paid consultation

In my line of business (Marketing), “Free Consultation” buttons are as common as company logos when you visit agency websites. But the savvier firms also understand that a paid consultation can generate significant demand (while also attracting better customers).

Our Industrial Marketing Road Map is an example of a paid, in-depth consulting service that helps our prospective customers figure out the right path to their desired business outcomes.

Sure, we’ll start with a “free” conversation to establish whether we could be a good fit for each other. But beyond that, we’ll reserve our advice for a paid engagement.

By spending the first chunk of their budgets to identify the most viable opportunities and avoid wasting their time and money throwing darts, we set them on the path to success.

After that, we’re often hired to implement the solutions we’ve recommended. But even if we don’t handle their implementation, the customer walks away with a sound action plan, backed by research. And we’ve been compensated for the value we created.

As a manufacturing organization, couldn’t you do the same in some capacity?

4. Research report

How about conducting some investigative work to explore a variety of solutions for your customer? How could you package up the insights you uncover and turn it into an actionable report in exchange for a fixed fee?

5. Knowledge transfer

This one applies more to service providers than manufacturers of physical products. But depending on your line of business and the type of customer you serve, is it possible that you could train your customer to effectively do some of what you currently do for them?

By helping the customer save money in simpler areas of their business, the trust you establish will likely open the door to helping them with bigger, more complex issues they need to address.

At Gorilla, we’re in the process of developing an online training course for Marketing Directors at manufacturing organizations. We can work intensively with about 15-20 companies at a time. But we can reach a whole lot more by providing our expertise at scale.

Whether through one-to-one on-site training or the delivery of on-demand content that packages up your knowledge as scalable intellectual property, how could you be compensated for transferring knowledge to your customers?

6. Product sample

The last two on this list of seven apply more to physical products. If you’re a manufacturer of plastic (or other materials), packaging solutions or something that could be physically placed in a small box and mailed as a sample, could you put a price tag on it?

You might be shaking your head and saying, “We do that already, but we can’t charge for it.”

But are you sure?

Home Depot charges $3.27 for you to experience a paint sample on your wall before you spend $30-50 on the full gallon.

Software companies put small price tags on “light” versions of their products before requiring you to commit to the full package.

What’s stopping you from doing the same?

7. Rental or lease

I recently consulted a manufacturing organization that sells large-scale filtration products. But closing the sale requires a big financial commitment from the buyer, operational down time and frankly, a leap of faith.

Our client has answered the hesitations of their future customers with an option to lease their equipment for a short period of time. The customer gets a firsthand trial without the big commitment. And our client gets paid in the meantime.

Lowering the barrier to entry

All seven of the services I just covered can be used to lower the barrier to entry for an ideal customer. When you can mitigate their perceived risk of moving forward with your solution, you:

  • Create the opportunity to build trust
  • Build that trust without sacrificing your time (or your positioning in the marketplace)
  • Get paid to take a critical step forward with an ideal future customer

One final note

What we sometimes forget as expert practitioners in our respective fields is that the value of our high-margin, flagship solutions isn’t exclusively limited to our physical product or service in and of itself.

Our products and services are the implementation of problems we’re helping our customers identify and solve. But implementation has little value without the expert advice we provide to identify that solution.

So let’s get smarter about how we position the value of our advice, and begin using it to our advantage.

Why having a “Website Guy” ain’t gonna cut it

website guy

Not too long ago, a client of mine introduced me to a business associate and said “This is Joe from Gorilla. They’re our Website Guys.”

I was immediately caught off guard.

Website Guys. Ugh.

In my mind, we were their marketing consultancy. Their digital marketing advisors. The marketing experts they commissioned to get their company from point A to point B.

Yes, their website was a piece of all that.

But I never would have defined our role as their “Website Guys.”

And that’s when I had the revelation that prompted this article:

To leadership at many B2B companies, there is no discernible difference between website management and digital marketing.

Both of these things happen in an online universe that many business leaders only somewhat understand (or care to understand). So naturally, they lump it all together and hand it to their “Website Guys.”

But these two functions – website management and digital marketing – serve very different purposes, and I’m here to make that distinction.

Let’s kick it off with a few quick analogies:

  • Your health. Your vision is immensely important to your overall health. But your Ophthalmologist doesn’t perform your annual checkup or diagnose you with hypertension when your blood pressure reads 150 over 90.
  • Your house. A flooring contractor will help you decide what you’ll be walking on. But he certainly isn’t drawing up the blueprints for your new home.
  • Your money. Your tax accountant will do her part to assure Uncle Sam doesn’t steal your whole nest egg in April. But she isn’t managing your investment portfolio.

So why then do we take all of our “online stuff,” mush it up into a ball and toss it to some people we call The Website Guys?

I’d like to step back and apologize to any readers of this article who are web designers, owners/staffers at web design agencies or IT folks who someone forced to manage their company’s website. I realize the title of this article may have forced your eyebrows into a downward-facing V shape and caused your abs to tighten up a bit.

But despite what the title might imply, believe me when I say I have loads of respect for the many things you do that I certainly can’t. Your role is unquestionably critical. And I’m not here to bash it.

Instead, I’m here to clarify what responsibilities (from my point of view) shouldn’t be lumped into yours.

So on that note (and with my rant behind me), I bring you….

The roles of your Digital Marketing Team

This person (or agency) is first and foremost an advisor to your business development strategy. I believe they have four specific roles.

Your Digital Marketing Team is hired to help you:

  1. Create focus
. Guide you in creating marketing focus around the best opportunities and your desired outcomes
  2. Develop strategy. 
Research and design objective plans that they (and you) are confident 
will get you to those outcomes
  3. Implement or guide implementation
. Assure those plans are executed on strategy and as cost-effectively as possible (whether by their team, your team, other expert practitioners or a combination of these)
  4. Drive the continuous improvement process
. Measure and interpret results, make changes to the plan, repeat

That Digital Marketing Team will fulfill these four roles by helping you:

  • Define and document what your ideal customer looks like at both a company and human level and craft positioning language that will resonate with them
  • Identify how and where those individuals go to seek information online, as well as what type of information they’re seeking
  • Plan and implement a digital content strategy that addresses their buying triggers, problems, goals and common questions
  • Design and deploy a lead generation strategy for your website that will attract those ideal future customers, engage them and pull them into your Sales funnel
  • Lay the foundational elements of your website to facilitate this lead-generation process
  • Co-manage your inbound pipeline by enabling your Sales team with data, processes and content to optimize their time
  • Select and implement the essential Marketing and Sales technologies (CRM, Marketing Automation and Analytics tools)
  • Deploy systems to tangibly measure results of all these initiatives and drive a continuous improvement process from your learnings

Don’t get me wrong.

I’ve encountered my share of web design agencies that do all this stuff and do it really well too. But I’ve seen far more whose specialties are confined to the website’s aesthetics and keeping its information up to date.

And those functions are very different from the bullet points I’ve just laid out.

If your Website Guys are doing all of these things effectively, then let’s call them what they are:

Your Digital Marketing Team.

If not, it’s time to think about how to separate those two roles.

How to extract expert knowledge from your team and turn it into incredible content

You know bad content when you see it. It reads like it was barfed up and posted online inside of half an hour.

It doesn’t work.

The foundation of effective inbound marketing for industrial B2B companies is relevant content that addresses an audience’s specific challenges and presents them with clear and compelling pathways to take action.

To achieve those goals, content must be informed by the technical experts within those organizations.

It’s straightforward, but it’s also easier said than done. Marketers often stumble before they even start because:

  • They’re unsure how to convince subject matter experts to take time to share what they know.
  • They’re ill-equipped to discuss and then translate highly technical subjects into clear, logical content.
  • They’re unfamiliar with tactics they can use to guarantee they get the full story—or at least as much of it as possible.

There’s no one way to overcome these challenges, and nobody’s way is perfect. But I’ll walk you through what works for us and the industrial B2B clients we serve.

Before you do anything else, get your team’s buy-in

It’s hard booking a conversation with a technical expert out of nowhere. They’re busy. And if you’re trying to optimize your company’s website from square one, they may not have helped marketers develop digital content before.

You need team-wide buy-in, and you get it by first developing an internal content strategy and clearly stating what success looks like. Then, determine whose help you’ll need to get there. It’ll most likely be a combination of engineers, operations managers, C-level decision makers and sales reps. Finally, let these people know what you’re doing and why.

If you hit resistance, here’s a tip: Identify those you think will be most helpful and work outward from there. If your content is good, data will start showing increased web traffic and leads. It’ll put you in better position to convince the stubborn ones that talking to you will be worthwhile.

When subject matter experts understand what you’re trying to achieve and why, they’ll be more inclined to help you.

Don’t be bashful. Make an informed case for creating valuable content. When you demonstrate that it’s tailored to your buyers’ stages in the sales cycle, it’ll be hard for your team’s experts and higher-ups to argue against it.

Interview prep: Go down the research rabbit hole

It’ll go largely unnoticed, but pre-interview research is a crucial step toward developing content that hauls in traffic and generates leads.

I start by crafting a tentative list of questions based on notes from our strategy team. I add, remove and edit questions on the list as my research progresses.

Channel your inner nerd. Turn off notifications, lock away your phone and open lots of tabs. Your interview subject will thank you for being prepared for a conversation that hits the ground running.

As you progress, you may start answering your own questions. This is NOT a stopping point. Instead, level-up by turning basic questions into meaty ones. Rather than asking what something is or how it works, ask how it applies it to your customers’ challenges.

The result will be relevant, useful content standing head and shoulders above an internet clogged with clickbaity listicles and dime-a-dozen summaries of rudimentary terms and concepts.

A note about conflicting information

It might shock you to learn that some topics online are misunderstood. It’s especially true for technically complex subjects.

What do you do if you see competing claims online? Two things.

First, keep researching. The answer might be out there—just look harder. For complex topics, I don’t accept a claim as true until I see two or three trustworthy sources repeat it.

If that fails, note the discrepancy and ask your expert to explain. This is your chance to correct the record and make the internet a better place.

Draw conclusions and test assumptions

This is the most direct way I know to get experts to connect topics or theories to actual challenges their customers encounter.

Lots of your assumptions will be wrong. Most of mine are.

Embrace your ignorance. Put yourself in your ideal buyer’s position and try to simulate their journey. It’s basically role-playing, and it’s been an effective strategy our teams use to build deeper understandings of our clients’ businesses and their customers’ challenges.

Great marketing content doesn’t trot out your company’s capabilities. Instead, it shows how those capabilities directly address your ideal buyers’ unique challenges.

Watch this video if you want some guidance on identifying your ideal buyers. It’s vital groundwork everyone should pitch in on so that marketing, sales and other teams are unified in their pursuit of new business.

Ask for more

Just because an interview subject provides an answer to every question on your list doesn’t mean you have the whole story.

You don’t.

It’s important to follow up if you think you need more. Your subject may initially self-censor, something we’ve seen a lot with engineers. They’re (usually) as considerate as they are smart. If you suspect they’re watering down their answers because they’re afraid you won’t understand, try these cues to get them to say more:

  • “You mentioned _________ a bit earlier. Can you tell me more about how it works?”
  • “Can you clarify what you meant by _________?”
  • “Does ___________ work that way every time, or are there exceptions?”
  • “Tell me how __________ would affect a customer in the real world.”

Digging deeper helps build rapport. I’ve found that experts get more talkative as they get comfortable. Like anyone else, they enjoy talking about what they do after they overcome the initial barrier.

Listen to actual interviews with real experts

If you’re curious how some of these tactics described have played out in real life, you’re in luck.

On our bonus page for this article, you’ll find:

  • Three actual audio clips from interviews I conducted with experts on some technically demanding topics
  • Links to the content pieces that resulted from those interviews
  • A quick-fire PDF playbook summarizing the research and interview methods I discussed at length above

Check it out and share it with your colleagues. Hopefully it empowers you to make the transition from content planning to actual development of resources your buyers crave.

Need more guidance? Let us help.

How to measure marketing success

How to measure marketing success

This previously published article was updated on May 1, 2019.

How do you define marketing success?

A stronger brand image? Improved visibility or awareness in your marketplace?

Higher rankings in Google searches, paired with growing website traffic?

Maybe more visitors turning into tangible leads by filling out forms on your site?

When we see an uptick in any of these numbers, it’s easy to get excited. And rightfully so. Especially when we’re reinvesting hard-earned dollars into our websites and marketing initiatives, and when our teams are busting their tails to generate impact.

But before we throw a celebration for elevating website traffic from 1200 to 1400 visits/month, I’d like to emphasize one very important point:

These numbers are Marketing KPIs – not business outcomes.

The difference between Marketing KPIs and business outcomes

Marketing KPIs are exactly what they sound like – key performance indicators.

They’re barometers – signals that tell us whether we’re on the right path to something bigger.

Business outcomes, on the other hand look something like these:

  • $10M growth in sales
  • 20% growth in year-over-year revenue
  • 5% increase in gross margin
  • 25% increase in customer retention
  • 50% increase in customer lifetime value

I’ve yet to speak with a CEO, President or VP of Sales that took more interest in growing traffic than growing revenue. Or a higher website form submission rate than higher profit margins.

Now don’t get me wrong.

The basis of my argument is not that metrics like campaign reach, cost per click, website traffic or leads generated are unimportant or irrelevant.

My point is that when they’re evaluated as standalone indicators of success or failure, these Marketing KPIs are no more than vanity metrics.

They’re important predictors of whether we are (or aren’t) moving in the right direction toward a more substantial business outcome. On their own, however, these KPIs are not business outcomes.

How to design a meaningful system for measuring marketing success

So how do we go about connecting the dots between the physical activities we’re implementing on the Marketing front and those big-picture outcomes we’re trying to achieve at a company level?

We believe the following seven metrics serve as your best indicators of marketing success:

  1. Website traffic growth (KPI)
  2. Visitor-to-lead conversion rate (KPI)
  3. Sales-qualified leads generated (KPI)
  4. Opportunities (or pipeline revenue) generated (KPI)
  5. New customers generated (business outcome)
  6. Revenue generated (business outcome)
  7. Resulting profit (business outcome)

You can make an argument for a number of other metrics to sit on this list (for example, pipeline velocity, close rate, cost of customer acquisition, etc). But keep in mind that this article is about how to gauge the success of your marketing investment. So we’ll exclude some of the more sales-centric benchmarks here.

If you can successfully build a system for tracking each of these seven steps – from one right into the next – you’ll understand whether your marketing infrastructure is positively impacting the advancement of your business.

And if it’s not, you’ll also learn where it’s breaking down, so you can initiate change.

Let’s briefly touch on each of these seven key figures.

1. Website traffic growth (KPI)

Website traffic is a top-of-funnel signal of awareness. As you open your Marketing and Sales funnel at the top, and more of the right individuals flow into it, a waterfall effect should occur down the line. Related KPIs include organic search engine rankings, as well as impressions and click-through rates on your paid media investments. As these numbers grow, so grows your traffic.

2. Visitor-to-lead conversion rate (KPI)

As you fill up that funnel and get more of the right eyeballs on your website and its content, are you effectively driving up the rate at which a visitor turns into a physical lead? Anonymous website visitors are of little value to your Sales professionals if they don’t come with names, email addresses and phone numbers. Without the ability to proactively step into conversation with your website visitors, we can only sit back, hoping they eventually raise their hands and say “I need your help”.

3. Sales-qualified leads generated (KPI)

Though we’re still in the land of Marketing KPIs here, this is where they become more meaningful.

Your growing website traffic (and the new contacts generated from it) will have no discernible impact on your business if they’re not comprised of buying-process influencers from right-fit accounts.

But when your new leads are consistently passing your qualification screenings, now you’re receiving a signal that whatever you’re doing to fill up the top of your Marketing and Sales funnel is working. Assuming your Sales team is armed with talent, focus and sufficient support, your business outcomes start coming into view out there on the horizon.

4. Opportunities (or pipeline revenue) generated (KPI)

This KPI may be a better indicator of your Sales team’s effectiveness than anything on the Marketing front. But with blurring lines between Marketing and Sales functions at B2B organizations today, you need to pay close attention here.

If sales-qualified leads (SQLs) are growing, but the number of those SQLs engaging in active sales conversations is stagnant, you might conclude that you have a Sales problem. And you might be right.

But we believe Marketing also has a responsibility here.

Our Marketing teams need to empower our Sales professionals all throughout the funnel by helping them create focus and optimize their time as they manage a growing influx of SQLs. We need to enable Sales to activate, nurture and develop SQLs into active Opportunities by arming them with the right tools, processes and content.

5. New customers generated (business outcome)

Here we’ve officially left the world of Marketing KPIs and entered that of business outcomes. But we have to remember that all customers aren’t created equal. Are the new customers that you can trace all the way back to their origin in your Marketing and Sales funnel the right ones? Is your Marketing investment producing high-margin opportunities? Companies and individuals that intend to buy what you actually want to sell? And have the potential to live on and realize a significant lifetime value (LTV) for your organization?

6. Revenue generated (business outcome)

If you’ve established tangible goals and effectively measured results from numbers one through five, then numbers six and seven should fall right into place. So – is your marketing spend driving enough revenue to justify the investment?

7. Resulting profit (business outcome)

You could make an argument to throw out revenue altogether as a success metric and jump straight to resulting profit. Because if your Marketing initiatives are driving up sales volume, but with low-margin customers, it’s possible you’re doing more damage that good.

So, are your margins growing as all the other numbers on this list grow?

Is the impact on your bottom line positive?

If not, it’s probably time to look hard at who you’re targeting and the value proposition you’re putting in front of them. Perhaps it’s time to refocus – to examine your positioning and redefine who your ideal customers or end markets really are.

Where to go from here

You can’t measure success without knowing where you currently stand (and where you need to go). So we created a tool to help you out.

We call it the Marketing KPI Worksheet.

The spreadsheet is simple. You’ll plug in a few goals and benchmarks, and the rest of the numbers will auto populate.

Marketing KPI Worksheet

So use this as your guide. Apply those “vanity metrics” so they have meaning. Connect them to real business outcomes. And measure marketing success accordingly.

Most importantly, lean on your results to make future decisions about how and where to focus your marketing investment.

Dating advice for manufacturers: How to not blow it with a good lead

dating advice for manufacturers

The Venn Diagram below represents three types of leads:

  1. On the left are those who are good fits (sales-qualified leads).
  2. On the right are those who are ready to buy (sales-ready leads).
  3. And in the overlapping middle are those who are both sales-qualified and sales-ready.

sales-qualified lead vs sales-ready lead

Common sense tells you that individuals in each of these three distinct groups should be courted very differently in your Sales and Marketing processes.

Yet that’s not how it usually plays out.

In fact, a majority of the manufacturing organizations I consult treat each and every one of their leads as if they’re ready and willing to be sold to.

The result:

Lots of blown opportunities.

Defining each of the three segments

I want to start by examining the characteristics of leads that fall into each of the three segments in this Venn Diagram. And after that, I’ll offer some guidance about how to cater your communication strategy accordingly.

1. The overlapping middle

The overlapping area between sales-qualified and sales-ready leads is where you’ll find the low-hanging fruit.

Here we have prospective future customers who need your high-margin, bread-and-butter solutions. And they’ve already entered the the decision stage of the buying process.

(You should be drooling).

2. The left circle

On the left, we have sales-qualified leads that are not yet sales-ready. These leads:

  • Are experiencing problems you’re good at solving
  • Work at companies that resemble your very best customers
  • Likely need solutions that command significant margins
  • Are more interested in achieving a specific outcome than obtaining a low bid (and as a result, have lower price sensitivity)
  • Haven’t yet decided what to buy (or from whom)
  • Value expert advice to guide their buying decisions

But here’s the all-important, yet consistently overlooked point:

These individuals are not yet ready to buy.

They may only be problem-aware at this point – meaning that solutions aren’t yet in clear focus. Perhaps their long buyer’s journeys consisting of extensive information-gathering are underway. Or maybe they’re simply performing due diligence – vetting potential solution providers.

Regardless, one common characteristic will be consistent among every lead that falls into this leftmost area:

Your sales pitch is not yet welcome.

3. The right circle

Over on the right, we have sales-ready leads that you haven’t yet qualified. (Note that anyone you’ve already disqualified isn’t represented in this diagram).

These individuals:

  • Are much further along in the buying process
  • Have likely decided (with or without the help of an expert like you) what to buy
  • Might be prepared to buy something that isn’t necessarily in your wheelhouse
  • Could just as easily be great-fit customers as they could be nightmares to work with

That dating advice I promised

OK, so now that we’ve defined the characteristics of individuals who are 1) sales qualified 2) sales ready and 3) both, what do we do?

My advice for handling those leads who fall into the overlapping middle is simple:

Don’t blow it.

These individuals need what you want to sell. And they’re ready to buy it.

But how do we court those on the left who aren’t ready for you to get down on one knee? And how do we avoid jumping the gun on ring shopping for those on the right?

Here’s my advice.

With leads on the left, we’ll:

  • Stop talking about ourselves and start talking about the problems, goals and related questions of these ideal future customers in our sales conversations
  • Furnish helpful advice through a consultative, customer-centric sales process
  • Mirror that advice by publishing genuinely helpful resources on our websites – content that answers questions and helps guide buying decisions as objectively as possible
  • Deliver that amazing content via consistent email touch points that help (instead of hard sell)
  • Create trust and earn expert advisor positions in the minds of our prospects – so when they become sales-ready, we’ll get the first call
  • Exercise patience

With leads on the right, we’ll:

  • Help them undercover and understand the real problems they’re trying to solve – in case they’ve prematurely drawn conclusions about what to buy
  • Introduce concepts like total cost of ownership that help them objectively evaluate whether the solution they’re ready to pursue is really a sustainable or ideal long-term solution
  • Avoid selling low-margin solutions that will only drain our resources – detracting attention from our best customers and truly qualified leads
  • Be courageous enough to walk away when the fit isn’t right

What happens when we properly court a lead?

When we start doing all of these things the right way, the two circles in your Venn Diagram slowly begin creeping together – being nudged both from the left and from the right.

more sales-qualified and sales-ready leads

The growing overlapping area means we’ve helped those sales-qualified (but not sales-ready) leads on the left move closer to a buying decision – and under our guidance.

It also means we’ve (mutually) confirmed a fit with more of those ready-to-buy leads over on the right.

So how about this?

Let’s agree to stop treating all leads the same way.

When we adapt to the buying processes of our good-fit leads and exercise enough discipline to avoid selling to bad-fit leads, more and more of our customer portfolios begin resembling our best customers.

Doing so requires more than smart marketing and sales communications. It requires patience. And a dose of courage. But the the net effects are significant:

Higher-margin sales.

Less headaches.

More time to shape our companies into the businesses we set out to create in the first place.

If you’re a mid-sized manufacturer that could use some guidance creating focus on your best opportunities and crafting a supporting marketing strategy, consider requesting a consultation. I’d love to talk.

Three steps to turn your website leads into sales

lead qualification illustration

You made it. Your company’s website is generating plenty of leads, so you can finally take a moment to breathe. But since you’re reading this article, you’re probably done with the breather or skipped it altogether. You’re probably asking yourself some of these questions:

  • What should happen after a lead comes in through our website?
  • Who is responsible for a lead?
  • What should we do with good-fit leads that aren’t ready to buy?
  • How can we stop wasting our time with bad-fit leads?
  • How do we measure website and marketing return on investment (ROI)?

The more leads your website generates, the more pressing these issues become. If you’re seeing ten per month, your focus should be on getting more good leads into the funnel. But if you’re getting 100 per month, boosting the lead-to-customer conversion rate will make a significant impact on your bottom line.

In this piece, we’re sharing guidance on how to maximize this conversion rate by breaking the issue down into three parts, in order of priority.

  • Priority 1: Make sure sales-ready leads are immediately met with your full attention
  • Priority 2: Don’t let mid-funnel leads fall through the cracks
  • Priority 3: Stop wasting your time with bad-fit leads
  • Bonus: Some guidance on measuring progress

Are you lagging behind on lead generation? Not a problem. Start with our guide to industrial marketing or enroll in our online course.

Priority 1: Address sales-ready leads immediately.

We don’t need to lecture you on the importance of timeliness in closing potential customers. But did you realize your odds of successful contact with a lead at the 30-minute mark are one hundred times lower than a response at the five-minute mark? Now factor in that the average B2B response time is 42 hours. Money is left on the table simply because businesses don’t get back in time.

Consequently, your first priority should be passing sales-qualified leads to your sales team immediately and guaranteeing their follow-up by following a few steps.

  • Provide your sales team with the information they’ll need for a follow-up. That includes a name, company, email, phone number and their inquiry. Other points of data such as their location and job title may be essential depending on your business.
  • Dig for extra bits of data that will make their outreach more effective. If you’re using a customer relationship management (CRM) tool like HubSpot or Salesforce, check out which pages the contact visited, which forms they submitted or which marketing emails they clicked. Can you find their LinkedIn profile? Great. This additional knowledge will make for a more informed conversation between your team and the potential buyer. Bundle a package of valuable data (read: quality over quantity) and send it off to the right sales team member.
  • Make it official. If your sales team is using your CRM (fingers crossed), assign the lead to the right team member and create a specific task for them, such as making a phone call, with a feasible due date.

Priority 2: Nurture leads that aren’t quite there yet.

Is it too early to pass the lead on to your sales team? Is your sales team not getting a response to their follow-up? Are leads just not ready to buy? Not a problem. But don’t let leads that are sales-qualified (i.e., fit your criteria of a good customer) but not yet sales-ready slide into database limbo.

You should nurture these leads, guiding them through the long and complex buying process with a combination of personal touch points (sales) and content / automation (marketing). The point is this: Because they’re sales-qualified, they shouldn’t be ignored. But because they’re not sales-ready, your sales team can’t afford to give them the manual attention that’s best suited for a lead who is both sales-qualified AND sales-ready.

Scenario 1: The lead has potential, but you need to qualify it further before you’re confident giving it to the sales team.

If you’re using HubSpot, this is where sequences are valuable. Sequences are a series of automated, templated emails that are sent over the course of a week or two. If you’re not using HubSpot, there are other tools to do this. While these emails will sound out whether or not the lead is qualified, they should also provide helpful, problem-solving resources.

For Gorilla, we’ve designed a five-email sequence that’s 90% resources, 10% sales. With a 23% reply rate, this tool generates real opportunities at the click of a button. Here’s a guide to help you set up your first HubSpot sequence.

Scenario 2: Your sales team is not getting a response to their follow-up.

While continued manual follow-ups should be part of the process (at least for promising leads), a regular email campaign will help you stay top-of-mind for these leads. For ourselves and our clients, this means a monthly newsletter that delivers our latest articles and guides to our contacts’ inboxes.

Your newsletter should position your company as an industry thought leader by providing high-quality, problem-solving content. When this works, the continuous drip of emails significantly increases the odds that your’re in the running when a lead is ready to buy.

If you’re not sure where to start on developing a newsletter for your company, read this guide.

Priority 3: Weed out bad-fit leads.

If you’re spending time skimming messages from vendors and students, sifting through leads from countries you don’t serve or weeding out RFQs for projects too small to consider, this section is for you. While we’re all for diversity and appreciating the small things, you need to focus your efforts on the best opportunities in the geographical area you can serve. Marketing automation will help you sort out this bycatch, allowing you to focus on the good stuff.

Start by sitting down with your sales team to discuss clear-cut characteristics that disqualify a lead. For our clients, disqualifying characteristics can be location (e.g., outside of the U.S.), job title (e.g., student) or a measure of revenue potential (e.g., annual spend). If you’re not already asking for this information on your website forms, make sure to update them.

Once you’re collecting that information, build automated processes that help differentiate good leads from bad leads. In HubSpot, Salesforce and other CRMs you’ll be able to use existing processes (e.g., HubSpot’s lead scoring) or build custom workflows (e.g., Salesforce’s Process Builder) that score a lead based on the criteria you determined earlier. Whatever your process for going through new website leads, you can now incorporate this score for filtering out bad-fit leads, focusing your time and attention on those you can and want to serve.

For a deep-dive on the lead qualification process we use here at Gorilla, read this.

Measuring progress

The goal of this article is to help you to maximize your lead-to-customer conversion rate. To understand where this conversion rate stands today and, more importantly, where you might be losing business in the sales funnel, you need to implement a measuring system.

Imagine a dataset that knew where each and every one of your leads was in the buying process and, if they closed, how much they spent. Now combine that with your CRM’s knowledge of their original source (e.g., organic search, pay-per-click, social media), the pages on your website they visited or the marketing emails they received. In addition to measuring lead-to-customer conversion, having accurate lead data means knowing whether a sale was worth the effort and expense made to attract it.

This level of detail in your data provides you with transparency into the return you’re getting on your marketing tactics, allowing you to invest in those that produce the best outcomes.

Say, for instance, that over the course of a year you invest in an SEO campaign and a Google Ads campaign. With a clean set of data in your CRM, you can simply let the numbers judge which of the two produced better results in terms of qualified leads, one-time sales and annual revenue. Closing the loop will elevate your marketing team from “the people who make our brochures” to “the people who are bringing us new business.”

For most of our clients (and, for that matter, the majority of companies out there), achieving this level of detail in their data is a challenge, especially with larger sales teams and often-long buying processes. While keeping information about leads updated while they’re still in your hands is on you, difficulties can arise when the lead is handed off to sales team members whose lead records are intermittently updated, if at all. We understand. Your sales team’s performance isn’t measured based on how neat their data is. Here’s how to approach this issue.

  • Put yourself in your sales team’s shoes and explain how clean data will help their goal of generating additional revenue. Create a what-if case study that illustrates how making marketing decisions based on sales data grows their bottom line.
  • Start small. Collaborate with select sales team members who are ready to embrace change. In exchange for data, provide them with tools that make their lives easier. Are they answering specific questions over and over again? Tools like Hubspot let you create templates for emails or even paragraphs to insert into emails. Even better, offer to write a blog post they can easily pass on to customers. Experiencing the power behind these tools can make them your ambassadors, helping you spread the data gospel throughout the company.
  • If you can, get buy-in from the executive team to initiate change from the top. If there’s an explicit call for change, you’ll have an easier time leading the charge.

Implementing measurement should go hand-in-hand with the three priorities discussed above. If you’re not reporting accurately, how will you ever know whether or not you’re improving?

This is great and all, but where do I start?

We get it. These challenges take months or years to address, not days. Start by assessing your status quo for each of the above priorities and determine your starting point. Is your sales team already highly responsive? Start with priority two. Are you seeing a low percentage of bad-fit leads? Skip priority three. Although you should consider each of the priorities, not every business will have to tackle all of them.

If you need guidance along the way, we’re happy to help. Just give us a call or request a consultation below. Besides addressing your lead management challenges, we’ll help you take a step back to develop an industrial marketing strategy that drives sustainable growth for your business.

Our 2019 picks for your marketing technology stack

B2B industrial marketing technology stack

Marketing technology is changing at a blistering pace, but only 28% feel their company is keeping up. With literally thousands of marketing technologies on the market, it’s almost impossible for a marketing manager to make sense of the landscape of tools, much less pick a lean, effective stack of technologies.

I’m here to help.

I work exclusively with B2B industrial sector clients. And through working with my clients, I’ve seen the good, the bad and the ugly of marketing technology. The list I’ve compiled below contains only the best of the best — 16 tried-and-true tools that’ll help you measure, analyze, report, automate, nurture and convert.

This post is a long one (it gives you info and advice on 16 tools!), so let’s dive in. To help you follow along, we created a quick, visual rundown of our top marketing technology picks.

Foundational

I’ll start with the basics. The tech tools in the section below are the ones you just need to have if you’re interested in taking your digital marketing to the next level.

HubSpot Marketing Hub (starting at $50 per month / beginner)

I have yet to find a customer relationship management (CRM) software or marketing automation software I like as much as HubSpot. It’s the best all-around tool out there, offering 90% of the functionality you’ll need. Getting HubSpot is a good starting point for those just beginning to add to their “martech” (marketing technology) stack. It’s a versatile, user-friendly software with a wide array of capabilities: Capturing data on leads, tracking sales activity, creating email campaigns and setting up marketing and sales automation.

As an added bonus, HubSpot’s robust help center and excellent customer service lower the learning curve for CRM and marketing automation novices. It starts at only $50 per month and scales up to $800+ per month, depending on your package, add-ons and the number of contacts you have. For more information, check out their pricing page.

Google Analytics (free / beginner)

Google Analytics is your go-to tool for measuring and analyzing website traffic. You can learn how many people are visiting your site, where they’re coming from (social, organic, direct, etc.) and, if you’re a little more advanced, how it’s contributing to your goals (requesting consultations, downloading guides, etc.). If you’re just getting started — or if you’d like to advance your skills — check out their library of free analytics courses.

Search Console (free / beginner)

Google Search Console lets you dive deeper into your site’s performance in organic search (i.e., search engines). Google Analytics might let you evaluate how many website visitors are coming from organic search and which landing pages they’re looking at — but Search Console takes that a step further. It tells you what keywords your visitors were searching when they found your site and how you’re ranking for these searches in different geographical regions.

Search Console is also an excellent tool to help you generate keyword ideas. You might, for instance, use it to look at the list of 100 or so keywords people are using to find your site. And as you’re evaluating the list, you notice a highly relevant keyword for which you’re listed on the fourth page of the SERP. If your site has the authority to rank on the first page, then it’s a great keyword to pursue with content and link building campaigns.

Google Data Studio (free / advanced)

You can use Google Data Studio to create custom reports using data from hundreds of sources, including website traffic (from Google Analytics) and advertising performance (from LinkedIn, Adwords, Facebook Ads, AdRoll, etc.). Basically, it lets you visualize the performance of all your digital marketing efforts all in one place. I’ll admit it isn’t the most beginner-friendly tool, but it is incredibly useful. And it’s free, which is nice for those watching their budget.

WordPress (free / advanced)

This is the content management system (CMS) I’d recommend nine times out of ten. About the only reason I might recommend another CMS is if you have an ecommerce website (and not many manufacturers do). And I’m not the only WordPress advocate out there —  about 30% of all websites are on WordPress.

It’s easy to use, even for the most tech-averse on your team, so you don’t have to pay $200-an-hour for a developer every time you need to upload a blog. Plus, there are plenty of developers familiar with WordPress you can call when you have to make a bigger change, like building a custom landing page or redesigning your site.

Demand generation

This section will focus on tools that help get your website and brand in front of people. It’s split into two sections:

  1. Inbound
    These tools help you attract paid and organic traffic to your site.
  2. Outbound
    These tools help you identify, communicate with and advertise to ideal-fit prospects.

Inbound / search engine optimization

Yoast (free / beginner)

Yoast is a great starting point for optimizing your website pages for SEO with little time investment. I just use the plugin to double check on-page elements (keyword density, meta description, title tag, URL, etc.) before I hit ‘publish’ on a blog post or page.

MozBar (free / beginner)

Choosing keywords to target with organic and paid methods depends on three factors — relevancy, search volume and competitiveness — listed in the order you should evaluate them. MozBar comes in at the end of this process, helping you evaluate the competitiveness of keywords you’ve already vetted based on relevancy and search volume. Check out this blog for an in-depth look at how to use MozBar as part of your SEO strategy.

It’s important to note that Moz is most useful when you have a small list of keywords. If you have lists of 50 or more keywords — like if you’re doing a website rebuild — this method will drive you crazy because it’ll take forever. But it’s still a really useful tool for SEO novices and experts alike.

Ahrefs (starting at $99 per month / advanced)

Ahrefs is the Swiss Army knife for digital marketers. It’ll let you conduct competitor keyword research, identify SEO issues and analyze content gaps. And if you just need to run a one-time website audit, you can get their week-long trial for only $7.

One of my favorite parts about Ahrefs is that it lets you spy on your competition. Everyone has that one competitor that is killing the SEO game (I’ll bet one just popped into your head). Well, Ahrefs pulls back the curtain and lets you peek at what keywords they’re ranking for. This lets you ride on the coattails of their success because, chances are, you should be targeting those keywords too.

Whitespark Citation Audit & Cleanup – Essentials ($279 flat fee per location / advanced)

Whitespark builds structured citations with your name, address and phone number (NAP) on hundreds of directories. Citations are a key local search ranking factor because they send Google a clear signal of where, exactly, your company is located. And having them makes Google more likely to serve up your site for local-intent searches like “flooring contractor Atlanta” or “conveyor belting near me,” which are important if you have physical locations.

It’s a pain to build citations yourself, and Whitespark does it for just $279 per location. What I love about Whitespark is that they charge you a flat fee and hand you the keys when they’re done – so you can make changes as needed and retain the value of your investment long after you’re done working with them. Many other citation building services charge you monthly or annually and, when you cancel your subscription, all your data is lost.

Google Ads ($1-4 per click / advanced)

Google Ads lets you to pay for an immediate surge of targeted search traffic while you optimize for organic search. It’s a perfect short-term solution for generating leads, allowing you to bid on keywords you know your target audience is searching. Even as your site begins to rank on your own, pay-per-click (PPC) advertising allows you to supplement organic search.

But PPC is time-intensive to do right — you need to be prepared to spend a couple hours a week on your paid campaign. If you’d like to run PPC yourself, I recommend reading this beginner’s guide. If you don’t have time to dedicate to your paid campaign, it’s best to hire an experienced PPC manager to run it for you. Otherwise, you run the risk of paying for clicks on ads that never give you any results.

Outbound / direct targeting

LinkedIn Sales Navigator ($79.99 per month / beginner)

LinkedIn Sales Navigator lets you find prospects that fit your ideal customer profile. And you can get really granular with your search. Say you need to target a CMO at a Midwest company that has at least 500 employees in the food and beverage industry. Sales Navigator will generate a list of people who fit that exact criteria.

Prospect.io (starting at $99 per month / beginner)

Prospect.io and LinkedIn Sales Navigator go hand in hand. Sales Navigator gives you a list of profiles that match your ideal customer profile, and Prospect.io finds their email addresses and lets you send automated email outreach campaigns. Together, these two tools give you everything you need to run a light account-based marketing (ABM) email campaign.

LinkedIn Advertising ($6-9 per click / advanced)

While LinkedIn Advertising ($6-9 per click) is much more expensive than Google Ads ($1-4 per click) and AdRoll ($1-4 per thousand impressions), it has unparalleled B2B targeting capabilities. Still, I’d only recommend advertising on LinkedIn if your customer lifetime value is greater than $15,000 because of the expense.

Before embarking on your first paid LinkedIn campaign, take this course. It’ll help you make sure your campaign has a laser-focused message and offer, positioned perfectly for your target audience, so you get the greatest return on your ad spend.

AdRoll ($1-4 per thousand impressions / advanced)

AdRoll is my retargeting platform of choice because it’s more user-friendly than other options and integrates different platforms, meaning your ads will show not only on websites, but also on social media platforms.

As soon as you have a good grasp on where your best leads are coming from (e.g., LinkedIn, Google and the specific pages they visit), you can use AdRoll to retarget those visitors to convert more of them. For example, if you know that all your best leads look at your pricing page, you might want to retarget visitors after they view that page.

And you should always run AdRoll campaigns simultaneously with LinkedIn campaigns. You can identify all the visitors from LinkedIn who left before converting and use AdRoll to follow them around the internet until they become a lead — for a fraction the cost of another click on LinkedIn.

Lead capture

Almost 1 in 3 marketers surveyed for HubSpot’s State of Inbound report said reducing the cost of lead acquisition is one their most pressing goals over the coming year. What better way to accomplish that than converting more of the traffic your site already has? The tools in section will do just that, ensuring that more of the people visiting your site actually turn into leads.

HubSpot Marketing Hub (pop-up component)

HubSpot gets a reprise in the lead capture section because of its pop-up tool. It lets you deploy pop-up forms which can be triggered when a user is about to leave, has scrolled to a pre-specified point or spent a specified amount of time on the page — capturing leads that might’ve otherwise left the page without converting. Sumo Pro is another tool for pop-up forms, although it’s less customizable than HubSpot’s.

Hotjar (starting at $89 / advanced)

Once you have a decent amount of qualified traffic visiting your site, you should use tools like Hotjar for insight on how to tweak your website to boost conversion rates (and get more leads). It’ll tell you where people are clicking, how far they’re scrolling and where they’re falling off in your conversion funnel. And you can even record user sessions to see how people interact with key pages on your site.

You can use these insights to inform page redesigns, website rebuilds and navigation optimizations to create user experiences which encourage higher rates of conversion (e.g., from 2% conversion to 3%).

But it’s important to remember you’re playing with percentages, so you want to make sure there’s enough traffic to warrant your effort. If you only have 100 visitors, going from a 2% conversion rate to 3% will only get you one more lead. But if you have 10,000 visitors every month, that same rate increase will get you 100 more leads — and that’s worth your time.

Lead nurturing

Next to personal phone calls, email is the communication channel that salespeople rate most successful. And it can be automated, saving your team time while still inching prospects closer to purchase. The tools in this section will help you turn cold leads into warm, sales-ready ones.

HubSpot Marketing Hub (e-blast and automated workflow component)

Yes, I’m listing HubSpot again, this time for its robust email functionality. You can send e-blasts to segmented lists of your lead database, and set up autoresponders and workflows that trigger after downloading a guide or requesting a consultation. For beginners, HubSpot has a drag-and-drop editor that simplifies the email creation process. And it comes in the package with all the other tools we’ve already talked about.

MailChimp Grow (starting at $10 per month / beginner)

If you’re on a different CRM that doesn’t have email functionality, MailChimp Grow is a great tool to create e-blasts and automated drip campaigns. And at $10 a month, it won’t break your martech budget.


Want to share this with a colleague or reference it later? Click here to get your one-page infographic of the manufacturing martech landscape.

Loading, Please Wait